This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
is (4>) ~ v/2V0/m2 = [2/(1 - n)]l/2MP. Depending on the nature of <j>, this kind of inflation has been termed 'natural', 'topological' and 'modular' (see for instance 10 for a recent espousal of modular inflation). In all cases the model is regarded as implausible if (cf>) is much bigger than Mp, which means that it is viable only if n is not too close to 1. Our 2-cr bound n > 0.9 implies (<j>) > 4.5Mp, which may perhaps be regarded as already disfavoring these models.
4
Running-mass models of inflation
So far we focussed on models giving a practically scale-independent spectral index. This seems to be a generic prediction of inflation models based on spontaneously broken (global) supersymmetry. As Stewart pointed out some years ago, the opposite is the case for models based on softly broken supersymmetry 14 . In such models, the inflaton mass runs with scale, and in the
131 linear log approximation the potential is 0
2Afj5
V 4>*
*)
(4)
This leads to n fc
( ) ~
l
_
s e cAN(fc)
_
2 AiV = ln(/c//cCOBE)
(5)
If c is a gauge coupling, its expected magnitude is \c\ ~ 10" 2 to 10" 1
(6)
With c in the upper part of this range, the spectral index can change very significantly over the range AiV ~ 4 or so which corresponds to cosmological scales. (The other parameter s controls end of inflation, and to avoid severe fine-tuning it should satisfy 0end — 4>* •) The fit mentioned earlier 4 determines the region of c and s allowed by observation. A gauge coupling c ~ 0.1 for the inflaton is allowed, giving potentially observable scale-dependence of the spectral index. 5
Where are we going with inflation models?
By building and testing models of the early Universe, we obtain a unique window on the nature of the fundamental interactions. This is especially true of inflation model-building, because the crucially important curvature perturbation, once generated, is frozen in until well after nucleosynthesis. In a few years we shall know n(k) with accuracy ±0.01. This is the only observable function relating to physics far beyond the Standard Model! The measurement of n(k) will rule out most of the presently existing inflation models. Depending on whether or not n is significantly different from 1, and on how much our understanding of string-derived field theory progresses, one model may have been selected as the best candidate. The next frontier will be to discover how the inflaton sector talks to the Standard Model sector. There must indeed be communication because the inflaton field must decay into SM radiation ('reheating'). As a result, given continued progress (which might be the rub), top-down inflation modelbuilders will eventually meet up with bottom-up extenders of the Standard Model!
132
References 1. D. H. Lyth and A. Riotto, Phys. Rep. 314, 1 (1998). 2. A. R. Liddle and D. H. Lyth, Cosmological inflation and large scale structure, Cambridge University Press (2000). 3. D. Wands, K. A. Malik, D. H. Lyth and A. R. Liddle, Phys. Rev. D62, 043527 (2000). 4. D. H. Lyth and L. Covi, Phys. Rev. D62, 103504 (2000); L. Covi and D. H. Lyth, astro-ph/0008165. 5. W. H. Kinney, A. Melchiorri and A. Riotto, astro-ph/0007357. 6. M. Tegmark, M. Zaldarriaga and A. J. S. Hamilton, astro-ph/0008167 v2. 7. J. R. Bond et al., astro-ph/0011378. 8. J. Barriga, E. Gaztanaga, M. G. Santos and S. Sarkar, astro-ph/0011398. 9. D. H. Lyth and E. D. Stewart, Phys. Rev. Lett. 75, 201 (1995); Phys. Rev. D53, 1784 (1996). 10. T. Banks, M. Dine and L. Motl, hep-th/0007206. 11. G. Dvali and S. H. Tye, Phys. Lett. B450, 72 (1999). 12. J. D. Cohn and E. D. Stewart, Phys. Lett. B475, 231 (2000); hepph/0002214. 13. M. M. Kawasaki, M. Yamaguchi and T. Yanagida, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85, 3572 (2000). 14. Stewart E.D., Phys. Lett. B391, 34 (1997); L. Covi, D. H. Lyth and L. Roszkowski, Phys. Rev. D60, 023509 (1999); L. Covi and D. H. Lyth, Phys. Rev. D59, 063515 (1999); L. Covi, Phys. Rev. D60, 023513 (1999); G. German, G. Ross G. and S. Sarkar, Phys. Lett. B469, 46 (1999).
N A T U R A L CHAOTIC INFLATION MODEL IN SUPERGRAVITY
MASAHIDE YAMAGUCHI Research
Center for the Early E-mail:
Universe, University of Tokyo, Japan gucci@ res ceu.s.u-tokyo. ac.jp
Tokyo,
113-0033,
Tokyo,
113-0033,
M. K A W A S A K I Research
Center for the Early E-mail:
Universe, University of Tokyo, Japan [email protected] T. YANAGIDA
Department
of Physics
& Research Center for the Early Universe, Tokyo, Tokyo 113-0033, Japan E-mail: [email protected]
University
of
JUN'ICHI YOKOYAMA Department
of Earth and Space Science, Graduate School of Science, University, Toyonaka, 560-0043, Japan E-mail: [email protected]
Osaka
We propose a chaotic inflation model in supergravity. In t h e model t h e Kahler potential has a Nambu-Goldstone-like shift symmetry of the inflaton chiral multiplet which ensures t h e flatness of the inflaton potential beyond the Planck scale. We show t h a t the chaotic inflation naturally takes place by introducing a small breaking term of the shift symmetry in the superpotential. As an alternative scenario, we also propose new inflation with a chaotic initial condition. In this scenario, chaotic inflation first takes place around the Planck scale, which solves t h e longevity problem, and also gives an adequate initial condition for new inflation. Then, new inflation lasts long to generate primordial fluctuations for the large scale structure, which generally has a tilted spectrum with the spectral index ns < 1.
1
Introduction
The inflationary expansion of the early universe is the most attractive ingredient in modern cosmology. This is not only because it naturally solves the longstanding problems in cosmology, that is the horizon and flatness problems, but also because it accounts for the origin of density fluctuations as observed by the Comic Background Explorer(COBE) satellite. Among various types of inflation models proposed so far, chaotic inflation model is the most attrac133
134
tive since it can realize an inflationary expansion even in the presence of large quantum fluctuations at the Planck time. In fact, many authors have used the chaotic inflation model to discuss a number of interesting phenomena such as preheating, superheavy particle production, and primordial gravitational waves in the inflationary cosmology. On the other hand, supersymmetry (SUSY) is widely discussed as the most interesting candidate for the physics beyond the standard model since it ensures the stability of the large hierarchy between the electroweak and the Planck scales against radiative corrections. This kind of stability is also very important to keep the flatness of inflaton potential at the quantum level. Therefore, it is quite natural to consider the inflation model in the framework of supergravity. However, the above two ideas, i.e. chaotic inflation and supergravity, have not been naturally realized simultaneously. The main reason is that the minimal supergravity potential has an exponential factor, exp(v^), which prevents any scalar fields ifi from having values larger than the gravitational scale Ma — 2.4 x 1018GeV. However, the inflaton 99 is supposed to have a value much larger than MG at the Planck time to cause the chaotic inflation. Thus, the above effect makes it very difficult to incorporate the chaotic inflation in the framework of supergravity. In fact, all of the existing models for chaotic inflation use rather specific Kahler potential, and one needs a fine tuning in the Kahler potential since there is no symmetry reason for having such specific forms of Kahler potentials. Thus, it is very important to find a natural chaotic inflation model without any fine tuning. In this talk, first of all, we propose a natural chaotic inflation model where the form of Kahler potential is determined by a symmetry. With this Kahler potential the inflaton cp may have a large value (p 3> MQ to begin the chaotic inflation. Our models, in fact, need two small parameters for successful inflation. One is the inflaton mass m, which is decided to be m ~ 10~ 5 from the COBE observation. The other is the coupling constant of the interaction between the inflaton and a pair of Higgs doublet for the decay of the inflaton. It must be smaller than 10~ 5 to avoid overproduction of gravitinos. However, we emphasize that the smallness of these parameters is justified by symmetries and hence the model is natural in 't Hooft's sense. As a model of inflation that predicts low reheating temperature straightforwardly, new inflation is more attractive than chaotic inflation because it occurs at a lower energy scale. Furthermore, new inflation can easily generate density fluctuations with a tilted spectrum, which may naturally explain the recent observation of anisotropies of the cosmic microwave background
135
radiation (CMB) by the BOOMERANG experiment and the MAXIMA experiment. However, it suffers from a severe problem about the initial value of the inflaton in addition to the longevity problem mentioned above. In order to realize successful inflation, the initial value of the inflaton must be fine-tuned near the local maximum of the potential over the horizon scale. For this problem Asaka et al. proposed a solution by considering the gravitationally suppressed interactions with particles in the thermal bath. But the longevity problem remains. Izawa et al., on the other hand, considered another inflation (called pre-inflation) which takes place before new inflation and drives the scalar field responsible for new inflation dynamically toward the local maximum of its potential. If the pre-inflation is chaotic inflation, the longevity problem is solved, too. Thus we are naturally motivated to a model of successive inflation, namely, chaotic inflation followed by new inflation. In fact, such a double inflation model has already been proposed in a different context, but in this talk, we propose a simple and self-consistent model of successive inflation in the framework of SUGRA in which the two inflatons belong to the same supermultiplet. That is, the inflaton for chaotic inflation is the imaginary part of a complex scalar field while its real part drives new inflation. In fact, our model is a triple inflation model where chaotic inflation first takes place followed by a mini inflation driven by a false vacuum energy and then new inflation occurs. In this talk, first of all, we propose a chaotic inflation model in supergravity. In the model the Kahler potential has a Nambu-Goldstone-like shift symmetry of the inflaton chiral multiplet which ensures the flatness of the inflaton potential beyond the Planck scale. Later, we propose new inflation with a chaotic initial condition. In this model, chaotic inflation first takes place around the Planck scale, which solves the longevity problem, and also gives an adequate initial condition for new inflation. Then, new inflation lasts long to generate primordial fluctuations for the large scale structure, which generally has a tilted spectrum with the spectral index ns < 1. 2 2.1
Natural chaotic inflation in supergravity model
Our model is based on the Nambu-Goldstone-like shift symmetry of the inflaton chiral multiplet ${x,0). Namely, we assume that the Kahler potential K{<&, $*) is invariant under the shift of $, $ -» $ + i CMG,
(1)
136
where C is a dimensionless real constant. Thus, the Kahler potential is a function of $ + $*, K($, $*) = K($ + $*). It is now clear that the supergravity effect e x ( * + * ) discussed above does not prevent the imaginary part of the scalar components of $ from having a larger value than MQ. We identify it with the inflaton field
|2 -\— •. However, these breaking terms are negligible in t h e present analysis as long as \ip\ < m _ 1 .
(13)
138
since eK does not contain (p. For rj, \X\ < 0(1), we can rewrite the potential as V(v,
end ~ //end ~ A 1 / 2 =
9V\
On the other hand, the mass squared of X, m2^-, is dominated by, m\ c 2«7V X 2 ~ -2E\
(40)
X
which is much smaller than the Hubble parameter in the early stage of chaotic inflation, when X moves towards the origin only slowly. Below we set X to be real and positive making use of the freedom of the phase choice. In this regime classical equations of motion for X and x a r e given, respectively, by 3H X ~ -m2xX, 3tf
3
X
- -Ax ,
(41) (42)
from which we find, X cc x2-
(43)
This relation holds actually if and only if quantum fluctuations are unimportant for both x a n d X. As for x, the amplitude of quantum fluctuations acquired in one expansion time is larger than the magnitude of classical evolution in the same period if x •> A - 1 / 6 , when the universe is in a self-reproduction stage of eternal inflation. Hence let us consider the regime x < A^ 1 / 6 and (42) holds. Then we can estimate the root-mean-square (RMS) fluctuation in
143
X using the Fokker-Planck equation and found that ((AX) approaches /
\
\ asymptotically
A2/3
which is much less than unity because A must be a tiny number as will be shown later. From (43) and (44) the amplitude of X becomes much smaller than unity by the time Y ~ A/24- Thereafter (41) no longer holds and X oscillates around the origin rapidly and its amplitude decreases even more. Thus our approximation that both if and X are much smaller than unity is consistent throughout the chaotic inflation regime. As x becomes of order of unity, chaotic inflation ends and the field oscillates coherently with the mass squared m^ ~ 2gv4. Since g must take a value slightly larger than unity as shown later, the energy density of this oscillation becomes less than the vacuum energy density ~ vA soon. At this stage
i) = E;4f($+$*) 2 |V>i| 2 . Then, the interaction Lagrangian density is given by £i n t = EiAit/^d^jC^V*: which yields the similar reheating temperature. ) Hv- ) = -kB MQ- So the larger the ratio MS/MQ, the larger the bound. For Ms = 1010GeVandMG = 10 1 6 GeV, we obtain A > 0 . 7 5 x 10-4. In this regime we can use the potential (8) during the inflationary regime and we obtain t h a t the slow roll conditions 3 are satisfied up to ipc for small coupling A of order MQ. T h e number of e-folding from the inflaton value ip
146
4
Discussion and Conclusions
We have shown that a chaotic inflation naturally takes place if we assume that the Kahler potential has the Nambu-Goldstone-like shift symmetry of the inflaton chiral multiplet $ and introduce a small breaking term of the shift symmetry in the superpotential. Unlike other inflation models the chaotic inflation model has no initial value problem and hence it is the most attractive. However, it had been difficult to construct a natural chaotic inflation model in the framework of supergravity because the supergravity potential generally becomes very steep beyond the Planck scale. Therefore, the existence of a natural chaotic inflation model may open a new branch of inflationmodel building in supergravity. Furthermore, the chaotic inflation is known to produce gravitational waves ( tensor metric perturbations ) which might be detectable in future astrophysical observations. We have also proposed new inflation with a chaotic initial condition. Chaotic inflation takes place around the Planck scale so that the universe can live long enough. In this regime, the inflaton responsible for new inflation dynamically relaxes toward zero so that new inflation sets in. The reheating temperature is low enough to avoid overproduction of gravitinos in a wide range of the gravitino mass. Furthermore, our model generally predicts a tilted spectrum with the spectral index ns < 1, which may naturally explain the recent observation of anisotropies of CMB by the BOOMERANG experiment and the MAXIMA experiment. In the present model, the initial value of the inflaton for new inflation may be so close to the local maximum of the potential that the universe enters a self-regenerating stage. Therefore all the scales observable today left the Hubble radius during the last inflation and we cannot verify the chaotic inflation stage directly because the minimum of Kahler potential during chaotic inflation coincides with the local maximum of the potential for new inflation. By appropriately shifting the local minimum of the new inflaton's potential during chaotic inflation one can construct a model in which duration of new inflation is short enough that the trace of chaotic inflation is observable on the large-scale structure. References 1. M. Kawasaki, M. Yamaguchi, and T. Yanagida, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85, 3572 (2000). 2. M. Yamaguchi and J. Yokoyama, hep-ph/0007021, to appear in Phys. Rev. D. 3. See also references in the above two references.
A N T H R O P I C SELECTION EWAN D. STEWART Department of Physics, KAIST, Taejon 305-701, South Korea E-mail: [email protected] I discuss anthropic selection and related topics. 1
What is the Anthropic Principle?
There are two versions: 1.1
The Strong Anthropic Principle
The Fundamental Theory should be such that it gives rise to life. This is more religion than science. 1.2
The Weak Anthropic Principle
This is just a selection effect. What we observe is biased by the fact that we are not external observers but are part of the universe and live in particular places. For example, we see an oxygen atmosphere, liquid water, etc. although these are known to be rare in the universe as a whole. /Probability of \ I observable 1 = \ being observed J
/Probability of^ observable in the Fundamental \ Theory J
/Probability
of\
I observer I being there y t o observe it J
(1)
One cannot deny the Weak Anthropic Principle. The real question is for which observables is it an important selection effect. 2
The Structure of the Fundamental Theory
Again, there are two versions: 2.1
Unique vacuum
The Fundamental Theory uniquely predicts the observed low energy physics. This would seem to require the Strong Anthropic Principle, though most physicists who favor a unique vacuum vehemently oppose the Strong Anthropic Principle! 2.2
Many vacua
The Fundamental Theory has many vacua and associated low energy laws of physics. The observed low energy physics is selected by a combination of anthropic selection, random chance, and possibly other factors. This is the weak anthropic approach. 147
148 3
Conjectured Structure of String Theory
Many (1010 , oo?) discrete non-supersymmetric vacua (this includes vacua with low energy supersymmetry breaking) and many continuous families of supersymmetric vacua. This fits well with the Weak Anthropic Principle. 4
Structure of the Eternally Inflating Universe
There are many types of inflation that are natural from the particle physics point of view: 1. False vacuum inflation
Figure 1. False vacuum inflation
This inflates eternally. 2. Rolling scalar field inflation
Figure 2. Rolling scalar field inflation
Inflates eternally at the maximum if m2 < 6Vo! in units where 8nG = 1. 3. Thermal inflation Even this inflates eternally if ^Hawking ~ ^critical4-1
Discrete Eternal Inflation
Slow-roll inflation is motivated by observations requiring the spectral index of the density perturbations to be n ~ 1 and is not necessary for, and is probably not relevant for, eternal inflation. Instead, one expects eternal inflation to be dominated by the more generic types of inflation listed above, and so to occur at the discrete points in field space corresponding to false vacua and maxima, with quantum tunneling between these
149
Figure 3. Thermal inflation
points. This will populate all the eternally inflating points in field space, somewhere in the eternally inflating multiverse, allowing all the (connected) vacua and their associated low energy laws of physics to be realized.
Figure 4. Discrete eternal inflation
However, the infinite expansion factors of eternal inflation make it impossible to give a probability to any given final state vacuum. Cosmology doesn't seem to help much with vacuum selection. 5
The Accelerating Universe
Observations of distant supernovae have shown that the expansion of the universe is accelerating. The simplest explanation of this is that the energy density of the universe is dominated by (positive) vacuum energy. Such vacuum energy would have magnitude pA = (2.2 x 1(T 3 eV) 4 = 2 x 1(T 59 TeV4
(2)
This is about 10 60 times smaller than particle physicists can understand. Furthermore, to understand the coincidence that it is just beginning to dominate now seems to require anthropic arguments.
150 Table 1. Current composition of the universe Vacuum energy Cold dark matter Ordinary matter (baryons) Stars Neutrinos Cosmic microwave background radiation Spatial curvature
6
65% ± 10% 30% ± 10% 5% 0.5% 0.3% x ( m „ / 0 . 1 e V ) 0.006% 0% ± 10%
Anthropic Selection Rules
For anthropically selected fine-tuning to be a consistent explanation we require: 1. Enough freedom in the Fundamental Theory. For anthropic selection to select a vacuum, the vacuum must exist in the first place. For example, > 1010 vacua are needed for accidental cancellations to produce a vacuum with a sufficiently small cosmological constant. 2. There should be no better solution. For example, before the discovery of inflation it was legitimate to use anthropically selected fine-tuning to explain the small value of the spatial curvature. However, it is no longer legitimate. Any anthropic selection mechanism would simply choose inflation rather than fine-tuning. In this respect, supersymmetric vacua are a challenge to the anthropically selected fine-tuning explanation of the value of the cosmological constant. Either supersymmetric vacua must be extraordinarily rare, at least 1010 times rarer than non-supersymmetric vacua, or supersymmetric vacua must somehow be incompatible with life. My guess is the latter, perhaps because matter would be unstable to bosonization and subsequent collapse because of the loss of Fermi exclusion. 3. Small changes in the observed value should have a significant effect. For example, current bounds on the spatial curvature disfavor an anthropic explanation for its small value. Small changes in the observed value of the cosmological constant have a significant effect on galaxy formation making an anthropic explanation plausible. 7
Anthropically Selected Fine-Tuned Cosmological Constant versus a Solution to the Cosmological Constant Problem
There are two classes of theories for why the cosmological constant is so small: 1. There is some symmetry or other mechanism which can set the cosmological constant to zero.
151 2. There is no mechanism (compatible with life - see comments above on supersymmetric vacua) which can set the cosmological constant to zero and anthropic selection selects a vacuum, which has a cosmological constant sufficiently small for life due to accidental cancellations, from a large number of vacua. The first predicts the cosmological constant should be zero. If the symmetry is broken (this includes quintessence scenarios) it predicts an a priori roughly speaking logarithmic type probability distribution which, when combined with the anthropic bound, would predict a value essentially no different from zero. Detailed calculations of the second predict a probability distribution for the cosmological constant with expected values of order or a small factor larger than the current matter energy density. Observations have confirmed the latter prediction which is highly unlikely in the former scenario. Note that this observational evidence strongly suggests that it is a waste of time looking for a 'solution' to the cosmological constant problem. It is also important to note that the case of the cosmological constant is different from that of many other parameters that appear to have an anthropically finetuned value. Firstly, it is cleaner, but more importantly the observed value is on the extreme edge of the anthropically allowed region (on a roughly speaking logarithmic type scale). This would be extremely unlikely if a symmetry were at work. However, for most other apparently anthropically fine-tuned parameters the observed value seems to take a typical value within the anthropically allowed region (again on a roughly speaking logarithmic type scale). In these cases it would be quite consistent and even likely for anthropic selection to select a symmetry or other mechanism to obtain an anthropically allowed value rather than merely using brute-force fine-tuning. Thus in these cases it is important to look for (broken) symmetries or other mechanisms to explain the observed value even if the value seems to be anthropically fine-tuned. 8
Outlook String Theory —> Map of the world
(3)
The field space of String Theory is a map of the local laws of physics, in particular of vacua and the associated low energy laws of physics. It is string theorists' job to draw this map. Cosmology + Particle Phenomenology —> You are here
(4)
Cosmological and particle physics observations will determine where we are in the field space of String Theory. Cosmology + Anthropic Principle —> Why we are here
(5)
We will need to use cosmology and the Weak Anthropic Principle to understand why we are here and how we got here.
152 Acknowledgments This work was supported by the Brain Korea 21 Project and Korea Research Foundation Grant (2000-015-DP0080).
A T M O S P H E R I C A N D SOLAR N E U T R I N O MASSES A N D A B E L I A N FLAVOR S Y M M E T R Y KIWOON CHOI Department
of Physics,
Korea Advanced Institute of Science Taejon 305-701, Korea
and
Technology
Recent atmospheric and solar neutrino experiments suggest that neutrinos have small but nonzero masses. They further suggest that mass eigenvalues have certain degree of hierarchical structures, and also some mixing angles are near-maximal while the others are small. We first survey possible explanations for the smallness of neutrino masses. We then discuss some models in which the hierarchical pattern of neutrino masses and mixing angles arises as a consequence of U(l) flavor symmetries which would explain also the hierarchical quark and charged lepton masses.
1
Introduction
Atmospheric and solar neutrino experiments have suggested for a long time that neutrinos oscillate into different flavors, thereby have nonzero masses x. In particular, the recent Super-Kamiokande data strongly indicates that the observed deficit of atmospheric muon neutrinos is due to the near-maximal ^M —*• vr oscillation 2 . Solar neutrino results including those of SuperKamiokande, Homestake, SAGE and GALLEX provide also strong observational basis for ve —>• v^ or vT oscillation 3 . The minimal framework to accomodate the atmospheric and solar neutrino anomalies is to introduce small but nonzero masses of the three known neutrino species. In the basis in which the charged current weak interactions are flavor-diagonal, the relevant piece of low energy effective lagrangian is given by eZMeeR
+ gW-feZlnVL
+ {vLyMvvL
,
(1)
where the 3 x 3 mass matrices Me and M" are not diagonal in general. Diagonalizing Me and M", (Ue)^MeVe
{U")TMVVV
= De = d i a g ( m e , T O M , T O r ) ,
= Dv = diag ( m i , m 2 , m 3 ) ,
(2)
one finds the effective lagrangian written in terms of the mass eigenstates eZDeeR + W-'eZ^UvL 153
+ TPCfDvvL
,
(3)
154
where the MNS lepton mixing matrix is given by U = {Ue)]Uv.
(4)
Upon ignoring CP-violating phases, U can be parametrized as U =
/I 0 \0
0 C23 -S23
0 \ S 23 C23/
/ C13 0 \-Si3
0 1 0
C13C12 -S12C23 S23S12 -
(
512 C12 0
0' 0 1
S13
\
S23S13S12
s23ci3
Sl3\ 0 C13J
Ci2 -aia \ 0
S12C13
S23S13C12 S13C23C12
C23C12 -S23C12 -
S13S12C23
(5)
C23C13/
where Cjj = cosOij and Sij = sinOij. Within this parameterization, the masssquare differences for atmospheric and solar neutrino oscillations can be chosen to be A
™atm = ml - m\,
Ams2ol = m\ - m?,
(6)
while the mixing angles are given by #atm = #23,
#sol=#12,
#rea = #13,
(?)
where 9Tec describes for instance the neutrino oscillation z/M —» ve in reactor experiments. The atmospheric neutrino data sugget near-maximal v^ —>• z/r oscillation 2 with Am2tm~3xlO-3eV2, sin2 20 a t m ~ 1.
(8)
As for the solar neutrino anomaly, four different oscillation scenarios are possible 3 though the large mixing angle (LMA) MSW oscillation is favored by the recent Super-Kamiokande data: SMA MSW : Am 2 ol ~ 5 x 1 0 - 6 eV 2 ,
sin2 26>soi ~ 5 x 10~ 3 ,
LMA MSW : Am 2 ol ~ 2 x 1CT5 eV 2 , sin2 26»soi ~ 0.8, LOW MSW : Am 2 ol ~ 10~ 7 eV 2 , sin2 2<9soi ~ 1, LMA VAC : Am 2 ol ~ 10~ 10 eV 2 , sin2 2<9soi ~ 0.7.
(9)
There is in fact an important constraint from reactor experiments, e.g. CHOOZ 4 , indicating no v^ oscillation into ve, thereby leading to 4C/23 «sin 2 26>i 3 < 0.15
(10)
155 P u t t i n g the atmospheric and solar neutrino d a t a together while taking into account the CHOOZ constraint, one can consider the following three p a t t e r n s of neutrino masses and mixing angles: I. Bi-maximal mixing with LMA MSW solar neutrino oscillation: 777,2/7773 ~ A or A ,
(M, M, M ) ~ (7f>7f>Afc)>
(n)
II. Bi-maximal mixing with LOW MSW or LMA VAC solar neutrino oscillation: 7772/7773 ~ A4 or A5 ,
( M . M . M ) ~ (^, ^ , A * ) ,
(12)
III. Single-maximal mixing with SMA MSW solar neutrino oscillation: 7772/7713 ~ A , ( | « 2 3 | , |«i2|, | S l 3 | ) ~ ( ^ , A 2 , A * ) ,
(13)
where A = s i n # c ~ 0.2 for the Cabbibo angle 8c and 7773 ~ 5 x 1 0 " 2 e V ,
k>
1
(14)
in all cases. These neutrino results can be compared with the following quark and charged lepton masses a n d mixing angles: (mt,mc,mu) (mb,ms,md) {mT,mll,me)
~ 1 8 0 ( 1 , A 4 , A8) 2
4
~ 4(1, A , A ) 2
GeV, GeV,
5
~ 1.8(1, A , A ) 2
GeV,
( s i n ^ 2 3 , s i n 0 1 2 , s i n ^ 1 3 ) ~ (A , A, A 3 ),
(15)
where
156
H
• L
H
'»
MN 4 * N
• N
i
4 L
Figure 1. Small neutrino mass from the exchange of superheavy singlet neutrino
keeping 623 and 912 near maximal. Similarly, for the scenario III, one can ask what would be the flavor structure yielding small 7712/7713 ~ A2 and #12 ~ A2, but near maximal 623- In this talk, we first survey possible explanations for the smallness of neutrino masses, and then discuss some models in which the hierarchical patterns of neutrino masses and mixing angles arise as a consequence U(\) flavor symmetries 5 , e which would explain also the hierarchical quark and charged lepton masses. 2
W h y neutrinos are so light?
Here we discuss four possible mechanisms which would suppress the resulting neutrino mass. These mechanisms are not orthogonal to each other, so one can take more than one mechanism in order to make the neutrino mass small enough. A.
Seesaw-type mechanism
In seesaw-type model, neutrinos are light since their masses are induced by the exchange of superheavy particles. At low energies, the effects of such heavy particles are described by the operator -77LLHH (16) M where L and H are the lepton and Higgs doublets, respectively, and M denotes the mass scale of the exchanged heavy particle. This gives a neutrino mass
™.~^~.x,o-.(i2^v).v
157
H
H * *
* *
T
*
:
L
L
Figure 2. Small neutrino mass from the exchange of superheavy triplet Higgs
which can be as small as the atmospheric neutrino mass for M ~ 1015 GeV. There are two different ways to generate the above d = 5 operator. One is the exchange of superheavy singlet neutrino 7 (Fig. 1) which corresponds to the conventional seesaw mechanism, and the other is the exchange of superheavy triplet Higgs boson 8 (Fig. 2). For the case of singlet neutrino exchange, the underlying lagrangian includes hHLN + MNNN
+ h.c,
(18)
where A'' is a singlet neutrino with huge Major ana mass MJV. Integrating out N then yields the operator (16) with M = M^/K1. For the case of triplet Higgs exchange 8 ' 9 , one starts from hTLL - \-MlTT*
- M'TTH*H* + h.c,
(19)
where T is a Higgs triplet with huge mass MT- Again integrating out T leads to (16) with M = MT/hMT. The seesaw-type mechanism is perhaps the simplest way to get small neutrino mass. However it would be rather difficult to probe other effects of the involved superheavy particles than generating the neutrino mass. B.
Frogatt-Nielsen mechanism
Neutrino mass can be small if the couplings which are responsible for neutrino mass are suppressed by a spontaneously broken (gauge) symmetry by means of the Frogatt-Nielsen mechanism 10 . As an example, consider again a model with singlet neutrino N but now with weak scale M^ ~ 102 GeV. Suppose that the operator HLN carries a nonzero integer charge n
158
of some discrete or continuous (gauge) symmetry G of the model and G is spontanesly broken by the VE V of a standard model singlet <j> which has charge — 1. Then HLN in the bare action is forbiden, however there can be higherdimensional coupling
' HLN = enHLN,
(20)
and so the neutrino mass <2n{H){H) mv
n
2
2
0 GeV\ 5 x 1 0 -2((\3- x^e10-rJ V f \ /(\11-^^) eV. M )
MN
N
(21) y '
By choosing appropriate values of n and e, one can easily accomodate the atmospheric neutrino mass even when the singlet neutrino has an weak scale mass. In supersymmetric models, one can implement the Frogatt-Nielsen mechanism for small neutrino mass without introducing any singlet neutrino. As an example, consider a supersymmetric model with U(l) flavor symmetry whose symmetry breaking order parameter e ~ A (Cabbibo angle). The (7(1) charges of H\H2 and LH2 are assumed to be —1 and —n, respectively, where Hx 2 and L denote the two Higgs doublets and the lepton doublet superfields in the MSSM. Then the supergravity Kahler potential can contain
K=
w*H* + Kfc) LH»
(22)
while the holomorphy and t/(l) do not allow the supergravity superpotential contain a term like 4>mH\HmLHi- After the spontaneous breaking of supersymmetry and also of U(l), this Kahler potential gives rise to the yu-type terms in the effective superpotential: Weff=tiH1H2
+
^LH2,
n
where fi ~ e*m3/2 ~ Am 3 / 2 and / / ~ e* m3/2 ~ Xnm3/2. Here the first term in Weff is just the conventional /x-term and the second corresponds to the bilinear _R-parity violating term. As is well known, the bilinear /^-parity violation leads to the neutrino mass n »'2(H2)(H2) l**M1/2
mv ~ ^ - ^ 9 ^ ~ A 2 ^ " 1 ^ ^ *
(23)
where the gaugino mass Mx/2 and fi are assumed to have the weak scale value Mweak- This neutrino mass can be of order the atmospheric neutrino mass if
159
n = 9, which would be obtained for instance if the U(l) charges of Hi, H2, L are 4, —5, —4, respectively. In fact, supersymmetric models always contain an intrincically small symmetry breaking parameter, i.e. m3/2/Mpianc): describing the size of SUSY breaking. If mv is suppressed by a symmetry G which is broken by the SUSY breaking dynamics, small m,vjMwea^ and m3/-2IMpiancit have a common dynamical origin. They are then related to each other by the Frogatt-Nielsen mechanism of G, e.g ^ ^ ~ e * , Mpianck
7 ^ - ' ,
(24)
Mweak
where e is the symmetry breaking order parameter of G, and k and I are model-dependent integers. If k/l — 4/3 and m.3/2 ~ Mweak, one obtains Tnv/Mweak ~ 10 - 1 2 which is the correct value for the atmospheric neutrino mass. m3/2/Mpianck and rnv/Mweak is always related to each other when G is a discrete /^-symmetry 12 which appears quite often in compactified string theory. It is also possible to relate mv/Mweak with m3/2/'Mpianck by means of other type of symmetry l o . C.
Radiative generation of neutrino mass
Even when the neutrino mass is zero at tree level, if the lepton number symmetry is softly broken, there can be small finite radiative corrections to neutrino mass 14 . The resulting neutrino mass is suppressed by the loop factor as well as the (potentially) small Yukawa couplings which are involved in the loop. The most typical example is the Zee model with £ = }HLEC + f'S+LL
- AS+HH'
+ ...,
where H and H' are 5f/(2)-doublet Higgs fields, 5+ is a charged SU{2)singlet Higgs field, and L and Ec stand for the conventional lepton doublet and anti-lepton singlet. Here we will ignore the flavor indices of couplings for simplicity. It is then easy to see that a nonzero neutrino mass is generated at one-loop (Fig. 3), yielding
m
" ~ 1^S{H){H'}>
(25)
where ms is the mass of S+. It is also possible to construct a model in which mv is generated at higher loop order 14 . A typical example is given by £ = JHLEC + f'S+LL
+ f"S—EcEc
- AS+S+S~-
+ ...,
160
H'
S+ >' •
/
L
r
L
Ec
f
L
H Figure 3. One-loop neutrino mass in Zee-type model
*\s+
s+y 5 * i
*
• %
r L
Ec
f
*
i
>
•
L
l
/"
H
* I
f
<—
L
H
Figure 4. Two-loop neutrino mass in the variant of Zee model
where S+ and S are charged 5f/(2)-singlet Higgs fields. In this model, nonzero m„ appears at two-loop (Fig. 4), yielding
Af2fr2f" (H)(H). 2 2
(26)
(167r ) m|
Note that even when S+ and S have weak scale masses, the resulting neutrino mass can be as small as the atmospheric neutrino mass if the Yukawa
161
couplings/,/',/'~1(T2. D.
Localizing singlet neutrino on the hidden brane
Recently it has been noted by Randall and Sundrum (RS) that the large hierarchy between Mpianck and Mweak can be achieved by localizing the gravity on a hidden brane 15 . In the RS model, the spacetime is given by a slice of d — 5 AdS space with two boundaries. A flat 3-brane with positive tension is sitting on one of these boundaries at y = 0, while a negative tension 3-brane is on the other boundary at y — b. Massless d = 4 graviton mode is localized on the positive tension brane (the hidden brane) while the observable standard model fields are confined in the negative tension brane (the visible brane). Since d = 4 gravity is localized on the hidden brane, matter fields on the visible brane naturally have very weak gravitational coupling, so a large disparity between Mweak and Mpiancf.. Attempts have been made to incorporate small neutrino mass in the RS model 16 . The model contains a bulk fermion \fr and a bulk real scalar $ with the following orbifold boundary condition: * ( - ! / ) = 75*(i/), H-v) = -*(»)> (27) in addition to the bulk gravition and the standard model fields. The action is given by - A B - ^1ADA*
S = j d^xdy^^^M^R^ + / dAxyf^)[-Kv Jy=b
++ I
+
+ K'H^CL
KHVL
- / $ # * - m * c * + ...] + -£-LLHH M*
+ ...}
...],
(28)
Jy=0
where M* is the 5-dimensional Planck mass, R^ is the d = 5 Ricci scalar, tyc is the charge-conjugation of the d = 5 spinor $ , and H and L are the Higgs and lepton doublets confined in the visible brane. Here A„ and A^ denote the visible brane tension and the hidden brane tension, respectively, and we write explicitly also the terms for neutrino mass in the visible brane action. If the bulk and brane cosmological constants satisfy k
=
~AB
=
A h
=
K
(9Q\
l \] 6Ms 6M3 6M.3 ' the model admits the following form of d = 4 Poincare invariant spacetime and the corresponding massless d = 4 graviton mode:
ds1 = e- 2 *l»l(rv + hll„{x))dxlidxv
- dy1.
(0
b).
(30)
162
Obviously /iM„ is localized around y = 0, so its coupling to the energy momentum tensor at y — b is exponentially suppressed by e~2kb. Equivalently, all dimensionful quantities on the visible brane are rescaled by e~2kb. This results in the standard model mass parameter M2ieak ~ e~2kbM2, while the d = 4 Planck mass is given by Mplanck = M^(l-e~kb)/k, so an exponentially small ratio Mweak ~M Mplanck
-kb e
/on
•
(31)
The small ratio mv/Mweak can be similarly obtained in the model of (28) by localizing the zero mode of \P on the hidden brane. To implement this mechanism, we need first the lepton number violating couplings (both in bulk and on branes) to be suppressed enough, for instance h, K' and m/M, should be less than 10~ 12 in order for mu < 0.1 eV. This can be easily achieved by imposing a discrete symmetry under which * -> e2ni/N*S>,
L -> e27ri/NL,
(32)
which would result in h = K' = m = 0.
(33)
Then the Dirac equation for the zero mode of VP is given by d g
2/c + i 7 5 / ( $ ) J * 0 = 0 ,
(34)
leading to the following solution g-3%1/2^
=
e-(2/(*>-*)|»|/2^(a:)
( 3 5 )
where r] denotes the canonically normalized (in d = 4 sense) singlet neutrino mode. On the parameter region with k < 2 / ( $ ) , this mode is localized on the hidden brane. As a result, rj has an exponentially small Yukawa coupling with H and L on the visible brane, so an exponentially small Dirac neutrino mass. After the proper rescaling of the involved fields, one finds - ^ -
~ «e-(2/<*>-*>»/2
(36)
M-weak
which can be small as 10~ 12 to provide the atmospheric neutrino mass. Note that the small neutrino mass obtained by localizing singlet neutrino on the hidden brane is a Dirac mass, however the current neutrino oscillation experiments do not distinguish the Dirac mass from the Majorana mass.
163
3
Models with abelian flavor symmetry
Here we discuss some models in which the hierarchical patterns of the atmospheric and solar neutrino masses and mixing angles are obtained by means of U(l) flavor symmetries. Our discussion will be limited to a specific example for bi-maximal mixing with LMA MSW solar neutrino oscillation and another example for near-maximal atmospheric neutrino oscillation and SMA MSW solar neutrino oscillation. A. A model for bi-maximal mixing The neutrino masses and mixing angles for bi-maximal mixing with LMA MSW solar neutrino oscillation are given by 7712/7713 ~ A o r A 2 ,
(\s23\,]Sl2l\s13\)~(-j=,-j=,\k)
(*>1).
(37)
One issue for this pattern of neutrino masses and mixing angles is how could one obtain small #13 and m-ijm-i while keeping #23 and #12 near maximal. Comparing the MNS mixing matrix U = U^U" with the parametrization (5), one easily finds that U automatically has a small #13 with bi-maximal #23 and 0i2 if Ue has only one large mixing by #23 and also U" has only one large mixing by #12 • A form of charged lepton mass matrix which would lead to such Ue is Me ~mrl
1
(38)
where a C 1. For the neutrino mass matrix, we can consider two different forms leading to such V. One is of pseudo-Dirac type:
(
61 a
a b2
c\ d\
(39)
c d 1/ with bi
a2
a3
d
,
(40)
where all a, are of the same order and c, d
164
Here we assume that Mv is induced by the conventional seesaw mechanism in supersymmetric model and explore the possibility that the above mass matrix textures are obtained as a consequence of U{\) flavor symmetries. It is not so trivial to obtain the mass matrix textures (38), (39), (40) from (7(1) flavor symmetries since Mv needs to have same order of magnitudes for the 1st and 2nd generations while Me needs different ones. This difficulty becomes more severe if we want to obtain a smaller value of #13. Among the models of U{\) flavor symmetries, the simplest one would be the case of single anomalous U(l) whose breaking is described by a single order parameter e = (<j>)/Mt ~ A. Unfortunately, it turns out that the desired textures can not be obtained in this simplest case. The next simple model would be the case of single non-anomalous U(l) which has two symmetry breaking parameters with opposite £7(1) charges:
_ (4>+)
?=
(
M,' M» ' where <j>± has the £7(1) charge ± 1 . Note that if the scale of £7(1) breaking is much higher than the scale of supersymmetry breaking, vanishing £7(1) Z?-term assures |e| = |e|. One can also consider the case of two £7(1)'s in which one £7(1) is anomalous while the other is non-anomalous. One plausible symmetry breaking pattern in this case is that e and e have the £7(1) x £7(1) charges (—1,-1) and (0,1), respectively. In this case, vanishing D-term of anomalous £7(1) leads to |e| ~ A, while that of non-anomalous £7(1) gives |e| = |e|. In the below, we will present a simple example for each case which gives rise to the mass matrix textures for (37). Let us first consider the case of single £7(1) with two symmetry breaking parameters e and e. We will assume that |e| = |e| ~ A. The light neutrino mass matrix which is obtained by the seesaw mechanism is given by M" = MD(MMy1(MD)T, D
(41) M
where M is the 3 x 3 Dirac mass matrix and M is the 3 x 3 Majorana mass matrix of superheavy singlet neutrinos. Let small letters denote the £7(1) charges of the capital lettered superfields, e.g. U for the lepton doublets Li, ei for the anti-lepton singlets E\, m for the superheavy singlet neutrinos Ni. Then for the charge assignments of fj = ( 2 , - 2 , 0 ) ,
n,- = ( 2 , - 2 , 0 ) ,
one finds the mass matrices /A Mv=m3\A
\X2
4
A A4 A2
17
e* = (1,5,5),
h = h2 = 0,
(42)
which are are given by A2\ A2 , 1/
/A7 Me = (H1) A3 \AS
A7 A3 A5
A3\ A Xj
(43)
165 where A is of order one, but does not exceed 1. This mass matrix provides the near bi-maximal #23 and #12, and also 013~A2,
Am2tm~(l-.42)m2,
Ams2ol ~ A 4 .4 2 m 2 ,
(44)
which can accomodate all experimental data for reasonable values of A and m3. The desired forms of mass matrices can be obtained for the case of U(l) x f/(l) also. If one U(l) is anomalous while the other is non-anomalous, which is the case that appears quite often in compactified string theory, it is quite plausible that U(l) x U(l) are broken by the two symmetry breaking parameters e and e with the U(l) x U(l) charges (—1, —1) and (0,1). In this case, |e| = |e| and they are naturally of order the Cabbibo angle A. Then for the charge assignment m=(0,-l),
n 2 = (0,l),
Ji = ( 0 , - 1 ) ,
^2 = (1,2),
n 3 = (0,0), f3=(0,0),
one easily finds M" ~ m 3
/A2 A VA
A A\ 0 0
(45)
0 1)
which yields 913 ~ A,
Am52ol ~ A 2 Am 2 tm -
(46)
B. A model for large atmospheric and small solar neutrino mixings The neutrino masses and mixing angles for large atmospheric and small solar neutrino mixings are given by m2/m3
~ A2,
( M . M . M ) ~(^,A2,A*)
(*>1).
(47)
The issues for this pattern would be how could one obtain small m2/m 3 even when #23 is near maximal, and also what would be the reason for small #12 and #13. Here we present a supersymmetric model with U(l) flavor symmetry in which such pattern of neutrino masses and mixing angles arises naturally. The model under consideration is the MSSM with i?-parity breaking couplings which are suppressed by an anomalous U(l) flavor symmetry with e ~ A 18 . The most general SU(3)C x SU(2)L X U(1)Y-invariant superpotential of
166
the MSSM superfields includes the following lepton number (L) and /^-parity violating terms: AW = XijkLtLjEi
+ \'ijkLiQjD%
(48)
where (Li,E£) and (Qt, [/?, Df) denote the lepton and the quark superfields, respectively. Another L and ft-parity violating term fi^LiH-2 in the superpotential can always be rotated away by a unitary rotation of superfields. Soft SUSY breaking terms also contain the L and .R-parity violating terms: AV80ft = mliHl
LtHl + BiLiH.2 + C^LiLjE^
+ C'^LiQjDi,
(49)
where now all field variables denote the scalar components of the corresponding superfields. In the basis in which /XjLj//2 in the superpotential are rotated away, non-vanishing Bi and m2LH result in the tree-level neutrino mass n
wv)T
* g °M )(i>;) '
(50)
1/2
where Ml/% denote the SU(2)i x £/(l)y gaugino masses and the sneutrino VEV's are given by ,~n 2Mz(m2L.HicosP + BiSin0) {Vi) { * m? + ! M i c o s 2 ^ ' ' where tan/? = (#2)/'(Hi), Mz is the Z-boson mass, and m;~ is the slepton soft mass which is assumed to be (approximately) flavor-independent. There are also additional neutrino masses arising from various one-loop graphs involving the squark or slepton exchange 19 . Let the small letters qi,Ui, e.t.c. denote the 1/(1) charges of the superfields Qi,Uf, e.t.c. If all L and /^-parity violating couplings are suppressed by some powers of A as is determined by the U(l) charges of the corresponding operators, the resulting neutrino mass matrix takes the form: A 2 , 1 Mn A'»+' a M 1 2 \ A^Mis /
v
(M )ij
= m3
A' l s + , 2 Mi2 \2l**A22 A'23^
\ll3Al3\ A''M 2 3 , ^33 /
(52)
whereTO3is the largest mass eigenvalue, Uz = h — h, and all Ay are of order unity. It is then straightforward to see that the near maximal #23 requires l2 = l3j while the small 0 12 ~ A2 requires h = h + 2. This eventually leads to the MNS mixing matrix of the form: / 1 A2 A2' U ~ A2 1 1 I . I A2 1 1
(53)
167
which gives #13 ~ A2. So far, we could get the mixing angle pattern #23 ~ 1, #12 ~ #13 ~ ^ 2 J u s t by assuming the U(\) charge relations: h — 2 = l-i = I3. Still we need to get the mass hierarchies 7712/7713 ~ 4 x 10~2 and also m3/Mweak ~ 10~ 12 . In the model under consideration, U(l) flavor symmetry assures that ^-parity violating couplings are all suppressed by A' i+/l2 or \li~hl compared to their i?-parity conserving counterparts. As a result, 7773 from ft-parity violation obeys roughly m3/Mweak
~ xW'+k')
or
A2^-^.
So if the U(l) charges are arranged to have h +h,2 =h - hi =7
or 8,
the resulting 777.3 naturally fits into the atmospheric neutrino mass scale. One may wonder how 7772/7773 can be as small as 4 x 1 0 - 2 even when the 2nd and 3rd neutrinos mix maximally. The neutrino mass matrix (52) from .R-parity violation automatically realizes such unusual scenario since it is dominated by the tree mass (50) which is a rank one matrix. Then the largest mass rn.3 is from the tree contribution while 7772 is from the loops, so 7712/7773 ~ LOOP/TREE independently of the value of #23- In fact, we need to make this loop to tree ratio a bit bigger than the generic value in order to get the correct mass ratio 777,2/7773 « 4 x 1 0 - 2 . This is difficult to be achieved within the framework of high scale SUSY breaking, e.g. gravity-mediated SUSY breaking models, while it can be easily done in gauge-mediated SUSY breaking models with relatively low messenger scale. In gauge-mediated SUSY breaking models 2 0 , Bi and ni\.H can be simultaneously rotated away as n't at the messenger scale Mm, i.e. Bi(Mm) = 777'i iHl (M m ) = 0 in the basis of \Ji = 0, and their low energy values at Mweak are determined by the RG evolution. Then the tree mass (50) which is determined by these RG-induced Bt and m\.H can be made smaller by taking a lower value of the messenger scale. Soft parameters in gauge-mediated models 20 typically satisfy: Ma/aa w 777^/0:3 ^ 777^/0:^2 at Mm where Mn, rriq, and mj denote the gaugino, squark and slepton masses, respectively, and aa = dtl^ for the standard model gauge coupling constants. The size of the bilinear term BH1H2 in the scalar potential depends upon how fi is generated. An attractive possibility is B(Mm) = 0 for which all CP-violating phases in soft parameters at
168
Mweak are automatically small enough to avoid a too large electric dipole moment 21 . In this case, the RG-induced low energy value of B yields a large tan/3 w (m2Hl + m'2H2 + 2n'2)/B{Mz) = 40 ~ 60. Analyzing the neutrino masses from i?-parity violating couplings which are determined by the RG evolution with the boundary conditions that trilinear soft scalar couplings, B, Bt and rn2LH are all vanishing at Mm, and also Ma/aa ~ rriq/az « mj/ai^ at Mm, one finds 18 ff\tree - , , n - 1 . 41, ..
{M")^
/ M "^Z
* lO" ^; \^f\
,
(54)
where at = J/bA^33 ~ \li~hi for the 6-quark Yukawa coupling yi and t = ln(M m /mj)/ln(10 3 ). The loop mass is given by 18 ( M " ) ^ * 10- 2 i 2 y^?^3 3 (feA i 33 + ^ 3 A i3 3) ( ^ ^
J .
(55)
where yT is the r-lepton Yukawa coupling and the smaller contributions are ignored. These tree and loop masses then give the following mass hierarchies: mz/Mweak m2/m3
« [Ui3{M")t^UjZ}/Mweak
~ 10- 1 A 2 (' 3 -' l l >,
« [^2(M*,)J5opl/;,-2]/m3 ~ (LOOP/TREE),
m i / m j « [t/„ (M^U^/m? 2
~ A4 ,
(56) 3
2
where (LOOP/TREE) = 1 0 - ( A 2 3 3 / A 2 3 3 ) ( l n l 0 / l n ^ ) , and we have used tan/3 ~ 50, m;- « 300GeV and \x « 2m;- which has been suggested to be the best parameter range for correct electroweak symmetry breaking 21 . To summarize, in this model, small m^lvriz is due to the loop to tree mass ratio, while the other small mass ratios m i / m 2 and mz/Mweak are from U(l) flavor symmetry. Acknowledgments: I thank E. J. Chun and K. Hwang for useful discussions, and also Y. Kim for drawing the figures. This work is supported by the BK21 project of the Ministry of Education, KRF Grant No. 2000-015DP0080, KOSEF Grant No. 2000-1-11100-001-1, and KOSEF through the CHEP of KNU. References 1. For a recent global analysis, see M. C. Gonzalez-Garcia et al, hepph/0009350.
169
2. Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 2644 (1999); Phys. Lett. B467, 185 (1999). 3. J. Bahcall, P. Krastev and A. Smirnov, hep-ph/0006078. 4. CHOOZ Collaboration, Phys. Lett. B420, 397 (1998); Phys. Lett. B466, 415 (1999). 5. M. Leurer, Y. Nir and N. Seiberg, Nucl. Phys. B398, 319 (1993); ibid, B420, 468 (1994); L. Ib'anez and G. G. Ross, Phys. Lett. B332, 100 (1993); P. Binetruy and P. Ramond, Phys. Lett. B350, 49 (1995); V. Jain and R. Shrock, Phys. Lett. B352, 83 (1995); E. Dudas, S. Pokorski and C. A. Savoy, Phys. Lett. B356, 45 (1995); P. Binetruy, S. Lavignac and P. Ramond, Nucl. Phys. B477, 353 (1996). E. J. Chun and A. Lukas, Phys. Lett. B 387, 99 (1996); K. Choi, E. J. Chun, and H. Kim, Phys. Lett. B 394, 89 (1997); Z. Berezhiani and Z. Tavartkiladze, Phys. Lett. B396, 150 (1997). 6. N. Irges, S. Lavignac and P. Ramond, Phys. Rev. D58, 035003 (1998); P. Binetruy, E. Dudas, S. Lavignac and S. A. Savoy, Phys. Lett. B422, 171 (1998); J. Ellis, S. Lola and G. G. Ross, Nucl. Phys. B526, 115 (1998); C. D. Frogatt, M. Gibson and H. B. Nielson, hep-ph/9811265; Y. Nir and Y. Shadmi, JHEP 9905, 023 (1999); S. F. King, Nucl. Phys. B562, 57 (1999); Nucl. Phys. B576, 85 (2000); J. Feng, Y. Nir and Y. Shadmi, Phys. Rev. D61, 113005 (2000); M. Berger and K. Siyeon, hep-ph/0010245; Q. Shafi and Z. Tavartkiladze, hep-ph/9904249; hepph/9905202;hep-ph/0002150; 7. M. Gell-Mann, P. Ramond and R. Slansky, in Supergravity (ed. P. van Nieuwenhuizen and D. Freedman, North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1979) p. 315; T. Yanagida, in Proceedings of the Workshop on the Unified Theory and the Baryon Number in the Universe (ed. O. Sawada and A. Sugamoto, KEK Report No. 79-18, Tsukuba, Japan, 1979). 8. E. Ma and Utpal Sarkar, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80, 5716 (1998); E. Ma, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81, 1171 (1998). 9. K. Choi and A. Santamaria, Phys. Lett. B267, 504 (1991). 10. C. D. Frogatt and H. B. Nielsen, Nucl. Phys. B147, 277 (1979). 11. L. Hall and Suzuki, Nucl. Phys. B231, 419 (1984); I.-H. Lee, Phys. Lett. 138B, 121 (1984). 12. K. Choi, E. J. Chun and H. Kim, Phys. Rev. D55, 7010 (1997). 13. N. Arkani-Hamed et al., hep-ph/0006312; F. Borzumati and Y. Nomura, hep-ph/0007018. 14. A. Zee, Phys. lett. B93, 389 (1980); Phys. Lett. B161, 141 (1985); K. S. Babu, Phys. Lett. B203, 132 (1988); Y. Okamoto and M. Yasue, Phys. Lett. B466, 267 (1999); D. Chang and A. Zee, Phys. Rev. D61,
170
15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
20. 21.
071303 (1999); T. Kitabayashi and M. Yasue, Phys. Lett. B490, 236 (2000). L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3370 (1999); Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4690 (1999). Y. Grossman and M. Neubert, Phys. Lett. B474, 361 (2000). Y. Nir and Y. Shadmi, JHEP 9905, 023 (1999). K. Choi, E. J. Chun and K. Hwang, Phys. Rev. D60, 031301 (1999). For recent works, see E. J. Chun and S. K. Kang, Phys. Rev. D61, 075012 (2000); S. Davidson and M. Losada, JHEP 0005, 021 (2000); O. C. W. Kong , hep-ph/0102113. For a review, see G. F. Giudice and R. Rattazzi, Phys. Rep. 322, 419 (1999). R. Rattazzi and U. Sarid, Nucl.Phys. B501, 297 (1997).
C U R R E N T E X P E R I M E N T A L STATUS OF N E U T R I N O OSCILLATION K. N A K A M U R A High Energy
Accelerator
Research Organization (KEK), Oho, Tsukuba, 305-0801, Japan E-mail: [email protected]
Ibaraki
Compelling evidence for neutrino oscillation was obtained from the SuperKamiokande's observation of atmospheric neutrinos with Am'2 ~ 1 0 - 3 eV 2 . There are two other indications of neutrino oscillation with different A m 2 from solar neutrino observations and the LSND experiment. On the other hand, an important bound was obtained by the CHOOZ reactor neutrino oscillation experiment. The results from these experiments as well as some other neutrino oscillation experiments are reviewed. Particular emphasis is placed on the recent results from Super-Kamiokande, which were updated in June, 2000. In addition, the status of the K2K experiment and the prospects of forthcoming neutrino oscillation experiments are reviewed.
1
Introduction
Neutrino oscillations provide the most sensitive means to explore the finite neutrino mass as well as the mixing in the neutrino sector. At present, there are three evidences of neutrino oscillations with different Am 2 : (i) Am 2 ~ 3 x 10~ 3 eV2 from atmospheric neutrino observations, (ii) Am 2 ~ 10~ 5 eV2 or less from solar neutrino observations, and (iii) Am 2 ~ 1 eV2 from the LSND experiment. Recent neutrino oscillation experiments and planned forthcoming experiments mainly focus on further investigation of these evidences. A simple observation is that these three different Am 2 cannot be accommodated with only three neutrino species. Therefore, if all the three evidences are true, at least one sterile neutrino species, vs, must exist because of the LEP constraint on the number of light, active neutrino species. Alternatively, one of the three evidences may not survive. Among them, the evidence from atmospheric neutrino observations seems compelling. Most of the results were obtained by Super-Kamiokande (hereafter abbreviated as SuperK), 1 , 2 , s with supporting evidence from Kamiokande, 4 1MB, 5 MACRO, 6 ' 7 and Soudan 2. 8 - 9 ' 10 The observed mixing is nearly maximal. The SuperK data favors v^ —>• vT oscillation and disfavors v^ —> vs oscillation as shown in Sect. 2. n Solar neutrinos have been observed by five experiments, Homestake chlorine experiment (^ e 3 7 Cl -> e" 3 7 Ar), 12 SAGE 13 and GALLEX 14 gallium 171
172
10
0.1 0.01 10 "-1
«S-io- 4
>
g 10-5
<
10~ KamLAND day-night asymmetry in IBs
10" KamLAND seasonaly variation in 7Be /
10" Solar VAC _rtgfj
10"
III
10" 3
I
I I
1
0.01 sin 2 29
I 111
0.1
I
I
I
I
1 I
Ll
1
Figure 1. Two-flavor oscillation results from various experiments as well as the sensitivities of some of the forthcoming experiments.
experiments (^ e 7 1 Ga ->• e _ 7 1 G e ) , and Kamiokande 15 and SuperK 16 z/e scattering experiments. The solar neutrino fluxes measured by all these experiments are significantly lower than the standard solar model (SSM) predic-
173
tions. 1 T Astrophysics alone cannot explain these results. In terms of neutrino oscillations, a global analysis of the data obtained by all the experiments show various allowed regions in the two-flavor (Am 2 , sin22#) plane. Different regions are called the MSW Small Mixing (Am 2 ~ 5 x 10~ 6 eV2 and sin220 ~ 3 x 1(T 3 ), MSW Large Mixing(Am 2 ~ 5 x 10" 5 eV2 and sin226> ~ 1), MSW Low (Am 2 ~ 10~ 7 eV2 and sin226> ~ 1), and Vacuum (or Just-So) (Am 2 ~ 10" 1 0 eV2 and sin22<9 ~ 1) solutions. The LSND experiment at LAMPF reported evidence of neutrino oscillations for both Vp -> i>e 18 a n d i/M -> ve. 19 The allowed (or "favored") (Am 2 , sin2 26) regions are consistent for the two CP-conjugate oscillation channels. However, the Karmen 2 experiment 20 at ISIS, Rutherford Appleton Laboratory, found no evidence though it has similar, but slightly less, sensitivity to LSND. Figure 1 neatly compiles the two-flavor oscillation results from important experiments as well as the sensitivities of some of the forthcoming experiments. 21 In this review, * the atmospheric neutrino results are presented in Sect. 2, and solar neutrino results in Sect. 3. Results from reactor and accelerator neutrino oscillation experiments are briefly reviewed in Sect. 4 and Sect. 5, respectively. The prospects of forthcoming experiments are discussed in Sect. 6, and conclusions are given in Sect. 7. 2
Atmospheric Neutrino Results
The most recent results from SuperK atmospheric neutrino observations correspond to an exposure of 70.4 kton-year or 1144 live days. Fully contained (FC) events are classified into sub-GeV events with Evls < 1.33 GeV and multi-GeV events with £JV;S > 1.33 GeV. Partially contained (PC) events are classified as multi-GeV events, though the minimum track length of about 2.5 m corresponds to muons with > 700 MeV/c momentum. To study the atmospheric neutrino flavor ratio (u^ + i>/J)/(i/e + P e ), the double ratio R = (/i/e)Data/(/Ve)MC is measured, where (fi/e) denotes the ratio of the numbers of fi-like to e-like neutrino interactions observed in the data or predicted by Monte Carlo (MC). The ratio of the data to MC is taken to cancel uncertainties in the neutrino flux and cross sections. The expected value for R is unity if there is agreement between the experiment and the theoretical prediction. *This review is an updated version of the one presented at CIPANP2000. mainly the SuperK results and the K2K status.
22
Updates are
174
'
'
'
i
i
• > '
> i
'
'
i
i
i
•
42 400 .Sub-GeV e-like e
•
•
•
1
1
1
'
'
•
1 1 1 1
i
Sub-GeV u-like
o u 200,a
e s e
i
•
•
•
• '
•
•
•
•
•
i
TTTrp-rrrpTTTj-
Multi-GeV e-like
42 e «
•
•
•
I
•
•
•
•
I
•
•
.
.
I
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Multi-GeV u-like+PG
200
^v^
o s-
100 S s a J- i 1 i i i i , l
_•_!_
-1
-0.5
0 COS 0
0.5
I • i i i I i i i • I
1 -1
-0.5
I
I I
0
I
I
I
0.5
I
I
1
COS 0
Figure 2. Zenith-angle distributions for sub-GeV e-like (upper left panel), sub-GeV /x-like (upper right panel), multi-GeV e-like (lower left panel), and multi-GeV ( F C + P C ) /z-like events (lower right panel) observed in SuperK. The horizontal axis shows cosine of the zenith angle; 1.0 corresponds to the downward direction and -1.0 the upward direction. The dashed histograms show the Monte Carlo prediction for the no oscillation hypothesis. The solid histograms show the Monte Carlo prediction for the hypothesis of v^ —> vT oscillations with sin 2 2d = 1 and A m 2 = 3.2 x l 0 ~ 3 eV 2 . For the oscillated histograms, the absolute normalization is adjusted to minimize x2.
Figure 2 shows the zenith-angle dependence of sub-GeV e-like, sub-GeV /i-like, multi-GeV e-like, and multi-GeV /z-like (FC+PC) events. The dashed histograms show the Monte Carlo prediction for the hypothesis of no oscillation. These data indicate that the /i-like events show a strong deviation from expectation in the shape of the zenith-angle distribution. In particular, multi-GeV ^t-like events show strong up/down asymmetry in contrast to the calculated up/down ratio of near unity. On the other hand, the zenith-angle distribution of e-like events is consistent with the prediction. These results update the published SuperK results. 2
175
U CO
I
' I ' I ' ' ' I I ' ' I ' ' I I I
i . i I . i i l i i i I i . i l i i
Upward-through going \i
Upward-stopping \i
a
U r> i
o I...I
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
0
0
i
-1
COS 0
•
trrr
-
l i r o Tl .: f C l v . " . , • • - .
_ v "
••
- ' 2 .
•'''
—
,
1'
•
'
0
'
".
(c)
y'* '.S•y-'r
ard tkrvug
?„
f. : :
'
>i « a. ,
•
COS G
'.,!,- -
S5
•
-0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2
1
:
;f"" i -0.9
_,,
-0.S
-0.7
0.6
-0.5
-0.4
-0.5
-0.2
-0.1
0
COS&
Figure 3. Zenith-angle distributions of upward-going muons. (a) SuperK results for upward through-going muons. (b) SuperK results for upward stopping muons. (c) MACRO results for upward through-going muons. In (a) and (b), the dashed histograms show the expected distribution for the hypothesis of no oscillation, while the solid histograms show the expectation for v^ -> vT with sin 2 20 = 1 and A m 2 = 3.2 x l 0 ~ 3 eV 2 . In (c), the shaded region shows the expectation and its uncertainties for the hypothesis of no oscillation, and the dotted line shows the expectation for u^ —»• ur with sin 2 26 = 1 and A m 2 = 2.5 x l O - 3 eV 2 .
The fluxes of high-energy atmospheric z/Ms can be measured with underground detectors through the detection of muons produced by the chargedcurrent interactions of v^s in the rock surrounding the detector. The SuperK Collaboration measured both the data of upward through-going muons and
176
v -v 1
I ' ' ' ' I ' ' ' ' I ' ' ' ' I "
' ' I ' ' ' • I ' ' ' • I •
E < Kamiokande
Soudan 2
« '
MACRO
v Super-K 0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.9
1
sin 2 29
Figure 4. The solid lines show the 68%, 90%, and 99% CL allowed regions for v^ —> vT, obtained from a combined analysis of FC, P C , and upward through-going and stopping muon events measured by SuperK. The 90% CL allowed regions obtained from the Kamiokande, Soudan 2, and MACRO experiments are also shown by the dashed lines.
upward stopping muons that stop in the detector. Typical neutrino energies corresponding to upward through-going and upward stopping muon events in SuperK are 100 GeV and 10 GeV, respectively. Figures 3 (a) and (b) show the SuperK results for the zenith-angle distributions of upward through-going and stopping muons. The observed zenithangle distribution for the upward through-going muons is steeper than the prediction with no neutrino oscillations. Also, the observed flux of the upward stopping muons is significantly smaller than the prediction with no neutrino oscillations. These results update the published SuperK results. 2 ' 3 The upward-going muons were also measured by the MACRO experiment 6 ' 7 at Gran Sasso. Figure 3(c) shows the zenith-angle distribution for the upward through-going muons observed by MACRO. 7 An oscillation analysis of the SuperK atmospheric neutrino data was made by including the upward through-going and stopping muons in addition to the FC and PC events. The obtained 68%, 90%, and 99% CL allowed regions for the hypothesis of v^ —> vr are shown in Fig. 4. In this figure, the 90% CL
177 "i
1
r
i—r
b)
W=3xlO J sin'29=l -&8
cosG
-0.6
-0.4
_1_ _l_ -0.2
I 0.2
0.&
0.8
C0S6
cos6 Figure 5. Zenith-angle distributions for (a) neutral-current enriched FC events, (b) highenergy P C events, and (c) upward through-going muons. T h e histograms show the Monte Carlo predictions for v^ —> vT and v^ —> v3 hypotheses with A m 2 = 3 x 1 0 - 3 eV 2 and sin 2 10 = 1. The two predictions are normalized by a common factor so that the number of the observed events is the same as the number of the predicted events for Vn. —> vT.
allowed regions reported by Kamiokande, 24 Soudan 2, 10 and MACRO 7 are also shown. The best fit parameters from SuperK are sin2 26 = 1 and Am 2 = 3.2 xlCT 3 eV 2 . The solid histograms in Figs. 2, 3(a), and 3(b) are calculated with these parameter values. The 90% CL allowed intervals for
178
the oscillation parameters obtained from the SuperK combined analysis are 1.5 x 10~3 eV2 < Am 2 < 5 x 1(T 3 eV2 and sin2 29 > 0.88.
excluded 90% CL. 99% CL. allowed(FC single ring) 90% CL. —99% CL.
(Am >0) <
V —>V u. s
(AnT<0) 0.7 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.» (I.9S 1
sin220
Figure 6. Excluded regions for three oscillation modes, (a) v^ —> vT, (b) v^ —> us with Am2 > 0, and (c) ufl —> vs with A m 2 < 0. Also shown are the allowed regions from the analysis of the single-ring FC data. In (a), the regions below the thick dashed and thick solid lines are excluded at 90% CL and 99% CL, respectively. In (b), the entire region in this figure is excluded at 99% CL. In (c), the entire region in this figure is exclude at 90% CL, and the region below the thick solid line is excluded at 99% CL.
There is an alternative scenario that can explain the SuperK FC atmospheric neutrino events in terms of neutrino oscillations. As far as the FC events are concerned, the hypothesis of v^ —» vs gives an equally good fit to the zenith-angle distribution as the standard hypothesis of z/M —¥ vT. These two hypotheses may be discriminated by using the fact that for v ii —* vs (i) fewer neutral-current events should be observed than i/M —> vT because vs does not interact with matter, and (ii) matter effects suppress the oscillation probability 25 while there is no matter effects for v^ —>• vT. The difference of the oscillation probability is appreciable only for > 15 GeV neutrinos traveling through the Earth.
179
First, neutral-current enriched sample of events were selected from multiring FC events with Evis > 400 MeV and the most energetic ring being e-like. A Monte Carlo study indicates that the fraction of neutral-current events in this sample is 29% for no oscillations. Figure 5(a) shows the zenith-angle distribution of these events with Monte Carlo predictions. Next, matter effects were studied using PC events with Evis > 5 GeV (for these events, the typical energy of the parent atmospheric neutrino is 20 GeV) and upward through-going muons (the typical energy of the parent neutrino is 100 GeV). Figures 5(b) and (c) show the zenith-angle distributions for the PC events and the upward through-going muons with Monte Carlo predictions. A combined statistical analysis was performed using the SuperK neutralcurrent enriched FC events, high-energy PC events, and upward throughgoing muons, and the two hypotheses, v^ —>• vT and v^ —>• vs were tested. For neutral-current enriched FC events and high-energy PC events, an up/down ratio, up(—1 < cos# < -0.4)/down(0.4 < cos# < 1), is used as a discriminant to cancel some systematic errors. For upward through-going muons, a vertical/horizontal ratio, vertical(—1 < cos# < — 0.4)/horizontal(—0.4 < cos# < 0), is used. Note that the matter effects depend on the sign of Am 2 , so that both positive and negative Am 2 values were tested for v^ —• vs. Figure 6 shows the excluded regions for each hypothesis. In this figure, the parameter regions allowed by the analysis of the SuperK FC data are also shown. For "fi —> "s, the parameter regions allowed for the FC data are excluded at the 99% CL. Therefore, the SuperK results disfavor the hypothesis of v^ —> vs for the atmospheric muon neutrino oscillation. n 3
Solar neutrino results
The latest results of the solar neutrino flux measurements are listed and compared with the prediction of the Bahcall-Pinsonneault (BP98) SSM calculations 26 in Table 1. The SuperK result in Table 1 is obtained from 1117 live days of solar neutrino observation, and updates the previous SuperK result from 300 live days of observation. 16 Compared to the SSM (standard solar model) prediction of BP98, 26 Data/SSM(BP98) = 0.465 ± 0.005j^lnlThe SuperK solar neutrino observations produce not only the average flux but also other interesting data. Among them, the day-night flux difference and the recoil electron energy spectrum have important bearing on the discrimination of various possibilities to solve the solar neutrino problems. The day-night flux difference, if any, would be caused by the regeneration of ves by the Earth. Should the MSW Large-Mixing solution be correct, an observable day-night flux difference would be expected. However,
180 Table 1. Results of the solar-neutrino flux measurements compared with the BP98 2 6 SSM calculation. The Homestake, GALLEX, and SAGE results and the corresponding calculations are given in terms of neutrino capture rates in units of SNU. The Kamiokande and SuperK results and the corresponding calculated results are given in terms of the 8 B solar-neutrino flux in units of 1 0 6 c m _ 2 s - 1 . Experiment
Ref.
Result
Homestake GALLEX
12
2.56 ± 0 . 1 6 ± 0 . 1 6 77.5 ± 6 . 2 + ^
SAGE Kamiokande SuperK
13
14 15 16
ul
BP98 T+1.2 '•'-1.0
7
129+| 129+|
+7.2+3.5 • -7.0-3.0
2.80 ± 0 . 1 9 ± 0 . 3 3 2.40 ± 0.03i°;° 7
5.15(1.00+°;}°) 5.15(1.00+^)
u.o CO (0
Q
0.5
+ I ± ± ±J 0.4
SK1117day 5.5-20MeV 22.5kton (Preliminary) Day
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
Figure 7. Daytime and nighttime fluxes observed by SuperK with 1117 live days. The nighttime data are subdivided according to the zenith angle 6Z of the sun; N l (0 < cos#2 < 0.2), N2 (0.2 < coa0x < 0.4), ... , N5 (0.8 < cos0 z < 1.0). The flux values predicted for the two (sin 2 20, A m 2 ) parameter sets are shown for comparison. (7.9 x 10~ 3 ,7.9 x 10~ g eV 2 ) is a typical MSW Small Mixing solution (solid lines) and (0.7, 6.3 x 10~ 5 eV 2 ) is a typical MSW Large Mixing solution (dashed lines).
181
uni1117day 22.5kt ALL
en
u a
5.5-20MeV (Preliminary)
w
leno . 8
^ Stat error
a
T /stat.2+syst.2
0.7 0.6 -n
0.5 :..0.4
~
0.3 0.2 0.1 0 ' 5
7.5
' 10
: ' ' 12.5 15 Energy(MeV)
Figure 8. Recoil-electron energy spectrum relative to the SSM prediction, Data/SSM(BP98), observed by SuperK with 1117 live days. The inner error bars are the statistical errors and the outer error bars are the quadratic sum of the statistical and systematic errors. The solid lines show a spectrum prediced for a typical MSW Small Mixing solution, (sin 2 20, A m 2 ) = (6.3 x 1 0 ~ 3 , 5 x 1 0 - 6 eV 2 ). The dashed lines show a spectrum prediced for a typical MSW Large Mixing solution, (0.8, 3.2 x 10~ 5 eV 2 ). The dotted lines show a spectrum predicted for a typical Vacuum solution, (0.75, 6.3 x 1 0 - 1 1 eV 2 ).
the SuperK results on the day and night fluxes are (2.35 ± 0.04t°;o7) x ! ° 6 cm" 2 sec" 1 and (2.43 ± Q.Oltom) x 106 c m - 2 sec" 1 , respectively, and (Night-Day)/i(Night+Day) = 0.034 ± 0.022±g;g}|. The nighttime data is subdivided into 5 bins according to the zenith angle 6Z of the sun; Nl (0 < cos0z < 0.2), N2 (0.2 < cosl9z < 0.4), ... , N5 (0.8 < cos9z < 1.0). The flux for each subdivision is shown in Fig. 7, where fluxes predicted for ve —\ V^,{VT) oscillation with some (sin22f9, Am 2 ) values are also shown for comparison. The SuperK recoil-electron energy spectrum normalized to the prediction of BP98 SSM calculation 26 is shown in Fig. 8 and compared with predictions for ve —>• vti{vT') oscillation with some (sin22f?, Am 2 ) values. Although the
182
Figure 9. T h e light shaded areas are the excluded regions at 95% CL for v& —> v^v-r) (left) and Vf,, —»• u, (right) from the day and night spectra analysis. The dark shaded regions show allowed regions at 95% CL from a global fit to the fluxes measured by the gallium (GALLEX and SAGE), chlorine (Homestake) and SuperK experiments.
data points at high-energy end are slightly higher than the average, the energy spectrum distortion is statistically not significant. Using the recoil-electron spectrum distortion or the day-night flux difference, an oscillation analysis can be done independently from uncertainties in the standard solar model (SSM) flux predictions. The absence of significant spectrum distortion and zenith angle variations in the SuperK data constrains neutrino mixing and Am 2 . Actually, the recoil-electron spectrum for each of Day, Nl, ... , N5 zenith angle (see Fig. 7) are independently taken into account in the x2 calculation for the oscillation analysis. Two neutrino oscillation scenarios, ue -> Ufi(uT) and v^ -> i/s, are tested. The left panel of Fig. 9 shows the excluded regions from this analysis for ve —> v^{uT), overlaid with the allowed
183
regions from a global fit to the solar neutrino fluxes measured by the gallium (GALLEX and SAGE), chlorine (Homestake) and SuperK experiments, assuming the SSM fluxes. 26 It can be seen that the Small Mixing and Vacuum solutions are disfavored. The right panel of Fig. 9 shows the excluded regions for z/e —>• vs. All possible solutions from the global fit are disfavored in this case. 4
Reactor Experiments
Two reactor neutrino oscillation experiments, CHOOZ 27 and Palo Verde 28 investigated the Am 2 range down to 10~ 3 eV2 for ue disappearance, ve ->• i>x, using liquid scintillator detectors. The CHOOZ detector is located in a 300-m water equivalent (mwe) underground laboratory at a distance of about 1 km from the Chooz power station in the Ardennes region of France. The Palo Verde detector is lacated at a distance of 750 - 890 m from three reactors at the Palo Verde Nuclear Generating Station near Phoenix, Arizona, but it has only 32 mwe overburden. Consequently, the Palo Verde experiment suffered from a large background rate, though the detector is subdivided. The 90% CL excluded regions from these experiments are shown in Fig. 1. These results excludes the possibility that the atmospheric neutrino anomaly observed by Kamiokande 4 is due to v^ —>• ue oscillations, thus in concordance with the SuperK result. In the context of three-flavor neutrino oscillations, the CHOOZ result gives a bound to the angle #13, sin 2 0 13 < 5 x 1 0 - 2 . 5 5.1
Accelerator Experiments LSND and Karmen 2
The LSND experiment searched for the appearance signal of the v^ —\ ve oscillation. The 90% "favored" region from this experiment 18 is shown in Fig. 1. In addition, LSND found an evidence for v^ —• ve oscillations. 19 The oscillation probabilities are (3.3 ± 0.9 ± 0.5) x 10~ 3 for z>M —> ve and (2.6 ± 1.0 ± 0.5) x 10~ 3 for v^ —>• ve. The favored regions and oscillation probabilities for these CP-conjugate oscillation channels are consistent. For the i>M —> ve oscillation, the Karmen 2 experiment has a sensitivity that nearly, but not entirely, covers the LSND favored region. However, Karmen 2 found no evidence, and the result of oscillation search 20 is shown in Fig. 1. At 90% CL, the region 0.2 < Am 2 < 1 eV2 of the LSND favored region is not excluded yet.
184
5.2
CHORUS and NOMAD
CHORUS 29 and NOMAD 30 experiments at CERN searched for J/M -> vr oscillations by looking for the appearance of T~ , in the context of massive neutrinos which might be a component of mixed dark matter. Their sensitivity goals are similar, sin2 20 ~ 2 x 10~4 for large Am 2 . At present, oscillations are excluded for sin22# > 10~ 3 at 90% CL in the large Am2 limit (see Fig. 1). Also, Am 2 > 1 eV2 is excluded at sin228 = 1 (maximal mixing).
5.3
Status of K2K
The K2K (KEK-to-Kamioka) long baseline neutrino oscillation experiment aims at exploring neutrino oscillations fM —> vx in the Am 2 range of 10~ 2 ~ 1 0 - 3 eV 2 , suggested by the atmospheric neutrino observations. vx may be ve, z/T, or vs, though the SuperK results strongly favor vT. Muon neutrino beams are produced by the KEK 12-GeV Proton Synchrotron, and are shot to the SuperK located at a distance of 250 km from KEK. With a horn-focused neutrino beam with an average energy of 1.3 GeV, v^ -> ve is studied in the appearance mode, while v^ —> vT is studied in the disappearance mode. The goal of the experiment is to observe a few hundred charged-current events (in the case of no oscillations) in the 22.5 kton fiducial volume of SuperK with 1020 protons on the production target. The K2K started data taking in June, 1999, and the preliminary results were oabtained from about 100 days of data taken from June 1999 to June 2000. The total number of protons brought to the target amounted to 2.3 x 1019 for the runs used in the analysis. In SuperK, FC events which were correlated in time with 1.1 /xsec neutrino beam pulses from KEK were searched for, and 27 FC events having the vertex within the 22.5 kton SuperK fiducial volume were observed. On the other hand, the expected number of SuperK FC events with the vertex within the 22.5 kton fiducial volume for the case of no neutrino oscillation was 4 0 . 3 t ^ . This number was estimated from the neutrino flux measured by the near detector and the near/far flux ratio deduced from the measurement of pion kinematics just after the magnetic horn. Based on these numbers, the preliminary K2K data disfavor no neutrino oscillations at the 2a level. It will take about 5 years to accumulate 1020 protons on target. When this goal is achieved, the K2K experiment is expected to be sensitive to Am 2 > 2 x 1CT3 eV2 at the 90% CL.
185
6
Forthcoming Experiments
There are a number of forthcoming neutrino oscillation experiments which are at various stages; a new solar neutrino experiment SNO already started observation, some are under construction, and others are yet to be formally approved. The main problems to be addressed by these forthcoming experiments are (i) to confirm the SuperK evidence for atmospheric v^ oscillations and to determine the oscillation mode by long baseline neutrino oscillation experiments, (ii) to solve the solar neutrino problem by identifying the unique solution, and (iii) to test the LSND evidence for v^ -> Pe oscillations. For the confirmation of the SuperK evidence for atmospheric z/M oscillations, K2K already started data-taking. There are three other long baseline neutrino oscillation experiments with the baseline distance of 730 km; MINOS (Fermilab to the Soudan mine, under construction, expected to turn on in 2003), and OPERA and ICANOE (CERN to Gran Sasso, yet to be approved formally, expected to turn on in 2005). MINOS is a magnetized calorimeter experiment and OPERA is an emulsion experiment. The ICANOE detector is a combination of liquid argon TPC and a magnetized calorimeter. Though K2K is a fM —>• vx disappearance experiment, other three experiments have capabilities to measure the appearance of T~ . Figure 10 compares the sensitivities of these experiments for both v^ —\ vT and v^ —) ve. 31 In the solar neutrino observations, the measurements of energy spectrum of the solar neutrinos and the day-night flux difference, and the measurement of solar-neutrino flux by utilizing neutral-current reactions are key issues. SuperK continues high-statistics measurements of the day-night flux difference and recoil electron spectrum. SNO, which uses 1,000 tons of heavy water D2O, started data-taking at the end of 1999. SNO measures solar neutrinos through both inverse beta decay [yed —> e~pp) and neutral-current interactions (vxd -> vxpn). In addition, ve scattering events will also be measured. The Borexino experiment with 300 tons of ultra-pure liquid scintillator is under construction at Gran Sasso, and expected to turn on in 2001. The primary purpose of this experiment is the measurement of the 7 Be solar neutrino flux by lowering the detection threshold for the recoil electrons to 250 keV: if the vacuum oscillation is the solution, it causes seasonal variation of the 7 Be solar neutrino flux. KamLAND, which is under construction at Kamioka and will be completed in 2001, is a multi-purpose neutrino experiment with 1,000 tons of ultra-pure liquid scintillator. One of the primary purposes of KamLAND is the search for neutrino oscillations by measuring neutrinos produced by power
186
Figure 10. Comparison of ICANOE, OPERA, and MINOS sensitivities.
reactors. The sensitivity region of KamLAND (shown in Fig. 1) includes the MSW Large Mixing solution. It may be proved or disproved in 5 years of measurements. KamLAND can also observe the 7 Be solar neutrinos if the detection threshold can be lowered to a level similar to that of Borexino. The sensitivities to the solar-neutrino problem of the 7 Be solar neutrino observations are also shown in Fig. 1. Finally, to test the LSND evidence for z?M ->• ve and v^ —> ve oscillations, the MiniBooNE experiment at Fermilab is under construction: it is expected to turn on late in 2001. The MiniBooNE detector will be diluted liquid scintillator (total mass is 807 tons and fiducial mass is 445 tons) and will measure the electron appearance signature in the v^ beam from the Fermilab 8-GeV Booster. The expected sensitivity of MiniBooNE is shown as "BooNE expected" in Fig. 1.
187
7
Conclusions
The evidences for the neutrino oscillation from the SuperK atmospheric neutrino observations and from the solar neutrino experiments are becoming solid. To accommodate yet another evidence from LSND, a sterile neutrino species must be invoked in addition to the three known neutrino species. These evidences will be challenged by the forthcoming neutrino oscillation experiments. They, together with the ongoing experiments, eventually settle the current problems and may bring new surprizes. Once established, the neutrino mass will lead us not only to a new era of neutrino physics, but also to a wealth of new physics beyond the Standard Model. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81, 1562 (1998). Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 2644 (1999). Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Lett. B 467, 185 (1999). Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Lett. B 335, 237 (1994). D. Casper et al., Phys. Rev. Lett. 66, 2561 (1991); R. Becker-Szendy et al, Phys. Rev. D 46, 3720 (1992). M. Ambrosio et al, Phys. Lett. B 434, 451 (1998). M. Spurio, Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.) 85, 37 (2000). W.W.M. Allison et al, Phys. Lett. B 391, 491 (1997). W.W.M. Allison et al, Phys. Lett. B 449, 137 (1999). W.A. Mann, hep-ex/9912007. S. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85, 3999 (2000). B.T. Cleveland et al, Astrophys. J. 496, 505 (1998). J.N. Abdurashitov et al, Phys. Rev. C 60, 0055801 (1999). W. Hampel et al, Phys. Lett. B 447, 127 (1999). Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 77, 1683 (1996). Y. Fukuda et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 1810 (1999). For a recent review of solar neutrinos, see K. Nakamura, in Reviews of Particle Physics (RPP 2000), Eur. Phys. J. C 15, 366 (2000). C. Athanassopoulos et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 77, 3082 (1996). C. Athanassopoulos et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 1 , 1774 (1998). T.E. Jannakos, Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.) 85, 84 (2000). Prepared by H. Murayama for Particle Physics Booklet, Particle Data Group, July 2000. K. Nakamura, in Intersections of Particle and Nuclear Physics, 7th Conference C1PANP2000, Quebec City, Canada, 2000, ed. Z. Parsa and W.J.
188
Marciano (American Institute of Physics, New York, 2000), p. 164. 23. M. Honda et al, Phys. Rev. D 52, 4985 (1995). 24. S. Hatakeyama et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 1 , 2016 (1998). 25. For example, see P. Lipari and M. Lusignoli, Phys. Rev. D 58, 073005 (1998). 26. J.N. Bahcall, S. Basu, and M.H. Pinsonneault, Phys. Lett. B 433, 1 (1998). 27. M. Apollonio et al, Phys. Lett. B 466, 415 (1999). 28. F. Boehm et al, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84, 3764 (2000). 29. E. Radicioni, Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.) 85, 95 (2000). 30. A. Lupi, Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.) 85, 91 (2000). 31. Taken from http://pcnometh4.cern.ch7LNGS_nov99.pdf.
THE PAMELA EXPERIMENT: A CLUE TO THE ENIGMA OF ANTIMATTER IN SPACE
SERGIO BARTALUCCI* LNF-INFN, P.O. Box 13, 1-00044 Frascati (ROMA)Jtaly E-mail: Sergio.Bartalucci@lnf. infn. it * on behalf of the PAMELA Collaboration PAMELA is a satellite-borne experiment whose main physics goals are the search for cosmic antimatter of primary origin and the measurement of the spectrum of cosmic ray particles and antiparticles in the energy range from -50 Mev to 200 GeV and beyond. Additional objectives are the continuous monitoring of the cosmic ray solar modulation, the study of the solar flares and the stationary perturbed fluxes in the Earth magnetosphere. The PAMELA apparatus will fly in a low polar sun-synchronous orbit for at least three years. It consists of a magnetic spectrometer with a particle identification system. The scientific objectives, the mission profile and a general description of the instrument are presented.
1
Introduction
The PAMELA experiment is the main part of the Russian Italian Mission (RIM) program that was conceived in the 90 s to study Cosmic rays in space. The RIM program follows an approach consisting of several steps. The first experiment (RIM-0.1, alias Si-Eye-1, Bidoli et al., 1997), has taken data onboard of the russian Space Station MIR starting from October 1995, and a second one (RIM-0.2 experiment, alias Si-Eye-2) was brought to MIR in 1997. These two experiments, based on small silicon telescope detectors, measure the trajectory and the energy lost by high ionizing particles in coincidence with the light flashes seen by astronauts during the flight. The second RIM experiment (called NINA, Bidoli et al., 1999) has been launched in space onboard of the russian satellite Resurs-Arktika n.4 in July 1998. Its main goal is to study the anomalous, galactic and solar components of cosmic rays at low energy (10 100 MeV/n). The PAMELA experiment is expected to be launched at the beginning of year 2003 on board of the russian Resurs-Arktika n.5 satellite, which will fly on a sun-synchronous, polar orbit (986 inclination, average height 690 km) for at least three years.
189
190 The Scientific Case
2.1
The Antimatter Enigma
The beautiful symmetry of microscopic physics laws seems not to hold true in the real macroscopic world and, if the violation of symmetry is very small at the subnuclear scale, it is absolutely prevailing already at the atomic scale. Nevertheless, the existence of antimatter, both as an artificial product from particle accelerators and as a natural product from interaction of cosmic rays with interstellar matter, is strongly suggestive of a possible evolution of the present asymmetric universe from an earlier, symmetric one. Unfortunately, no observation can support such primordial symmetry so far, although the existence of separate domains of matter and antimatter on cosmological scale cannot be absolutely excluded. The early theoretical models and the observational tests of a symmetric Universe were reviewed firstly by Steigman [1976], but since then no significant improvement in either field has been done. The most recent work on this subject is due to Cohen et al. [1998], who explore the possibility of universal (but non-local) matter-antimatter symmetry, with a typical domain size today > 20 Mpc. They find that matter-antimatter encounters at domain boundaries are unavoidable, and try to put constraints on such an Universe arising from two observations, a non-thermal distortion in the Cosmic Background Radiation (CBR) and an enhancement in the spectrum of Cosmic Diffuse Gamma-rays (CDG), red-shifted to the current energy of order 1 MeV. In both cases their HEAT comb. rather conservative estimates far exceed CAPRICE 98 CAPRICE 94 the measured values, so they conclude " Neulr. annihilation • Secondary bkgd that, if such antimatter domains exist, - Signal + bkgd their size is comparable to the Hubble s distance. Perhaps it is worth mentioning that in this case there should be annihilation radiation coming from the interfaces of those large domains, giving rise to detectable anisotropics for the v io2^ ! „ ^ T » C D G in the 100 M e V energy range. Such measurement is well within the io! capabilities of the GLAST based Positron energy (GeV) LargeArea Telescope instrument [GLAST-LAT, 1999]. Figure 1. The experimental and theoretical positron fraction with possible distortion from % annihilation
In the past twenty-five years, several balloon-borne experiments have measured the antimatter/matter ratio as the experimentally most accessible
191 parameter. Some of the most recent results are shown in fig. 1 for e*/(e + e+) ratio, where all experiments mostly suppport the secondary origin of high-energy positrons, although the positron fraction does not appear to fall as rapidly as predicted by the various models. In particular, the HEAT [Barwick et al., 1997] result in the energy range from 7 to 20 GeV might indicate new mechanisms of positron production, but statistics is still poor. A similar remark can be done for the antiproton flux (fig.2): although results in excess of expectations from secondary production were claimed in some early measurements, the next generation of experiment, making use of more sophisticated techniques, clearly showed no evidence for exotic sources of antimatter in the energy range from 200 MeV to, with little statistics, - 50 GeV. -*J ltr 2
to 3
's
1
m = 9 6 4 GeV 10*
• i D X
Mass91 BESS IMAX CAPRICE Secondary total
PAMELA Range
m-»
Figure 2. The antiproton flux with the distortion from % annihilation in a possible MSSM
The basic signature of the existence of significant amount of antimatter in the Universe is certainly the detection of just an antinucleus. There has been speculation that it might be possible for cosmic rays to reach Earth from extragalactic space out to a few hundreds Mpc. Thus, high-energy antinuclei form antimatter domains beyond the gamma-ray limits ( > 10 Mpc) might reach US and be detected, although w i t f j ym]s p r o b a b i l i t y . A n antihelium
could likely be the result of primordial nucleosynthesis, since even the most conservative estimate of the fraction of secondary He produced in collisions of cosmic rays with the interstellar gas gives a He I He of 10"14. An anticarbon would only be produced in an antistar. The present status of search for He is summarized in fig. 3, together with the limit that PAMELA can achieve in three years operation, thanks to its excellent particle identification capabilities. Historically, early in 1967 A. Sakharov suggested that the baryon-asymmetric Universe can evolve from a symmetric one by satisfaction of the three conditions: a) Non-conservation of the total baryon number B b) Both C and CP violation, but CPT invariance c) Baryogenesis in a non-equilibrium environment Condition 1) is quite obvious. Condition 2) means that not only a preference for matter or antimatter must be present (C-violation makes the amplitude of the inverse reaction different), but
192 also CP must not be an exact symmetry, otherwise the rate of a CP-invariant (i.e. time-invariant, because of the CPT theorem) reaction would be equal to the one of its time reversed reaction, thereby determining no change in the net baryon number. 10
J
2 2 io-'
1
RiminrralPT!
JSmoutelal 197.5 Bidhwnrelnl.1978 Ooldenetnl 1997 Bafliin-temctil. 197S
1 2
10 5
10
3
I
G
AMSSTS-91 BESS 93. 94.95.97 and 98 »"<: -mm
10 ''
PAMELA 10"8
Condition 3) is required by the fact that in a thermal equilibrium, when entropy is maximum, the time average of B must be zero, assuming again that the CPT invariance holds true (i.e. masses and total decay widths of particles and antiparticles are exactly equal). The asymmetric Universe is the present reality, but not all the three conditions are supported by experimental evidence. The occurrence of condition 1) was not observed so far: the upper limit on proton lifetime (AB=1 interaction) is very high, around 103" years, implying that the mass scale at which new physics arises is Mx > 1 0 15 GeV. A more stringent test is provided by studies of n
Figure 3. Status and prospects for ^ s e a r c h
present upper limits imply a mass scale M x
_
o s d l l a t i o n
a
n
d n o n -leptonic
modes (AB=2 interaction), ~ 10 GeV.
decay
where
C-nonconservation, as required by condition 2), is maximally observed in weak interactions, but the observed amount of CP violation is definitely too small in the neutral kaon system and doesn t seem large in the B" I B° => fK, decay. While Grand Unification Theories provide a simple and natural environment where Sakharov s conditions are implemented, unfortunately the involved physics is unlikely to be testable in a near or far future. The most widely studied scenario for generating the baryon number of the universe is the electroweak baryogenesis, because it leads to testability at realistic colliders, and therefore to tight constraints. In particular, in the Minimal Supersymmetric Standard Model (MSSM) the behaviour of the electroweak phase transition is dependent on the mass of the lightest Higgs particle and on the mass of the top squark (stop mass) [Riotto and Trodden, 1999 and ref. therein]. Recent LEP results would suggest a candidate Higgs mass > 113 GeV, while electroweak baryogenesis puts an upper bound of 105 GeV in the MSSM. Furthermore, the stop mass should be close to the top mass, -173 GeV, and is presently reachable only at the Tevatron.
193 Only condition 3), which is model-independent, seems quite easily fulfilled, since at early epochs the relevant processes are naturally out of equilibrium, their timescales being slow compared to the expansion rate of the universe. As a last remark, some authors [see Streitmatter, 1996] have suggested the possibility of very large (perhaps on a -100 Mpc scale) domains of matterantimatter, as a consequence of a non-universality of the sign of the CP-violation, what is possible if it arises from spontaneous symmetry breaking.
2.2
The search for exotic Dark Matter
The identification of any excess of primary antiprotons or positrons over the expected flux of secondary antiprotons and positrons may reveal the presence of exotic dark matter, in the form of WIMPs (Weak Interacting Massive Particles). In supersymmetric theories a good candidate for WIMP is the neutralino X< lightest stable supersymmetric particle. These particles could have been accumulated in the halo of galaxies and, through the annihilation with their antiparticles, result in the pair production of antiprotons, positrons and gammas, which can be observed on top of the secondary flux produced in the interaction of cosmic rays with the interstellar medium. In the past, extensive calculations were performed by several authors, mainly looking at possible effects on the p spectrum at low energy (< 2 GeV) , where the spectrum is quite sensitive to solar modulation, however. More recent calculations in the framework of the MSSM point out at the presence of detectable distortions of the high energy spectrum of both positrons [Baltz and Edsj , 1998] and antiprotons [Ullio, 1999]. Some examples are shown in figs 1-2. The particle collection capability of PAMELA, with its large statistics and energy range, will certainly allow one to recognize such signatures within one year of operation, should they exist.
2.3
Summary of the Scientific objectives
The main observational objectives of PAMELA can be summarized as follows: 1. 2.
measurement of the p and p spectrum in the energy range 0.1 150 GeV; measurement of the e~ spectrum in the energy range 0.05 lOOGeV;
search for antinuclei with a sensitivity of about 3¥10 8 in the He I He ratio; measurement of nuclear spectra (from H to C) in the energy range 0.1 200 GeV/n. Moreover, the PAMELA experiment has the following additional objectives:
3. 4.
5.
continuous monitoring of the cosmic rays solar modulation during and after the 23 r maximum of the solar activity
194 6.
study of the time and energy distribution of the energetic particles emitted in solar flares; 7. study of the stationary and disturbed fluxes of high energy particles in the Earth s magnetosphere. These objectives are in the reach of PAMELA because the satellite spends much time in the polar regions, where the cut-off due to the terrestrial magnetic field is low.
2.4
The mission profile
The PAMELA experiment will be installed on the upward side of the ResursArktika n.5 satellite, that will be continuously oriented downward to the Earth during all its mission, in order to fulfill a program of monitoring of ocean-surface, ice and meteorological conditions of Arctic zones. Furthermore the satellite will travel in a quasi-circular, about 700 km high, polar orbit. This is an optimal situation for the observation of cosmic rays, because the polar orbit maximizes the cosmic ray collection rate (important for antinuclei search), and also minimizes the geomagnetic cutoff in a significant portion of the satellite trajectory (important for all scientific issues related to the solar activity and to the terrestrial geomagnetic effects). The upward orientation of the PAMELA telescope on board of the satellite is the required direction for observing cosmic rays without interference with the Earth and keeping far away from the telescope acceptance the showers produced by quasi-horizontal cosmic rays on the terrestrial atmosphere; these showers are responsible of the strong increase of the background at low zenith angles. Finally the high height of the orbit assures a long permanence of the satellite in orbit due to the very small effect of the atmospheric drag; the stabilization of the satellite is obtained by magnetic devices to make the best use of this situation without depending from the possible shortness of fuel.
3
The PAMELA Instrument
A sketch of the telescope is shown in fig. 4. This is composed of: three basic elements: a magnetic spectrometer, an imaging-sampling electromagnetic calorimeter and a transition radiation detector. Also, a time-of-flight/triggering system and an anticoincidence system are implemented. The total height of PAMELA is 105 cm, the mass is 380 kg, the power consumption is 345 W and the geometrical factor is 20.5 cm x sr.
195 3.1
Magnetic spectrometer
The magnetic spectrometer, based on permanent magnet system and silicon microstrip detector, is capable of determining the electric charge with a very high confidence level, and of measuring the particle momentum up to the highest energies, allowing to collect a useful sample of rare particles, according to the PAMELA acceptance and duration of the flight. The general scheme of the magnet system consists of five modules, each 81 mm high, interleaving 6 frames 8 mm high, which accommodate the silicon sensors. The total height of the spectrometer is 445 mm with a rectangular cavity 131x161 mm corresponding to a geometrical factor of 20.5 cm 2 x sr. The magnetic material is a sintered Nd-Fe-B alloy with a large residual magnetic induction (~ 1.3 T). The field within the spectrometer is 0.4 T at the center. Outside the field is shielded by a ferrimagnetic shield. Six tracker planes are inserted in the spectrometer, each composed by 6 silicon sensors, 70x53.3 mm wide and 300 |im thick (The PAMELA collaboration, 1999a). The detectors have been tested with particle beams at PSI (Z rich) and at CERN. The Magnet spatial resolution of a Silicon-Tracker single detector has been found to be 3.0-0.1 u,m in the bending direction and 11.5-0.6 (J.m in the orthogonal direction. The Maximum / Detectable Rigidity (MDR) of the PAMELA Figure 4. The PAMELA Telescope (side view) spectrometer, resulting from the performed tests, is about 800 GV/c and the spectrometer simulation shows that the proton and electron spillover sets a maximum energy limit in the antiproton and positron to about 200 GeV.
3.2
Electromagnetic Imaging Calorimeter
The electromagnetic imaging calorimeter is meant to provide a measurement of the energy lost by the interacting e + , e" and the particle interaction pattern within the
196 calorimeter. The latter allows a clean separation of electromagnetic from hadronic showers ( and from non-interacting particles) with a high level of confidence and efficiency. It is a sampling calorimeter made of silicon sensor planes interleaved with tungsten absorbers [The PAMELA Collaboration, 1999b]. The sensitive area of one detector plane is 240x240 mm' and it consists of a 3x3 matrix of single-sided silicon detectors 80x 80 mm2 wide, which are divided in strips with an implant pitch of 2.4 mm. This high granularity permits a very good path reconstruction of the particle energy released in the calorimetric volume. The thickness of the silicon sensors is 380 |0,m and that of the absorber tungsten layers is 2.6 mm corresponding to 0.7 Xo The whole calorimeter is made of 46 detector layers (23 for the X view and 23 for the Y view) and 22 absorber layers. Several calorimeters of this kind have been already built, tested and used in balloon flight experiments of the WiZard collaboration (TS93, CAPRICE94, CAPRICE98). The performances of these instruments are well studied and the simulation of the SiW calorimeter in the PAMELA configuration gives a resolution in the electron energy measurement better than 5% in the range 20 100 GeV (and ~ 6.5% at 250 GeV) and a rejection power of protons and electrons against positrons and antiprotons of 104 with an overall selection efficiency better than 90%.
3.3
Transition Radiation Detector
The threshold velocity measurement system is based on a Transition Radiation Detector (TRD). It is made of carbon fiber radiators and straw tubes and it helps further discriminate between electrons and hadrons. The Pamela TRD [The PAMELA Collaboration, 1999c] is used to select leptons out of hadrons up to very high energy (-1000 GeV) and it is based on small diameter straw tubes (4 mm) arranged in 9 double layer planes interleaved by carbon fiber radiators. The use of the pulse height measurement technique allows one to perform the particle selection based on energy loss criteria and to track all particles before their entrance in the magnetic spectrometer, cleaning the sample of the particles accepted at its entrance. The PAMELA TRD detector has been tested at CERN using a 3 GeV pion and electron beam, showing pretty good results.
3.4
Time-of-Flight and Anticoincidence Systems
A plastic scintillator hodoscope system is used as time-of-flight (TOF) counter to measure the velocity of particles crossing the apparatus, and gives the trigger signal for data acquisition. It is made up of five layers of detectors, 0.5 cm thick, arranged in three groups, two on top of the instrument, one between the TRD and the magnet, and two just below the magnet. The time resolution is of the order of 100 ps,
197 allowing a separation of ~ 3 std. dev. between protons and electrons up to a momentum of 1.3 GeV/c. The TOF sistem is able to reject albedo (= upward moving) particles at a level better than 1¥ 10. The anti-coincidence system is meant to identify events in which particles may have entered through the mechanical structure of the magnet, or interact in the magnet material and produce secondary particles, or even are produced in interactions in the instrument or spacecraft. It is made up of plastic scintillators covering the top and the sides of the magnet.
4
Conclusions
The PAMELA project is completely defined and each subsystem and detector prototype has been built and tested to measure the detector performances. Moreover, the prototypes have also been tested to probe the resistance against vibrations and shocks during the launch phase, exhibiting a good mechanical behaviour for all sub-detectors. These tests show that the performances meet the requirements and that the PAMELA experiment can fulfil its scientific objectives. Recent (May and July 2000) beam tests at CERN-PS and -SPS with some detectors already in a quasi-final configuration gave very good results, somehow better than the expectations. The PAMELA Qualification Model is under construction and it will be ready for the integration tests and electro-mechanical compatibility with the satellite by mid-2001. Then, according to test results the construction of the Flight Model will start and the integration with the Resurs-Arktika satellite should be completed by the end of 2002. The launch is foreseen at the beginning of 2003 with a mission duration of at least three years. References Baltz, E.A. and J., Edsj, Phys.Rev. D59 (1999),023511. Barwick, S. et al., Nucl. Instr. Meth. 400 (1997),34. Bidoli V., et al, Proc. 25 th ICRC (Durban), 5 (1997), 45. Bidoli V., et al, Nucl. Instr. Meth. A424 (1999), 414. Cohen, A.G. et al, ApJ 495 (1998),539. GLAST-LAT, http://www-glast.stanford.edu/Instrument.html (1999) The PAMELA Collaboration, Proc. 26th ICRC (Salt Lake City), 5 (1999a), 116. The PAMELA Collaboration, Proc. 26th ICRC (Salt Lake City), 5 (1999b),187. The PAMELA Collaboration, Proc. 26th ICRC (Salt Lake City), 5 (1999c), 124. Riotto, A. and M. Trodden, ARN&PS 49 (1999),35. Steigman, G., ARA&A 14 (1976),339. Streitmatter, R., Nuovo Cimento 19C (1996),835. Ullio, P., astro-ph/9904086, Submitted to Astron.Astrophys. (1999).
198
The PAMELA Collaboration 0 . Adriani1 , M. Ambriola2 , G. Barbiellini 3 , L.M. Barbier4 , S. Bartalucci5 , G. Bazilevskaja6, R. Bellotti2 , D. Bergstrom7 , S. Bertazzoni8 , V. Bidoli9 , M. Boezio3, E. Bogomolov 10 , V. Bonvicini3 , M. Boscherini1 , U. Bravar 14 , F. Cafagna2 , P. Carlson7 , M. Casolino8, M. Castellano2 , G. Castellini15, E.R. Christian4 , F. Ciacio2 , M. Circella 2 , R. D'Alessandro 1 ,G. De Cataldo 2 , C.N. De Marzo 2 , M.P. De Pascale9 , N.Finetti1, T. Francke7 , G. Furano 9 , A. Gabbanini 15 , A.M. Galper" , N. Giglietto2, M. Grandi 1 , A. Grigorjeva 6 , M. Hof12, S.V. Koldashov" , M.G. Korotkov" , J.F. Krizmanic 4 , S. Krutkov 10 , B. Marangelli 2 , L. Marino 5 , W. Menn 12 , V.V. Mikhailov 11 , N. Mirizzi 2 , J.W. Mitchell 4 , A.A. Moiseev" , A. Morselli9 ,R. Mukhametshin 6 , J.F. Ormes 4 , J.V. Ozerov 11 , P. Papini 1 , M. Pearce7,A. Perego1 , S. Piccardi1 ,P. Picozza9, M. Ricci5, A. Salsano8, P. Schiavon3 , M. Simon12 , R. Sparvoli9, B. Spataro5,P. Spillantini1 , P. Spinelli2, S.A. Stephens13 , S.J. Stochaj14 , Y. Stozhkov6, R.E. Streitmatter4,F. Taccetti15 , M. Tesi15, A. Vacchi3, E. Vannuccini 1 , G. Vasiljev 10 , V.Vignoli" , S.A. Voronov 11 , N. Weber 7 , Y. Yurkin n ,N. Zampa3 Institutions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
University and INFN, Firenze (Italy) University and INFN, Bad (Italy) University and INFN, Trieste (Italy) NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt (USA) Laboratori Nazionali INFN, Frascati (Italy) Lebedev Physical Institute (Russia) Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm (Sweden) Electronic Engineering Department, II University, Roma-Tor Vergata (Italy) II University and INFN, Roma-Tor Vergata (Italy) Ioffe Physical Technical Institute (Russia) Moscow Engineering and Physics Institute, Moscow (Russia) Siegen University, Physics Department, Siegen (Germany) Tata Institute of Fundamental Research, Bombay (India) Particle Astrophysics Laboratory, NMSU, Las Cruces (USA) Istituto di Ricerca Onde Elettromagnetiche CNR, Firenze (Italy)
TUNNELING P H E N O M E N A IN COSMOLOGY: SOME FUNDAMENTAL PROBLEMS
M. Y O S H I M U R A Department
of Physics, E-mail:
Tohoku University Sendai 980-8578 [email protected]
Japan
The fundamental problem of how tunneling in thermal medium is completed is addressed, and a new time scale of order 1/friction for its termination, which is usually much shorter than the Hubble time, is pointed out. Enhanced non-linear resonance is responsible for this short time scale. This phenomenon occurs when the semiclassical periodic motion in a metastable potential well resonates with one of the environment harmonic oscillators coupled to its motion.
The usual picture of how the first order phase transition proceeds in cosmology, for instance the electroweak phase transition which is relevant for the scenario of electroweak baryogenesis 1, is something like this; nucleation of the bubble of the true ground state (of broken symmetry) occurs with some probability in different parts of the universe. If the bubble formation does not take place strongly, the phase transition is terminated only when cosmological evolution changes the form of the potential (or more properly of the free energy) so that the symmetric phase is no longer the local minimum of the potential. This picture relies on the presumption that there is no inherent time scale for termination of the phase transition, or at least even if it exists, it is much larger than the Hubble time scale, which is the time for the potential change. We would like to exmaine this problem by working in a new formalism of the real-time description of the tunneling phenomena 2 , 3 . Clearly, if the new time scale of the phase transition is much shorter than the Hubble time, one must reconsider the usual scenario. This might change the situation on, and even resurect the once failed GUT phase transition for the inflationary universe scenario 4 . Another important ingredient for our consideration is effect of cosmic environment; the order parameter that describes the state of the universe such as the homogeneous part of the Higgs field is necessarily coupled to matter fields that make up the thermal environment. One must then take into accout the presence of thermal medium in discussion of the tunneling rate and its time evolution, and estimate how dissipation due to the environment interaction modifies the basic tunneling rate. There are already many works on the subject of tunneling in medium 5 , and most past works deal with a system in equilibrium as a whole. The 199
200
Euclidean technique such the bounce solution 6 is often used in this context 7 8 , . Our approach here is different, and we attempt to clarify dynamics of time evolution starting from an arbitrary initial state of the tunneling system, which can be either a pure or a mixed state. We find it more illuminating to use a real-time formalism instead of the Euclidean method much employed in the literature. Our formalism is based on separation of a subsystem from thermal environment, and integrating out the environment variable including the interaction with the subsystem. In this picture dissipation seen in the behavior of the subsystem is due to our ignorance of huge environment degrees of freedom. Modeling of the environment and its interaction form with the subsystem is expected to be insensitive to the result one derives in this approach. We use the standard model of environment 9 , 7 . This method is best suited to a (by itself) non-equilibrium system which is immersed in a larger thermal equilibrium state. This methodology has been used by us in a number of problems in cosmology 10 , n . For instance, the relic abundance was calculated n from this approach and the usual estimate of thermally averaged Boltzmann rate was justified at high temperatures. At very low temperatures T <S M (the mass of relic particle) our calculation differs from the usual one; the Boltzmann suppressed number density (MT/2-ir)3/2 e~MlT at the freeze-out is replaced by some temperature power term. (There is some criticism against this calculation 12.) But numerical importance of this effect is presumably minor, although it is a theoretically interesting issue. Here we consider the most basic problem of this kind, one dimensional subsystem described by a potential V{q). This system is put in thermal medium. The potential is assumed to have some local minimum at q = 0, which is separated at q = qs of the barrier top from a global minimum. The environment part is modeled by infinitely many, continuously distributed harmonic oscillators whose coordinates are Q(UJ). Its coupling to the tunneling system is given by a Hamiltonian, /•OO
q /
duc(u)Q(uj).
(1)
J ioc
The coupling strength is c(u>) and uc is some threshold frequency. Needless to say, one may imagine a generalized case in which the system variable q is the order parameter for the first order phase transition, the homogeneous Higgs field, and the environment oscillator Q(co) is a collection of various forms of matter fields coupled to the Higgs field.
201
The basic equation in our problem is m d2Q{io) rco , d-7z2q„ dV f°° . .^. , cFQ(w) , , ,„. 2_. . -£ + — = - I dojc(u)Q(uj), 2f2 + u ; 2 Q M = -c(u;)(7.(2) One may eliminate the environment variable Q(w) to get the Langevin equation 13 ,
^£ + ^+2
J' dsaI(t-S)q(s) = FQ(t),
(3)
where FQ(£) is linear in initial values of environment variables, Qi(w) and
<£j c(w) I Qj(w) cos(wi) + - ^ - ^ sin(wt) j .
(4)
By taking the thermal bath of temperature T = 1/(3 given by the density matrix, \ l/'2
/ Pp(Q,Q')
•n coth(/?c;/2) •exp
W
2 sinh(/3w)
{(Q2 + Q'2) cosh(/3w) - 2QQ')
, (5)
for each environment oscillator, the following correlation formula is obtained;
Z
oo
g^j
dw r(u) cos CJ(T - s) c o t h ( — ) = aR(r - s) (6)
with
The kernel function aj in eq. (3) is given by /*oo
<*/(*) = — /
du>r(oj) sin(wt).
(8)
The combination, afl(t) + iai(t), is a sum of the real-time thermal Green's function for Q(u>)— oscillators, added with the weight c2(w). An often used simplification is the local, Ohmic approximation taking
rM = ^ ,
(9)
7T
with uic = 0, which amounts to a / ( r ) =£W 2 <$(T)+»?<$'(r)-
(10)
202
This gives the local version of Langevin equation, d2q
dV
r
dq
9
,
,
The parameter 5UJ2 is interpreted as a potential renormalization or a mass renormalization in the field theory analogy, since by changing the bare frequency parameter to the renormalized UJ2R the term 5u>2 q is cancelled by a counter term in the potential. On the other hand, r\ is the Ohmic friction coefficient. This local approximation breaks down both at early and at late times 14 , but it is useful in many other cases. Any mixture of quantum states is described by a density matrix, P = ^2wn\n)(n\,
(12)
n
where \n) is a state vector for pure quantum state and 0 < wn < 1. The density matrix obeys the equation of motion; ih^
= [Htot,p],
(13)
where Htot is the total Hamiltonina of the entire system. In configuration space this density matrix is given by its matrix elements, p(q , q'; Q(u) , Q'(u)) = (q , Q(u)\p \q', Q V ) > .
(14)
1
Its Fourier transform with respect to relative coordinates, q—q , Q(ut) — Q'(ui), is called the Wigner function and denoted by fw', fw(q,p;
Q(w),P(w)) = f
P(q +C/2,q-
d e l ] dX(u) exp[-i^P-i
i/2 ; Q(w) + X(u)/2
f
, Q(u) - X(u)/2)
dwX{w)P{u)} .
(15)
It is easy to show from eq.(13) that this quantity obeys dfw
dfw
p—
9t
dg
f , ( r,l \ // * dw , ( I r{<jj)
J
V
®fw
,
2 nx
\
, . + to Q{LO) v ;
3Q(w)
9
fw
. , +
<9P(w)
In one dimensional quantum mechanics the semiclassical approximation is excellent when the potential barrier is large, and we assume that this is also true in the presence of the system-environment interaction. In the semiclassical h —i 0 limit we have 1
/ v ( j . ih
d
\
vf
ihd
Mf
_^dV
dfw
203
The resulting equation, being identical to the classical Liouville equation, has an obvious solution; fw(q,P,Q
,P)=
/ dqtdpi /
dQidPif$(qi,Pi,Qi,Pi)
•6 (q - gci) 6 (P - Pd) 6 (Q - Qd) 5 (P - P cl ) ,
(17)
where ), P(w) integration, fw\q,P;t)= K(q,p,qi,Pi;t)
/ dqidpif^tq{qi,pi)K{q,p,qi,pi;t), = J dQidPi f$iQ(Qi
(18)
, Pi) 6 (q - qcl) S [p - p cl ) . (19)
The problem of great interest is how further one can simplify the kernel function K here. In many situations one is interested in the tunneling probability when the environment temperature is low enough. At low temperatures of T < a typical frequency or curvature scale u>s of the potential V, one has
/c^,jpj(^)
= 0{Vf] « fuT,.
(20)
In the electroweak and the GUT phase transition this corresponds to T < m#(Higgs mass). Expansion of qc\ in terms of Qi(u>), P;(w) is then justified. Thus, we use <* (q - Qd ) = / - ^ exp [i Xq ( q - qcl) ] «
/ ^texp [l A" {q ~q«] " / ^ { QiMQ^i") + p^)ecfV)})
] >(2i)
valid to the first order of Qi(w), Pi(tu). A similar expansion for S {p — pc\) using p^ ,p^\u),p[P(u}), also holds. An alternative justification of the expansion (21) is to keep 0[c(w)] terms consistently in the exponent since both ^ ( w ) and <^P)(u;) are of this order. Gaussian integral for the variables Qi(u), Pi{u)) first and then for Xq , Xp can be done explicitly with eq.(21), when one takes the thermal, hence Gaussian density matrix for the initial environment variable, pQ . The result of
204 this Gaussian integral leads t o an integral transform 2 of the Wigner function, f$ (initial) -> f™ (final), using the kernel function of ui K{q,p,qi,Pi]t)
*\
v/detj = — exp
where the matrix elements of J 1 h i = 1
f00
0{Q ^ 1
Id
>P
Pel ) J
^
(23)
W
1 f°° Bui 1 7 22 = - / ducoth?--\z(Lo,t)\2, /i2 = ^ /"°° dw coth ^ where
z(ui ,t)
(22)
= Uj are given by
3LU 1 du; coth^--\z(u,t)\2,
Jul*
(0) cl
[ (o) (0) \ P-Pcl n — rr,
(24)
- JR ( Z ( w , t)z* (to , t)) = - ^ - ,
= q r , ' (ui ,t) + iui q(ci '' (u ,t),
and
(25)
i ( w , t ) = p£i (ui ,t) +
iujp[P{uj ,t). Quantities t h a t appear in the integral transform are determined by solving differential equations; the homogeneous Langevin equation for q£, and an inhomogeneous linear equation for z{u , t) and z(u ,t),
+ 2 [tdsaI(t-s)q$\S)=0,
— 2+ ( T 0 dt
V dq J 9,.to)
d2z(uj_,t) 2
dt
(26)
y0
ffV
' ( 0 " ) ,«., *<<" • ' ) + 2 { rfs a ' C " s ) ^ •s) = - c(w)e " • (27)
A similar equation as for z(u> ,t) holds for z(u> ,t).
T h e initial condition is
qia)(t = 0) = qi, p^(t = 0)=Pi, z(u,t = 0)=0, z(u,t = 0)=0. T h e physical picture underlying the formula for the integral transform, eq.(18) along with (22), should be evident; the probability at a phase space point (q, p) is dominated by the semi classical trajectory qcl (environment effect of dissipation being included in its determination by eq.(26)) reaching (q ,p) from an initial point (
205
We note that in the exactly solvable model of inverted harmonic oscillator potential the identical form of the integral transform was derived 3 without resort to the semiclassical approximation. Explicit form of the classical and the fluctuation functions (g£j and z{u> ,t)) is given there. To proceed further, one may separate the tunneling potential V(q) at the barrier top location, q = qs- We distinguish two cases of the potential type, depending on the value of V(oo) relative to the local minimum value Vm at q = 0 in the potential well. When V(oo) < Vm, the classical motion in the overbarrier region q > qs is monotonic ending at q = oo, while for V(oo) > Vm the motion is a damped oscillation towards 70 at the true minimum, unless the friction is large. If the friction is larger than a critical value of « 2w* with w« being the curvature of the potential at the global minimum, there occurs the overdamping such that q^ —> qo monotonically. A typical interesting case for V(oo) > Vm is the asymmetric double well as may occur in the first order electroweak phase transition x. We consider here a few problems to illustrate consequences of our general formula of the integral transform. One problem is calculation of the barrier penetration factor; to determine the outgoing flux in the overbarrier region for the type of potential of V(oo) < Vm, assuming an initial energy eigenstate under the potential V. The other problem is the tunneling probability for the asymmetric wine bottle type of potential. Energy eigenstates are special among pure quantum states, since they evolve only with phase factors. Thus, if one takes for |n)(n| in eq.(12) the energy eigenstate of the total Hamiltonian, the density matrix does not change with time. On the other hand, if one takes the energy eigenstate for the subsystem Hamiltonian, then the density matrix changes solely due to the environment interaction. It is thus best to use a pure eigenstate, or its superposition, of the subsystem Hamiltonian when one wishes to determine how the barrier penetration factor is modified in thermal medium. We first discuss the stationary phase approximation for the initial state. Starting from the formula, f${Qi,Pi)
= J
5Z Wn j
dte-**
d£ exp
J2
W
» ^ n f e " fWnfai + f )
£ ipi£ + I n >*(* - •^)+lrit{}n(qi
=
£ + -)
(28)
we locate the stationary point by J | = 0, -S- = 0 for each exponent factor. The partial derivative -^- = 0 is taken with the understanding that the rest of pj integration contains smooth functions of pi. This leads to the stationary
206
point at £ = 0, In{x)
Pi = In(qi)
(29)
-i ^*n{x)ipn{x) - tpZ(x)ipn(x) 2 |^ n (a:)| 2
(30)
Here In{x) is the usual flux factor at x for the pure state \n). This gives the result for the initial density matrix, Swili,
Pi) « 5 I
W
n\^n(qi)\'2
27T 5 fa -
(31)
In(qi))
The barrier penetration factor is calculated from the flux formula, i{q,t)=
£
(32)
^pfw'ii'P-'t)
2TT J
Thus, the semiclassical plus the stationary phase approximation gives I(q, t) of the form,
/ ^i^i2vd^exp
2/n
^)+^(?-i0)) (33)
for a pure initial state given by the wave function ip(x), where q* is the turning point in the overbarrier region. In the region of q 2> g» there is always a classical trajectory that reaches the point q of the Gaussian peak from an initial g, in the range qi > g», and the entire region within the Gaussian width ^fl\\ is fully covered by the integral. The factor outside the Gaussian exponent is well approximated by its peak value in the weak coupling case. Thus, one obtains 2 2
2
I(q,t) « |V(*o)| ( - i o ) = mx0)\ p^(x0,t)
,(°h r ^ 1 ^ ^ )
-l
, 04)
where xo (q , t) is determined from q(a\li
= xo ,Pi = / ( x 0 ) , Qi(u) = 0 , Pi(u) = 0-t) = q.
(35)
We now take the WKB wave function in the overbarrier region, 4>{qi) = —r== exp VPw)
f
J x.
dx p{x)
p(x) = J2(E-V(x)),
(36)
207 to get a factorized form of the flux 2 ,
,(„t)-ir(B)lV(,..lB). / - s S ^ p f e ^ ' . O T A feature t h a t characterizes the classical trajectory q^ its initial energy is = 0)a±p(qi)2
Hg(t
is of special interest;
+ V(qi) = E.
(38)
This formula for the flux reproduces our previous result for a specific potential of the inverted harmonic oscillator 3 , V(x) + -| 5ui2 x2 = — | u\ x2 , with UJR the renormalized curvature. T h e present approach actually improves our previous result; 9 x0+gl(x0)
=
_^
9 +ujBg
gl(x0) + guj'2Bx0
uiB(g + ojBg) '
where U>B ~ <JJR — r)/2 is a diagonalized frequency. T h e limiting formula of eq.(39), with I(xo) —> LUBXO as XQ —> oo, is valid in the infinite q limit, as derived in 3 . T h e function (£) is the homogeneous solution of the Langevin equation given explicitly in 3 ; N2
/-oo
#(t) =
H
^
sinh(w B i) + 2 /
«
.,»•.,.,» ^
^
(u2 + u2R)2 +
^
dw H(u) sm(ut)
2
(irr(u)y
>
(40)
(
4 1
)
/»oo
A^2 = 1 - 2
/
C1UJH(LO)U.
(42)
Both at early and late times the factor / « 1, deviating from unity only for the time range of order 1/LUBAccording to the view of 7 the potential V(q) t h a t determines the semiclassical penetration factor |T(£7)| 2 should be expressed in terms of the renormalized parameters, LOR in this case. This explains the bulk of the suppression caused by dissipative environment interaction, as explained in 3 . For discussion of a more general case of finite V(oo) < Vm we use the local, Ohmic approximation, which becomes excellent at late times. A potential t h a t decreases fast as q —> oo is assumed; ~f- —> 0 . T h e acceleration term can then be neglected when the friction satisfies rj1 3> | ^ T - | - This is a slow rolling
208
approximation, and it always holds for q large enough. The classical equation is then solved as Jq a,
dz(—)~1
= -t,
dz
(43)
which gives the factor
'-T-hr
<«>
dqm r]p(co) Thus, the tunneling probability decreases with time along with the decreasing slope of the potential. This result poses a curious question; the tunneling may not be terminated within a limited finite time. We shall encounter a similar situation for the asymmetric wine bottle potential. We next consider the case in which the potential is very steep at both ends; V(±oo) = oo . The tunneling rate, from the inner region at q < qs into the outer region at q > qs, is an important measure of tunneling phenomena and is given by the flux at q — qs; P(t) = — I(qB , t), which is equal to — /
dqidpif$(qi ,pt) (p^ + Yf~{
2/n
(45) On the other hand, the tunneling probability into the overbarrier region at q > x is given by dqidpif${qi,pi)
\ Jx
du
exp V^hi
2/n
(.46)
In both of the quantities, P(t) and P(qB , t) (the tunneling probability into q > qs), it is essential to estimate how q^ and In varies with time. We consider an initial state localized in the potential well so that the dominant contribution in the (qt ,Pi) phase space integration is restricted to q% < <7B- I n the rest of discussion anharmonic terms play important roles, but at first we work out the harmonic approximation;
V(?) + f < ^ V * | w 0 V ,
(47)
near the bottom of the well at q = 0. In the Ohmic approximation the classical solution and the fluctuation is given by qf
= I coscoot + ^-smcoot)
e " ^ 2 Qi + ^
^
e"^2Pi,
(48)
209
Z(U,t)
= —
j
:
W z — UIQ — ILUT]
iut _ u+Qo-iy/2
iaet-nt/i
,
+
u
-
~ Q-o» _~ ir-ll#2/ -
2WQ
.-ia t-t,t/2
e - « w „0* - , t / - 2
^
(4g)
2WQ
using wo = y ^ o — ^ - . In the rest of discussion we assume a small friction, Near w = w>o the fluctuation is approximately 1 C ( 0 J ) . / 0 f t e ^ 0 * - ± smQot) e~^2 . (50) w + wo - "7/2 \ w0 / This formula is valid at t < 0[l/rj]. The appearance of the linear t term is a resonance effect. The resonance roughly contributes to hi{t) by the amount, rj t2 e~r)t x a smooth w integral which is cut off by a physical frequency scale. Thus, the width factor In initially increases with time until the time scale of order 1/rj. The width factor asymptotically behaves as *(w,*) «
/ii(t) = / 1 i(oo) + 0 [ e - ' * / 2 ] ,
(51) 2
/n(oo)«7^- + — TT—T + ^ T . (52) v J ' 2w0 wo e"»/ T - 1 3 w^ The asymptotic value of I n (oo) has the familiar zero point fluctuation of harmonic oscillator and in the last term the dominant finite temperature correction, valid for this Ohmic model at T
*£> + £ - ( * * - * < ? > )"•<>.
(53)
Moreover, the final tunneling probability P(gs , oo) has a finite value, and typically is very small for a large potential barrier. For instance, for the asymmetric wine bottle potential shortly discussed,
p
1
/
W0
<*"°° > * W ^
eo _ 8 v h / u o%
(54)
with V/i the barrier height much smaller than wo. This poses again a curious question; it appears that decay of a prepared metastable state localized in the potential well is never completed. This simple picture is however valid only when one ignores anharmonic terms in the tunneling potential, but they must be there in order to give any realistic tunneling potential. The most important in the following discussion is
210
effect of anharmonic terms in the equation for the fluctuation Z{UJ , t). Presence of anharmonic terms gives a non-trivial periodicity in the coefficient function for (27), assuming a small friction r\ <^i OJQ. c!
The homogeneous part of the Z(UJ ,t) solution which might exhibit the well known parametric resonance 15 is closely related to the behavior for our inhomogeneous z(ui ,t) solution. It is then important to check whether the relevant parameter in the periodic coefficient function f i j-r 1 . falls in the instability or the stability band. As is shown in 16 , unbounded exponential growth of v ^ n does not take place. On the other hand, the power-law growth is observed in numerical computation. Moreover, we find that our z(u ,t) solution belongs to the boundary between stability and instability bands. At the resonance frequency the enhancement factor due to the boundary effect is much larger than what one might expect from the harmonic case (50). We shall interpret this phenomenon as influenced in a subtle way by the parametric resonance, although it is not the parametric resonance itself. It is best to discuss the resonance enhanced tunneling mechanism in concrete examples. We take the asymmetric wine bottle potential, which is described in the well and its vicinity region by V(q) * \{q2 - 2qBqf
.
(55)
The curvature parameters at two externa of q — 0 and q — qs are <X>Q = 2\qB , u% = Xq% , and the barrier height seen from the bottom of the well is Vh, = jq% = Wggg/8. The classical q^ , and the fluctuation z(u ,t) equations in the Ohmic approximation are written using rescaled variables, V = 9ci I IB and r = w0 t/2, v"+y(y-l)(v-2) 2
z"+[4-6(y-^y
)\
+ —v' = 0,, z+ ^
(56) ^
-
^
e
1
^
,
(57)
where ' = d/dr. For a small friction one has approximate forms of solution in terms of the Jacobi's elliptic function;
to- .,« = i + ^-V^ p^\t)
(^7^
+[
-7==i_M)
= 2y/2eVhsxx ( ^ 1 + yfe{r + const),kJ en ( \J 1 + ^ ( r + const), k J
211
1
*
u I 2^
These formulas are valid for wo , 2wo , • • • n&o i' • • > where
u0 = ^J^7e(
, t
Ei
f
,
There are resonances at
dU
V.
(58)
We found so far that these explicit solutions are not very illuminating, and numerically integrated the coupled q^' and z(u, t) equations. In the u) integral (23) for the width factor In the largest contribution is found to come from the fundamental resonance at to = u>o, then contribution from higher harmonics at n CJQ follows. Thus, phenomenon of a non-linear resonance occurs. At a time of 0[1/T?] the width factor In becomes maximal at its value much larger than in the harmonic case. The decrease observed at late times is due to the friction; we explicitly checked that for the zero friction, the fluctuation \z(u> ,t)/c(co)\2 increases in time without a bound, with an averaged time power close to 4 at the resonance. Note that even if the effect of the friction is turned off, there exists an important environment effect here; the environment interaction drives the non-linear resonance oscillation. We refer to our paper 16 for detailed numerical results. We numerically checked 18 the behavior of the most important part given by the product of two competing exponential factors, A = exp
tanh
/3u0 pj + ul q\ LO0
x exp
Zlll
the one for the initial state and the other for the kernel factor in the probability rate. Remarkably, the largest contribution comes, not from the dominant initial component near the zero point energy, rather from the initially suppressed excited component. The first exponent in (59) is in proportion to Ei, while the second one goes roughly like E~2, hence a maximum may appear somewhere away from the lowest energy of Ei = LOQ/2. In the example of rj/ujQ = 0.0025 the maximum product factor is of order 1 0 - 3 at Ei ss 4 x wo/2, 6 orders of magnitudes larger than what one expects from the lowest energy state and also the asymptotic value of order 10 - 3 6 . A large value of the product factor of order unity suggests an interesting possibility of a rapid and violent termination of the tunneling. The reason why one observes enhanced tunneling at resonant frequencies of u) = n WQ is as follows. The semiclassical q—motion in the left potential
212
well has a periodicity 2-K/QQ if one neglects the friction. The environment oscillators act as stochastic fluctuation to this motion in such a way that the effective potential including one environment oscillator, V(q) + qc{u) ( Qi(u) cos{ut) + - ^
sin(wt) j ,
(60)
changes the potential barrier periodically. When the q—particle hits against the potential wall, the potential barrier may become smallest, hence the tunneling rate maximally enhanced, if one of environment oscillators has a period exactly equal to that of the classical motion, u = nuiQ. This is precisely the condition of the non-linear resonance we have been discussing. The resonance enhanced tunneling thus envisaged seems to have little connection to the stochastic resonance 17 much discussed in the literature. In summary, we gave a new mechanism of resonance enhanced tunneling, using the real-time semiclassical formalism. Our approach suggests a new time scale of order I/77, the inverse friction, for completion of the first order phase transition. Evidently much has to be done to apply the idea here to realistic problems. I wish to thank my collaborator, Sh. Matsumoto who shared most of the results presented here. References 1. For a review, A.G. Cohen, D.B. Kaplan, and A.E. Nelson, Annu. Rev. Nucl. Part. Sci. 43, 27(1993). 2. Sh. Matsumoto and M. Yoshimura, "Quantum tunneling in thermal medium", hep-ph/0008025. 3. Sh. Matsumoto and M. Yoshimura, "Dynamics of barrier penetration in thermal medium: exact result for inverted harmonic oscillator", hepph/0006019, and Phys. Rev. A in press. 4. A. Guth, Phys. Rev. D23, 347(1981); K. Sato, Mon. Not. R. Astr. Soc.195, 467(1981). 5. For a review, P. Hanggi, P. Talkner, and M. Borkovec, Rev. Mod. Phys62, 251(1990). 6. S. Coleman, Phys. Rev. D15, 2929(1977); C.G. Callan and S. Coleman, Phys. Rev. D16, 1762(1977); J.S. Langer, Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 4 1 , 108(1967);
213
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12.
13. 14.
15.
16. 17.
M.B. Voloshin, I.Yu. Kobzarev, and L.B. Okun, Sov. J. Nucl. Phys. ,20, 644. A.O. Caldeira and A.J. Leggett, Ann. Phys. (JV.Y.) 149, 374(1983). H. Grabert, P. Schramm, and G-L. Ingold, Phys. Rep. 168, 115(1988). R.P. Feynman and F.L. Vernon, Ann. Phys. (JV.Y.) 24, 118(1963). I. Joichi, Sh. Matsumoto and M. Yoshimura, Phys. Rev. A57, 798(1998); Prog. Theor. Phys. 98, 9(1997); Phys. Rev. D58, 043507-17(1998). Sh. Matsumoto and M. Yoshimura, Phys. Rev. D61, 123508(2000), and hep-ph/991039; Phys. Rev. D61, 123509(2000), and and hepph/9910425. A. Singh and M. Srednicki, Phys. Rev. D61, 023509(2000); M. Srednicki, Phys. Rev. D62, 023505(2000); E. Braaten and Y. Jia, hep-ph/0003135; P. Bucci and M. Pietroni, hep-ph/0009075. G.W. Ford, J.T. Lewis, and R.F. O'Connell, Phys. Rev. A37, 4419(1988). V. Ambegaokar, Ber. Bunsenges. Phys. Chem. 95, 400(1991); I. Joichi, Sh. Matsumoto, and M. Yoshimura, Phys. Rev. A57, 798(1998), and references therein. L. Landau and E. Lifschitz, Mechanics (Pergamon, Oxford, 1960), p80; M. Yoshimura, Prog. Theor. Phys. 94, 873(1995); H. Fujisaki, K. Kumekawa, M. Yamaguchi, and M. Yoshimura, Phys. Rev. D53, 6805(1996); L. Koffman, A. Linde and A. Starobinsky, Phys. Rev. D56, 3258(1997). Sh. Matsumoto and M. Yoshimura, "Resonance Enhanced Tunneling", hep-ph/0009230, and Phys. Lett. B in press. L. Gammaitoni, P. Hanggi, P. Jung, and F. Marchesoni, Rev.Mod.Phys70, 223(1998).
T H E COSMOLOGICAL C O N S T A N T A N D T H E B R A N E W O R L D SCENARIO HANS P E T E R NILLES Physikalische
Institut,
Universitat E-mail:
Bonn, Nussallee 12, D-53115 nilles@th,physik.uni-bonn.de
Bonn,
Germany
Although the cosmological constant has primarily cosmological consequences, its smallness poses one of the basic problems in particle physics. Various attempts have been made to explain this mystery, but no satisfactory solution has been found yet. The appearance of extra dimensions in the framework of brane world systems seems to provide some new ideas to address this problem form a different point of view. We shall discuss some of these new approaches and see whether or not they lead to an improvement of the situation. We shall conclude that we are still far from a solution of the problem.
1
Introduction
We know that the cosmological constant is much smaller than one would naively expect. This led to the belief that a natural approach to this problem would be a mechanism that explains a vanishing value of this vacuum energy. While cosmological observations 1 ' 2 seem to be consistent with a nonzero value of the cosmological constant, still the small value obtained lacks a satisfactory explanation other than just being the result of a mere fine-tuning of the parameters. Recently new theoretical ideas in extra dimensions have been put forward to attack this problem. In the present talk I shall elaborate on work done in collaboration with Stefan Forste, Zygmunt Lalak and Stephane Lavignac 3 ' 4 ' 5 , where the problem of fine-tuning has been analyzed in the framework of models with extra dimensions that have attracted some attention recently. One of the most outstanding open problems in quantum field theory is it to find an explanation for the stability of the observed value of the cosmological constant in the presence of radiative corrections. As we will see below (and as has been discussed in several review articles 6 ' 7 ' 8 ) a simple quantum field theoretic estimate provides naturally a cosmological constant which is at least 60 orders of magnitude to large. Quantum fluctuations create a vacuum energy which in turn curves the space much stronger than it is observed. Hence, the classical vacuum energy needs to be adjusted in a very accurate way in order to cancel the contributions from quantum effects. This would require a fine-tuning of the fundamental parameters of the theory to an accuracy of at least 60 digits. From the theoretical point of view we consider this 214
215
as a rather unsatisfactory situation and would like to analyze alternatives leading to the observed cosmological constant in a more natural way. In this talk we will focus on brane world scenarios and how they might modify the above mentioned problem. In brane worlds the observed matter is confined to live on a hypersurface of some higher dimensional space, whereas gravity and possibly also some other fields can propagate in all dimensions. This may give some alternative point of view concerning the cosmological constant since the vacuum energy generated by quantum fluctuations of fields living on the brane may not curve the brane itself but instead the space transverse to it. The idea of brane worlds dates back to 9 ' 1 0 > n . A concrete realization can be found in the context of string theory where matter is naturally confined to live on D-branes 12 or orbifold fixed planes 13 . More recently there has been renewed interest in addressing the problem of the cosmological constant within brane worlds, for an (incomplete) list of references see [14-42] and references therein/thereof. The talk will be organized as follows. First, we will recall the cosmological constant problem as it appears in ordinary four dimensional quantum field theory. We shall then elaborate on some of the past (four-dimensional) attempts to solve the problem. Subsequently the general set-up of brane worlds will be presented. Particular emphasis will be put on a consistency condition (sometimes also called a sum rule) for warped compactifications that has been overlooked in various attempts to address the problem of the cosmological constant and which is a crucial tool to understand the issue of fine-tunings in the brane world scenario. Then we will study how fine-tunings appear in order to achieve a vanishing cosmological constant in the Randall Sundrum model 14>15. We shall argue that a similar fine-tuning is needed in the set-up presented in 21 ' 22 once the singularity is resolved. Finally, we elaborate on the issue of the existence of nearby curved solutions and we will argue that it is this questions that has to be addressed if one wants to understand the small value of the cosmological constant. 2
The problem of the cosmological constant
The observational bound on the cosmological constant is AM|,; < 1CT120
(MPI)4 19
(1)
where MPt is the Planck mass (of about 10 GeV) and the formula has been written in such a way that the quantity appearing on the left hand side corresponds to the vacuum energy density. This is a very small quantity once one admits the possiblilty of the Planck scale as the fundamantal scale of
216
physics. Even in the particle physics standard model of weak, strong and electromagnetic interactions one would expect a tree level contribution to the vacuum energy of order of several hundred GeV taking into account the scalar potential that leads to electroweak symmetry breaking. Moreover, in quantum field theory we expect additional contributions from perturbative corrections, e.g. at one loop \M2Pl = A0Af£ + (UV-cutoff)4 Str (1)
(2)
in addition to Ao the bare (tree level) value of the cosmological constant which can in principle be chosen by hand. The supertrace in (2) is to be taken over degrees of freedom which are light compared to the scale set by the UV-cutoff. Comparison of (1) with (2) shows that one needs to fine-tune 120 digits in Ao Mj,; such that it cancels the one-loop contributions with the necessary accuracy. Supersymmetry could ease this problem of radiative corrections (for a review see 43 ). If one believes that the world is supersymmetric above the TeV scale one would still need to adjust 60 digits. Instead of adjusting input parameters of the theory to such a high accuracy in order to achieve agreement with observations one would prefer to get (1) as a prediction or at least as a natural result of the theory (in which, for example, only a few digits need to be tuned, if at all). This is the situation within the framework of four-dimensional quantum field theories. The above discussion might be modified in a brane world setup which we will discuss in this lecture. We should however mention already at this point that "modification" does not necessarily imply an improvement of the situation. Before we get into this discussion let us first recall some attempts to solve the problem in the four-dimensional framework. 3
Some attempts to solve the problem
A starting point for a natural solution would be a symmetry that forbids a cosmological constant. In fact, symmetries that could achieve this do exist: e.g. supersymmetry and conformal symmetry. Unfortunately these symmetries are badly broken in nature at a level of at least a few hundred GeV and therefore the problem remains. Still one might think that the presence of such a symmetry would be a first step in the right direction. A second possible solution could be a dynamical mechanism to relax the cosmological constant. Such a mechanism could be quite similar to the axion mechanism that relaxes the value of the 9 parameter in quantum chromodynamics (QCD). This mechanism needs a new ingredient, a propagating field that adjusts is vacuum expectation value dynamically. For a review of these
217
questions see 6 ' 4 4 . In string theory the so-called "sliding dilaton" could play this role as has been argued in 45>46. In all these cases, however, one would then expect the existence of an extremely light scalar degree of freedom which would lead to new fifth force that probably should not have escaped our detection. Other attempts to understand the value of the vacuum energy have used the anthropic principle in one of its various forms. For a review see 6 . Given the present situation it is fair to say that we do not have yet a satisfactory solution of the problem of the cosmological constant, at least in the framework of four-dimensional string and quantum field theories. Could this be better in a higher dimensional world? For an alternative way to address the problem in less than four space-time dimensions see 7 . We should keep in mind, however, that the problem of the cosmological constant is just a problem of fine-tuning the parameters of the theory in a very special way. We now want to see whether this can be avoided in a higher dimensional set-up. 4
Extra dimensions as a new hope
In the so-called "brane world scenario" matter fields (quarks and leptons, gauge bosons, Higgs bosons) are supposed to be confined to live on a hyper surface (the brane) in a higher dimensional space, whereas gravity and possibly also some additional fields can propagate also in directions transverse to the brane. Such a picture of the universe is motivated by recent developments in (open) string theory 12 and heterotic M-theory 13>47. Since gravitational interactions are much weaker than the other known interactions, the size of the additional dimension is much less constrained by observations than in usual compactifications. In fact, the size of the additional dimensions might be directly correlated to the strength of four-dimensional gravitational interactions 48 . Looking for example on product compactifications of type I string theory it has been noted that it is possible to push the string scale down to the TeV range when one allows at least two of the compactified dimensions to be "extra large" (i.e. up to a /j.m)53. A first look at the question of the cosmological constant does not look very promising. The naive expectation would be that the cosmological constant in the extra (bulk) dimensions As and that on the brane, the brane tension T, should vanish separately. We would then essentially have the same situation as in the four-dimensional case, with the additional problem to explain why also A B has to vanish. The known mechanism of a sliding field 4 5 ' 4 6 can be carried over to this case 49>50>5i,52^ ^ut ^oes n o t g^j a n y n e w ^ ^ Q n ^e
218
question of the cosmological constant. A closer inspection of the situation reveals the novel possibility to have a flat brane even in the presence of a nonzero tension T. For a consistent picture, however, here one also has to require a non-zero bulk cosmological constant AB that compensates the vacuum energy (tension) of the brane. In some way this corresponds to a picture where the vacuum energy of the brane does not lead to a curvature on the brane itself, but curves transverse space and leaves the brane flat. Curvature of the brane can flow off to the bulk, a mechanism that is sometimes called "self-tuning". For such a mechanism to appear we need to consider so-called warped compactifications where brane and transverse space are not just a direct product. We shall see that in this case we can have flat branes embedded in higher dimensional anti de Sitter space, provided certain consistency conditions have been fulfilled. In the following we will be considering the special case that the brane is 1+3 dimensional and we have one additional direction called y. Then the ansatz for the five dimensional metric is in general (M,N = 0 , . . . , 4 and H, v - 0 , . . . 3) ds2 = GMNdxMdxN
= e2A^g^dx»dx"
+ dy2
(3)
where the brane will be localized at some y. We split (4)
into a vacuum value g^v and fluctuations around it h^. For the vacuum value we will be interested in maximally symmetric spaces, i.e. Minkowski space (M 4 ), de Sitter space (dS4), or anti de Sitter space (adS4). In particular, we chose coordinates such that g
=
' diag (-1,1,1,1) J diag ( - 1 , e2VKt,e2VKt,e2VKt^j 2 1
2 x
2 x
diag Ue ^ *,e ^ *,e ^ *,l)
for: M 4 for: dS4
(5)
for: adS4
That means we are looking for 5d spaces which are foliated with maximally symmetric four dimensional slices. Throughout this talk, the five dimensional action will be of the form
R-\
(dcpf - V (
Vi) • (6)
We allow for situations where apart from the graviton also a scalar <j> propagates in the bulk. The positions of the branes involved are at «/;. With lower
219
case g we denote the induced metric on the brane which for our ansatz is simply 9nv — GMNS^S^
.
(7)
The corresponding equations of motion read RMN - -ZGMNR
- -zdM
+^E^fe-^^tt = 0 (8) i
dv*^G+ I^M (V^GGMNd <j>) -^-g^Hv-Vi) d4> N
d*fi {>) = 0. (9)
After integrating over the fifth coordinate in (6) one obtains a four dimensional effective theory. In particular, the gravity part will be of the form S^grav = M2Pl f
tfx^g
(R - A) ,
(10)
where R is the 4d scalar curvature computed from g. The effective Planck mass is Mpt — J dye2A, (note that we put the five dimensional Planck mass to one). Now, for consistency the ansatz (5) should be a stationary point of (10). This leads to the requirement A = 6A. Finally, the on-shell values of the 4d effective action should be equal to the 5-dimensional one. This results in the consistency condition 4 (see also 24 ), j^~
x
= 6A^,.
(ID
It has to be fulfilled for all consistent solutions of the Einstein equations, independently whether the branes are flat or curved. Especially for foliations with Poincare invariant slices the vacuum energy A should vanish. Curved solutions would require a corresponding nonzero value of A. It is this adjustment of the parameters that replaces the traditional four-dimensional fine-tuning in the brane world picture. 5
A first example: the Randall-Sundrum model
As a warm-up example for a warped compactification we want to study the model presented in 1 4 . There is no bulk scalar in that model. Therefore, we put
, f1=T1
, f2=T2,
(12)
220
where AB, T\ and T2 are constants. There will be two branes: one at y — 0 and a second one at y = y0. Denoting with a prime a derivative with respect to y the yy-component of the Einstein equation gives HA')2
= -^f-
(13)
Following 14 we are looking for solutions being symmetric under y -» —y and periodic under y —> y + 2y0. The solution to (13) is
A
=- w 7 - ¥ >
(i4)
where \y\ denotes the familiar modulus function for — yo < y < j/o a n d the periodic continuation if y is outside that interval. The remaining equation to be solved corresponds to the \w components of the Einstein equation, 3A" = -^6(y)-^S(y-Vo).
(15)
This equation is solved automatically by (14) as long as y is neither 0 nor j/oIntegrating equation (15) from —e to e, relates the brane tension T\ to the bulk cosmological constant A B , 7\ = V - 2 4 A B .
(16)
T2 = - V - 2 4 A B .
(17)
Integrating around yo gives
These relations arise due to A = 0 in the ansatz and can be viewed as finetuning conditions for the effective cosmological constant (A in (10)) 16 . Indeed, one finds that the consistency condition (11) is satisfied only when (14) together with both fine-tuning conditions (16) and (17) are imposed. Since the brane tension T, corresponds to the vacuum energy of matter living in the corresponding brane, the amount of fine-tuning contained in (16), (17) is of the same order as needed in ordinary 4d quantum field theory discussed in the beginning of this talk. Next we have to address the important question: What happens if the fine-tunings do not hold? Does this necessarily lead to disaster or do solutions exist also in this case. Indeed it has been shown in 16 that in that case solutions exist, however with A ^ 0. This closes the argument of interpreting conditions (16) and (17) as fine-tunings of the cosmological constant. It also emphasizes the new problem with the adjustment of the cosmological constant on the brane: how to select the flat solution instead of these "nearby" curved solutions that are continuously connected in parameter (moduli) space.
221
6
Self-Tuning
Thus the generic higher dimensional set-up considers nonzero values of brane tensions and the bulk cosmological constant. A fine tuning is needed to arrive at a flat brane with vanishing cosmological constant. Recently an attempt has been made to study the situation with As = 0. We will focus on a " solution" discussed in 21,22 (solution II of the second reference). In this model there is a bulk scalar without a bulk potential V^)=0.
(18)
In addition we put one brane at y = 0, and a bulk scalar with a very specific coupling to the brane via /o (
, with: b = T | .
(19)
Observe that this model already assumes fine-tuned values AB and b which would have to be explained. We now make the same warped ansatz (3) as before. If again we assume A = 0 in (5), the bulk equations seem to be solved by A' = ±±
y+c
•<»>-{ ±!i ifo s* lJV-C
+ d for: y < 0 + d for: y > 0 '
. K
. '
where d and c are integration constants (they would correspond to the vacuum expectation values of moduli fields in an effective low energy description). Observe that with the logarithm appearing in (20) we are no longer dealing with an exponential warp factor as (3) would suggest. As a result of this we have to worry about possible singularities in the solution under consideration. We shall come back to this point in a moment. Finally, by integrating the equations of motion around y = 0 one obtains the matching condition T0 = 4e±'d.
(21)
This means that the matching condition results in an adjustment of an integration constant rather than a model parameter (like in the previously discussed example). So, there seems to be no fine-tuning involved even though we required A = 0. As long as one can ensure that contributions to the vacuum energy on the brane couple universely to the bulk scalar as given in (19) it looks as if one can adjust the vev of a modulus such that Poincare invariance on the brane is not broken. In fact it seems that a miracle has appeared: "solution" (20) is apparently independent of the brane tension To- So if one would add something to To on the brane, the solution does not change. This would also solve the problem of
222
potential contributions to the brane tension in perturbation theory, as they can be absorbed in T 0 . Is this so-called self-tuning of the vacuum energy a solution to the problem of the cosmological constant? Unfortunately not, since there are some subtleties as we shall discuss now. We first notice that the uniform coupling of the bulk scalar to any contribution to the vacuum energy on the brane may be problematic due to scaling anomalies in the theory living on the brane 4 . Apart from that one would have to worry about the correct strength of gravitational interactions. In order to be in a agreement with four dimensional gravity, the five dimensional gravitational wave equation should have normalizable zero modes in the given background. In other words this means that the effective four dimensional Planck mass should be finite. For the model considered with a single brane at y = 0 and c < 0 this implies that J^° dye2A^ should be finite. However, plugging in the solution (20) one finds that this is not satisfied. Following 21 2 2 ' ' this could be solved by choosing c > 0 and simultaneously cut off the y integration at the singularities at \y\ = | c . This prescription then yields a finite four dimensional Planck mass. With this choice of parameters, however, we are approaching disaster. Checking the consistency condition (11) one finds that it is not satisfied anymore. The explanation for this is simple - the equation of motions are not satisfied at the singularities, and hence for c > 0 (20) is not a solution to the equations of motion. It is the singularities that have created the miracle mentioned above. Of course, it has been often observed that singularities appear in an effective low energy prescription, and that at those points new effects (such as massless particles) appear as a result of an underlying theory to which the effective description breaks down at this point. A celebrated example is N = 2 supersymmetric Yang-Mills theory where singularities in the moduli space are due to monopoles or dyons becoming massless at this point 54 . We might then hope that a similar mechanism (e.g. coming from string theory) may save the solution with c > 0 and provide a solution to the problem of the cosmological constant. It should be clear by now, that this new physics at the singularity would be the solution of the cosmological constant problem, if such a solution does exist at all. In the following, we will investigate such a mechanism and see whether it is connected to a potential fine-tuning of the parameters. Does the new physics at the singularity have to know about the actual value of the tension of the brane at y = 0 or does it lead to a relaxation of the cosmological constant independent of T0? To start this discussion, we first modify the theory in such a way that
223
we obtain a consistent solution in which the equations of motion are satisfied everywhere. This can, for example, be done by adding two more branes, situated at \y\ = | c to the setup. We then choose the coupling of the bulk scalar to these branes as follows, f±(
(22)
where the ± index refers to the brane at y = ±§c. These two additional source terms in the action lead to two more matching conditions whose solution is 6 + = 6 _ = 6 = T^
and
T+ = T_ = ~T0.
(23)
It is obvious that here a third fine tuning (apart from A# = 0 and b = = F | ) has to be performed. The amount of fine-tuning implied by these conditions is again determined by the deviation of the vacuum energy on the brane from the observed value. Hence, the situation has worsened with respect to the question of fine-tuning. However, we have learned that the consistency condition (11) is a very important tool to analyze the question of the cosmological constant. A short calculation shows that (23) is essential for the consistency condition (11) to be satisfied. 7
Nearby curved solutions
So far, we focused on a very specific model and there remains the question whether this situation is generic. For the given set of parameters we should then scan the available moduli space of solutions parametrized by the values of the bulk cosmological constant A#, the brane tensions T and the various couplings like 6 of the scalars to the brane. It is quite easy to see that the above observation applies in general (for various explicit examples see 4 ) . The reason is the fact that the amount of energy carried away from the brane by the bulk scalar needs to be absorbed somewhere else. In principle, it could flow off to infinity, but, as we have seen explicitely in the last chapter, this cannot happen since in this case we would not be able it to localize gravity on the brane. In fact, it has been shown in 27 that localization of gravity is possible only if there is either a fine-tuning between bulk and brane parameters as observed in the original Randall-Sundrum model or there are naked singularities as in the models of 21>22. For the latter case the consistency condition (11) requires the exactly fine tuned amount of energy from the singularity to match the contribution from the branes. We have seen this explicitly when studying a simple way of "resolving" the singularities by adding new branes with the appropriate tension. However, any other resolution of the singularities will lead to the same conclusions.
224
So far we have concentrated on solutions that lead to flat branes A = 0. A general discussion, however, should also address the question whether the moduli space of solutions also contains "nearby" curved solutions that are continuously connected to the flat solutions discussed so far. If they exist, the solution of the cosmological constant problem would need to supply arguments why the flat solutions are favoured over these "nearby" curved solutions. A first step in this direction would be to study the response of the system once the fine-tuning (which appears after the singularities are somehow resolved) is relaxed. In various cases it has been shown that there exist also solutions with A ^ 0 23 . Moreover, for any fixed value of A they fulfill the consistency condition (11) for that value of A 4 . This means, that relaxing the fine-tuning to zero cosmological constant will lead to a consistent (curved) nearby solution with a non-vanishing effective cosmological constant A. It has been argued in the literature that for the specific model which we discussed above (6 = ± | ) there do not exist any nearby curved solutions 21>23. This would be a rather remarkable result as it would imply that in some way the solution with A = 0 would be unique and potentially stable. Observe that the option of a smooth deformation of b away from |6| = | is not possible since the |6| ^ | solutions are not smoothly connected to the former ones 22 . The above argumention, however, is only true under the asumption that the bulk cosmological constant A# (or the bulk scalar potential) vanishes exactly. The situation in which the scalar field received a nontrivial bulk potential has been studied in 4 with the result that depending on the value of the bulk potential at zero the effective cosmological constant is constrained to a certain non-zero value. Thus also the flat solution with b = ± | is continuously connected to a nearby curved solution with A ^ 0 and nonvanishing bulk potential. In all the known cases we thus see that the moduli space does not contain isolated flat solutions. This is another way of stating the fact that the problem of the cosmological constant has not been solved. So far we have concentrated on the discussion of classical solutions. As we have argued before there is a second aspect of the cosmological constant problem once we consider quantum corrections as well. Generically we would asume that radiative corrections would destroy any fine-tuning of the classical theory if not forbidden by a symmetry. Supersymmetry is an example, but since it is broken in nature at the TeV scale it is not sufficient to stabilize the vacuum energy to the degree of say 1 0 - 3 eV. The special solution \b\ = | enjoys an additional symmetry, a variant of scale invariance. This symmetry, however, has a quantum anomaly and therefore cannot survive in the full quantum theory. A way out would be to postulate a model with unbroken scale (or conformal) invariance, i.e. a finite theory with vanishing /9-function.
225
But as in the case of supersymmetry we know that this symmetry cannot be valid far below the TeV region and thus cannot be relevant for the stability of the cosmological constant. 8
Outlook
From the above discussion it is clear that the brane world scenario gives a new view on the problem of the cosmological constant. However, the present discussion has not provided a satisfactory solution, since in all the known cases a fine-tuning is needed to achieve agreement with observations. In fact this fine-tuning is of the same order of magnitude as the one needed in ordinary four dimensional field theory. More work needs to be done to clarify the situation. One direction would be to analyze in detail the possible implications of broken (bulk and brane) supersymmetry in the general set-up. In the fourdimensional case we need broken supersymmetry MSUSY to be somewhere in the TeV region and also the value of the cosmological constant is essentially determined by MSUSY • In the brane world scenario one could hope to separate these scales. Some gymnastics in numerology would suggest Mg USY /Mpi ailc k to be relevant for the (small but nonzero) size of the cosmological constant. Unfortunately we have not yet found a satisfactory model where such a relation is realized and the problem of the size of the cosmological constant still has to wait for a solution.
Acknowledgements It is a pleasure to thank Stefan Forste, Zygmunt Lalak and Stephane Lavignac for collaboration on the subjects presented in this talk. The help of Stefan Forste in the preparation of the present manuscript is highly appreciated. This work is supported by the European Commission RTN programs HPRNCT-2000-00131, 00148 and 00152. References 1. S. Perlmutter et al. [Supernova Cosmology Project Collaboration], "Measurements of Omega and Lambda from 42 High-Redshift Supernovae," Astrophys. J. 517, 565 (1999) [astro-ph/9812133]. 2. P. M. Garnavich et al., "Constraints on Cosmological Models from Hubble Space Telescope Observations of High-z Supernovae," Astrophys. J. 493, L53 (1998) [astro-ph/9710123]. 3. S. Forste, Z. Lalak, S. Lavignac and H. P. Nilles, "A comment on self-
226
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
17.
18. 19. 20. 21.
tuning and vanishing cosmological constant in the brane world," Phys. Lett. B481 (2000) 360 [hep-th/0002164]. S. Forste, Z. Lalak, S. Lavignac and H. P. Nilles, "The cosmological constant problem from a brane-world perspective," JHEP 0009 (2000) 034 [hep-th/0006139]. S. Forste, "Fine-tuning of the cosmological constant in brane worlds," hep-th/0012029. S. Weinberg, "The Cosmological Constant Problem," Rev. Mod. Phys. 61 (1989) 1. E. Witten, "The cosmological constant from the viewpoint of string theory," hep-ph/0002297. P. Binetruy, "Cosmological constant vs. quintessence," hep-ph/0005037. V. A. Rubakov and M. E. Shaposhnikov, "Extra Space-Time Dimensions: Towards A Solution To The Cosmological Constant Problem," Phys. Lett. B125 (1983) 139. V. A. Rubakov and M. E. Shaposhnikov, "Do We Live Inside A Domain Wall?," Phys. Lett. B125 (1983) 136. K. Akama, "An early proposal of 'brane world'," Lect. Notes Phys. 176 (1982) 267 [hep-th/0001113]. J. Polchinski, "Dirichlet-Branes and Ramond-Ramond Charges," Phys. Rev. Lett. 75 (1995) 4724 [hep-th/9510017]. P. Horava and E. Witten, "Heterotic and type I string dynamics from eleven dimensions," Nucl. Phys. B460 (1996) 506 [hep-th/9510209]. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, "A large mass hierarchy from a small extra dimension," Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 3370 [hep-ph/9905221]. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, "An alternative to compactification," Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 4690 [hep-th/9906064]. O. DeWolfe, D. Z. Freedman, S. S. Gubser and A. Karch, "Modeling the fifth dimension with scalars and gravity," Phys. Rev. D62 (2000) 046008 [hep-th/9909134]. C. P. Burgess, R. C. Myers and F. Quevedo, "A naturally small cosmological constant on the brane?," Phys. Lett. B495, 384 (2000) [hepth/9911164]. A. Kehagias and E. Kiritsis, "Mirage cosmology," JHEP 9911 (1999) 022 [hep-th/9910174]. E. Verlinde and H. Verlinde, "RG-flow, gravity and the cosmological constant," JHEP 0005 (2000) 034 [hep-th/9912018]. C. Schmidhuber, "AdS(5) and the 4d cosmological constant," Nucl. Phys. B580 (2000) 140 [hep-th/9912156]. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, N. Kaloper and R. Sundrum, "A small
227
22.
23. 24. 25.
26. 27.
28.
29. 30. 31.
32. 33. 34.
35. 36. 37.
cosmological constant from a large extra dimension," Phys. Lett. B480 (2000) 193 [hep-th/0001197]. S. Kachru, M. Schulz and E. Silverstein, "Self-tuning flat domain walls in 5d gravity and string theory," Phys. Rev. D62 (2000) 045021 [hepth/0001206]. S. Kachru, M. Schulz and E. Silverstein, "Bounds on curved domain walls in 5d gravity," Phys. Rev. D62 (2000) 085003 [hep-th/0002121]. U. Ellwanger, "Constraints on a brane-world from the vanishing of the cosmological constant," Phys. Lett. B473 (2000) 233 [hep-th/9909103]. J. Chen, M. A. Luty and E. Ponton, "A critical cosmological constant from millimeter extra dimensions," JHEP 0009 (2000) 012 [hepth/0003067]. S. P. de Alwis, A. T. Flournoy and N. Irges, "Brane worlds, the cosmological constant and string theory," hep-th/0004125. C. Csaki, J. Erlich, C. Grojean and T. Hollowood, "General properties of the self-tuning domain wall approach to the cosmological constant problem," Nucl. Phys. B584 (2000) 359 [hep-th/0004133]. E. Dudas and J. Mourad, "Brane solutions in strings with broken supersymmetry and dilaton tadpoles," Phys. Lett. B486 (2000) 172 [hepth/0004165]. G. T. Horowitz, I. Low and A. Zee, "Self-tuning in an outgoing brane wave model," Phys. Rev. D62 (2000) 086005 [hep-th/0004206]. B. Grinstein, D. R. Nolte and W. Skiba, "Adding matter to Poincare invariant branes," Phys. Rev. D62 (2000) 086006 [hep-th/0005001]. V. Barger, T. Han, T. Li, J. D. Lykken and D. Marfatia, "Cosmology and hierarchy in stabilized warped brane models," Phys. Lett. B488 (2000) 97 [hep-ph/0006275]. P. Mayr, "Stringy world branes and exponential hierarchies," JHEP0011, 013 (2000) [hep-th/0006204]. A. Krause, "A small cosmological constant, grand unification and warped geometry," hep-th/0006226, hep-th/0007233. P. Binetruy, J. M. Cline and C. Grojean, "Dynamical instability of brane solutions with a self-tuning cosmological constant," Phys. Lett. B489 (2000) 403 [hep-th/0007029]. C. BarceloandM. Visser, "Moduli fields and brane tensions: Generalizing the junction conditions," gr-qc/0008008. Z. Kakushadze, "'Self-tuning' and conformality," Mod. Phys. Lett. A15 (2000) 1879 [hep-th/0009199]. S. Kalyana Rama, "Brane world scenario with m-form field: Stabilisation of radion modulus and self tuning solutions," hep-th/0010121.
228
38. A. Kehagias and K. Tamvakis, "A self-tuning solution of the cosmological constant problem," hep-th/0011006. 39. J. E. Kim, B. Kyae and H. M. Lee, "A model for self-tuning the cosmological constant," hep-th/0011118. 40. S. B. Giddings and E. Katz, "Effective theories and black hole production in warped compactifications," hep-th/0009176. 41. G. Gibbons, R. Kallosh and A. Linde, "Brane world sum rules," hepth/0011225. 42. R. Blumenhagen and A. Font, "Dilaton tadpoles, warped geometries and large extra dimensions for non-supersymmetric strings," hep-th/0011269. 43. H. P. Nilles, "Supersymmetry, Supergravity And Particle Physics," Phys. Rept. 110, 1 (1984). 44. H. P. Nilles, "1997 TASI Lectures on the low-energy limit of string and M-theory," hep-ph/0004064. 45. J. P. Derendinger, L. E. Ibanez and H. P. Nilles, "On The Low-Energy D = 4, N = l Supergravity Theory Extracted From The D = 10, N = l Superstring," Phys. Lett. B155, 65 (1985). 46. M. Dine, R. Rohm, N. Seiberg and E. Witten, "Gluino Condensation In Superstring Models," Phys. Lett. B156, 55 (1985). 47. P. Horava and E. Witten, "Eleven-Dimensional Supergravity on a Manifold with Boundary," Nucl. Phys. B475, 94 (1996) [hep-th/9603142]. 48. E. Witten, "Strong Coupling Expansion Of Calabi-Yau Compactification," Nucl. Phys. B471, 135 (1996) [hep-th/9602070]. 49. P. Horava, "Gluino condensation in strongly coupled heterotic string theory," Phys. Rev. D 54, 7561 (1996) [hep-th/9608019]. 50. H. P. Nilles, M. Olechowski and M. Yamaguchi, "Supersymmetry breaking and soft terms in M-theory," Phys. Lett. B415, 24 (1997) [hepth/9707143]. 51. H. P. Nilles, M. Olechowski and M. Yamaguchi, "Supersymmetry breakdown at a hidden wall," Nucl. Phys. B530, 43 (1998) [hep-th/9801030]. 52. A. Lukas, B. A. Ovrut and D. Waldram, "Gaugino condensation in Mtheoryon S**l/Z(2)," Phys. Rev. D 57, 7529 (1998) [hep-th/9711197]. 53. I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, "New dimensions at a millimeter to a Fermi and superstrings at a TeV," Phys. Lett. B436 (1998) 257 [hep-ph/9804398]. 54. N. Seiberg and E. Witten, "Electric - magnetic duality, monopole condensation, and confinement in N=2 supersymmetric Yang-Mills theory," Nucl. Phys. B426 (1994) 19 [hep-th/9407087].
DILUTING GRAVITY W I T H COMPACT H Y P E R B O L O I D S MARK TRODDEN Physics
Department,
Syracuse E-mail:
University, Syracuse NY [email protected]
13244-1130,
USA
I give a brief informal introduction to the idea and tests of large extra dimensions, focusing on the case in which the space-time manifold has a direct product structure. I then describe some attractive implementations in which the internal space comprises a compact hyperbolic manifold. This construction yields an exponential hierarchy between the usual Planck scale and the true fundamental scale of physics by tuning only 0 ( 1 ) coefficients, since the linear size of the internal space remains small. In addition, this allows an early universe cosmology with normal evolution up to substantial temperatures, and completely evades astrophysical constraints.
1
Some Background about Large Extra Dimensions
There are a number of talks in this conference about the idea of large extra dimensions. With this in mind I will begin with a brief overview of the general idea and of the constraints on it. 1.1
Motivations : the Hierarchy Problem
The hierarchy problem, for our purposes, is usually posed in the following way: Why is gravity so much weaker than the other forces? To make this concrete compare GN = M~{2 ~ 1(T 33 GeV" 2
(1)
GF = M^2 ~ 1(T 5 GeV" 2
(2)
with
Phrased in this way, the Planck mass Mp\ is considered to be the fundamental scale of physics and the puzzle is the comparative smallness of M\y, or the comparative strength of the electroweak force. The real problem here is not so much the fact that the two scales differ so drastically, but rather that such an arrangement is doomed to be ruined by radiative corrections in a generic quantum field theory. Thus, theoretical efforts have mostly focused on restoring the technical naturalness of this vast difference is scales via, for example, supersymmetry, in which the offending quadratic divergences are absent. 229
230
Given this suggestive phrasing, a logical alternative statement of the problem becomes clear. If we instead imagine that the fundamental scale of physics M* is close to the weak scale Mw, then the hierarchy problem becomes: Why is Mpi so much larger? When considering this possibility however, one must keep in mind some important facts about physics at these scales: • The Electroweak interactions have been tested up to energies E ~ Mw, or equivalently, down to scales d ~ Mwx = 10~ 16 cm • Gravity, in the form of Newton's law has been tested down to a scale d ~ 10 3 3 /M p l ~ 1cm Thus, we know that there are no quantum gravity effects up to energies E ~ Mw, since, for example, there is no evidence of energy lost to gravitons in e + e~ annihilations. Given these constraints, let us examine how it might be that the Planck mass is a comparatively huge derived quantity in a theory in which the weak scale is fundamental. The fundamental idea behind the new constructions is the following1,2. Imagine that space time has 3 + 1 + d dimensions, and that d of these are compact while the remaining 3 + 1 comprise the familiar space-time in which we appear to live. Now make the following two crucial assumptions: • Standard model particles are confined to the 3 + 1 dimensional submanifold. • Gravity is not confined, and therefore gravitons propagate in the bulk These assumptions will turn out to be crucial, since to obtain the necessary hierarchy we will require large volume extra dimensions, and these are ruled out by the precision tests mentioned above if the weak interactions can take place in the bulk. While such a structure may seem somewhat unnatural from the phenomenological viewpoint taken here, it is important to mention that the appropriate behavior occurs readily in some compactifications of string theory. In particular, in Hofava-Witten theory 3 , precisely this division of interactions occurs. The essential M-theoretic ingredient responsible for this is the existence of D-branes, non-perturbative extended objects, in the string spectrum 4 . Open strings must end on D-branes (with "D"irichlet boundary conditions on their endpoints), while the open strings are free to propagate through the whole larger space. Since the excitations of open strings correspond to standard model-like degrees of freedom, while the closed string
231
excitations describe the geometric (gravitational) degrees of freedom, the resulting structure is one with standard model fields confined to a D-brane, and gravity propagating in the full space. To be concrete, let us describe the original large extra dimension scenario. Imagine that the full space-time manifold is M3+1
x Td ,
(3)
3+1
where Ai describes a flat Minkowski or cosmological space which we observe, and Td is a d-dimensional torus of common linear size R describing the internal space. Consider how gravitational flux spreads out around a point mass m, as in figure 1.
Figure 1. Gravitational flux around a point mass in a direct product space with one extra dimension.
The gravitational acceleration experienced by a test particle at distance r from such a point mass obeys the following G (4+rf) 771 for r < R r2+d
G (4+d)» for r » i? (4) Rdr This is easy to understand in terms of Gauss' law : On small scales r <S R gravity is diluted by spreading out into all the dimensions, whereas on large scales r S> R gravity is smeared out over the internal space and can only spread into the 3 + 1 dimensional space. Now, since we understand gravity extremely well on large scales, we must identify G^G(4+d) d
R
^
M"=M2^Rd.
(5)
232
Thus, the observed Planck mass can be huge, even if the fundamental scale of physics is of order a TeV. All that is needed is that the volume of the extra dimensional space (here Rd) is large enough. In particular, for M* ~ 1 TeV, we require #~10¥-17cm.
(6)
For example, • If d = 1, we need R ~ 10 13 cm, which is obviously excluded by any number of large scale tests of gravity. • If d = 2, we need R ~ mm, a truly large extra dimension. So, in a picture with extra dimensions and standard model particles restricted to the brane, the hierarchy problem can be recast in the interesting guise of a mismatch of spatial scales, rather than one of energies. 1.2
Constraints
The constraints on such a possible structure for space-time and particle physics come from three main sources: the laboratory, astrophysics and cosmology. In the laboratory 0 , the relevant quantity is the amplitude for single graviton emission: (d+2) . (7) / M~ This allows one to write the dimensionless graviton emission rate for a process of energy AE as
7l~G(4+d)AE^,^)d+2
.
(8)
There are two important facts that we shall need from this expression. One is that the constraint becomes weaker the more extra dimensions there are, and the second is that the constraint is stronger for higher values of AE. As it turns out, collider constraints 6 are currently not the strongest ones faced by the large extra dimension picture. This can be seen, for example, by considering the process K —> TT+ graviton, for which the branching ratio is / Bi(K -»• irg) ~ I ^
\d+2 J ~ 1(T 12
"For a nice summary of laboratory constraints see
5
for
d=2.
(9)
233
graviton d
d
Figure 2. A feynman diagram for K —> ir+ graviton.
More important are constraints arising from astrophysics. The basic issue is that the Kaluza-Klein (KK) modes in the model are light MKK > -R -1 > 10~4eV, and numerous NKK - M^/Ml < 10 32 . Thus, although each KK mode is very weakly coupled, of order 1/Mpi, to standard model particles on the brane, there are so many of them that they can be copiously produced by energetic processes on the brane. Therefore, it is possible for astrophysical bodies to lose energy by emitting gravitons into the extra dimensions. The most important ways in which this can occur have been termed gravistrahlung, referring to the production of a KK graviton in heavy nucleon collisions, and the gravi-Primakojf process, in which a KK graviton is produced through a photon scattering from a heavy nucleus (see figure 3). As mentioned earlier,
graviton
graviton
,'WWWJ/VW
"Gravistrahlung"
"Gravi-Primakoff
Figure 3. Two processes through which astrophysical bodies can lose energy to KK gravitons.
the most energetic processes yield the tightest constraints, and so it is useful
234
to consider energy loss from the most energetic astrophysical event yet known, supernova 1987A (SN1987A). A careful analysis7 yields M* > 50 TeV
for d = 2
(10)
(and less important constraints on higher values of d). As is often the case in modern particle physics, some of the most important constraints on this structure arise from cosmological considerations. I will just mention two main issues here. As I have described, extra dimensions provide an alternative mechanism through which astrophysical bodies can cool. This remains true for the universe itself. In the standard cosmology, the universe cools adiabatically as the scale factor a(t) increases, with the temperature-time relationship (in the radiation-dominated era)
t
r^j
T2 = H a ' M*
a —
T
(11)
In the new picture, there is a competing evaporative cooling mechanism due to cosmic gravistrahlung, with temperature-time relationship f-p
rrd+3
f ~ je^
•
(12)
Since the standard cosmology is so successful as a description of the universe at temperatures below that of, for example, primordial nucleosynthesis, we require that the new cooling mechanism be sub-dominant at least at temperatures below that. To this end it has become customary to define the normalcy temperature Tt, to be that temperature below which evaporative cooling is negligible compared to the usual adiabatic mechanism. In the basic large extra dimension scenario that I am reviewing here, this temperature is T* ~ 10 MeV for d = 2 ~ 10 GeV for d = 6 (string theory) .
(13)
The second cosmological constraint arises from the possibility of gravitino overproduction. If the underlying theory is supersymmetric, one expects gravitinos to be thermally produced. If they are produced at temperature T, they have a lifetime Ml If M* is too small, these particles may over-close the universe or distort the 7-ray background. These constraints are most relevant for d = 2, in which
235
case they yield M* > O(TeV) > 110 TeV .
(15)
To summarize the combined constraints from the laboratory, astrophysics and cosmology; d — 1 is experimentally ruled out (easily), d = 2 is quite constrained, and d > 2 is relatively unconstrained. 2
Some Interesting Manifolds
I have spent some time giving an overview of the basic concepts behind and constraints on the large extra dimension model, as originally proposed. I would now like to shift gears a little, and describe how these ideas might be extended to the case when the internal manifold is no longer fiat (merely a torus) 8 . More specifically I will be interested in topologically nontrivial internal spaces, and in particular in the case that the internal space is a compact hyperbolic manifold. Compact hyperbolic manifolds (CHMs) 9 , are obtained from Hd, the universal covering space of hyperbolic geometry (that admitting constant negative curvature), by modding out by an appropriate freely acting discrete subgroup T of the isometry group of Hd. (If V is not freely-acting, then the resulting quotient is a non-flat non-smooth orbifold. Such a structure may be related to the Randall-Sundrum models10) Consider space-times of the form M4 x (Hd/T\{iee)
,
(16)
with MA a Friedmann, Robertson-Walker (FRW) 4-manifold, with metric GudzUz-1
= g$(x)dx»dxv
+ R2cg\f{y)dyidy^.
(17)
In this expression Rc is the physical curvature radius of the CHM, so that gij{y) is the metric on the CHM normalized so that its Ricci scalar is 7Z = —1, and /i = 0 , . . . ,3, i = 1 , . . . ,d. Locally negatively curved spaces exist only for d > 2, and the properties of CHMs are well understood only for d < 3. However, it is known that CHMs in dimensions d > 3 possess the important property of rigidity n . As a result, these manifolds have no massless shape moduli, implying that the volume of the manifold, in units of the curvature radius Rc, cannot be changed while maintaining the homogeneity of the geometry. Therefore, the stabilization of such internal spaces reduces to the problem of stabilizing a single modulus, the curvature length or the "radion".
236
Although CHMs may seem like quite abstract objects, their popularity among mathematicians has led to some useful tools for visualizing their structure. In figure 4 I have used the Geomview package 12 to display two examples of CHMs generated by Jeff Weeks' SnapPea program 13 . These are presented
Figure 4. Two CHMs, one small volume, the other large volume.
in the Poincare metric, and what is important here is that those parts of the manifold that are identified under actions under T are shaded in the same way. I would just like to draw attention to two important features. First, the second example has a much larger volume than the first in units of the curvature radius. In addition, the second example is considerably more topologically complex than the first, as can be seen by the much higher number of identifications under T. These features are interrelated, and are quite general. 2.1
Compact Hyperbolic Spaces and Volume
The central feature of CHMs that I will exploit here is the behavior of their volume as a function of linear size in the manifold. A specific example that it is useful to keep in mind is a 3-sphere of radius r, cut out of an H3 of curvature radius Rc. The volume of such a sphere can be calculated exactly, and is given by Vol(r) =
TTR3C
(18)
237
It is useful to examine this expression in two limits. When r -C Rc, the first term in a Taylor expansion yields Vol(r) ~ ^7rr3 ,
(19)
as one would expect, since the manifold looks fiat on these scales. However, in the opposite limit r ^> Rc, we obtain Vol(r) ~ \Rle*lR*
,
(20)
and therefore the volume of the sphere grows exponentially with linear size for large radius. This result remains true for other compact spaces constructed from H3. In general, the total volume of a smooth compact hyperbolic space in any number of dimensions is Vol(CHM) = Rdc ea ,
(21)
where a is a constant, determined by topology. Since the topological invariant ea characterizes the volume of the CHM, it is also a measure of the largest distance L around the manifold. Although CHMs are globally anisotropic, since the largest linear dimension gives the most significant contribution to the volume, one can employ eq. (18), or its generalizations to d ^ 3, to find an approximate relationship between L and Vol(CHM). For L ~S> Rc/2 the appropriate asymptotic relation, dropping irrelevant angular factors, is
e^expp^l.
(22)
Kc
In a model with such a manifold as an extra dimensional space, this relationship allows us to compute the expression for Mp\ in terms of linear distance in the space, to compare with (5) in the flat case. The relevant expression is Mp2, = Ml+dRdcea
~ Ml+dRdc exp " ( d - 1 ) L l (23) Rc Thus, in strong contrast to the flat case, in which Mv\ has a power law dependence on linear size, with a CHM the relationship is exponential. As I'll mention later, the most reasonable and interesting case is the smallest possible curvature radius, Rc ~ M " 1 , since this is the only scale available in the problem. Taking M* ~ TeV then yields L ~ 35JW71 = l(T 1 5 mm .
(24)
Therefore, one of the most attractive features of a CHM internal space is that to generate an exponential hierarchy between M* ~ TeV, and Mp\ requires only that the linear size L be very mildly tuned.
238
2.2
Eigenmodes and Kaluza-Klein
Excitations
I have tried to convince you that CHMs provide an attractive alternative manifold for implementing large extra dimension ideas. However, if this idea is to be taken seriously it is necessary to examine the constraints and possible experimental signatures. To uncover the relevant physics of these models one must consider the spectrum of small fluctuations h in the metric around the background metric. Writing Gu^Gu+e^huiy).
(25)
one sees 3 different types of KK fluctuations • h^v, the spin-2 piece; • hij, with indices only in the internal directions, giving spin-0 fields for the 4D observer; • /iiM, the mixed case, giving spin-1 4D fields. The 4D KK masses of these states are the eigenvalues of the appropriate internal-space Laplacians acting on h(y). For the spin-2 case the relevant operator is the Laplace-Beltrami operator ALB (the Laplacian on scalar functions in the internal space), defined by A i B 0(i/) = \g(y)\-1/2di
(\g(y)\1/2gijdMy))
-
(26)
Although there are no known analytic expressions for the individual eigenvalues of ALB on a CHM of any dimension, some generic properties are known. First, a variational argument shows that the spectrum of ALB is bounded from below, and the lowest eigenmode is just the constant function on the CHM. This zero mode is the internal space wave-function of the massless spin-2 4D graviton. Second, since the internal space in compact, the spectrum of ALB on a CHM is discrete and has a gap between the zero mode and the first excited KK state. The size of this gap is all important. A crucial point is that most of the eigenmodes of ALB on a CHM have wavelengths less than Rc, and the number density of these modes is well approximated by the usual Weyl asymptotic formula6 n(k) = (2n)-dn(d_1)Vdkd-1
,
(27)
'There can also be a few lighter supercurvature modes, with wavelengths as large as the longest linear distance in the manifold, and masses thus bounded below by L~1.
239 where fl(d-i) = Area(5 d _ 1 ). Further, bounds on the value of the first nonzero eigenvalue are known. In the best-studied CHM case of d = 2 it can be proven that a large enough volume (and thus genus) d — 2 CHM will have first eigenvalue > 171/(784^). The analogous conjecture in d = 3 is more problematic, but has also been made 14 . In addition, numerical studies of the spectra of even small volume d = 3 CHMs show that they have very few modes with X < Rc 15 . The basic result is that the first KK modes are exponentially more massive than those in the flat case. This drastically raises the threshold for their production, and as a consequence the astrophysical bounds 16,7 completely disappear since the lightest KK mode has a mass (at least 30 GeV), much greater than the temperature of even the hottest astrophysical object. Similarly the large KK masses imply a much higher normalcy temperature T», up to which the evolution of our brane-localized 4D universe can be normal radiation-dominated FRW. Turning to the spin-O(l) excitations, the detailed form of the Laplacian is modified. However, the Mostow-Prasad rigidity theorem for CHMs of dimension d > 3 implies that ALL has no zero modes, and it is conjectured that the gap to the first excited state is of similar size to the Laplace-Beltrami result that is physically reasonable. Finally for the spin-1 fluctuations hi^ recall that any zero modes would correspond to KK gauge-bosons and are directly related to the continuous isometries of the compact space. But, as a result of the quotient by F, CHMs have no such isometries, and thus there are no massless KK gauge bosons. The non-zero KK modes once again have a mass gap that is at least as large as \/L and is more likely close to ~ 1/RC, as in the previous cases. Thus these additional types of fluctuation should not disturb our results. 2.3
Radion Stabilization
In order for the CHM model to work, it is necessary to realize Rc ~ M~l and ea ~ exp((d — \)L/RC) > 1 consistently with the ansatz of a factorizable geometry, a static internal space, and the vanishing of the 4D long-distance (3> L) cosmological constant (CC) A4. To see how this might work, consider a 3-brane embedded in (4 + d) dimensions, with bulk and brane actions Sbuik = J d4+dx^-\g{i+d)\(M^+2n 5brane = | d 4 x v / - | 5 ^ u c e d | ^ / 4 +
+ A-£m) _^
(28) (29)
240
respectively, where Cm is the bulk matter field Lagrangian, and f4 is the brane tension. Note that, since CHMs are just quotients of Hd, there will exist a uniform negative bulk cosmological constant A ~ M4+d, and that to ensure a static internal space, this must be balanced in the field equations by the small curvature radius of the internal space. Dimensionally reducing these actions yields an effective 4D potential for the radion Rc of the form V{RC) = ARdcea - M*ea{MtRc)d-2
+ W(RC) + f4 .
(30)
Here the first two terms arise from the (4+d) bulk CC term, and the curvature of the internal space. Now, in general we may expand W(RC), which comes from Cm, as a Laurent series in Rc M4
with dimensionless coefficients ap. Broadly speaking, there are then two interesting possibilities. If the determination of the minimum is dominated by a competition between any two terms in V, then the condition that the 4D CC vanish (Vm;n = 0) cannot be achieved with a brane tension such that |/ 4 1 < M4. Thus, such a situation is not consistent with the basic assumption that a low-energy effective theory is valid on the brane Fortunately there is an attractive alternative. If three or more i n dependent terms in V{RC) are all important at the minimum (for example the CC and curvature terms, and one of the matter terms from W) then we can tune the coefficients ap such that Vm\n = 0, without needing f4 2> M4. Thus, the basic assumptions remain consistent. Moreover, this tuning is particularly natural in the CHM case precisely because the minimum will naturally occur for a curvature radius close to the fundamental scale Rc ~ M~x, at which the high-scale theory will produce many different terms that contribute roughly in an equal way. (This is exactly the opposite situation from the large flat extra dimension case where the minimum has to occur at a length scale much greater than M~l.) This one fine-tuning is just the usual 4d CC problem. It seems unlikely to me that this one fine tuning will be solved within these models, since in the end one is left with an arbitrary higher-dimensional cosmological constant that one can add to the theory. Nevertheless, at the very least the cosmological constant problem appears in a different guise in these models. It remains to check one important detail. In the usual large extra dimension scenario the radion moduli problem in the early universe provides quite a strong constraint 17 . In the CHM case this problem is much weakened.
241
The radion, which is the light mode corresponding to dilations of the internal space, gets its mass from the stabilizing potential V(RC). Here _ 1 RlV"{Rc)
_, 1
which is close to Ml ~ TeV 2 . Therefore, the radion lifetime is t ~ M^/M^, much shorter than in the case of flat extra dimensions, and only slightly longer than the age of the universe at nucleosynthesis, even if M* ~ TeV.
3
Conclusions and Further Directions
I have briefly reviewed the structure of theories with large extra dimensions, and discussed the main constraints on these models. I have then described an important modification to these theories, in which the internal manifold comprises a CHM. With this modification, the hierarchy problem is solved by a mild tuning of parameters, in an interesting and topologically stable way. While cosmologically and astrophysically much safer, models with internal compact hyperbolic spaces do have testable signatures accessible to collider experiments. Since KK modes abound close to the fundamental scale, Standard Model particle collisions with center-of-mass energies near this scale will result in the production of KK particles, detectable by a distinctive missing energy signature 6 . Although this is qualitatively similar to the scenario of 10 , the spectrum of KK modes one will see is quite distinctive. A full exploration of these experimental signatures will require a more complete investigation of the spectrum of large CHMs, in particular the issues of isospectrality and homophonicity of such manifolds. It is quite likely that such CHMs have other implications for higher-dimensional physics.
Acknowledgements I would first like to acknowledge my collaborators on CHMs: John MarchRussell, Nemanja Kaloper and Glenn Starkman. I would also like to thank all the organizers of COSMO-2000 for an enjoyable and stimulating conference, and for continuing the now traditional focus on particle cosmology. In addition, I am indebted to the Korean Institute for Advanced Study (KIAS) for support during the conference and hospitality in Seoul.
242
References 1. I. Antoniadis, Phys. Lett. B246, 377 (1990); J. Lykken Phys. Rev. D54 3693 (1996). 2. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B429, 263 (1998); I. Antoniadis, et al, Phys. Lett. B436,257 (1998). 3. P. Hofava and E. Witten, Nucl. Phys. B460, 506 (1996); Nucl. Phys. B475, 94 (1996). 4. J. Polchinski, Phys. Rev. Lett. 75,4724 (1995). 5. G. Landsberg, "Minireview on Extra Dimensions", hep-ex/0009038 (2000). 6. I. Antoniadis, K. Benakli, M. Quiros, Phys. Lett. B 3 3 1 , 313 (1994); G. Giudice, R. Rattazzi and J. Wells, Nucl. Phys. B544,3 (1999); E. Mirabelli, M. Perelstein, M. Peskin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 2236 (1999); T. Han, J. Lykken, R. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D59 105006 (1999). 7. S. Cullen, M. Perelstein, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 268. 8. N. Kaloper, J. March-Russell, G. Starkman and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85, 928 (2000); [hep-ph/0002001]. 9. See for example: W.P. Thurston, Three-Dimensional Geometry and Topology (Princeton UP, Princeton, 1997). 10. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3370 (1999); ibid 4690 (1999). 11. G. Mostow, Ann. Math. Stud.78 (Princeton UP, Princeton 1973); G. Prasad, Invent. Math.21 255 (1973). 12. h t t p : / / t h a m e s . n o r t h n e t . o r g / w e e k s / i n d e x / S n a p P e a . h t m l 13. http://www.geomview.org/overview/ 14. R. Brooks, private communication. 15. N. Cornish and D.N. Spergel [math.DG/9906017 ] and references therein. 16. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Rev. D59, 086004 (1999). 17. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, N. Kaloper and J. March-Russell, Nucl. Phys. B5667, 189 (2000); [hep-ph/9903224].
R A D I O N P H E N O M E N O L O G Y IN T H E RANDALL S U N D R U M SCENARIO
S. B A E , P. K O , H. S. L E E Department
of Physics, E-mail:
KAIST, Taejon, 305-701, [email protected]
Korea
JUNGIL LEE Deutsches
Elektronen-Synchrotron E-mail:
DESY, D-22603 [email protected]
Hamburg,
Germany
Phenomenology of a radion (<j>) in the Randall-Sundrum scenario is discussed. The radion couples to the trace of energy momentum tensor of the standard model with a strength suppressed only by a new scale (A^,) which is an order of the electroweak scale. In particular, the effective coupling of a radion to two gluons is enhanced due to the trace anomaly of QCD. Therefore, its production cross section at hadron colliders could be enhanced, and the dominant decay mode of a relatively light radion is <j> —¥ gg, unlike the SM Higgs boson case. We also present constraints on the mass m^ and the new scale A^, from the Higgs search limit at LEP, perturbative unitarity bound and the stability of the radion/Higgs potential under radiative corrections.
1
Introduction
Despite the tremendous success, the standard model (SM) has several theoretical drawbacks, one of which is related with stabilizing the electroweak scale relative to the Planck scale under q u a n t u m corrections, which is known as the gauge hierarchy problem. Traditionally, there have been basically two avenues to solve this problem : (i) electroweak gauge symmetry is spontaneously broken by some new strong interactions (technicolor or its relatives) or (ii) there is a supersymmetry (SUSY) which is spontaneously broken in a hidden sector, and superpartners of SM particles have masses around the electroweak scale 0 ( 1 0 0 — 1000) GeV. However, new mechanisms based on the developments in superstring and M theories including D-branes have been suggested by Randall and Sundrum J . If our world is confined to a three-dimensional brane and the warp factor in the Randall and Sundrum (RS) theory is much smaller t h a n 1, then loop corrections cannot destroy the mass hierarchy derived from the relation v = e~hroirv0, where v0 is the VEV of Higgs field (~ O(Mp)) in the 5-dimensional RS theory, e^kr°n is the warp factor, and v is the V E V of Higgs field (~ 246 GeV) in the 4-dimensional effective theory of the RS theory by a kind of dimensional reduction. Especially the extra-dimensional subspace need not be a circle S 1 like the Kaluza-Klein theory 1, and in t h a t 243
244 case, it is crucial to have a mechanism to stabilize the modulus. One such a mechanism was recently proposed by Goldberger and Wise 2 ' 3 , and also by Csaki et al. 4 . In such a case, the modulus (or the radion <j> from now on) is likely to be lighter t h a n the lowest Kaluza-Klein excitations of bulk fields. Also its couplings to the SM fields are completely determined by general covariance in the four-dimensional spacetime, as shown in Eq. (1) below. If this scenario is realized in nature, this radion could be the first signature of this scenario, and it would be i m p o r t a n t to determine its phenomenology at the current/future colliders, which is the purpose of this talk 5 . Some related issues were addressed in Refs. 6 | 7 . In this talk, we first recapitulate the interaction Lagrangian for a single radion and the SM fields in the Randall S u n d r u m scenario, and discuss the decay rates and the branching ratios of the radion into SM particles. Then the perturbative unitarity bounds and stability condition for the radion Higgs potential on the radion mass m^ and A^, are considered. Current bounds on the SM Higgs search can be easily translated into the corresponding bounds on the radion. Then the radion production cross sections at next linear colliders (NLC's) and hadron colliders such as the Tevatron and LHC are considered. Then our results will be summarized at the end. 2
Radion in the Randall S u n d r u m Scenario I
In the RS theory I 1 , the hierarchy problem between the Planck scale Api ~ 10 1 8 GeV and the electroweak scale A E W ~ 10 2 GeV can be solved geometrically via v = e~kVaWvo with krc ~ 12, where the warp factor e~ °n is in the classical RS metric, dsls
= e-2kr^riltvdxitdxv
- r2cdy2.
(1)
T h e radius r c is the VEV of the i/t/-component of metric Gab{x,y). When the bulk field Gyy(x,y) is decomposed into Kaluza-Klein (KK) modes, the lowest lying mode is the massless radion ((f)) in the original RS model I, since there is no tree-level stabilization mechanism for the radion. T h e loop corrections can solve the hierarchy problem, but give too light radion to be consistent with experiments 8 . Therefore, a tree-level stabilization mechanism is needed, and the Goldberger-Wise mechanism 2 is a promising one, because they stabilized the modulus without any severe fine-tuning of the parameters in the full theory. In the Goldberger-Wise stabilization mechanism, there is a bulk scalar field $(x,y) which has large quartic self-interactions only on the hidden and visible branes, and an extra-dimension dependent V E V $ ( y ) . After replacing
245 the field <&(x,y) in the original Lagrangian with its V E V $(j/) and integrating the Lagrangian over y, we have the modulus stabilizing potential. Since there is a potential stabilizing the radion, the radion has a mass of order O(10) GeV at the tree level 3 . From a recent analysis ' , it was known t h a t the one-loop allowed radion mass can be ~ O(10) times larger t h a n the tree-level one, but the radion is still lighter t h a n the Kaluza-Klein modes. 3 3.1
S c a l e A n o m a l y a n d t h e I n t e r a c t i o n L a g r a n g i a n for a R a d i o n Scale
Anomaly
If a Lagrangian possesses no dimensionful parameter, there is a scale symmetry at classical level, for which one can construct a conserved Noether current D/j.. One can show t h a t the improved energy m o m e n t u m tensor 0^ satisfies the following relation : dllD
(2)
For example, if one considers QCD as an example, the improved energy mom e n t u m tensor O' 2 " is given by QV
=
_pa\npav
_j_ _„nv papa pa
+ |?(7"£>" + y Z?")g - g^q(irDa
/g\
- mq) q.
It is clear t h a t this theory has traceless energy m o m e n t u m tensor at classical level if we consider the massless quark limit (without dimensionful parameters) . However, this is no longer true in q u a n t u m field theory ( Q F T ) in which the radiative corrections are usually divergent so t h a t renormalization procedure is called for. In the renormalization, one needs t o regularize the theory with a suitable cutoff parameter to make loop integrals finite. Therefore a hidden cutoff scale is necessarily involved with Q F T . If we use the dimensional regularization instead of cutoff regularization, the dimensionless parameter in four-dimensional theory is no longer dimensionless in D-dimensional theory. And the classical scale s y m m e t r y in 4 — D is no longer a good s y m m e t r y in arbitrary D dimensions. To look into the energy m o m e n t u m tensor Q^ more closely at q u a n t u m level, let us consider the scale dependence of q u a n t u m effective action. Since the renormalized coupling gs(fi) has a scale dependence,
^
= /%*),
(4)
246 one finds t h a t
^
dfi
= P{g>)^
' dgs
= %.
(5)
Therefore we end up with
6£(SM)anom =
Y,
PG 9
} °^ ti{F°uFGl"/).
(6)
G = S U ( 3 ) C , •••
Since the classical scale symmetry is broken by q u a n t u m effects, it is called scale anomaly (like the chiral anomaly) 9 . If there were mass parameters in the classical Lagrangian, the scale s y m m e t r y would have been broken already at classical level so t h a t 0 £ is not zero and this should be considered altogether with the scale anomaly term. 3.2
Interaction
Lagrangian for a Radion
The interaction of the radion with the SM fields at an electroweak scale is dictated by the 4-dimensional general covariance, and is described by the following effective Lagrangian via canonical normalizations of the fields 4 ' 3 :
£int = -r-e£(SM) + ...,
(7)
where A^ = (<j>) ~ 0(v). The radion becomes massive after the modulus stabilization, and its mass m^ is a free parameter of electroweak scale 4 . Therefore, two parameters A^ and m^ are required in order t o discuss productions and decays of the radion at various settings. T h e couplings of the radion with the SM fields look like those of the SM Higgs, except for v —>• A^. However, there is one i m p o r t a n t thing to be noticed : the q u a n t u m corrections to the trace of the energy-momentum tensor lead t o trace anomaly, leading to the additional effective radion couplings to gluons or photons in addition to the usual loop contributions. This trace anomaly contributions will lead to distinct signatures of the radion compared to the SM Higgs boson. T h e trace of energy-momentum tensor of the SM fields at tree level is easily derived :
6£(SM)tree = J2mfff -2m^W+W-^ - m | ^ Z " / + {2mlh2-dllhd'1h) + ...,
(8)
where we showed terms with only two SM fields, since we will discuss two body decay rates of the radion into the SM particles, except the gauge bosons
247 of which virtual states are also considered. T h e couplings between the radion 4> and a fermion pair or a weak gauge boson pair are simply related with the SM Higgs couplings with these particles through simple rescaling : grf,_f_f = gfM - v/As, and so on. On the other hand, the
( 2 \ as _ as U n b -^ f)^Z QCD, \ 3 V 8TT = -JZ 8TT
(9)
where nj = 6 is t h e number of active quark flavors. There are also counterparts in the SU{2) x U(l) sector. This trace anomaly has an i m p o r t a n t phenomenological consequence. For a relatively light radion, the dominant decay mode will not be <j> —y bb as in t h e SM Higgs, b u t
Radion Phenomenology Decay Properties
of a Radion
Using the interaction Lagrangian Eq. (7), it is straightforward to calculate the decay rates and branching ratios of the radion > into / / , W+W~, Z°Z°, gg and hh.
T{^ff) = Nc^±(l-Xff\
r(* _• w+w~) = ^ - ^ y r ^ ; (i - Xw +
6 2
-x w),
248 m" = ^32TTA T 2^
ZZ
)
3
^
(1 - * z +
-z;>
™3 £/i ^2 r
( ^ ^
=
r(«^^^)
3 2 ^ ^ ^ ( 32^3Ai
1
+
&QC£> +
Y ) ' ^2lq{xq
(10)
where ar /)t y ]Z)/l = 4 m j | B , | Z ] i / m J , and / ( z ) = z[l + (1 - z ) / ( z ) ] with rfj/
/(*)
ln[l - - y ( l - j/)] o 2/ arcsin ( l / ^ / z ) ,
-(^i§)-H
:
z > 1 z < 1.
(11)
Note t h a t as m ( - } oo, the loop function approaches I(xt) —> 2 / 3 so t h a t the top-quark effect decouples and one is left with bqcD with rif = 5. For <j> —• WW, ZZ, we have ignored SU(2)i x C/(l)y anomaly, since these couplings are allowed at the tree-level already, unlike the (j>—g — g or
249
10
! • • • ' ! ' • • • I • • • • I • • . • I • • • • 1 1 • 1 1 I •
.. • I . . .
• I •
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 9001000
m,
(GeV)
Figure 1. The total decay rate (in GeV) for the radion <j> f°r m/, = 150 GeV with a scale factor ( A ^ / ^ ) 2 . The decay rate of the SM Higgs boson is shown in the dashed curve for comparison.
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 9001000 m , (GeV)
Figure 2. The branching ratios for the radion
250 final states. Especially
Perturbative
Unitarity
The perturbative unitarity can be violated (as in the SM) in the ViVi —> VLVL or hh —> VLVL, etc. Here we consider hh —> hh, since the <j> — h — h coupling scales like s/A^ for large s = (pht + Ph2)2 • The tree-level amplitude for this process is M(hh-^hh) =
~
3 6 A V
[—^2
+ ^~ZJ
(12)
+ TT^J)
where A is the Higgs quartic coupling, and s + t + u = ^m2h. Projecting out the J = 0 partial wave component (ag) and imposing the partial wave unitarity condition |cto|2 < Im(cto) (i.e. |Re(ao)| < 1/2), we get the following relation among rnh^v^rn^, and A^,, for s » m j , m\ :
l + ml
3A
87rAi
8TT
2m
<\-
(13)
This bound is shown in the lower three curves of Fig. 3. We note t h a t the perturbative unitarity is broken for relatively small A^ < 130 (300) GeV for m<£ ~ 200 GeV (1 TeV). Therefore, the tree level results should be taken with care for this range of A^> for a given radion mass. 4-3
Radion Productions
at hadron and linear
colliders
The production cross sections of the radion at hadron colliders are given by the gluon fusion into the radion through quark-loop diagrams, as in the case of Higgs boson production, and also through the trace anomaly term, Eq. (4), which is not present in the case of the SM Higgs boson : a(pp (or pp) -> <j>X) = K o-ho(gg
-» <j>) I JT
- g(x, Q2)g(r/x,
Q2) dx,
(14)
X
where r = m2,/s and yfs is the CM energy of the hadron colliders (y/s = 2 TeV and 14 TeV for the Tevatron and LHC, respectively). T h e K factor
251
.1200
> O
800
600
200
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 9001000
m, (GeV)
Figure 3. The excluded region in the m$ and A^, space obtained from the recent L3 result on the SM Higgs search (the left three curves) and perturbative unitarity bound (the lower three curves).
I
|
I
I
I
|
,
,
10-
10'
r
10
r
1
r
1
1 ' ' ' 1' ' Radior, • Higgs
\\
T
NT"**-.
\
>v
LHC
"I
"""--...
~s
-1
10
T
n
Xjevatron^
^
10~'
mrrn—pmn i
J IV,
*]
l
w~ fcf CTEQ5L 10~
.
i
i
l
,
200
] ,
,
!
,
400
,
600
800
1000
m, (GeV)
Figure 4. The radion production cross section via gluon fusions at the Tevatron (s/s = 2 TeV) and LHC (y/s = 14 TeV) with a scale factor (A^/v)2. The Higgs production cross sections are shown in dashed curves for comparison.
252 includes the QCD corrections, and we set K = 1.5. T h e parton-level cross section for gg —>• <j> is given by 2
Vho(gg
«2.(Q) 256TTA2
1
bqcD +J2 ?
(15)
where I(z) is given in the Eq. (11). For the gluon distribution function, we use the C T E Q 5 L parton distribution functions 1 2 . In Fig. 4, we show the radion production cross sections at the Tevatron and LHC as functions of m^ for A^ = v. We set the renormalization scale Q = m^ as shown in the figure. When we vary the scale Q between m^/2 and 2m^, the production cross section changes about + 3 0 % to —20%. The production cross section will scale as (v/A^)2 as before. Compared to the SM Higgs boson productions, one can clearly observe t h a t the trace anomaly can enhance the hadroproductions of a radion enormously. As in the SM Higgs boson, there is a great possibility to observe the radion up to mass ~ 1 TeV if A^ ~ v. For a smaller A^,, the cross section becomes larger but the radion becomes very broader and it becomes more difficult to find such a scalar. For a larger A^, the situation becomes reversed : the smaller production cross section, but a narrower width resonance, which is easier to detect. In any case, however, one has to keep in mind t h a t the perturbative unitarity may be violated in the low A^, region. At the e+e~ colliders, the main production mechanism for the radion <j) is the same as the SM Higgs boson : the radion-strahlung from Z° and the WW fusion, the latter of which becomes dominant for a larger CM energy 13 . Again we neglect the anomaly contributions here. Since both of these processes are given by the rescaling of the SM Higgs production rates, we can use the current search limits on Higgs boson to get the bounds on the radion. W i t h the d a t a from L3 collaboration 1 4 , we show the constraints of A^ and •Hi,], in the left three curves of Fig. 3. Since L3 d a t a is for y/s = 189 GeV and the mass of Z boson is about 91 GeV, the allowed energy for a scalar particle is about 98 GeV. If the mass of the scalar particle is larger t h a n 98 GeV, then the cross section vanishes. Therefore, if m^ is larger t h a n 98 GeV, there is no constraint on A^. And the forbidden region in m^ — A^, plane is not changed by m/j > 98 GeV, because there is no Higgs contribution to the constraint for rrih > 98 GeV. T h e radion production cross sections at NLC's and the corresponding constant production cross section curves in the (A^, m^) plane are shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6, respectively. We have chosen three different CM energies for NLC's : V ^ = 500 GeV, 700 GeV and 1 TeV. We observe t h a t the relatively light radion (m^ < 500 GeV) with A^ ~ v (up to ~ 1 TeV) could be probed at NLC's if one can achieve high enough luminosity, since
253 .10
I I | I I I I I I I I I I I I I I | I I I I I I I I I I I I I I | I I I I | I I I I I I I I I.
CL
>/s=1000GeV Vs=700 GeV Vs=500GeV .
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 m , (GeV)
Figure 5. The production cross section for the radion at NLC's at y/s — 500 , 700 and 1000 GeV, respectively.
.1200
-T—i—I—i—i—r-
O
800
600
400
200 -
0
200
400
600
800
1000
m , (GeV)
Figure 6. The constant production cross section curves at next linear colliders (NLC's) for y j = 500 , 700 and 1000 GeV
254 the production cross section in this region is less t h a n a picobarn. There are also studies of the radion effects on low energy phenomenology such as muon (g — 2) 6 and the weak mixing angle 1 5 . T h e effects are generally small in the region where perturbative unitarity is not violated. 5
Conclusions
In summary, we demonstrated t h a t the radion t h a t stabilizes the fifth dimensional modulus in the RS I scenario has characteristic signatures at colliders due to the scale anomaly. Were it not for the scale anomaly in Q F T , the radion would have behaved exactly the same as the SM Higgs except t h a t the dimensionful parameter v relevant for the SM Higgs is replaced by the radion decay constant A^. T h e radion would have decayed preferentially into 66 final state for rritf, < 2mw, and into WW/ZZ for a heavier radion (m^ > 2mv=w,z), like the SM Higgs boson. Because of the scale anomaly, however, the situation drastically changes and (f> —>• gg is greatly enhanced over (f> —)• 66, and could be a dominant decay channel for a light radion. Also this enhanced (j> — g — g ((f> — 7 — 7) coupling makes the gluon (photon) fusion into a radion the dominant radion production mechanism at hadron (photon) colliders.
Acknowledgments This work was supported in part by BK21 program (HSL), D F G - K O S E F exchange program (PK) and by K O S E F SRC program through C H E P at Kyungpook National University ( P K ) . References 1. 2. 3. 4.
L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 3 , 3370 (1999). W . D . Goldberger and M.B. Wise, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 3 , 4922 (1999). W . D . Goldberger and M.B. Wise, Phys. Lett. B 4 7 5 , 275 (2000). C. Csaki, M. Graesser, L. Randall and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D 6 2 , 045015 (2000). 5. S. Bae, P. Ko, Hong Seok Lee, Jungil Lee, Phys. Lett. B 4 8 7 , 299 (2000). 6. U. M a h a n t a and S. Rakshit, Phys. Lett. B 4 8 0 , 176 (2000). 7. G. F. Giudice, R. Rattazzi and J. D. Wells, Nucl. Phys. B 5 9 5 , 250 (2001) ; U. M a h a n t a and A. D a t t a , Phys. Lett. B 4 8 3 , 196 (2000) ; Saebyok Bae and Hong Seok Lee, KAIST-TH-2000-13, hep-ph/0011275, to appear in Phys. Lett. B ; K. Cheung, Phys. Rev. D 6 3 , 056007 (2001).
255 8. J. Garriga, O. Pujolas and T . Tanaka, hep-th/0004109 ; W . D . Goldberger and I.Z. Rothstein, Phys. Lett. B 4 9 1 , 339 (2000). 9. R. Crewther, Phys. Rev. Lett. 28, 1421 (1972) ; M. Chanowitz and J. Ellis, Phys. Lett. B 4 0 , 397 (1972) ; Phys. Rev. D 7, 2490 (1973) ; J. Collins, L. Duncan and S. Joglekar, Phys. Rev. D 16, 438 (1977). 10. W. D. Goldberger and M. B. Wise, Phys. Rev. D 60, 107505 (1999). 11. T . Gherghetta and A. Pomarol, Nucl. Phys. B 5 8 6 , 141 (2000). 12. H.L. Lai et al. ( C T E Q Collaboration), Eur.Phys.J. C 12 375 (2000). 13. E. Accomando et al, Phys. Rep. 2 9 9 , 1 (1998). 14. L3 Collaboration, hep-ex/9909004. 15. Jihn E. Kim, B. Kyae and J. D. Park, SNUTP-00-017, hep-ph/0007008.
COSMOLOGY OF R A N D A L L - S U N D R U M
MODELS
HANG BAE KIM Department
of Physics,
Lancaster
University,
Lancaster
LAI
l^YB,
Great
Britain
There are many interesting issues in the brane world with a large/warped extra dimension. We focus on the cosmological aspects. We review the cosmological solutions of the brane world and how the conventional four-dimensional cosmology is recovered by including the effect of stabilization. Its implications on the mass hierarchy and the cosmological constant are discussed.
1
Introduction
For past two years, many particle physicists and cosmologists were excited by the development of two ideas, the brane world and the warped extra dimensions, both of which are based on the existence of extra dimensions. The basic idea of the brane world is that standard model particles are localized on a (3+l)-dimensional brane (or a set of branes) embedded in a higher dimensional spacetime, while gravity propagates in the whole bulk 1'2. The warped extra dimension assumes that the background metric is curved along the extra dimensions, mainly due to the negative bulk cosmological constant 3 ' 4 . Why are these two ideas so exciting? They have brought us fresh views and perspectives in gravity, cosmology, particle physics and string theory. We have seen many interesting issues discussed so far, such as the localization of gravity, the gauge hierarchy problem, the cosmological constant problem and self-tuning models 5 , the construction of supersymmetric RS models and the role of supersymmetry 6 , the connection to string theory or Horava-Witten model and warped compactification, the interpretation in light of AdS/CFT holographic duality 7 , the collider signatures of the KK modes and the radion, etc 8 . In this talk, we focus on the cosmological aspect of the two ideas, mostly in five dimensional models with one extra dimension. There has been much interest in this because the five dimensional nature of gravity and the brane setup might lead to the non-conventional cosmology even at low temperature as well as at high temperature above TeV scale. It was found that the Friedmann equation of the brane shows a H ex p behavior and has an additional dark radiation term 9 . There was also a difficulty concerning the negative tension brane, and it was not very clear what happens at temperatures above TeV, which can alter the early universe cosmology including inflation. However, in the early models, a few important ingredients are not ad256
257
dressed, such as the mechanism for the localization of fields on the brane, the stabilization of the brane systems 10 and the way to achieve necessary fine tunings of parameters. They inevitably involve bulk matter and dynamics, and can change the whole picture, for example, changing the exponential warp factor to power law. For the cosmological consequences of brane world models, taking the stabilization into account is found to be crucial n>12>13. The inclusion of the effect of stabilization recovers the conventional FRW cosmology at temperatures below TeV. The talk is organized as follows. First, we derive the effective fourdimensional brane equations to see the generalities of brane dynamics, though its usefulness is limited by the lack of the knowledge of bulk effects. Then, we try to solve the five dimensional equations with an appropriate ansatz. The solution can be obtained in very restricted cases, but a framework can be found where we can study brane cosmology with the effect of stabilization taken into account. This is done through the T | component which is adjusted to stabilize the extra dimension in the presence of brane matter. Based on this, we analyze the background spacetime where we also discuss the mass scales and the hierarchy problem, and one and two brane models in turn. 2 2.1
Effective four-dimensional equations on the brane Framework
We consider the five-dimensional spacetime with coordinates ( r , x l , y ) , and 3-branes embedded in it. The action describing our framework is "M 3
= / 'd x^/ —g -— R — A& + CtM JM
+Y2 f rf4*y^w [-A,+c iM \
(i)
i •*
where M is the fundamental gravitational scale of the model, A& and A$ represent the bulk cosmological constant and brane tensions, respectively. CbM and CiM are Lagrangians for the bulk fields and for the fields localized in the branes. To investigate the role of bulk and bulk fields in brane dynamics 14 we introduce a bulk scalar <£, with CbM = j;(d<&)'2. We also allow that A&, A, and Ci can be functions of $. The bulk Einstein equations obtained from the action (1) are GMN
= TMN
= OM^QN^
-
9MN
2(5$)
2
+ A,($)
(2)
258
and the bulk scalar equation is
D$-^0=O.
(3)
The existence of branes imposes the junction conditions on the above bulk equation, giving discontinuities in the first derivatives across the branes of metric and scalar field. First let us proceed the general setup. A brane can be described by the normal vector UM- Then the induced metric on the brane is given by QMN = 9MN — n-MnN, while the extrinsic curvature by KMN — 9MTIN- The junction conditions are [K»A = - ^ ( r ^ - \ g » v T ^
(4)
where the bracket in the left hand side means the difference across the brane and X"M„ is the energy momentum tensor of brane matter, i.e., A,- and £JMSuppose that we are localized on a certain brane and want to study the brane dynamics as observed by us. We may take two different approaches. The first approach is to derive the effective 3-brane equations localized on our brane. The second is to directly solve the whole bulk equations. In this section, we follow the first approach. The second will be dealt with in the next section. 2.2
The effective 3-brane Einstein equation
To derive the effective 3-brane equations, we need to know the extrinsic curvature and the intrinsic curvature of our brane in terms of the bulk metric QMN and the normal vector UM, which are provided by the Codacci equation QMK™ - 8,K = g™GMNnN,
(6)
and the Gauss equation G
2 GMN9™9? ""-3
+ (GMNnMnN
+KKIIV - K™KMv where E^v = CMNOpnMn°g^g^
- ±G)
9lil
- - {K2 - KMNKMN) and CMNOP
9VLV
- £„„,
is the bulk Weyl tensor.
(7)
259
Now we take y as the Gaussian normal coordinates and impose Z^ symmetry, y ~ —y. We expand $ around the brane, $(x,y)
= 4>{x)
+
*I(I)|J/|
+ 2*2(a:)j/2 + C>(2/3)-
(8)
Then from the bulk equations (2) and (3), and the junction conditions (4) and (5), we obtain the equation for
n
dAh
_
T
d(j>
12M
3
(dA .d
_$,
and the four-dimensional effective Einstein equation for the brane G^ = Aeff(>)srM„ +
(9) 14
T + 77^-n M„ - E^ + nv{4>), 3M 3 M6
-^JJT^ 3
6M "
(10)
where Aeff(<£)
2M 3
A6 +
A2 6M 3
1 UA 8 \dcp
(11) (12)
?liV{
(13)
The first three terms in the right hand side of (10) deal with the sources on the brane. The first two terms are same as four-dimensional Einstein gravity, if we identify the four-dimensional Planck mass A{4>) (14) 6Me' The third term gives a correction quadratic in energy-momentum tensor. The last two terms in Eq. (10) are bulk effect terms, which reflect the existence of bulk in brane dynamics. They are inputs from bulk dynamics and not determined in the brane equations. The brane equations (9) and (10) are not closed equations. In this sense, they would not be very useful without the knowledge of the bulk effect terms. However, they reveal a most general structure of the brane equations. In this regard, we note that the Planck mass (14) seems at first to be determined solely by the brane tension. This seems strange because the graviton (and its zero mode) comes from the bulk fields. Therefore there must be some correlation between the brane tension and bulk dynamics, which are incorporated in the brane equations through these bulk effect terms. We will see this in the following sections where the bulk solutions are treated. Mp2
260
3 3.1
Five-dimensional cosmological solutions Framework
In this section, we investigate the cosmological bulk solutions of fivedimensional models. For the two brane models, the fifth dimension y is assumed to be an orbifold S1 /Z2 with y ~ y + 1 and y ~ —y identified. Two 3-branes reside at two fixed points (boundaries) y = 0, \. Since we are interested in the cosmological solution, we consider the metric where the 3-dimensional spatial section is homogeneous and isotropic. ds2 = -n'2(T,y)d,T2 + a2{r,y)'yijdxidxj
+ b2(r,y)dy2,
(15)
where jij is the 3-dimensional homogeneous and isotropic metric, and we will use K = —1,0,-1-1 to represent its spatial curvature. Einstein equations are given by GMN = (1/M3)TMN where (16)
a2 b2
fa" [a
(17)
n a \ a
nJ )
(18) (19)
f$
= diag[-p,p,_p,j3,p 5 ]+
^ —^-dia.g[-ph
pi, pi, Pi, 0]
(20)
i=0i
In addition to Einstein equations, we use the energy-momentum conservation equation, d^iT^f = 0 dp
„. „
„. a
.„
„ .b
-f + 3(p + p)- + {p + p5)dr
a
P'5+P5 \1 — +3-)+—p-3-p n aj n
b
a
0,
(21)
= 0.
(22)
Brane sources in Eq. (20) can be converted to boundary conditions (Junction conditions): n, a and b must be continuous and n', a1 are discontinuous
261 due to boundary sources by y+
'
b n 3.2
2Pi+3Pi 3M 3
la' y'+ _ ba
'
Pi
3M3'
Five-dimensional spacetime with the bulk cosmological constant and brane tensions
First, we consider the five-dimensional spacetime supported by the negative bulk cosmological constant p = — p = Aj < 0 and brane tensions pi = —pi — A*. We define the parameters
fc
A
1/2
\
=W
'
ki =A
(24)
^
In general cases with ko, —ki/2 > k, the metric is given by
15
+ 8 dx dx + (fcr6 )o;dy ds2 =-dr[krz smh(kb T v e\y\r . + ^c v) :'" 7 + g 2
i
j
2
ij
2
0
0
0
0
(25)
where bo and CQ are determined by /ccosh(co) = ko,
kcosh(-kbo
+ Co) =—k^-
(26)
The metric (25) describes a slice of AdSs space inflating both in extra dimension and in spatial dimensions. We note two special cases. If we have a fine tuning (—k'2 — k)/(ki — k) = ekbo(—hi + k)/{k\ + k), we obtain a inflationary solution with static extra dimension 16 d s
,
=
i -dr2 +• ~e2kT5^iidx dx' j - , —
+, b^ 20^dy2
( 2 ? )
2
sinh (A;6o|j/| + c0) With two fine tunings k = ko — —k±, we can get a static solution, the Randall-Sundrum model 4 ds2 = e-'^oMri^dx^dx"
+ b20dy2
(28)
This model attracted much attention because it convert the gauge hierarchy problem into a geometric problem. The four-dimensional Planck scale in this model is given by Mp = (Mz/k)[l — e~kb°]. Any mass parameter mo on the visible brane corresponds to a physical mass m = moe~^kb°, which we identify as the weak scale. Hence the large hierarchy between the Planck scale and the weak scale Mp/Mw ~ 1016 can be explained by a warp factor e~^kb° with 7;kbo ~ 37. The property is not spoiled by i? 2 corrections, if R2 corrections are given by Gauss-Bonnet interactions 17 .
262
Note that the space described by the metric (25) is locally AdSs, because it shares the same bulk equation. The metric (25) can be transformed to (28) by a coordinate transformation e-WRs«/RS =
fcrsinh^&oy + c0) + g0,
m s = T cosh(kb0y + c 0 ).
(29)
Therefore, we can say that above metrics are the slices of AdSs with different boundary geometries. 3.3
Cosmological solutions with static extra dimension
Let us turn to the more interesting situation where the matter is added on the brane(s) and possibly in the bulk. But we require the extra dimension to be static, that is b = 0. This requires a fine tuning between matter densities. For the bulk energy-momentum, we assume p = Ab,
j3=-A&,
p5 = -Ab+p5(r,y).
(30)
where A& < 0. The form of Ps(r, y) is constrained by Eq. (22) to be PS{T)
(31)
n(T,y)a6{T,y)
With the gauge fixing n(r,y = 0) = 1, we obtain the solution a2(r,y)
18 13
'
= a20
1+
K
F
C +
~A
1/2
sinh(2/c6y)
(32)
and n{r,y) = a(T,y)/a0(T). Here a 0 (r) = a(r,y = 0) and C(T) is determined by i% (T) up to a constant through the equation 2a 0 (r) _ (33) PZ(T). 3M 3 CIO(T) is fixed by the boundary condition. Suppose that a brane with the energy density po is placed at y — 0, and assume Z-2 symmetry y ~ —y. The junction condition (23) at the brane gives the evolution equation for ao(r) C =
Ka0j
ag
V6M 3 /
C_ -A a\
y
!
If we further assume that we are living on the brane, this equation is nothing but the Friedmann equation of our universe. However, in the simple case
263
where A.b — 0 and p 5 = 0, this equation differs from the four-dimensional Friedmann equation in two aspects. First, the Hubble parameter H = a0/a0 is proportional to po instead of y/po. Second, there is a Cja\ term which looks like a radiation term. This means that we can have dynamic solution without any matter on the brane or in the bulk. This term seems to have an interesting interpretation in view of AdS/CFT 7 . Both of these alter the big bang nucleosynthesis result: H ex po is not compatible and C is required to be small enough. If we consider the negative bulk cosmological constant together with the positive brane tension, p 0 = A0 + POM, the above equation is written as
(£)' + 5 = ( « ' *> + T S > M + SJP*« - 1 -
<35>
The four-dimensional Friedmann equation is obtained for k% — k2 = 0, C = 0, POM ^ Ao. We can obtain a viable cosmology for the positive tension brane attached to the infinite size extra dimension. The effective cosmological constant is given by Aeff <x (kfi — fc2) At high energy/temperature, that is, in the very early universe p\M term dominates and results in very interesting consequences 19 . 4 4-1
The stabilized RS models Stabilization by balanced bulk matter
In the previous section, we saw that the brane at y = 0 fixes the whole bulk solution. If we have the second brane at y = -|, the junction condition at y = \ gives _ sinh(/c6) + \{p$ - C - 1) sinh(fc6) - p0 cosh(kb) ^ ~~ cosh(kb) + i(pg - C - l)(cosh(fc6) - 1) - p0 sinh(kb)'
P
(36
^
where
A
= 6fe^ = °'^ ° = lk-
(3?)
This is a constraint between energy densities pi on two branes. The reason why this constraint is necessary is obvious. We used the ansatz with the static extra dimension, which is not the general case for the two brane model. But the (almost) static extra dimension is required from the phenomenological view point. We need a stabilization mechanism to make the extra dimension static.
264
Here we consider a simple modeling of how the stabilization mechanism works 1 3 ' n . It must involve some bulk dynamics. We suppose that it is through the role of C. The basic idea is that the back reaction by the stabilization mechanism to the brane energy densities which, if left alone, would destabilize the extra dimension, induces the bulk energy momentum T55 which forces C fitted to the constraint (36) through (33) and keep 6 = 0. The constraint (36) can be solved to give the necessary C _2 C = (Po-l)-2
po + pi - (1 + Popi) tanh(fcfe) 2 t a n h ( ^ ) { 1 _ pi_ t a n h ( f c 6 / 2 ) } '
(38)
and the bulk energy-momentum component ps through 6M3 ... ,C. (39) 4a {T,y)a{T,y) Inserting (38) into (34), we obtain the 3-brane Friedmann equation for the stabilized two brane system P5(r,y)=
oo\ aoj
2
K__ a.Q
2
3, 3
Po + Pi ~ (1 + popi) tanh(fc6) tanh(kb){1 — px tanh(kb/2)}
We have two comments here. First, in general it is expected that the stabilization mechanism induces T\ as well as T^, and b may not be strictly static but be shifted somewhat as pi changes in time. Considering T55 only and requiring strictly static b seems to give a limit of infinitely steep stabilization potential. It is of course unrealistic, but gives the leading behaviors of RS models with a certain, unknown stabilization mechanism. Second, we can see from (39) that the induced ps does not fix the additive constant of C. This cannot be controlled by T§, but required to vanish to satisfy the constraint. This may require another mechanism behind. Actually non-vanishing C implies the breakdown of conformal symmetry in the bulk, and there might be a connection between the stabilization mechanism which requires non-trivial C and the conformal symmetry breaking. Now we rephrase the metric for the stabilized RS model ds2 = -n2(T,y)dT2 where 6(T, y) = b — constant,
+ a 2 (r, y)6ijdxidxj
+ 6 2 (r, y)dy2
(41)
265
a{r,y) = a 0 (r) cosh(2kby) - po sinh(2kby)
H
{po + Px) cosh(kb) - ( l + p 0 p i ) . ,,.,
—
T-TTTT
,.„,,,
,,
1/2
7^r-{cosh{2kby) - 1}
sinh(/t6) — p±{cosh(kb) — 1}
(42)
and ao(r) satisfies (40). ^.2
The static five-dimensional spacetime: The mass hierarchy and the cosmological constant
With the metric in (41) and (42), we first consider the case where there is no matter and only the bulk cosmological constant and the brane tensions are involved. The metric is now given by a(r,y) = ao(r)n(y) and n(y) = cosh(2kby) — /c0 sinh(2kby) (ko + k±) cosh(kb) — (1 + fco^i) +- sinh(/c6) — ki{cosh(kb) — 1} (cosh(2A%) - 1}
1/2
(43)
From (38) and (39), the balanced ps is found to be P5(y) =
6Mj3fc1.2 n(yy
(k0 + kx) - (1 + k0ki) tanh(A;6) (ko - 1) - 2
tanh(fc6){l - kx tanh(A;6/2)}
(44)
The scale factor a(r, y) undergoes inflation, and the Hubble parameter can be defined independently of y because H = o(r,y)/a(r,y) — do(r)/ao(r). The static background spacetime is obtained when we make a fine tuning to satisfy the condition for the vanishing cosmological constant (kQ + kx) - (1 + k0ki) tanh(A;6) = 0.
(45)
With this condition, (43) and (44) are simplified to n
(y)
=
[cosh(2kby) - ko sinh(2kby)] 6M3(feg -k2) Pn(y) = n(y)4
.
(46) (47)
We can identify the four-dimensional Planck scale in two ways. Firstly, we can get it from the 4-dimensional effective theory which is obtained by integrating
266
the action over the extra dimension, Mf3
2
/ ^ bdyn{yf = — [sinh(fc&) - fc0{cosh(A;6) - 1}] . (48) Secondly, we can deduce it from the 3-brane Friedmann equation (40), which leads to M3 tanh(fcfc){l - ki tanh(kb/2)\ Ml
=
2
L-LJ1
(49)
P
{ k l-kLtanh(kb) ' The two derived Planck scales (48) and (49) coincide under the condition (45), that is, when the cosmological constant vanishes. Let us consider the gauge hierarchy problem in this background spacetime. Physical mass scale at two branes are given by n
Mw
= MII{T, 0) = M,
MH = Mn(r, h=M
(50)
[cosh(A;6) - k0 sinh(fc6)]1/2 .
(51)
Note that we placed the visible brane at y = 0 and identified the physical mass scale of the visible brane as the weak scale. The physical mass scale on the hidden brane, called the hidden scale here, is in general different from the Planck scale. Now the ratio of the electroweak scale and the Planck scale is M% (M\ , . , . , „ r . , / 1 ) N i n , „, (Y J [sinh(A:6) - k0 {cosh{kb) - 1}] w 10 32 . (52)
Mh
The condition for the vanishing cosmological constant and the solution to the gauge hierarchy problem impose two conditions among four parameters k, ko, ki_ and 6. Hence, in this model, there are continuous set of static background spacetimes which solve the cosmological constant problem and the gauge hierarchy problem together, specified by, for example, two parameters (k/M, kb) and ko and ki can be expressed in terms of them from (45) and (52) sinh(kb) - 10 32 (k/M) k ° ~ cosh(Jfei) - 1 ' ~kl = ~~ko + tanh(fefc) = 1 - fco tanh(kb)'
(53)
V
;
The original RS model with k = —ko = fci is a special case where p$ in (47) vanishes. Note that while the hidden scale is larger than the weak scale by the ratio of warp factors at two branes, n(r, | ) / n ( r , 0), it is in general different
267
from the four-dimensional Planck scale by a factor M/k and a different warp factor combination. In the original RS model where k = —ko = fci, ekb S> 1 and M/k ~ 1, the difference disappears. If we introduce another hierarchy M/k ^> 1 (without any feasible reason at the moment), this will show up in the hierarchy of the hidden scale and the Planck scale. 4-3
One brane model
Let us turn to the cases where matters are added on the brane. First, we look at the case pi. = 0. This corresponds to compactifying the extra dimension without the second brane. This is made possible by the tuned ps distribution along the extra dimension 1 6 M d r - -kcoth(kb){p0
Ps
- 3p0) -
PoiPo + 3p0) 12M 3
(55)
The 3-brane Friedmann equation (40) becomes —^ a0J
+^=2k2[-l+ ai
p0coth(kb)}.
(56)
If we split out the brane tension from the brane energy density, the above equation takes the form of four-dimensional Friedmann equation
a0J
kn —coth(fcfc) — 1 ) + coih(kb)poM
aLQ
(57)
with the identifications M3
tanh(fc&),
(58)
Aeff = A0 - (6M 3 A 6 )2 tanh(fcb).
(59)
Mi
An interesting characteristic of this model is its implication for the cosmological constant problem. Suppose that we have the relation k — ko in some way, that is, assume a solution to the 'big' cosmological constant problem. Then the size of the cosmological constant has an exponential dependence on the size of extra dimension. This is just the RS-type solution to the 'small' cosmological constant problem. The currently observed cosmological constant ft A ~ 1 can be fitted with kb « 140.
268
4-4
Two brane model
Now we turn to the two brane case. We split the brane energy densities into the brane tensions and the brane matter energy densities as we did in the one brane model, and impose the vanishing cosmological constant condition (45). The the 3-brane Friedmann equation (40) can be written as POMP^M
tanh(A;6)
+ P\M doV , _, * + ' 6M3fc l-ft 0 tanh(fc6) + = P\M t&nh(kb) tanh(&6/2) aoj % 3MJ, 2 ~ 6MJ.A; l-k0t<mh(kb) K
POM
(60)
where p±M = Pi-Mn{k)4 = P-M [cosh(A;6) — ko sinh(A;6)] , which is the physically observed energy density on the hidden brane. Up to small correction, this equation is nothing but the four-dimensional Friedmann equation. The energy densities on both branes contribute equally. So the matter on the hidden brane acts as dark matter for our brane. The inclusion of the effect of stabilization mechanism, through the balanced T55 component in this simplified model, gives a ordinary FRW cosmology at least up to TeV scale, resolving the peculiarities caused by the existence of the negative tension brane. Above the TeV scale, we meet a complicated situation where in addition that the quadratic terms become important, we need to consider the excitation of other dynamical variables which may spoil the stabilization. Further study is required to clarify it. 5
Conclusion
There are many interesting issues in the brane world models and large/warped extra dimensions, such as the mass hierarchy, the cosmological constant, localization of gravity, confinement of fields on the brane, fine tunings of the bulk cosmological constant and brane tensions, stabilization of the extra dimension, the role of supersymmetry, the role of AdS/CFT duality, connection to string theory, and collider signals, etc. In this talk, we focused on the cosmological implications, together with the cosmological constant and the gauge hierarchy. In cosmological side, the model with one positive tension brane and the infinite warped extra dimension (RS2) has a viable cosmology without the need of stabilization. But for models with two or more branes or with the compact extra dimension, taking the effects of stabilization into account is very crucial in studying the cosmology of the models. We have shown that, through the simple method using the balaced T | component, the inclusion of the effects of stabilization recovers the
269 conventional four-dimensional FRW cosmology. Therefore, the stabilized RS models have viable cosmology below TeV scale, with interesting new perspective on the mass hierarchy and the cosmological constant. Further study is required to clarify the cosmology of these models at temperatures above TeV scale. Acknowledgments I would like to express my gratitute to the organizers of the "International Workshop on Particle Physics and the Early Universe", COSMO2000 and acknowledge the hospitality of KIAS. I have benefited from discussions with K. Choi and H. D. Kim. References 1. V. A. Rubakov and M. E. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. B 1 2 5 , 136 (1983) Phys. Lett. B 1 2 5 , 139 (1983) K. Akama, Lect. Notes Phys. 1 7 6 , 267 (1982). 2. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 4 2 9 , 263 (1998); I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos a n d G. Dvali, ibid. 4 3 6 , 257 (1998). 3. M. Gogberashvili, h e p - p h / 9 8 1 2 2 9 6 ; Europhys. Lett. 4 9 , 396 (2000); Mod. Phys. Lett. A 1 4 , 2025 (1999). 4. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 3 , 3370 (1999); Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 3 , 4690 (1999) 5. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, N. Kaloper and R. S u n d r u m , Phys. Lett. B 4 8 0 , 193 (2000); S. Kachru, M. Schulz and E. Silverstein, Phys. Rev. D 6 2 , 045021 (2000); S. Forste, Z. Lalak, S. Lavignac a n d H. P. Nilles, Phys. Lett. B 4 8 1 , 360 (2000); J H E P 0 0 0 9 , 034 (2000); J. E. Kim, B. Kyae, H. M. Lee, h e p - t h / 0 0 1 1 1 1 8 ; h e p - t h / 0 1 0 1 0 2 7 . 6. T. Gherghetta and A. Pomarol, Nucl. Phys. B 5 8 6 , 141 (2000); A. Falkowski, Z. Lalak and S. Pokorski, Phys. Lett. B 4 9 1 , 172 (2000); E. Bergshoeff, R. Kallosh and A. Van Proeyen, J H E P 0 0 1 0 , 033 (2000); M. Zucker, h e p - t h / 0 0 0 9 0 8 3 . 7. S. S. Gubser, h e p - t h / 9 9 1 2 0 0 1 ; N. Arkani-Hamed, M. Porrati, and L. Randall, hep—th/0012148; R. Rattazzi and A. Zaffaroni, hep-th/0012248. 8. C. Csaki, M. L. Graesser a n d G. D. Kribs, Phys. Rev. D 6 3 , 065002 (2001); S. C. Park, H. S. Song and J. Song, h e p - p h / 0 0 0 9 2 4 5 ; 9. P. Binetruy, C. Deffayet, and D. Langlois, Nucl. Phys. B 5 6 5 , 269 (2000)
270
10. W.D. Goldberger and M.B. Wise, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4922 (1999) 0 . DeWolfe, D. Z. Freedman, S.S. Gubser, and A. Karch, Phys. Rev. D62, 046008 (2000) 11. P. Kanti, K. A. Olive and M. Pospelov, Phys. Rev. D62, 126004 (2000); P. Kanti, 1.1. Kogan, K. A. Olive and M. Pospelov, Phys. Lett. B468, 31 (1999); Phys. Rev. D61, 106044 (2000); Phys. Lett. B481, 386 (2000). 12. C. Csaki, M. Graesser, L. Randall and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D62, 045015 (2000) J. M. Cline and H. Firouzjahi, Phys. Lett. B495, 271 (2000) 13. H. B. Kim, Phys. Lett. B478, 285 (2000) 14. K. Maeda and D. Wands, Phys. Rev. D62, 124009 (2000); T. Shiromizu, K. Maeda and M. Sasaki, Phys. Rev. D62, 024012 (2000). 15. H. B. Kim and H. D. Kim, Phys. Rev. D61, 064003 (2000). 16. N. Kaloper, Phys. Rev. D60, 123506 (1999); T. Nihei, Phys. Lett. B465, 81 (1999). 17. J. E. Kim, B. Kyae and H. M. Lee, Phys. Rev. D62, 045013 (2000); Nucl. Phys. B582, 296 (2000) 18. P. Binetruy, C. Deffayet, U. Ellwanger, and D. Langlois, Phys. Lett. B477, 285 (2000) 19. R. Maartens, D. Wands, B. A. Bassett, I. Heard, Phys. Rev. D62, 041301 (2000)
Precise calculation of neutralino relic density in the minimal supergravity model" Takeshi Nihei Department
of Physics,
Lancaster
University,
Lancaster
LAI
^YB,
UK
We study precise calculation of neutralino relic density in the minimal supergravity model. We compare the exact formula for the thermal average of the neutralino annihilation cross section times relative velocity with the expansion formula in terms of the temperature, including all the contributions to neutralino annihilation cross section analytically. We confirm that the expansion formula fails badly near s-channel poles. We show that the expansion method causes 5-10 % error even far away from the poles.
1
Introduction
In recent years, observations of cosmic microwave background radiation have been providing experimental values for cosmological parameters with some accuracy. Current experimental bound on the fractional energy density of cold dark matter is [2,3] ficDM/i2 = 0.1 - 0.3,
(1)
where h m 0.7 is the parameter in the Hubble constant Ho = 100 h km/sec/Mpc [4]. This bound (1) is expected to be improved in the near future, so precise calculation of the relic density becomes important. Particle physics should provide a particle-theoretical explanation for dark matter. The minimal supergravity model [5] is one of the most promising candidate for new physics beyond the standard model. In this model, a discrete symmetry, so-called R-parity, is introduced to avoid rapid proton decay. One of the consequences of introducing the R-parity is that the lightest superparticle (LSP) is stable, and the LSP becomes a good candidate for cold dark matter [6]. The LSP in this model is mostly the lightest neutralino x which is a mass eigenstate given by a linear combination of neutral gauginos and Higgsinos X
= NnB+N12W3+N13H°
+ NliH°2.
(2)
In general, supersymmetric models have a huge number of unknown parameters. However, the minimal supergravity model has only a small number of parameters, so it has reasonable predictive power. There are five unknown "This talk is based on the work [1].
271
272
parameters in this model m 0 , ml/2,
A, tan/3, sgn(/x),
(3)
where mo, m i / 2 and A represent a common scalar mass, a common gaugino mass, and a common trilinear scalar coupling, respectively. They parametrize soft supersymmetry breaking terms at the GUT scale « 2 x 10 16 GeV. tan/3 is the ratio of vacuum expectation values of the two neutral Higgs fields, y, denotes the Higgs mixing mass parameter. In the case of the minimal supergravity model, the absolute value of n is determined from the condition for consistent radiative electroweak symmetry breaking, and only the sign is a free parameter. In this work, we assume that there are no CP violating phases in these parameters (3) for simplicity. 2
Calculation of the relic density
In this section, we first briefly review the standard calculation of the neutralino relic density [7] in the minimal supergravity model. After that, we explain what is necessary to calculate it precisely. We evaluate the relic density at present, starting from thermal equilibrium in the early universe. The time evolution of the neutralino number density in the expanding universe is described by the Boltzmann equation
+ 3Hnx = -<™M0i> K - nT) >
^
(4)
where H is the Hubble expansion rate. nx describes the actual number density of the neutralino, while nxq is the number density which the neutralino would have in thermal equilibrium, a denotes the cross section of the neutralino pair annihilation into ordinary particles. WM01 is so-called M0ller velocity which can be identified as the relative velocity between the two neutralinos. (eri>M0i) represents the thermal average ofCTWM01• In the early universe, the neutralino is in thermal equilibrium nx = nxq. As the universe expands, the neutralino annihilation process freezes out, and after that the number of the neutralinos in a comoving volume remains constant. In the annihilation cross section a in eq. (4), there are a lot of final states which contribute: \X r~* ff> hh> WW> ZZ' Zh' e t c - A m o n g t h e s e final states, fermion pairs / / usually give dominant contributions. Using an approximate solution to the Boltzmann equation (4), the relic density px = rnxnx at present is given by
= lM
*
w, (10 ^r
(5)
273
where x — T /mx is a temperature of the neutralino normalized by its mass. Tx and T 7 are the present temperatures of the neutralino and the photon, respectively. The suppression factor (Tx/T^)3 « 1/20 follows from the entropy conservation in a comoving volume [8]. Mpi denotes the Planck mass, XF ~ 1/20 is the value of x at freeze-out, and is obtained by solving the following equation iteratively: X F = ln
~
V ^ V 2^{aVM«l)*FXF
(6)
)'
where G;v is the Newton's constant, and g* represents the effective number of degrees of freedom at freeze-out. The relativistic formula [9] for thermal average in eq. (4) can be written as an integration over one variable [10] <<™M0I>
= - 4T„2, 7^7 / dsa(s)(s -4m2)^K1 x 8m'xTKi{mx/T) J4m^
(^ ) , \T J
(7)
where Ki (i = 1,2) are the modified Bessel functions. The cross section a(s) is a complicated function of s in general, so we have to evaluate the above integration numerically to calculate the thermal average. If the normalized temperature x is small enough, we may be able to use an expansion formula in terms of x for the thermal average (7) {crvM0i) = a + bx.
(8)
This expansion, neglecting the higher order of x, is widely used in literatures. In the case that the neutralino is the LSP, the a coefficient for a fermion pair production is proportional to the fermion mass due to the Majorana nature of the neutralino. On the other hand the b coefficient for the same final state includes a contribution which is not proportional to the fermion mass, so the b coefficient is much larger than the corresponding a coefficient for each fermionic final state: a
274
In this work, however, we concentrate on (i) and (ii) to compare the expansion formula with the exact one, and we don't take into account (hi) and (iv) for simplicity. Namely, we use the approximate solution (5) to the Boltzmann equation, and we neglect coannihilation effects. We have derived analytic expressions for the exact annihilation cross section and have obtained a and b coefficients analytically for every contribution including interference terms. These interference terms are neglected in most literatures, but we found that they can give significant contributions in some cases. Some of the analytic expressions can be found in literatures for both the exact cross section [16,17] and the expansion coefficients [18,19]. 3
Thermal average — exact formula vs. expansion
Let's see the rough behavior of the integrand in eq. (7). In the case of interest, the argument of the function K\ is much larger than unity, since T ^ mx/20 and T/J > 2mx. Therefore the thermal average can be written as a convolution of the cross section with a function which decays exponentially: /•OO
(CVM01) ~ /
dsa(s)F(s),
(9)
where the function F(s) has an exponential suppression factor as F(s) <x e-^s'T.
(10)
Naively, it seems that the expansion should converge quickly, since the function F(s) in eq. (10) decays exponentially as s increases [9]. However this is not always true. It is known that the expansion method fails badly when the annihilation cross section changes rapidly with s [10,12,16]. This happens, e.g, near s-channel poles and thresholds of new channels. In the following we compare the expansion result with the exact one, including all the contributions to the annihilation cross section. 4
Numerical results
The spectrum and the couplings in the minimal supergravity model at the weak scale are calculated by solving renormalization group equations with boundary conditions at the GUT scale and implementing radiative electroweak symmetry breaking. In this analysis, we use an existing code "SUSPECT" [20] to calculate the spectrum and the couplings. In the following, we present the results of our calculation. Fig. 1 shows the integration of the thermal average / 0 F dx (avMai) as a function of m ^ 2
500
0 m1/8
Mil! pill
•in Lini
103 10 2 10' r 10° r 10-' r 10-* r 10"»
500
250 500 (GeV)
n 1
r^~~"—^
1:
T
[ I l l
— io* A, 10' > b 10°
iox •O
250
(GeV)
500
10
-;
i "
i I
zz
r r r
1
n
r
__J
r • i l l
il:l i i i
250
V
-» 10"! '1/2
Figure 1: Integration of the thermal average P = 2, m 0 = 200 GeV, A = 0, n > 0.
n 500
(GeV)
F
500 L
i/t
(GeV)
dx (crvM0l) as a function of m 1 / 2 fort
276 tan/J = 2, m 0 1
1
'
1
1
1
r\
1
.
1.5
1
/S
1 \
= 200 GeV, A = 0, p > 0
10
-
01
-/"^
c:
\G
S 0.5
0 w
g
CO a
[ex
Q,
•
,
c:
A l l , , , 250 i1/2 (GeV)
0.5
500
500 '1/2
(a)
(b) 2
Figure 2: The relic density Clh (a) and the ratio n e x p a n s j o n /f2 e xact (b) for tan/3 = 2, mo = 200 GeV, A = 0, /i > 0.
tan/? = 50, 1
i
i
|
i
,
i
i
|
i
i
i
i
m0 |
,
i
1
= 600 GeV, A = 0, /i > 0 1
« c
^
1
'
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
o CO
" -
•
X
01
£ 0.5 —
" • 3
—
qT
CO
0.
(ex
I
"
"
1a 1
\
i
i
1
l
i
i
i
1
,
i
l
r
1
i
250 500 750 m1/2 (GeV)
(a)
i
i
i
1000
•
•
_
0.5 C)
i
i
i
i
1
i
•
i
i
1
i
i
i
i
1
•
250 500 750 m1/2 (GeV)
i
i
t
1000
(b)
Figure 3: Similar results to Fig. 2 for tan/3 = 50, m0 = 600 GeV, A — 0, /t > 0.
277
for tan/3 = 2, m0 = 200GeV, A = 0, fi > 0. Note that the relic density in eq. (5) is proportional to the inverse of this integration. The solid line and the dashed line represent the exact result and the expansion result, respectively. We have ploted the total contributions and the individual contributions for relevant final states. The exact results show similar behaviors with those in a previous analysis [21]. There are two peaks in the total contributions. One is from the Z boson contribution, and it takes place when 2m x « mz is satisfied. The other is from the lightest Higgs (h) contribution, and it happens when 2mx « m/j. Around the poles, we see huge difference between the exact result and the expansion. Away from the poles, the difference is not so huge. We plot the relic density vs. mi/2 in Fig. 2 (a) for the same parameters as those in Fig. 1. In the region of the poles, we see a dip of the relic density. Away from the poles, the relic density is too large to satisfy the experimental constraint (1). In F i g . 2 ( b ) , w e p l o t t h e r a t i o
fiexpansion/Oexact,
Where ftexact (^expansion)
denotes the relic density calculated with the exact (expansion) formula for the thermal average. In the pole regions, the expansion is quite different from the exact one by a large factor [16]. Also we find a difference of about 5 % in this ratio even far away from the pole. In a very large tan/3 case, the result has a different feature. In Fig. 3 (a) and (b), we show similar results for tan/3 = 50, mo = 600 GeV, A = 0, /i > 0. The relic density is small due to enhancements of the pseudoscalar Higgs exchange contribution and the heavier neutral Higgs exchange contribution in the bb final state for a large tan/3. The are two reasons for these enhancements. First, couplings of the pseudoscalar Higgs and the heavier neutral Higgs to the bottom quark become large for a large tan /3. Secondly, masses of heavy Higgses become smaller in a large tan/3 region. Because of these enhancements in the annihilation cross section, the relic density in Fig. 3 (a) becomes small enough to satisfy the experimental constraint (1) for a wide region of 350 GeV < mi/-2 < 800 GeV. As for the ratio of the expansion result to the exact one in Fig. 3 (b), we see a difference more than 10 % for 600 GeV < m 1 / 2 < 800 GeV. Note that we find this relatively large difference in the interesting region where the relic density satisfies the experimental constraint (1). We show a contour plot for the quantity 2mx — TUA for tan/3 = 50, A = 0 and n > 0 in Fig. 4, where TJIA denotes the pseudoscalar Higgs mass. Along the thin solid line, this quantity vanishes so that there are enhancements in the annihilation cross section from the pseudoscalar Higgs pole contribution and the heavier neutral Higgs pole contribution through the bb final state. Fig. 4 shows that the region 600 GeV < rrii/2 < 800 GeV in Fig. 3 (b), where the
278
tanp = 50,
A = 0, fi > 0 /
"\l00GeV
BOO _ Charged LSP f \ =
/
600
400
/ ^ T
200
OGeV
\
):
i {
20p CeV.
/ y ^ No EWSB
V \ -
-
400
S00
m0
(GeV)
Figure 4: A contour plot of 1mx — THA in the m o - m i / 2 plane for tan 0 = 50, A = 0 and fi > 0. The region 'Charged LSP' is excluded because the lighter stau is the LSP in this region. In the region 'No EWSB', the electroweak symmetry breaking does not occur.
279 deviation of fiexpailsion from fiexact is about 10 %, differs from the pole region (i.e. the zero of the quantity 2mx - TTIA) in m 0 by about 150 GeV. Despite of this difference, we still have a sizable error of 10 % in the expansion result, as we have seen in Fig. 3 (b). In Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, we find 5-10 % difference even away from the pole. Thus the expansion never succeeds to approximate the exact result within the accuracy of 5 %. This implies t h a t the coefficient of the next order ex 2 in the expansion (8) has the same order with the b coefficient c/b « 0(1). 5
Conclusions
We have presented results of precise calculation of neutralino relic density in the minimal supergravity model. We have calculated all the contributions to neutralino annihilation cross section analytically. We have compared the exact formula for the thermal average of the annihilation cross section times relative velocity with the expansion formula in terms of the t e m p e r a t u r e . We have confirmed t h a t the expansion formula fails badly near s-channel poles. We have shown t h a t the expansion method causes 5-10 % error even far away from the poles. Acknowledgments The author was supported in p a r t by P P A R C grant P P A / G / S / 1 9 9 8 / 0 0 6 4 6 . References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
T. Nihei, L. Roszkowski and R. Ruiz de Austri, in preparation. P. de Bernardis et.al., Nature 4 0 4 , 955 (2000). A. Balbi et.al, astro-ph/0005124. W. Freedman, Phys. Rep. 3 3 3 , 13 (2000). For reviews on the minimal supergravity model, see for instance, H.P. Nilles, Phys. Rep. 1 1 0 , 1 (1984); P. Nath, R. Arnowitt and A.H. Chamseddine, Applied N = 1 Supergravity, World Scientific, Singapore (1984). 6. J. Ellis, J.S. Hagelin, D.V. Nanopoulos, K A . Olive and M. Srednicki, Nucl. Phys. B 2 3 8 , 453 (1984). 7. For reviews on calculations of the relic density, see for instance, E.W. Kolb and M.S. Turner, The Early Universe, Addison-Wesley (1990); G. J u n g m a n , M. Kamionkowski and K. Griest, Phys. Rep. 2 6 7 , 195 (1996). 8. K.A. Olive, D. Schramm a n d G. Steigman, Nucl. Phys. B 1 8 0 , 497 (1981).
280
9. M. Srednicki, R. Watkins and K.A. Olive, Nucl. Phys. B 310, 693 (1988). 10. P. Gondolo and G. Gelmini, Nucl. Phys. B 360, 145 (1991). 11. H. Goldberg, Phys. Rev. Lett. 50, 1419 (1983). 12. K. Griest and D. Seckel, Phys. Rev. D 43, 3191 (1991). 13. S. Mizuta and M. Yamaguchi, Phys. Lett. B 298, 120 (1993). 14. J. Edsjo and P. Gondolo, Phys. Rev. D 56, 1879 (1997). 15. J. Ellis, T. Falk, K.A. Olive and M. Srednicki, Astropart. Phys. 13, 181 (2000). 16. J.L. Lopez, D.V. Nanopoulos and K. Yuan, Phys. Rev. D 48, 2766 (1993). 17. K. Griest, M. Kamionkowski, and M.S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 41, 3565 (1990). 18. J. Ellis, L. Roszkowski and Z. Lalak, Phys. Lett. B 245, 545 (1990); K.A. Olive and M. Srednicki, Nucl. Phys. B 355, 208 (1991). 19. M. Drees and M. Nojiri, Phys. Rev. D 47, 376 (1993). 20. A. Djouadi, J.-L. Kneur and G. Moultaka, the code available on the web at http://www.lpm.univ-montp2.fr:7082/~kneur/suspect.html. 21. H. Baer and M. Brhlik, Phys. Rev. D 53, 597 (1996).
MICROLENSING B Y N O N - C O M P A C T ( N O N - B A R Y O N I C ) OBJECTS (NEUTRALINO STARS): THEORY A N D POSSIBLE I N T E R P R E T A T I O N OF OBSERVATIONAL DATA ALEXANDER F. ZAKHAROV Institute of Theoretical and Experimental Physics, B. Cheremushkinskaya, Moscow, 117259, Russia E-mail: [email protected]
25,
Microlensing distant stars by non-compact objects such as neutralino stars is considered. Recently Gurevich and Zybin considered the objects as microlenses. Using the non-singular density distribution we analyse microlensing by non-compact objects. We obtain the analytical solutions of the gravitational lens equation and the analytical expression for the amplification factor of the gravitational lens. We show that using the model of microlensing by non-compact objects it is possible to interpret microlensing event candidates having two typical maximums of light curves which are usually interpreted as binary microlenses.
1
Introduction
The first results of observations of microlensing which were presented in the papers 1>2'3 have discovered a phenomenon, predicted in the papers. 4 ' 5 The basics of microlensing theory and observational data are given in the reviews 6,7,8,9 a n c j m t n e book. io ^ m a t t e r of the gravitational microlens is unknown till now, although the most widespread hypothesis assumes that they are compact dark objects as brown, red or white dwarfs. Nevertheless, they could be presented by another objects, in particular, an existence of the dark objects consisting of the supersymmetrical weakly interacting particles (neutralino) has been recently discussed in the papers. u ' 1 2 The authors showed that the stars could be formed on the early stages of the Universe evolution and to be stable during cosmological timescale. Using the singular model distribution microlensing by non-compact lenses were analysed in the papers. 13'14>15 The geometric optics is used in our model and effects connected with diffraction and mutual interference of images and analysed in the papers 16>17>18 are neglected.
281
282 2
N o n - s i n g u l a r m o d e l for c o m p a c t m i c r o l e n s e s
We approximate t h e density of distribution mass of a neutralino star in t h e following form PNes(r)=2p0-^-^,
r
2
(1)
where r is t h e current value of a distant from stellar center, p0 is a mass density of a neutralino star for a b o u n d a r y of a core (or for a distance rc from a center), rc is a radius of a core. So we use the nonsingular isothermal sphere model (or the model of an isothermal sphere with a core). T h e dependence is approximation of the dependence which has been considered in t h e paper, 8 where the authors considered the model of non-compact object with a core. It is clear t h a t the singular (degenerate) dependence is the limiting dependence of (1) for rc -> 0. So, it is not difficult t o obtain surface density mass, according t o expression (1)
£ ( 0 = Wo0ir?2c /
— ,.„
Jo
— , „d/i -an = = 4p 4po—, , L9 0
c
atan—. . atan-
In t h e case, if R0 3> £, then E ( f ) — • 27rpo _ 7^ fi ^=- In t h a t case the lens equation has the following form
ff=%rZ-Dd,aNeS&,
(2)
i->d
where Ds is a distance from the source t o the observer, Dd is a distance from the gravitational lens t o the observer, Dds ia a distance from the source t o the gravitational lens, vectors (ff, £) define a deflection on the plane of the source and the lens, respectively
«^) = JR2dS--^WZ1--
(3)
We calculate the microlens mass 2
Mx = 8irp0r
c
rRx r2dr / — - = 8irp0r2c(Rx
R - r c a t a n — ) « 8np0r2Rx.
(4)
We use characteristic value of a radius r c , corresponding the microlens "mass" Mx = 8np0r2Rx, thus we obtain lens equation in the dimensionless form. We
283
introduce t h e dimensionless variables by t h e following way x=~,
y=—, Vo
rc Ecr =
,
k(x) =
"
Vo = rc—-, Dd
,
(5)
d2x'k(x')
a(x) = -
—.
As we supposed that surface density is an axial symmetric function then the equation of the gravitational lens may be written in the scalar form 19,10 y = x — a(x) = x
,
mix) — 2 /
x
x'dx'k(x').
Jo
We remind, that we have the following expression for the function k(x) k{x) =
k0
2-jrporo Scr
G DdDds c2 Ds
2TTMX
rcRx
k0
n AGMX DdDds 4rcRx c2 Ds
Hence, the lens equation has the following form y = x-D
n R\ 4rcRx
10
,
(6)
where D — 2fco3
Analysis of the gravitational lens equation
We will show that gravitational lens equation has only one solution if D < 2 and have three solutions if D > 2 and y > yCT (we consider gravitational lens equation for y > 0), where ycr is a local maximal value of right hand of Eq. (6). In order to illustrate the analytical relationships obtained in the previous section, we show in Fig.l the right hand side of the gravitational lens equation for different values of the parameter D. The values xcr and yCT for D > 2 characterize the position of the local maximum of this function. It is possible to show that we determine the value xCT which corresponds to y„ using the following expression 2D - 1 - V4D + 1
2
<
=
7T
.
(7)
284
Figure 1. The right hand side of the gravitational lens equation for various values of the parameter D.
It is easy to see that according to (7) x2r > 0 if and only if D > 2 and „ -v/l + x%r — 1 ya = xa-DX£ ,
(8)
If we choose xCT < 0 then ycr > 0 So, if D < 2 then gravitational lens equation has only one solution for (y > 0), if D > 2 then gravitational lens equation has one solution (if y > ycr), three distinct solutions (if y < yCT), one single solution and one double solution (if y = yCI). It is possible to show that gravitational lens equation is equivalent to the following equation x3 - 2yx2 - (D2 - y2 - 2D)x - 2yD = 0,
(9)
jointly with the inequality x2 - yx + D > 0.
(10)
Thus it is possible to obtain the analytical solutions of gravitational lens equation by the well-known way. We perform z — x — 2j//3 and obtain incomplete equation of third degree z3 + pz + q = 0,
(11)
285 2 y2 and „i q _ _ y fy^2- - D(D + 1) , so we have the where p = 2D - Dl 22 - ?= -?-
O \ y
o
y
following expression for the discriminant
Q=
(f ) 3 + (I)' = %j [-y4 + y 2 ( 2 j ° 2 + 10Z? " 1} + D(2 ~ DW •
(12)
If Q > 0 then Eq. (11) has unique real solution (therefore the gravitational lens equation (6) has unique real solution). We use Cardan expression for the solution -q/2+y/Q+y-q/2-y/Q
+ 2y/3.
(13)
We suppose the case D > 2. If y > ycr then the gravitational lens equation has unique solution. If Q > 0 then we use the expression (13) for the solution. If Q < 0 then we have the following expression x = 2^cos
^±^L+2y/2,,
(fc = 0,l,2)
(14)
where cosa =
q
2x/rW3F
,
(15)
and we select only one solution which corresponds to the inequality (10) which corresponds to k = 0 in (14) because if the gravitational lens equation has only one solution then we have a positive solution x for a positive value of impact parameter y therefore there is the inequality x > y which is easy to see from (8). It is possible to check that maximal solution of (9) corresponds to k — 0 therefore the solution is the solution of (8). If V < 2/cr then the gravitational lens equation has three distinct solutions and we use the Eqs. (14-15) to obtain the solutions. We consider now the case D < 2. We know that the gravitational lens equation has unique solution for the case. If Q > 0 then we use the expression (13) for the solution. If Q < 0 then we have the following expressions (14-15) and we select only one solution which corresponds to the inequality (10) which also corresponds to k = 0 as in the previous case. It is known that magnification for gravitational lens solution Xk is defined by the following expression (J-k
1
£>(vTT^-i)\ L | ^ x / T T ^ - i X
j \
X
1
D
i_ VTT:
, (16)
286 5.0
3.0
1.0 -3.0
-0.0
3.0
Figure 2. The light curve corresponds microlensing by noncompact object for D = 1.9.
so the total magnification is equal
Aot(y) = Y, Vk,
(17)
where the summation is taken over all solutions of gravitational lens equation for a fixed value y. 4
Two types of light curves
Let us consider examples of light curves for various parameter values. Fig. 2 shows a light curve corresponding to microlensing by non-compact body for D = 1.9. In this case the light curve qualitatively resembles the light curve for a compact (Schwarzschild) microlens, as well as noncompact microlens whose density distribution is described by a singular isothermal sphere model when rc = 0. 13 Fig. 3 shows a light curve corresponding to microlensing by a non-compact body when D = 4. When the source has a finite size characterized by the radii Rs = 0.01,0.03 and 0.1, the light curve undergoes a change: its maxima decrease with increasing Rs (fig. 4). In this case, the light curve has two maxima and is qualitatively similar to light curves observed in the MACHO 20 and OGLE 21 experiments (see fig. 5). Such light curves have usually been interpreted as the result of microlensing by binary lens. 9 , e However, they could be associated with microlensing by a single compact gravitational microlens if the external gravitational field is taken into account. 15
287 80.0
60.0
40.0
20.0
0.0 -0.6
-0.2
0.2
0.6
Figure 3. The light curve corresponds microlensing by noncompact object for D = 4. The light curve resembles the light curve for OGLE # 7 event. 60.0
40.0
20.0
0.0 -0.6
-0.2
0.2
0.6
Figure 4. Light curve corresponding to microlensing by a non-compact object for D = 4 and different source radii, namely Ra = 0.01, 0.03 and 0.1.
5
Conclusions
The light curve corresponding to non-compact microlens is shown in Fig.3 (for D = 4). The finite maximal value of the amplification in Fig.3 is connected with a calculation of amplification for a finite set of times and if we consider the
288
750
800
850
1100
1150
J.D. hel. - 2448000
Figure 5. Microlensing event candidate: the OGLE # 7 event, which is often interpreted using a model with binary compact microlens. 2 1 The regions a and b of the caustic intersections are shown on an enlarged scale in the two insets. The MACHO collaboration obtained several dozen additional data points to the OGLE observations) in the two wavelenght bands: these data demonstrated the achromatic character of the light curve.
amplification on the all interval then the maximal value of the amplification must be infinite. It is easy to see that the light curves resemble the light curve for OGLE # 7 event candidate that is usually interpreted by binary lens model. 21 We recall that the appearance of two types of light curves for a toy density distribution model for noncompact object was discussed by Ossipov and Kurian. 23 More detailed analysis of the nonsingular model and its consequences are presented in the paper. 24 Detailed discussion of these degenerate properties of the singular model is given in the paper. 25 Acknowledgements I would like to thank M.V. Sazhin for valuable discussions of various aspects of microlensing. This work was partially supported by the Russian Foundation for Basic Research (project # 00-02-16108). References 1. C. Alcock et al., Nature 365, 621 (1993). 2. E. Aubourg et al., Nature 365, 623 (1993).
289 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
A. Udalski et al., ApJ 426, L69 (1994). A.V. Byalko, AZh 46, 998 (1969). B. Paczinsky, ApJ 304, 1 (1986). B. Paczinsky, preprint astro-ph/9604011 (1996). E.Roulet, S. Mollerach, preprint astro-ph/9603119 (1996). A.V. Gurevich, K.P. Zybin, V.A. Sirota, Uspekhi Phys. Nauk 167, 913 (1997). A.F. Zakharov, M.V. Sazhin, Uspekhi Phys. Nauk 168, 1041 (1998). A.F. Zakharov, Gravitational Lenses and Microlenses, (Janus, Moscow, 1997, in Russian). A.V. Gurevich, K.P. Zybin, Phys. Lett. A 208, 276 (1995). A.V. Gurevich, K.P. Zybin, V.A. Sirota, Phys. Lett. A 214, 232 (1996). A.F. Zakharov, M.V. Sazhin, Journ. Exper. Theor. Phys. 110, 1921 (1996). A.F. Zakharov, M.V. Sazhin, Journ. Exper. Theor. Phys. Lett. 63, 894 (1996). A.F. Zakharov, M.V. Sazhin, Pis'ma v Astron. Zhurn. 23, 403 (1997). A.F. Zakharov, Astron. Astrophys. Trans. 5, 85 (1994). A.F. Zakharov, Astron. Lett. 20, 359 (1994). A.F. Zakharov, A.V. Mandzhos, Journ. Exper. Theor. Phys. 104, 3249 (1993). P. Schneider, J. Ehlers, E.E. Falco, Gravitational Lenses, (Springer, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York, 1992). C. Alcock et al., preprint astro-ph/9606165 (1996). A. Udalski et al., Ap J 436, L103 (1994). V.A. Belokurov, M.V. Sazhin, Phys. Lett. A 239, 215 (1998). D.L. Ossipov, V.E. Kurian, Phys. Lett. A 223, 157 (1996). A.F. Zakharov, Astron. Reports 43, 325 (1999). A.F. Zakharov, Phys. Lett. A 250 67 (1998).
A FEASIBILITY STUDY FOR DARK MATTER SEARCH U S I N G CsI(Tl) CRYSTAL
H.J. AHN, S.K. KIM, T.Y. KIM, I.H. PARK, E.I. WON Physics Department, Seoul National University, Seoul 151-742, Korea M.J. HWANG, H.J. KIM, S.Y. KIM, T.H. KIM, Y.J. KWON Physics Department, Yonsei University, Seoul 120-749, Korea W.K. KANG, Y.D. KIM, E.Y. OH Physics Department, Sejong University, Seoul 143-747, Korea E-mail: [email protected]
Physics Department,
Physics Department,
S.Y. CHOI Chonbuk National University, Chonju, 561-756 Korea M.H. LEE University of Maryland, College Park, MD 20742, USA
T W . KIM Disposal R&D Group, Korea Electric Power Corporation, Daejon 305-600, Korea We report a feasibility study of CsI(Tl) scintillator to use for an experiment of dark matter search. The intrinsic backgrounds from the internal radioisotopes of CsI(Tl) are studied. The photomultiplier tubes matching better for CsI(Tl) has been studied. We also investigated the pulse shape discrimination power of this scintillator using the low energy alpha source. The overall sensitivities expected with this scintillator for future dark matter experiment is estimated.
1
Motivation
Scintillators have been widely used in the experiments for the direct dark matter search 1 . Among them Nal(Tl) , CaF(Eu), Liquid Xe have been used for the previous experiments. Recently DAM A experiment 2 reported a positive signal for a WIMP (Weakly Interacting Massive Particle) interaction with nuclei in Nal(Tl) crystal detector. CsI(Tl) crystal is another interesting scintillator because it has a high scintillation efficiency and a strong pulse shape discrimination power. In this report, we describe the studies on the feasibility of utilizing CsI(Tl) crystal for a WIMP search experiment. The main disadvantages of Csl crystal are the high intrinsic backgrounds from Cesium radioisotopes and smaller number of photoelectrons due to the mismatch between emission 290
291
spectra and the photocathode sensitivities. We studied CsI(Tl) crystals specially on these two points to improve the detector characteristics, so as to have a similar or better sensitivity than the present WIMP search experiments. 2
Background measurements of Csl crystals
To use Csl crystals in ultra low background experiment such as dark matter search 7 ' 8 or neutrino experiment 9 , it is essential to reduce the intrinsic backgrounds of the crystal to the required levels of each experiments. The main intrinsic backgrounds in Csl crystals are conjectured to be due to the Cesium radioisotopes of 137Cs and 13ACs . l37Cs (t1/2 = 30.07 y, Q=1175.6 keV) is the beta-emitter decaying with 95% branching ratio to the meta-stable state(i 1 / 2 = 2.55 minutes) of 137Ba at 661.6 keV state. Therefore the beta electron and the subsequent gamma is not correlated and the backgrounds below 20 keV is significant. l3ACs (i 1 / 2 = 2.065 y, Q=2058.7 keV) is also a beta emitter, but the subsequent gammas are correlated with the beta electron. Therefore the backgrounds due to the 13iCs is not significant at low energies. Another significant background could be 87Rb since Rubidium is very close to Cesium in chemical properties. 87 Rb (ti/2 = 4.75 x 1010y , Q=282.3 keV, 27.8% relative abundance of Rubidium) beta decays to the ground state with 100 % branching ratio, and will generate significant backgrounds at low energies even with small contamination. The expected background spectra in a CsI(Tl) crystal with a size of 10cm x 10cm x 30cm due to 137Cs , 13iCs , and 87Rb are simulated with a Geant3 Monte-Carlo program. 25 identical detectors are assumed to be in 5X5 configuration, and only inner 9 detectors are counted, and assumed the outer layer detectors work as Compton veto counters specially for 13iCs background rejection. Figure 1 shows the expected count rates in the unit of cpd (counts/kg day keV). The background rate below 20 keV energy region is set to be about 0.3 cpd for each radioisotopes totalling to be around lcpd. The contamination levels for such a low background rates should be below O.OOlBq/kg, O.lBq/kg, and 0.2ppb for 137Cs , 134Cs , and 87Rb respectively. There are very few measurements on the contamination level of these isotopes in Csl crystals until now. Texono9 group cited 137Cs contamination in CsI(Tl) crystal less than 0.0128 Bq/kg from the high purity germinium detection, which is much less than one of previous data. Also 87Rb contamination level is set to be less than 9ppb with mass spectrometry by the same group. We measured the background spectra of large CsI(Tl) crystal detectors to obtain 137Cs and 13ACs contamination level at low background environment, and also with HPGe(High Purity Germanium) detector. The crystals were in
292
0.8 0.9 Energy (MeV)
Figure 1. Background count rates expected from 10cm x 30cm Csl crystals in 5X5 configurations
137
Cs
A
Cs , and
87
Rb
for 10cm x
a size of about 5 — 6cm x 5 — 6cm x 30cm. Two 9265B 3" photomultiplier tubes(PMT) were attached at both sides, and the discrimination threshold was set at single photoelectron level. At least 2 photoelectrons are required for each PMT, so the total number of photoelectrons for the hardware trigger was 4. The two PMT signal forms have been digitized with LeCroy digital oscilloscope, and transferred to the PC through GPIB interface. The timing range was 5 usee, and the timing bin was 10 ns. The 1st 1 fisec was used to reject after pulse events in off-line analysis. Our previous study 5 demonstrated that the 6 keV x-rays from 57Co source are cleanly measured with this trigger scheme. The measurements were performed at a site located inside an empty tunnel in a storage water power plant, which is about 400 meter underground, where the muon flux is 1/10000 of that at the ground. The detector was shielded in a simple shielding structure of 2cm copper and 10cm lead layers. We have tested 25 crystals supplied by 3 companies. The normalized background spectra of two typical crystals are shown in Figure 2. The main shapes of the spectra can be explained with the decay of 137Cs , 134Cs , and 87Rb isotopes though there are distinguishing features. The upper spectrum shows a large count rate from the beta decay of 87Rb at low energy, and the bottom spectrum shows the characteristic shapes of the decay from 137 Cs and 13iCs isotopes. The curves in the spectra are the results of fitting
293
with the simulations which include the response of the CsI(Tl) detector to the decays of 137Cs and 134Cs in the energy region of 500-2500 keV. The environmental (extrinsic) background level is not considered here assumed to be small. The contamination level of 87 Kb is also analyzed with ICP-MASS spectrometer for each crystal of two types, and resulted in 20 ppm(a) and < 20 ppb(b) consistent with the measured CsI(Tl) spectra and also with the previous chemical analysis 6 . The Rubidium contents in the crystals depends on the chemical processes in producing the Csl powder. In case of the crystal with high Rubidium contents, the supplier didn't make specail efforts to reduce it 15 ' 6 .
250
500
750
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250 2500 Energy (keV)
250
500
750
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250 2500 Energy (keV)
Figure 2. The background spectra of a 5kg CsI(Tl) crystal in a simple shielding structure.
The 137Cs and 134Cs contamination levels of all detectors tested are shown in the Figure 3. Although there are variations in crystal by crystal by an order of magnitude, the background rates at low energies expected from the contamination level of the three isotopes are too high to perform direct WIMP search experiments. Our preliminary measurements on the commercially available Csl powder shows similar contamination level though it is less. Cesium is obtained mainly from the pollucite ore as Cs2Al2SiiOi2{H20) at
294
T
\14/\ / \l/\ mn
fl Csl37(Bq/kg)
Figure 3. The contamination levels of different suppliers.
137
Cs
and
134
C s . Open and close symbols are for
the mines of Canada, Zimbabwe and Ukraina. It should be interesting to see the contamination level of 137Cs and 134Cs if any in the pollucite ore. At present we are studying the contamination levels in the Csl powder and raw materials in detail. 3
Light yields
The number of photoelectrons from a low energy deposition in Csl crystals is another important issue for the WIMP search experiment. In this respect CsI(Tl) crystal has a disadvantage that the emission spectra don't match well with the normal bialkali photocathodes. We measured the number of photoelectrons with a CsI(Tl) crystal(3cm x 3cm x 3cm) attached to a 3" photomultiplier tubes with different photocathodes. Figure 4 shows the single photoelectron spectra obtained with the events of 6.4 keV energy deposition(left-up corner) and the energy spectra(number of photoelectrons) from 57Co source with a RbCs PMT. For these low energy deposition the photoelectrons are well separated from each other in their arriving time in the signal. The single photoelectron spectrum shows a well separated peak. Table 1 shows the number of photoelectrons for the photons of various energies with a normal bialkali photocathode(9265B PMT) and RbCs photocathode. The number of photoelectrons per keV was about 4.5 and 2.5 with RbCs and normal bialkali
295 Table 1. Number of photoelectrons from each peaks from Numbers in () are the energy resolutions in %. Energy(keV) 6.4 14.4 122.1
57
Co
source for different P M T s .
No. of photoelectrons 9265B RbCs 15.2(35.9) 27.3(29.6) 67.9(21.7) 40.1(26.4) 578(8.12) 375(10.0)
PMT respectively. RbCs photocathode has an enhanced quantum efficiency at around 550 nm region than the normal bialkali photocathode by about factor 3. If we fold the quantum efficiencies14 with the emission spectra of CsI(Tl) crystals, the increase in the number of photoelectrons in case of RbCs photocathodes with respect to normal bialkali tube is found to be 37%, which is consistent with the measurements qualitatively. The quantitative discrepancy between the expectation and measurements at low energies are under investigation.
7000 6000
RbCs Photocathode
5000 4000 3000
VTP*L
2000
X.
1O0O
, , . . , , . . 0.004
O.O06
t^^s^te
0.008
0.O1
0.012
100
200
Cluster size(Arbitrary Unit)
Figure 4. The energy spectra of RbCs P M T with single photoelectron spectrum.
300
400
500
600 n
57
Co
700
(Vc^spe)
source. The inserted graph is the
296 4
Pulse shape discrimination
The pulse shape discrimination(PSD) power of CsI(Tl) crystal has been used at rather high energy even to separate hydrogen isotopes in nuclear and high energy physics experiments. The difference in pulse shapes of various particles is due to the difference of stopping power 13 . There are a few studies on the discrimination power of CsI(Tl) crystal detector at very low energies 7 ' 8 with neutron beam. We have measured the discrimination power between alpha and gamma particles with a CsI(Tl) crystal of size 5cm x 5cm x 5cm. We used a 2WPo alpha source with a continuous energy distribution and various gamma sources. The pulse shape of each signal is parameterized with a single value of mean time, r = 4<^ Ai ' ' . Figure 5 shows the mean time distributions from
E
alpha and gamma sources at different energy ranges. The solid line is a fit 2 for each spectrum with a function of / ( r , w ) = Ti0'1we <'°9,") , where r is the mean time and w is the width of the r distribution. The PSD power dependent on the doping type and concentration is under study now.
Figure 5. Mean time distribution for a, and 7 particles at various energy gates measured with a CsI(Tl) crystal
297
5
Expected sensitivity
We have estimated the sensitivity of CsI(Tl) crystal detector for a direct WIMP search experiment with the scheme of Gaitskell et al. 12 assuming the same quality and quenching factors measured by previous works 7 ' 8 . The WIMP halo parameters were p — 0.3GeV/cm3, v0 = 230km/sec, vesc = 650fcm/sec, and the Helm's form factor was used for Cesium and Iodine nuclei. Figure 6 shows the limits expected with the different background rates( counts/(kev kg day)) and detector masses for spin-independent WIMPnucleon interactions. This simple estimation doesn't include the systematic uncertainties in PSD methods yet. In addition it doesn't include the increase in the quality factor for a large crystal compared with the measurements of small size crystal. Therefore it is a rather optimistic estimation. It should be worth while to improve the qualities of the present Csl crystals for WIMP search experiments to be compared with the recent DAM A experiment.
Figure 6. The limits expected with (a) 100 kg, lOcpd, (b) 100kg, 2cpd, (c)1000kg, 2cpd of CsI(Tl) crystal detector. The threshold is 2 keV in all cases.
6
Conclusion
We have studied the feasibility of CsI(Tl) crystals for a direct WIMP search experiment specially for intrinsic backgrounds and light yields. The 1Z7Cs contamination levels in the present CsI(Tl) crystals are about 0.01 - 0.1 Bq/kg,
298 and the level of 13iCs are 0 - 0.2 Bq/kg. The light yields of 3cm cubic CsI(Tl) crystal with green extended RbCs photocathode was about 4.5 photoelectrons/keV. For a comparable or better experiment than the current Nal(Tl) experiment, the intrinsic background should be reduced more than an order of magnitude and be controlled. Measurements and understanding of the pulse shape discrimination power with large size of crystal is under study. Acknowledgments The authors appreciate the staffs in Korea Electric Power Corporation(KEPCO) for us to use their HPGe detector. The authors acknowledge the financial support by Ministry of Science and Technology through National Creative Research Initiatives(NCRI). This work was partially supported by Korea Research Foundation Grant (1999-015-DP0078). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
G. Jungman et al, Physics Reports 267 195 1996 R. Bernabei et al, Phys. Lett. B 480, 23 (2000) R. Bernabei et al, IL Nuovo Cimento 112 545 1999 CDMS collaboration, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89, 5699 (2000) H.J. Kim et al, NIM A457 471 2001 K. Kazui et al, NIM A394 46 1997 S. Pecourt et al, Astroparticle physics 11 457 1999 V.A. Kudryavtsev et al, NIM A456 272 2001 H.B. Li et al, hep-ex/0001001 2000 R. B. Firestone et al., "Table of Isotopes", 8th Edition, 1997 J.D. Rewin and P.F. Smith, Astroparticle physics 6 87 1996 Gaitskell , Nucl. Phys. B 51, 279 (1996) J.B. Birks, Theory and Practice of Scintillation counter, Pergamon Press , 1964 14. data from Electron Tubes Ltd. 15. private communication with Chemetall company.
INFLATION WITH S U P E R S Y M M E T R Y
BREAKING
L. C O V I Deutsches
Elektronen-Synchrotron E-mail:
DESY, Notkestrasse Germany [email protected]
85, D-22603
Hamburg,
The grand unification scale MQ ~ 10 16 GeV can generate the inflation scale Mj ~ JQ13 —14 Q e v for small inflaton coupling. We show that in this case the scale of supersymmetry breaking, Ms ~ 10 1 0 GeV may dominate the dynamics of the inflationary phase. We study this effect in a hybrid inflation model whose ground state breaks supersymmetry.
1
Introduction
T h e C O B E measurement x of the cosmic microwave background (CMB) anisotropy shows t h a t the scale of inflation Mj has to be lower t h a n the Planck scale, but larger t h a n the electroweak scale. It is therefore clear t h a t low energy supersymmetry may play an important role during inflation. On the other hand we know t h a t supersymmetry is not exact in nature, and t h a t the supersymmetry breaking (SSB), caused by the inflaton displacement from the minimum, can strongly affect the inflationary phase 2 . Models of inflation in a general supergravity framework have been constructed 3 , but it is still very often thought t h a t a globally supersymmetric model with the spontaneous SSB due to the inflaton field is sufficiently accurate to describe the inflationary phase as well as the reheating process, since the low energy SSB terms, which are important in the true vacuum, are suppressed by m3f2/Hj ~ M j / M j during inflation. Here m 3 / 2 — M j / M p is the gravitino mass in the true vacuum and Hi — M] /(\/?>Mp) the Hubble parameter in the inflationary era. As we shall see in the following, this is not always the case. We will present an explicit model where supersymmetry is broken at all stages, studied in detail in 4 . On the one hand, in such a case the SSB sector is influenced by the inflaton dynamics, and the true vacuum, with the present SSB particle spectrum, is reached only at the end of inflation. On t h e other hand, also the inflationary potential is modified by the presence of the "low energy" SSB terms. This modification turns out to be very i m p o r t a n t in the case of a very weakly coupled inflaton field.
299
300 2
The model
We will consider the hybrid inflation scenario based on the superpotential W = WG + Ws = AT (Ml
- Y,2) + M2S (/3 + S) ,
(1)
where T, E and S are chiral superfields a . The first term of (1) has traditionally been used 5 to break a global or local symmetry in supersymmetric theories. Apart from being the simplest choice giving hybrid inflation 6 , it has also the advantage of avoiding large supergravity corrections in the case of a canonical Kahler potential, thanks to the linearity in the inflaton field T. In (1) higher powers of T can be forbidden by R-invariance. In order to break supersymmetry, we add also the second t e r m Ws, the Polonyi potential 7 , where Ms is the SSB scale and is related to the gravitino mass m 3 / 2 — M j (we will use units with Planck mass Mp — 1 if not explicitly s t a t e d ) . For a gravitino mass of order the E W scale, one needs Ms ~ 1 0 1 0 - 1 1 GeV. T h e Polonyi superpotential is also linear in S and in the limit of global supersymmetry the potential is perfectly flat. Hence, early a t t e m p t s have been made to identify the Polonyi field with the inflaton 8 . However, the supergravity corrections turn out to be too large and to spoil the flatness of the potential. T h e constant /? in the Polonyi potential is completely irrelevant in the global supersymmetric limit, but it plays a key role in the supergravity framework. There it breaks R-invariance, and is adjusted t o have a global m i n i m u m with vanishing cosmological constant. As we shall see it also may play an imp o r t a n t role during inflation. Our conclusions will generally apply to any SSB effective potential where the constant and the linear t e r m d o m i n a t e in an expansion in powers of S. Note, t h a t the superpotential (1) is just a variant of the O'Raifeartaigh model 9 . This becomes apparent after a change of variables. Defining
$=
_i^_
+
_^_
*= _^
1ZL_
(2)
a We will consider a singlet S, but all our conclusions can be easily generalized to the case when T interacts with charged fields by the substitution T,2 —> XX, with X(X) charged under a local U(l), or even S 2 —>• Tr | X2 |, with X belonging to the adjoint representation of a non abelian gauge group. In such case an additional D-term would be present, but it can be made to vanish during inflation with additional constraints on the X(X) multiplet(s).
301 with f = M | / ( A M Q ) ~ m3/2/Hi, W =
A
yrr^
one obtains
Ae =*E2 + MJ/3
$(^(i+C2)-^2
yrre
(3)
In this basis, the inflation T and the Polonyi field S are on the same footing, so t h a t it would be n a t u r a l to identify the inflaton with some field in the SSB sector. 2.1
The scalar
potential
Let us consider now the potential coming from (1). T h e supergravity scalar potential is given by 10 V = eK
dW
3\W\7
+ z*W
(4)
where a sum over all fields z,- is implied and we have chosen for all fields canonical Kahler potential, K = J ^ |z;| 2 . In the limit of global supersymmetry Mp —> oo we have V
Mi + \2 Ml
+ A 2 |E| 2 |T| 2 ]
(5)
and the vacuum corresponds to (T) = 0, (|E|) = MQ, while (5) is undetermined. We have computed in 4 the modifications due to the supergravity terms and they correspond just to small shifts of the v.e.v. of the T and E fields and of the Polonyi field, compared to the global supersymmetric limit. Also the constant /? has to be slightly readjusted to keep a vanishing cosmological constant. We could then be t e m p t e d to think t h a t also for the inflationary phase, the supergravity corrections are practically negligible. Let us see if this really happens. Considering t h a t during inflation E is driven to zero by the large v.e.v. of T, the potential is very simply computed in the basis $ , "if. We have at tree level, neglecting t e r m s of order £ 2 , V
~K l\2
\ M" M2
l-2V2Hp
+ \x\2
V2£f3 9 6)
where £ = jj^fr, X denotes the scalar component, of the chiral multiplet ^ and ip is the real part of the scalar part of $ ~ T. Note t h a t we are assuming t h a t ^ C l since otherwise the potential would not be flat enough to inflate. This happens as long as Ms
302 and we will see later t h a t this is not only consistent with but also required by the C O B E normalization. A one loop correction to the potential is also present, coming from the SSB due to the inflaton field and S. Again up to order £ we have AV
A4M4
2,„2 1 - yfefo3) log 2AV
-oW.f
(7)
where /i is the renormalization scale. We see clearly the "spontaneous SSB" as the first term, while all the rest depends on £ oc rriziz/HiIn both expressions (6) and (7), it is straightforward to take the limit of global supersymmetry, and the potential reduces then to the inflationary potential proposed in n , Vsusy
3
2L
\2M%
8TT
2
2,-2 2A-V
log
0{MG/^)
(8)
T h e inflationary phase
In general inflation is supposed to start at large values of T, where both the masses of S and S are large and we can expect t h a t this fields are stabilized at the origin. Inflation then ends at
\2M%
1 - 2^i
/3 f-
A2
+' 8TT
2
log b
/2AV \
/i2
+
(9)
We see t h a t three terms compete and depending on the parameter A, £ and MQ, different regimes can be realized. We find t h a t the first contribution dominates, i.e. the global supersymmetric picture applies, as long as A>
4TT^
(3 ip > 3 . 5
M MG
1/3
(10)
substituting j5 ~ 2 — -y/3 and
303 to the end of inflation at
The C O B E normalization
l
requires then
where the * indicates t h a t the potential and its derivatives have to be evaluated at the epoch of horizon exit for the scale observed by C O B E . Defining TV, as the number of e-folds at such epoch, the corresponding inflaton value is given by ip*/Mp ~ Xy/N* /(2n2) and we obtain the relation 2
G
=
5.9 x 1 0 - 5
5
VK
where the final result, is computed assuming AT* = 5 0 . So we have a consistent picture for MQ ~ 3 X 10~ 3 , A < 3 X 10~ 3 and Hj ~ 10~ 8 (always in Planck units). T h e scale of inflation is naturally given by a MQ of the order of the G r a n d Unification scale. Moreover due to the small coupling the observable last 60-50 e-folds correspond to a scale
M < (2V2£/?) 1 / 3 .
(14)
So for a critical value MQ less t h a n this value, in the last phase of inflation the linear term is dominating and the slow roll conditions are
'=K^) ,=4£,/,, ( i -^ + -) <1 ' ri=—
V"
3 = -V2 + . - ^ l ,
and they are easily satisfied for small value of £ and <j> < 1.
(l5) (16)
304 In this case the inflationary phase is driven by a scalar potential similar to the Polonyi one, but with the wrong constant /3, i.e. while the supersymmetry breaking scale during inflation is given by \ll2Ma, the constant, is still related to the SSB scale in the true vacuum Ms- T h e hierarchy between the two scales is exactly what makes the potential flat enough, contrary to the simple expectation for the Polonyi potential with only one relevant scale. Note also t h a t the potential is asymmetric and we need an initial value \T\ (or \4>\) ^> 0 with opposite sign to fl to realize an hybrid inflation model and not be trapped in a false vacuum at large \T\. In fact we have t h a t the "Polonyi minimum" for small £ is given by <j>min — ( 4 A / 2 ^ / 9 ) 1 / 3 ~ 9.12 x 10~ 3 . The e-folding number while the linear term dominates is given by \M2
1
"W=i7f^'y-y'l=2V2(2-WM~MO)-
(1?)
Since ( < l a huge number of e-folding is generated around ip ~ MQ- Then also the cosmologically relevant scales leave the horizon while the linear term dominates and a strong constraint on £ is given by the C O B E normalization (12), this time independently of N*: \Ml ^ =
Ml ^
o = 1.5x10-3.
(18)
which means ^2 — £ = 5 0 M s = 5 x 10~ 7 . So inflation can indeed take place and again a large hierarchy between the inflationary scale and the gravitino mass is required by the C O B E normalization. T h e inflationary phase driven by the linear t e r m is particularly interesting since it gives practically a scale invariant spectrum; computing the spectral index we have in fact from eq. (14): n - 1 = 3
(19)
The model predicts therefore n = 1 with a quite high precision, while in the usual supersymmetric limit, discussed previously, one has n ~ 0.98. Future satellite experiments will therefore be able to distinguish between the models. Finally if the critical value is larger t h a n (14), the quartic term dominates the potential, and the model reproduces the one studied already in 1 2 ; in this case the prediction of the spectral index coincide with (19), but with opposite bound for
> 2 . 4 x 10~ 4 .
(20)
In Figure 1 we summarize the three different inflationary regimes in the plane A - MG for a specific choice of the SSB scale Ms = 1.4 x 10 1 0 GeV.
305
10 MQ
(GeV)
Figure 1. The parameter space of the three regimes of hybrid inflation in the plane A — M g for Ms = 1.4 X 10 10 GeV: the solid line is defined by the COBE normalization for the full potential, while the dashed lines refer to the approximate potentials obtained keeping the single dominant term in each regime.
4
Conclusions
We have studied in detail a simple model presenting both an hybrid inflationary phase and softly broken supersymmetry in the true vacuum. We find that if the inflaton is a singlet with a linear superpotential and the SSB can be parameterized by the Polonyi model with vanishing cosmological constant, linear terms in the inflaton fields are generated due to the constant term in the superpotential. Such terms appear already at the tree level and are dangerous since they in general spoil the first flatness condition, e
306 possible regimes are present depending if the tree level linear term dominates over the q u a n t u m corrections: for A ~ 1 0 - 3 the usual picture of hybrid inflation applies, but already at A ~ 1 0 - 4 the linear term is no more negligible and can be used to drive the inflationary phase. In such a scenario the spectral index is exactly scale dependent since the deviation from n = 1 is of the order M j . Then for large MQ the quartic term starts dominating. We mention t h a t in the case of a charged inflaton field, or in general when the superpotential contains only second and higher powers of the inflaton, no linear t e r m is generated by the susy breaking sector, and the first correction is given by a mass term. Then inflation can be realized even with H ~ m 3 /2 if the inflaton mass is sufficiently suppressed by some cancelations or by the running mass mechanism 13 . Acknowledgments I am grateful and indebted to Wilfried Buchmiiller and David Delepine with whom this work has been done. I would like to t h a n k J. E. Kim and the organizers of COSMO-2000 for the exciting workshop and KIAS (Korean Institute of Advanced Studies) for local support during and after the conference. References 1. E. F. Bunn and M. White, Astrophys. J. 4 8 0 , 6 (1997). 2. E. J. Copeland, A. Ft. Liddle, D. H. Lyth, E. D. Stewart, D. Wands, Phys. Rev. D 4 9 , 6410 (1994). 3. D. H. Lyth, A. Riotto, Phys. Rep. 3 1 4 , 1 (1999) and references therein. 4. W. Buchmiiller, L. Covi and D. Delepine, Phys. Lett. B 4 9 1 , 183 (2000). 5. P. Fayet, Nucl. Phys. B 90, 104 (1975). 6. A. D. Linde, Phys. Lett. B 2 5 9 , 38 (1991). 7. J. Polonyi, Budapest preprint KFKI-93 (1977). 8. B. A. Ovrut and P. J. Steinhardt, Phys. Lett. B 1 3 3 , 161 (1983). 9. L. O'Raifeartaigh, Nucl. Phys. B 96, 331 (1975). 10. H. P. Nilles, Phys. Rep. 1 1 0 , 1 (1984). 11. G. Dvali, Q. Shafi and R. Schaefer, Phys. Rev. Lett. 7 3 , 1886 (1994). 12. A. D. Linde, Phys. Rev. D 4 9 , 748 (1994); D. Roberts, A. R. Liddle and D. H. Lyth, Phys. Rev. D 5 1 , 4122 (1995). 13. E. D. Stewart Phys. Lett. B 3 9 1 , 34 (1997) and Phys. Rev. D 56, 2019 (1997); L. Covi and D. H. Lyth, Phys. Rev. D 5 9 , 063515 (1999); L. Covi, D. H. Lyth and L. Roszkowski, Phys. Rev. D 6 0 , 023509 (1999); L. Covi, Phys. Rev. D 6 0 , 023513 (1999).
TESTING A N INFLATION MODEL W I T H A MASSIVE N O N M I N I M A L S C A L A R FIELD HYERIM NOH Korea Astronomy E-mail:
Observatory, Taejeon, [email protected]
Korea
The power spectra of the scalar- and tensor-type structures generated in an inflation model based on a massive nonminimally coupled scalar field are derived. The contributions of these structures to the anisotropy of the cosmic microwave background radiation are compared with the four-year COBE DMR data. The constraints on the expansion rate during the inflation period, and the relative amount of the tensor-type contribution to the quadrupole of the CMBR temperature anisotropy are provided.
1
Introduction
Inflation scenario now seems to have its firm presence in the theoretical study of the early universe preceding the radiation dominated big bang era. The main necessity of the inflation stems from the natural mechanism which provides the origin of the large scale structures in the paradigm of spatially homogeneous and isotropic world model. If one accepts the presence of inflation and its ability to generate seeds for the large scale structures, one can use the data of the observed structures to constrain the model parameters for the inflation models. These days, the trouble is not the lack of plausible inflation models but the presence of too many of them mostly based on toy models which are specially designed for the successful inflation and some based on hopeful theories for the physics in high-energy regime, i.e., the lack of standard model. However, often the observational constraints are strong enough to exclude models based on some promising high-energy physics; like the ones based on the grand unification, the supersymmetry, the low-energy effective action of superstring theory, etc. Although there are attempts to constrain the model parameters of simple models based on a single field potential in Einstein gravity, in the present situation without agreeable theory of the high-energy physics, the other common trend is to investigate the proposed inflation models case by case, to constrain or to exclude them using the structure formation processes and the observational data. Recently, we notice growing interests in the roles of generalized versions of gravity theories in reconstructing the early universe scenario. These otherthan Einstein gravity theories naturally arise either from attempts to quantize gravity or as the low-energy limits of the unified theories including gravity. 307
308
We have been investigating the structure formation processes in generalized gravity theories, and presented a unified way of analyzing quantum generation and classical evolution processes of the scalar- and tensor-type structures applicable in a wide class of generalized gravity theories 1 ' 2 ' 3 - 4 . In the following contribution to the proceedings we will make an application to an inflation model based on a nonminimally coupled massive scalar field proposed in 5 and will derive constraints on the model using COBE-DMR data 6 . 2
Nonminimally coupled scalar field theory
We consider a Lagrangian £
£=
(1)
where K2 = 8-Km~2. This is a Lagrangian of the massive nonminimally coupled scalar field in the original-frame. The unified analyses of the quantum generation and the classical evolution processes of the scalar- and tensor-type structures in a general gravity context including the above one were presented in 3 ' 4 . In the following we will apply the general results in 3 ' 4 . By assuming the strong coupling condition K2\£\(f>2 3> 1, we obtain the following background solutions (we consider £ < 0 case) 5 a«e™,
Hj=
,
(1
"4e)W
V-2£(l-6£)(3-160
t"^'
a
(2)
^iT^hwr
This solution shows a near exponentially expanding period which can provide a plausible inflationary era. In the large-scale limit, the general power spectra based on vacuum expectation values in eq. (16) of 3 and eq. (32) of 4 lead to
lc2{k)
*'* ~ ]5[ **- ~ 2^j0| r(3/2) i-4* \T) 3/2-vr
w/2 KH 1 I > T ) [/ "T/l % | 'V d 2 «e ~~ y/2it y/l - K ^ 2 r(3/2)
l
r
i
C l W | (3)
'
,M
,.,,2 (4)
309 where from eqs. (14,21) of
3
and eqs. (8,11) of
^'
= I/T=
4
we have (5)
20^40'
£ indicates the two polarization states of the gravitational wave. £ = 0 reproduces the minimally coupled limit; Cj(fc) and cu(k) are constrained by the quantization conditions | c 2 | 2 - |ci| 2 = 1 and \c(2\2 - \cn\2 = 1. In general, the power spectra generally depend on the scale k through the vacuum choices which fix Cj and c « . If we assume t h e simplest vacuum states c 2 = 1 and C(2 = 1 the power spectra show power-law dependence on k. In l it is shown t h a t tpg^ and Cap are generally conserved independently of changing gravity [in our case, from the non-minimally coupled gravity t o the minimally coupled one], changing potential, and changing equation of state, as long as the scale remains in the large-scale; this applies to the case of the observationally relevant scales before the second horizon crossing in the m a t t e r dominated era. Using these conserved properties, we can identify the power spectra based on t h e vacuum expectation value during t h e inflation era [PipS4, and VQ ] with the classical power spectra based on the spatial average \Pvs4, a n d 'Peep]- Then, we have the same results in eqs. (3,4) for Vlfi54> and Vca0- Thus, eqs. (3,4) remain valid even in the m a t t e r dominated era. Using eq. (60) of 3 and below eq. (52) of 4 , the spectral indices of the scalar- and tensor-type structures are given as ns — 1 = 3 — 2i>s and nr = 3 — 2VT- If we ignore the vacuum dependences in the inflation era (i.e., choosing the simplest vacuum state), we have n
5
- l =n
T
= ^——,
(6)
which is less than zero, thus showing redder spectra compared with the scale independent ones (ns — 1 = 0 = JIT); results up to this point are valid for general negative value of £. T h e COBE d a t a with ns — 1 — 0 ~ TIT constrain |f | <S 1. In this limit we have: -pl/2 _
/
3
H
i
H
«»* - V _ 2 £ 27rm4>'
-pl/2 _
/_2_ Hi
' c"> ~ ]/ -£
2TT0
'
[7}
The multipole (a2) = ( | o ( m | 2 ) is related to VVS4> and VcaP through formulae in eq. (61) of 3 and eq. (56) of 4 . Thus, the observed values of (a2) constrain directly V^5t and Pca/3For the scale independent spectra the quadrupole anisotropy is (a 2 ) = (a2)s
+ {a2)T
310
~^+7.74iA^ 1
1
m
480TT£2 \4>)
3 x 7.74
+'
\-l$£
4TT
(8)
The ratio between the two perturbations becomes
_
r2 =
(4)T
3.46
•21S <<*!>
-27.7£ = -6.92n T .
V,VS4>
(9)
Thus, if |£| < 1/27.7 the gravitational wave contribution is negligible compared with the scalar-type one. The four-year COBE-DMR data 7 (a2.) ~ 1.1 x 10
-10
(10)
give a constraint m
3
1.6 x 10 _3 |^U
ICI
(11)
l + 27.7|f|'
The Einstein-frame
Using the conformal transformation 8 ' 9 the gravity theory in eq. (1) can be transformed to Einstein gravity with a special potential; we call it the Einstein-frame. Considering the strong coupling condition (/-c2|£|02 ~3> 1) in the original-frame, the potential in the Einstein-frame has an asymptotic form "V l-6«K'', p j u e t 0 t n e exponential potential we have a poweras V 2£ K law type accelerated expansion 10 2
2
a oc tp,
1 2~e
p—3 2pln
(1-60(3-160
mt
(12)
We find the same result in eq. (5) for vs and v-f. The large-scale power spectra are given by pl/2 Vs
H2
I > s ) 1 ~ 4£
2TT|0| T(3/2) 1 - 6 ^ KH
V1-'2 = c-e ~ 7^
T(VT)
3/2-1/s
MV
3/2-1/r
1 - 4£
r(3/2) 1 - 6£
2
\c2(k) -
Cl(k)\,
(13)
!$>«(*)- c «(*)f-( 14 )
311
Identifying the power spectra based on the vacuum expectation values with the classical power spectra based on the spatial average, and using the conservation properties in the large-scale limit lead the same results in eqs. (13,14) now valid for VVH and Vcaf3- Assuming the negligible vacuum dependences during the inflation era leads to the same result for the spectral indices ns and nr in eq. (6). In order to be consistent with the COBE data, we need |£| < 1 as in the case of the original frame. Then we have
pi/2
I
!L
pV2 _ J L J L
(15)
For the scale independent spectra in eq. (15) the quadrupole anisotropy becomes . 2.
1 / H V /
1
3x7.74\
The ratio becomes r2 = -27.7£ = -6.92nr,
(17)
which is the same as eq. (9). Thus, for |£| < 1/27.7 the gravitational wave contribution is small compared with the scalar-type one. Using the four-year COBE-DMR data in eq. (10) we have a constraint
— ~ 1.3x10-V, | 5 ' , , . mpl Y 1 + 27.7|£|
(18) V '
We have derived the power spectra for both scalar and tensor-type structures. The analyses have been made in both the original and the Einstien frames. We can show that using the conformal transformation in 8 ' 9 the results original-frame in eqs. (3,4,7,8) produce correctly the ones in Einsteinframe in eqs. (13,14,15,16). In eq. (25) of9 we have shown that c/?^ and CQ|S are invariant under the conformal transformation. 4
Discussions
We have derived contributions of both structures to the anisotropy of the CMBR and compared them with the four-year COBE-DMR data on quadrupole anisotropy. For very small |£| the gravitational wave shows negligible contribition to the quadrupole ansiotropy of CMBR compared with the scalar-type one. In fact, for a successful amount of inflation in the Einstein frame 5 showed that |£| < 1 0 - 3 , and in such a case the gravitational wave should give negligible contribution to the CMBR temperature
312
anisotropy, see eq. (9). This is a testable result in future CMBR experiments like MAP and Planck Surveyor missions with polarization measurements. Any excessive amount of gravitational wave signature detected in the future CMBR polarization measurements can exclude potentially the inflation scenario considered in this work. Another important testable point is the specific nearly scale-invariant Zel'dovich spectra in eq. (6). The recent high precision measurements of the CMBR by Boomerang and Maxima-1 in small angular scale n together with COBE-DMR data 7 suggest the scalar spectral index ns — 1 ~ O.Ollo'iI a t the 95% confidence level 12 . Thus, the inflation model considered in this work can provide viable seeds for the large-scale cosmic structures which pass the current observational limits. Future observations of the spectral indices and/or the contribution of the gravitational wave to CMBR temperature/polarization anisotropies will provide tests for the considered inflation model. Acknowledgments This work was supported by grant No. (2000-0-113-001-3) from the Basic Research Program of the Korea Science and Engineering Foundation. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
J. Hwang, Phys. Rev. D 53, 762 (1996). J. Hwang, Class. Quant. Grav. 14, 3327 (1997). J. Hwang and H. Noh, Class. Quantum. Grav. 15, 1387 (1998). J. Hwang, Class. Quant. Grav. 15, 1401 (1998). T. Futamase and K. Maeda, Phys. Rev. D 39, 399 (1989). J. Hwang and H. Noh, Phys. Rev. D 60, 123001 (1999). C. L. Bennett, ApJ 464, LI (1996). J. Hwang, Class. Quant. Grav. 7, 1613 (1990). J. Hwang, Class. Quant. Grav. 14, 1981 (1997). F. Lucchin and S. Matarrese, Phys. Rev. D 32, 1316 (1985). P. de Bernardis, et al., Nature 404, 955 (2000); S. Hanany, et al., preprint astro-ph/0005123 (2000). 12. A. H. Jaffe, et al., preprint astro-ph/0007333 (2000).
QCD PHASE TRANSITION A N D PRIMORDIAL DENSITY PERTURBATIONS
J. IGNATIUS Department of Physics, P.O. Box 9, FIN-00014 University of Helsinki, Finland E-mail: [email protected] DOMINIK J. SCHWARZ Institut fur Theoretische Physik, TU Wien, Wiedner Hauptstrafie 8 - 10, A-1040 Wien, Austria E-mail: [email protected] We analyze the effect of primordial density perturbations on the cosmic QCD phase transition. According to our results hadron bubbles nucleate at the cold perturbations. We call this mechanism inhomogeneous nucleation. We find the typical distance between bubble centers to be a few meters. This exceeds the estimates from homogeneous nucleation by two orders of magnitude. The resulting baryon inhomogeneities may affect primordial nucleosynthesis.
T h e order of the QCD transition and the values of its p a r a m e t e r s are still under debate. Nevertheless there are indications from lattice Q C D calculations. Quenched QCD (no dynamical quarks) shows a first-order phase transition with a small latent heat, compared t o the bag model, and a small surface tension, compared t o dimensional arguments 1. We assume t h a t the QCD transition is of first order and t h a t the values from quenched lattice QCD (scaled appropriately by t h e number of degrees of freedom) are typical for the physical QCD transition. Based on these values and homogeneous bubble nucleation a small supercooling, A s c = 1 — T[/Tc ~ 10~ 4 , and a tiny bubble nucleation distance, (iiiuc ~ 1 cm, would follow ^. T h e actual nucleation temperature is denoted by Tf, and t h e thermodynamic transition t e m p e r a t u r e by Tc ss 150 MeV. We argue 3 t h a t the assumption of homogeneous nucleation is violated in the early Universe by t h e inevitable density perturbations from inflation or from other seeds for structure formation. Those fluctuations in density and t e m p e r a t u r e have been measured by C O B E 4 to have an amplitude of ST/T ~ 1 0 - 5 . T h e effect of t h e Q C D transition on density perturbations 5 ' 6 and gravitational waves 7 has been studied previously, while we investigate the effect of the density perturbations on the QCD phase transition here. First-order phase transitions normally proceed via nucleation of bubbles of the new phase. When the t e m p e r a t u r e is spatially uniform and no signifi313
314
cant impurities are present, the mechanism is homogeneous nucleation. The probability to nucleate a bubble of the new phase per time and volume is approximated by T w Tc4 exp[-5(T)]. The nucleation action S is the free energy difference of the system with and without the nucleating bubble, divided by the temperature. Nucleation is a very rapid process, compared with the extremely slow cooling of the Universe. The duration of the nucleation period, Ai n u c , is found to be 8 ' 9 TTl/3
AW = -.„,,, • (1) dS/dt \tf The time tf is defined as the moment when the fraction of space where nucleations still continue equals 1/e. The heat flow preceding the deflagration fronts reheats the rest of the Universe. We denote by Wheat the effective speed by which released latent heat propagates in sufficient amounts to shut down nucleations. In practice, Vde{ < i>heat < c s; where v^f is the velocity of the deflagration front and cs is the sound speed 10 . In the unlikely case of detonations i>heat should be replaced by the velocity of the phase boundary in all expressions that follow. The mean distance between nucleation centers, measured immediately after the transition completed, is G^nuc,liom — ^ h e a t ^ * n u c •
{^)
This nucleation distance sets the spatial scale for baryon number inhomogeneities. Lattice simulations imply that in real-world QCD the energy density must change very rapidly in a narrow temperature interval. This can be seen from the microscopic sound speed in the quark phase, cs = (dp/de)s' . Lattice QCD indicates that 3Cg(Tc) = 0(0.1) n . Thus, the cosmological timetemperature relation is strongly modified already before the nucleations, due to
^ = "3Cste'
(3)
where tn = 1/H = {ZM'^/^Tre^)1^ with e q being the energy density in the quark phase. This behavior of the sound speed increases the nucleation distance because of the proportionality Ai n u c oc l/[3Cg(T/)] 2 . In the thin-wall approximation the nucleation action has the following explicit expression:
S(T,
=(TW'
cs
V!i$s'
(4)
315
for small supercooling. Assuming further that cs does not change very much during supercooling, the following relation holds for the supercooling and nucleation scales: [) At ~A ~^i73 Here we denote by A a relative (dimensionless) temperature interval and by At a dimensionful time interval. S = S(Tf) is the critical nucleation action, 5 = 0(100). Surface tension and latent heat are provided by lattice simulations with quenched QCD only, giving the values a = 0.015T 3 , / = 1.4T4 1. Scaling the latent heat for the physical QCD leads us to take I = 3T 4 . With these values for the latent heat and surface tension, the amount of supercooling is A sc = 2.3 x 1 0 - 4 . From Eq. (5) it follows that A n u c = 1.5 x 10~ 6 . Substituting 3c2 = 0.1 into Eq. (3), we find At n u c = 1.5 x 10" 5 i H for the duration of the nucleation period. The nucleation distance depends on the unknown velocity fheat in Eq. (2). With the value 0.1 for i>heat, the nucleation distance dnUc,hom would have the value 2.9 x W~6du- One should take these values with caution, due to large uncertainties in I and a. As our reference set of parameters, we take: A s c = 1 0 - 4 , A n u c = 1 0 - 6 , Atlmc = 10~ 5 t#. In the real Universe the local temperature of the radiation fluid fluctuates. We decompose the local temperature T(t, x) into the mean temperature T(t) and the perturbation 6T(t, x). The temperature contrast is denoted by A = ST/T. On subhorizon scales in the radiation dominated epoch, each Fourier coefficient A(t,fc) oscillates with constant amplitude, which we denote by AT(&). Inflation predicts a Gaussian distribution,
We find 12 for the COBE normalized 4 rms temperature fluctuation of the radiation fluid (not of cold dark matter) A™ s = 1.0 x 1 0 - 4 for a primordial Harrison-Zel'dovich spectrum. The change of the equation of state prior to the QCD transition modifies the temperature-energy density relation, A = CgSe/(e + p). We may neglect the pressure p near the critical temperature since p
A™s * 10" 4 (3 C 2) 3 / 4 ^ - J
(«-l)/2
,
(7)
316
where k0 = (aH)0. For a Harrison-Zel'dovich spectrum (n = 1) and ic2s = 0.1, we find A™ls « 2 x KT 5 . A small scale cut-off in the spectrum of primordial temperature fluctuations comes from collisional damping by neutrinos 13,6 . The interaction rate of neutrinos is ~ GyT5. This has to be compared with the angular frequency cskph of the acoustic oscillations. At the QCD transition neutrinos travel freely on scales lv « 4 x 10~6G£H- Fluctuations below the diffusion scale of neutrinos are washed out, i 'diff
/ Jo
lv(i)di
«7xl(r4dH.
(8)
In Ref. 6 the damping scale from collisional damping by neutrinos has been calculated to be A;Ph = 10477 at T = 150 MeV. The estimate (8) is consistent with this damping scale. We assume /smooth = 10 _ 4 C/H- The compression timescale for a homogeneous volume ~ /smooth ^s ^ = ^smooth/c« ~ 10~ 3 £HSince 6t S> At, luc the temperature fluctuations are frozen with respect to the time scale of nucleations. As long as /smooth exceeds the Fermi scale homogeneous bubble nucleation applies within these small homogeneous volumes. This is a crucial difference to the scenario of heterogeneous nucleation 14 , where bubbles nucleate at ad hoc impurities. Let us now investigate bubble nucleation in a Universe with spatially inhomogeneous temperature distribution. Bubble nucleation effectively takes place while the temperature drops by the tiny amount A n u c . To determine the mechanism of nucleation, we compare A n u c with the rms temperature fluctuation A™1S: 1. If A™ s < A n u c , the probability to nucleate a bubble at a given time is homogeneous in space. This is the case of homogeneous nucleation. 2. If A"" s > A n u c , the probability to nucleate a bubble at a given time is inhomogeneous in space. We call this inhomogeneous nucleation. The quenched lattice QCD data and a COBE normalized flat spectrum lead to the values A n u c ~ 1 0 - 6 and A™1S ~ 10~ 5 . We conclude that the cosmological QCD transition may proceed via inhomogeneous nucleation. A sketch of inhomogeneous nucleation is shown in Fig. 1. The basic idea is that temperature inhomogeneities determine the location of bubble nucleation. Bubbles nucleate first in the cold regions. The temperature change at a given point is governed by the Hubble expansion and by the temperature fluctuations. For the fastest changing fluc-
317
H Q'
Figure 1. Sketch of a first-order QCD transition in the inhomogeneous Universe. At t\ the first hadronic bubbles (H) nucleate at the coldest spots (light gray), while most of the Universe remains in the quark phase (Q). At ti the bubbles inside the cold spots have merged and have grown to bubbles as large as the temperature fluctuation scale. At r.3 the transition is almost finished. The last quark droplets are found in the hottest spots (dark gray).
tuations, with angular frequency csjl.smooth, we find dT(t,x) T_ 3c+0 A (9) dt ~ iH St The Hubble expansion is the dominant contribution, as typical values are 3c2 = 0.1 from quenched lattice QCD and A^H^/St « 0.01 from the discussion above. This means that the local temperature does never increase, except by the released latent heat during bubble growth. To gain some insight in the physics of inhomogeneous nucleation, let us first inspect a simplified case. We have some randomly distributed cold spheres of diameter Zsmooth with equal and uniform temperature, which is by the amount ATrfisTc smaller than the again uniform temperature in the rest of the Universe. When the temperature in the cold spots has dropped to T f , homogeneous nucleation takes place in them. Due to the Hubble expansion the rest of the Universe would need the time Atcooi = tnA^ns/3c'f to cool down to T f . Inside each cold spot there is a large number of tiny hadron bubbles, assumed to grow as deflagrations. They merge within At coo i if A n u c < ('UdefM1eat)A™ls. This condition should be clearly fulfilled for our reference set of parameters. Thus the cold spots have fully been transformed into the hadron phase while the rest of the Universe still is in the quark phase. The latent heat released in a cold spot propagates in all directions, which provides the length scale 'heat = 2l>l lea t A t c o o l .
(10)
318
If the typical distance from the boundary of a cold spot to the boundary of a neighboring cold spot is less than /heat, then no hadronic bubbles can nucleate in the intervening space. In this case the nucleation process is totally dominated by the cold spots, and the average distance between their centers gives the spatial scale for the resulting inhomogeneities. In the following analysis for a more realistic scenario we concentrate in this case, /heat > 'smooth-
The real Universe consists of smooth patches of typical linear size /smooth, their temperatures given by the distribution (6). As discussed above, the merging of tiny bubbles within a cold spot can here be treated as an instantaneous process. The fraction of space that is not reheated by the released latent heat (and not transformed to hadron phase), is given at time t by / ( t ) « i - / riim(t')v(t,t')dt',
(ii)
Jo
where we neglect overlap and merging of heat fronts. At time t heat, coming from a cold spot which was transformed into hadron phase at time t', occupies the volume V(t,t') = (47r/3)[/ smoo th/2 + Vheat(* - O] 3 - The other factor in Eq. (11), Tihn, is the volume fraction converted into the new phase, per physical time and volume as a function of the mean temperature T = T(t). Tihii is proportional to the fraction of space for which temperature is in the interval [Tf,T^(l + dA)}. This fraction of space is given by Eq. (6) with A = T[/T — 1. Rewriting dA by means of Eq. (3) leads to the expression rilm = 3 c ^ — y
p(A = ^ - 1),
-i tn l / s m o o t h
(12)
-t
where the relevant physical volume is V smoo th = (47r/3)(/ smoot h/2) 3 . The end of the nucleation period, iji m , is denned through the condition /(*ihn) = 0. We introduce the variables N = (1 - T f / T ) / A ^ l s and N = N{t\hn). Since cs may be assumed to be constant during the tiny temperature interval where nucleations actually take place, we find from Eq. (3): 1 — t/*ihn « 2/(3c^)A5ms(iV - M). Putting everything together we determine Af from /3 'heat
/3
/>oo
c-^N
+ N-N) Jtf
V2TT
V 'heat
=1.
(13)
/
smooth
The expression /heat/smooth = ^vheat(3c2s)-1/4(k/k0){n~1)/2 is valid for the COBE normalized spectrum. For /heat/Smooth = 1,2,5,10 we find Af « 0.8,1.4,2.1,2.6, respectively.
319
The effective nucleation distance in inhomogeneous nucleation is defined from the number density of those cold spots that acted as nucleation centers, dm.r.ihn = n~ 1 / 3 . We find -1/3
Tihn{t)dt
-^nuc.ihii
(14)
o 3 -(l-erW^)]-1/3/smooth-
(15)
'7T
With the above values /heat/smooth = 1,2,5,10 we get d„Uc,iim = 1-4,1.8,3.0, 4.8 x /smooth, where Zsmooth « 1 m. For a COBE normalized spectrum without any tilt and with a tilt of n — 1 = 0.2 (where (fcsmooth/fco)0'1 ~ 25), together with 3c';; = 0.1 and Wheat = 0.1, we find the estimate /heat/'smooth ~ 0-4 and 9, correspondingly. Notice that the values of i^eat and 3c'f are in principle unknown. Anyway, we can conclude that the case /heat > /smooth is a realistic possibility. With 2 i w ( 3 c 2 ) - 1 / 4 ( i 0 - 4 d H / / smooth) < 1 and without positive tilt we are in the region /h eat < /smooth, where the geometry is more complicated and the above quantitative analysis does not apply. In this situation nucleations take place in the most common cold spots (N ~ 1), which are very close to each other. We expect a structure of interconnected baryondepleted and baryon-enriched layers with typical surface Zginooth and thickness /def = fdefAicooi- In between d nuC] h om would be the relevant length scale of inhomogeneities. An accurate analysis of this case requires computer simulations, which is beyond the scope of the present work. However, it is clear that the result will be different compared with homogeneous nucleation. We emphasize that inhomogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation 14 are genuinely different mechanisms, although they give the same typical scale of a few meters by chance. If latent heat and surface tension of QCD would turn out to reduce A sc to, e.g., 1 0 - 6 , instead of 1 0 - 4 , the maximal heterogeneous nucleation distance would fall to the centimeter scale, whereas on the distance in inhomogeneous nucleation this would have no effect. We have shown that inhomogeneous nucleation during the QCD transition can give rise to an inhomogeneity scale exceeding the proton diffusion scale (2 m at 150 MeV). The resulting baryon inhomogeneities could provide inhomogeneous initial conditions for nucleosynthesis. Observable deviations from the element abundances predicted by homogeneous nucleosynthesis seem to be possible in that case 15 . In conclusion, we found that inhomogeneous nucleation leads to nucleation distances that exceed by two orders of magnitude estimates based on homogeneous nucleation. We emphasize that this new effect appears for the
320 (today) most probable range of cosmological and QCD parameters. Acknowledgments We acknowledge Willy the Cowboy for valuable encouragement. We thank K. Jedamzik, H. Kurki-Suonio, J. Madsen, and K. Rummukainen for discussions. J.I. would like to thank the Academy of Finland and D.J.S. the Austrian Academy of Sciences for financial support. References 1. Y. Iwasaki et al, Phys. Rev. D 46, 4657 (1992); 49, 3540 (1994); B. Grossmann and M.L. Laursen, Nud. Phys. B 408, 637 (1993); B. Beinlich, F. Karsch, and A. Peikert, Phys. Lett. B 390, 268 (1997). 2. J. Ignatius et a/., Phys. Rev. D 50, 3738 (1994). 3. J. Ignatius and D.J. Schwarz, hep-ph/0004259 (2000). 4. C.L. Bennett et al, Astrophys. J. 464, LI (1996). 5. C. Schmid, D.J. Schwarz, and P. Widerin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 78, 791 (1997). 6. C. Schmid, D.J. Schwarz, and P. Widerin, Phys. Rev. D 59, 043517 (1999). 7. D.J. Schwarz, Mod. Phys. Lett. A 34, 2771 (1998). 8. G.M. Fuller, G.J. Mathews, and C.R. Alcock, Phys. Rev. D 37, 1380 (1988). 9. K. Enqvist et al, Phys. Rev. D 45, 3415 (1992). 10. H. Kurki-Suonio, Nud. Phys. B 255, 231 (1985); J.C. Miller and O. Pantano, Phys. Rev. D 42, 3334 (1990); J. Ignatius et al, Phys. Rev. D 49, 3854 (1994); J.C. Miller and L. Rezzolla, Phys. Rev. D 51, 4017 (1995). 11. Quenched QCD: G. Boyd et al, Nud. Phys. B 469, 419 (1996); Two flavor QCD: C. Bernard et al, Phys. Rev. D 54, 4585 (1996). 12. The relevant equations can be found in, e.g., J. Martin and D.J. Schwarz, Phys. Rev. D 62, 103520 (2000). 13. S. Weinberg, Astrophys. J. 168, 175 (1971). 14. M.B. Christiansen and J. Madsen, Phys. Rev. D 53, 5446 (1996). 15. I.-S. Suh and G.J. Mathews, Phys. Rev. D 58, 123002 (1998); K. Kainulainen, H. Kurki-Suonio, and E. Sihvola, Phys. Rev. D 59 083505 (1999).
QUINTESSENCE AXION POTENTIAL FROM ELECTROWEAK INSTANTONS
TAIZAN WATARI Dept.
Physics Univ. of Tokyo, Tokyo E-mail: [email protected].
113-0033,Japan ac.jp
This article is written for the proceedings of the international workshop COSMO 2000 (Sept.4 - Sept.8). The talk I gave there and this article are based on the work Phys.Lett.B484:103(2000) 1 with Yasunori Nomura(UC Berkeley) and T. Yanagida(Univ. of Tokyo), and include further discussion on the cosmological coincidence problem.
Cosmological
Constant
Problem
Type la Supernovae d a t a suggest t h a t the expansion of the universe is accelerating today 2 . This forces us to introduce positive cosmological constant: a
6M2
+
3M p 2
>
(
>
Even if we do not believe the Supernovae d a t a , the observation of clusters reveal t h a t the fJ m a (;t is much less t h a n 1, C M B R fluctuation power spectrum indicates spatially flat universe and age crisis of globular clusters excludes the Standard CDM model and almost the Open CDM model. These three observations are enough to conclude t h a t the cosmological constant is nonzero positive. These observations, including the type l a Supernovae data, are all consistent with each other and they, as a whole, indicate t h a t 2 / 3 of the total energy density of the universe, at least more t h a n a half of, is the cosmological constant. This non-zero positive cosmological constant gives rise to two severe fine tuning problems. One of these fine tuning problems comes from field theory. T h e other is from cosmology. The fine tuning problem in the field theory is one of the naturalness problems. In q u a n t u m field theories, 0-point oscillation of any q u a n t u m fields contribute to the vacuum energy. So the naive estimate of the cosmological constant is of order of (MP ~ 2.4 x 10 1 8 GeV) 4 . There are other contributions to the vacuum energy and the totality of all these contributions, taking into account the cancellation between each other, must b e the observed value, (2 x 1 0 - 3 e V ) 4 . This constitutes the severest fine tuning problem of all in q u a n t u m field theory: 10~ 1 2 0 fine tuning of the vacuum energy. Even if there is supersymmetry(SUSY) and all 0-point oscillation energy cancels exactly 321
322 with each other, there are still contributions to the vacuum energy from SUSY breaking, electroweak breaking and Q C D chiral condensate. T h e fine tuning problem still remains severe. Another fine tuning problem comes from the cosmology. This fine tuning problem is called "coincidence problem", or sometimes "why now problem". T h e "why now problem" is t o ask reason why "now" the cosmological constant begins to dominate the universe. To formulate this problem, we have to define the meaning of the word "now". T h e word "now" is defined t o be the epoch right after the matter-radiation equality, when large scale structure can be formed. Then the why now problem is paraphrased as triple coincidence problem: W h y does the cosmological constant become comparable to other components of the universe right after the matter-radiation equality? Or equivalently, why do all these three energy densities become roughly the same at some temperature in the history of the universe?
Quintessence The quintessence 3 can be an idea which solves these fine tuning problems. The cosmological constant problem in the field theory was a fine tuning problem because the cosmological constant comes from the energy of the true potential minimum. Rather, in quintessence scenario, we suppose t h a t the true potential minimum is, for some reason, exactly zero. We suppose t h a t there exist a scalar field (called quintessence field), and our universe is still on its way down the quintessence potential to the true minimum. Then non-zero potential energy can be the t o d a y ' s cosmological constant. The philosophy of the quintessence is to split the fine tuning problem into the three following problems. First we must have some mechanism which sets the true minimum exactly to zero. Moreover the quintessence potential must be very small so t h a t the quintessence potential energy density is ~ ( 1 0 _ 3 e V ) 4 . W h a t should be emphasized here is t h a t 10~ 1 2 0 fine tuning problem has converted into 10~ 1 2 0 hierarchy problem; This is already a great progress from the field theoretical point of view. In some cases initial condition of the quintessence field must satisfy some condition. As for the mechanism to set the minimum to zero, there have been proposed some ideas such as 4 ' 5 . But this is not what I am going to discuss in this article. We concentrate mainly upon how we can understand naturally the required huge hierarchy of the quintessence potential. Quintessence potential generally satisfies two following properties in order to account for the real world cosmological constant. First, the slow rolling of the quintessence field is necessary. Otherwise, negative pressure is not
323 realized. This slow rolling requires flat potential. Curvature of the potential must be smaller t h a n the present Hubble constant 10~ 3 3 eV. So the quintessence potential must be not only extremely small but also extremely flat. The second property of the quintessence field comes from the requirement t h a t the quintessence energy density is more t h a n the half of the whole universe(fi q u ; n t. > 1/2). This requires the quintessence field to be far away from the true minimum by of order of the Planck scale. These two common features of quintessence potential lead to stringent constraints upon non-derivative couplings between the quintessence field and standard model fields. There are two types of constraints. One is direct constraints from experiments or observations 6 . The other is from field theoretical consideration 7 . The sources of the direct constraints include the experiments on the long range forces t h a t do not satisfy the equivalence principle and various measurements of the time variation of the standard model gauge couplings and the Newton constants. These experiments and observations put upper bounds on the non-derivative couplings between the quintessence field and the s t a n d a r d model fields. Another source of the constraints is the electroweak or Q C D condensates. If there were non-derivative couplings between the quintessence field and those condensates, then the requirement t h a t the potential must be flat to the extent of field value of order of the Planck scale would be no longer satisfied. We have so severe constraints on the non-derivative couplings between the quintessence field and the standard model fields t h a t , the candidates of quintessence potential are quite limited 7 . One possibility is t h a t these couplings are systematically tuned so t h a t the linear combinations of t h e m t h a t suffer from the constraints simultaneously vanish. This situation is realized when the quintessence field is radion of extra-dimensions. In t h a t case, quintessence field couples to the s t a n d a r d model field only through effective 4-dimensional metric. If we seek candidates from 4 dimensional field theory, the other way out of these constraints is to forbid all non-derivative couplings. For t h a t purpose, we only have to impose shifting symmetry on the quintessence field. In this case, the quintessence field is a pseudo-Goldstone boson. Here the smallness of the potential can be explained by the smallness of the breaking parameter of the symmetry. Breaking of the symmetry is either explicit breaking or gauge anomaly. In the case of the explicit breaking, we need extremely small breaking parameter. In the case of the anomaly, in the meanwhile, the potential suffers from exponentially small non-perturbative breaking factor with moderately small gauge
324 coupling. This is a good news for the natural explanation of the extremely small potential. We take seriously the possibility t h a t the quintessence field is realized as pseudo-Goldstone boson whose potential comes from the gauge anomaly, t h a t is, as the axion. The standard model SU(3)C gauge anomaly induces too large potential. So the next candidate, and the only candidate we surely have in our hands is the electroweak axion. Supersymmetric
Calculation
of Electroweak
Instanton
Effects
Now we calculate the electroweak axion potential. We assume Minimal Supersymmetric Standard Model(MSSM) and introduce axion supermultiplet ( $ = (fc -f- ia) + • • •) whose scalar components are saxion(6) and axion(a). We suppose t h a t this axion supermultiplet is supplied by Planck scale physics. We assume t h a t this axion supermultiplet couples to the electroweak field strength but not to that of the SU(3)C:
d2e
{4^-^+i>)waiw"
where =1 2 3
* ''-
^
where Fa is of order of the Planck scale. T h e axion introduced here is distinct from the QCD axion, or so called Peccei-Quinn axion. We also assume t h a t every higher dimensional operators with MSSM fields exists unless it is forbidden by some symmetry. The axion field has direct coupling with the SU(2)L instanton, while this instanton violates U(1)B+L symmetry, and emits many fermion zero-modes. In order for the axion potential to be generated, all these fermion zero-modes must be closed. Hence we need B + L breaking operators. These operators are supplied by the higher dimensional operators of MSSM. 1-instanton generates e x p ( i a / F a ) potential with 1-instanton factor and the B + L breakings as its coefficient, and 1-anti-instanton generates the hermitian conjugate of t h a t of the 1-instanton: exp(—ia/F a ) potential. Both sums up to form cosine type potential of the axion: V(a) ~ ( b r e a k i n g J A 3 ^ - 3 ^ - ^ + ( b r e a k m g ) t A 8 T ° - ! r * t e * * ~ |(breaking)A 3 1 ^- 1 "* | cos (y^j
.
(3)
where K3TG'TR = Mfa~TR exp(-87r 2 /g 2 {M P ) + i-&). Our subject in the following is to make an estimate of the magnitude of this potential. The axion potential is generated only through the electroweak instanton effect. Large sized(IR) instanton effect is cut off by higgs effect.
325 T h e SU(2)L gauge coupling is asymptotic (UV) free in the standard model, and hence the (weak s c a l e ) - 1 sized instantons will give the dominant contribution. Naive dimensional analysis shows t h a t the potential from the standard model SU(2)i is far too small to explain the cosmological constant. In the supersymmetric case, the gauge coupling constant is asymptotic non-free and stronger t h a n t h a t of the s t a n d a r d model at high energy. Small sized instanton in the MSSM gives larger contribution to the potential than t h a t in the standard model. The dominant contribution must come from t h a t UV region, if the MSSM electroweak axion really accounts for the cosmological constant. We can calculate the electroweak instanton effects to the axion potential in supersymmetric manner 8 , because the dominant contribution is supposed to come from the UV region, where the supersymmetry is a good symmetry. Let the Kahler potential and superpotential of MSSM be given in this form: K = ZQUJQtQ
W=
+ ZB,B&D
( s + ^ ^ W W
+•••+
ZQ
W'&QQut&
+ •••
+ YQUHu + ..-+^^QQQL+.--.
(4)
(5)
Small soft SUSY breaking effects such as gaugino masses, scalar quark masses and A-terms are included in higher G r a s s m a n n components of coupling superfields: - 49%w ZDiD
32*» +
2g2Ew
= ZBtB{l-0>Pm3)
(6)
....
(7)
T h e axion is expected to have very small mass compared with the weak scale. We describe axion effective potential by the axion multiplet and coupling superfields of high energy theory. Usual MSSM particles are all integrated out and only the higgs expectation value remains in the low energy effective Lagrangian. T h e effective Kahler and superpotential are controlled by the supersymmetry and global symmetry of the high energy theory. T h e effective Kahler and superpotential is give by integrating all contribution from instanton of any size: K = d\np
[ e - 3 2 7 r 2 ( 5 + I i ^ 7z)f(H,
J f t , Y, y t , Z, D2, D2)]
W = dlnp
[e"32,r2(5+^*)f(HuHd,Y)\
.
(8) (9)
326 Table 1. charge assignment of the U(1)R symmetry
Q,U,E
L,D 1/5
3/5
Hu 4/5
D2 -2
Hd 6/5
2
D2 2
e-32n
S
-2
We impose continuous U(1)R symmetry at high energy. The reason is the following. The supergravity tree level scaler potential is given by
V
„K I
Z\W\2).
(10)
Since the supersymmetry is not broken at the Planck scale but broken at intermediate scale, \F\2 is much less t h a n order 1. Therefore the fact t h a t our universe is not anti-de Sitter implies t h a t the \W\2 is also much less t h a n order 1. This means t h a t the U(1)R symmetry is not broken at the Planck scale. We assume t h a t the effects of the R-symmetry breaking appear in MSSM sector only as gaugino masses, A-terms, higgs scaler expectation values and gravitino mass, which are all of order of the weak scale. U(1)R charge assignment to the MSSM particles are listed in the Table 1. This assignment is determined from the condition t h a t all renormalizble superpotential couplings and Majorana neutrino mass are allowed by this U(1)R, along with the S t / ( 5 ) - G U T compatibility. The dominant contributions to the axion potential come from the effective Kahler potential. Here is one example t h a t gives dominant order contribution. dp2 1 2
P P
6
T^D'
J
(YQQQI
QQV*E1
V MP
Mp
Y
QUHvXLEHdZiJMjZE\E
Since 1-anti-instanton violates R charge by —2, .R-symmetry breaking with charge 2 must be i n s e r t e d ( D 2 ) . We can confirm t h a t this effective Kahler potential satisfy all other symmetries existed in the high energy theory. This effective Kahler potential gives potential of the axion, picking up the SUSY breaking soft squark masses. W h a t we see here is t h a t 1 R breaking with charge 2 and 1 (SUSY breaking) 2 is necessary besides the 1-instanton factor in order for the axion potential to be generated. T h e instanton size integration is cut off at the Planck scale and the potential induced is given by V ~ CMpe
_2i! /weakV °(«p)
MP J
\Fa/
(12)
To estimate the prefactor C, we need some knowledge on the coefficients of the higher dimensional operators which we use to close the fermion zero-
327 Table 2. charge assignment of the Froggatt-Nielsen U(l)
Q,U,E
symmetry
L,D e,l,l
modes from instantons. Here we take Froggatt-Nielsen (FN) mechanism as the principle to determine the coefficients of various operators. This FrogattNielsen mechanism is motivated from the quark lepton mass hierarchy we already have in the standard model. It is known t h a t the charge assignment of the FN U{1) symmetry given in Table 2 is suitable in explaining the mass hierarchies and mixing angles 9 . Then the i7(l)pN-gauge 2 anomaly is 10 units, and the potential suffers from e 10 where e is the Froggatt-Nielsen breaking parameter. The axion potential energy is
~ Ml, x
10
- ~ x 1 0 - - x 10-» x ( ^ )
3
~(10-3eV)4~pcos.
(
^ (13)
The potential energy of the electroweak axion is suitable in explaining the today's cosmological constant. We obtained 10~ 1 2 0 hierarchy naturally. T h e potential is induce only when the weak coupling non-perturbative effects are taken into account. Furthermore, supersymmetry breaking and R breaking are necessary in order for the axion potential to be generated, and these breaking parameters are also small compared with the Planck scale because these breakings are also supposed to be the consequence of some non-perturbative dynamics. Discussion
on the Coincidence
Problem
The numerical coincidence eq.(13)seems, however, quite accidental. We show in the following t h a t this is not the case. The paper has pointed out the following on the cosmological coincidence problem. T h e energy density of radiation and m a t t e r are given by Prad ~ T 4
mTS
" — ~ fe)•
(14)
(15)
328 when the mater energy density is given by the thermal relic of a stable particle with mass m, where T is the t e m p e r a t u r e . Then the only one condition which is necessary and sufficient for the cosmological coincidence is
^~ M -6^) 8 -
(16)
Indeed these three energy densities coincide when T ~ m2/Mp. Once the cosmological constant is related to the m a t t e r energy density in a suitable way (eq.(15)and eq.(16)), then no tuning of a continuous parameter is necessary. The mass scale m is arbitrary. The cosmological coincidence take place even if m is not of the weak scale. Now let's go back to our scenario. In our scenario, the radiation density and the m a t t e r density are given in the same form, but the formula for the cosmological constant from the electroweak axion is different. T h e instanton factor does not have any relation with the mass scale at first sight. Let's assume gauge coupling unification of electroweak and dynamical SUSY breaking(DSB) sector at the Planck scale: 1
„
(17)
I
a(MP)BVV a(MP)DSB Then this common gauge coupling determines the weak scale, the mass scale of the CDM candidate, as ».
».
/ADSB\3TG"T*
/weak\
V MP J
\ MP J
^ " ^
where ADSB is the dynamical SUSY breaking scale, TG and TR the group factors of the hidden sector gauge group, and the gravity mediation of the SUSY breaking is assumed. Since we know from our knowledge t h a t »»
/weak\
UP/
V
.„„.
the hidden sector gauge group factor ZTQ — TR is supposed to be 8. If we express the energy density of the electroweak axion potential using the relation eq.(18) with 3T G -TR = &,
7 10
^-^te) ' -
(20)
Comparing this result with the eq.(16), we find t h a t the coupling unification in field theory almost explains the cosmological coincidence. T h e remaining accidental coincidence is the fact t h a t the flavor breaking e 1 0 is not so different
329 from the m/Mp. This accidental coincidence can be said to be rather "cute" compared with the 1 0 - 1 2 0 accidental coincidence. Testability Finally we discuss the testability of this electroweak quintessence axion scenario. First, precise measurement d a t a of type l a SNe, C M B R spectrum and large scale structures will enable us to reconstruct the shape of quintessence potential 1 1 . T h e potential might t u r n out to be c o s ( a / F a ) type. Second, what is specific to this scenario 6 is t h a t the quintessence field couples to the electroweak FF and so to the Q E D FF, t h a t is, the parity violating E • B term. If the quintessence field has rolled significantly in the history of the universe, the coupling to the parity violating term rotates polarization angle of photons coming far away from radio galaxies and quasars 6 . Future improvement of the upper bound of the polarization rotation may find out the rolling of the electroweak quintessence axion field. Acknowledgments T . W . thanks the J a p a n Society for the Promotion of Science for financial support. T . W . thanks T. Yanagida and H. M u r a y a m a for discussion. References 1. Y. Nomura, T. W a t a r i and T . Yanagida, Phys.Lett. B 4 8 4 , 103 (2000) 2. A. Riess et.al Astron.J 1 1 6 , 1009 (1998) ; S. Perlmutter et.al. Astrophys.J. 5 1 7 , 565 (1999) 3. R. Caldwell, R. Dave and P. Steinhardt Phys.Rev.Lett. 80, 1582 (1998) 4. S. Hawking Phys.Lett. B 1 3 4 , 403 (1984) ; S. Coleman Nucl.Phys. B 3 1 0 , 643 (1988) 5. N. Arkani-Hamed et.al. Phys.Lett. B 4 8 0 , 193 (2000) ; S. Kachru, M. Schulz and E. Silverstein, Phys.Rev. D 6 2 , 045021 (2000) 6. S. Carroll, Phys.Rev.Lett. 8 1 , 3067 (1998) 7. K. Choi, hep-ph/9912218 8. K. Choi, H.B. Kim and J.E. Kim, Nucl.Phys. B 4 9 0 , 349 (1997) ; K. Choi and H.D. Kim, Phys.Rev. D 5 9 , 072001 (1999) 9. J. Sato and T . Yanagida, Nucl.Phys.Proc.Suppl. 77, 293 (1999) ; P. Ramond, Nucl.Phys.Proc.Suppl. 77, 3 (1999) 10. N. Arkani-Hamed, L. Hall, C. Kolda and H. Murayama, astro-ph/0005111 11. T. Chiba and T. Nakamura, astro-ph/0008175
Adiabatic Gravitational Perturbation Growth During Preheating °
Institute
Xin He M E N G National Astronomical Observatories, CAS, Beijing, P.R.China CCAST(World Lab), B.O.Box 8730, Beijing 100080, P.R.China Department of Physics, Institute of Physics, Nankai University Tianjin 300071, P.R. China* E-mail: [email protected] of Theoretical Physics, Academia Sinica, P.O. Box 2735 Beijing P.R.China
100039,
The early Universe inflation 11 is well known as a promising theory to explain the origin of large scale structure of the Universe, that is, an established causal theory for the origin of primordial density fluctuations which may interpret the observed density inhomogeneities and cosmic microwave fluctuations in the very early Universe. This theoretical framework can solve the early universe pressing problems in the standard Hot Big Bang theory 1 . In the single field inflation model, we study the possibilitis of parametric amplification of the gravitational perturbation, and we find that there is no additional growth of the super-horizon modes during reheating beyond the usual predictions by giving a general analytic explanation as well as the numerical results for it.
1
Introduction
According to the nowadays popular cosmology scenario, all matter in the Universe was created in reheating after inflation, and the large stucture formation is from the inflated the primordial fluctuations which experience all the evolution stages, including the reheating period. While this happened really long ago and on very small scales, this process is obviously of such vital importance that one may hope to find some observable consequences, specific for some particular reasonable models of particle physics. Indeed, as we all believe today that there can be some clues left, see Refs. [1-22]. In the middle of 1990s new theory on the reheating has been develloped and some new interesting consequences appear in the first phase of the newly established reheating theory, the so named preheating period. After the inflationary period ends, the cold Universe enters a reheating stage. It has been recognized that the Universe reheating will turn on by an explosive particle production due to the parametric resonance during the oscillating stage of ina P a p e r in the 4th International Workshop on COSMO2000, the Early Universe and Particle Physics, Sept.4-Sept.8, 2000, Cheju Island of Korea. This job is supported in part by the National Nature Science Foundation of P.R.China 'correspondence and mailing address
330
331
flation. In this scenario, a lot of work has already been done using analytic approaches based on the Mathieu or Lame equations and numerical computations by the mean field approximations or full lattice simulations31. The existence of the preheating period is very important in the sense that it would affect the baryogenesis in grand unified scale33, topological defect formation32, nonthermal phase transition 34 gravitational waves production 35 , lots of physics phenomena. In the following we turn to the large structure formation of the inflationary Universe during the period and discuss the possibilities of adiabatic gravitation perturbation amplification by the parametric resonance during this stage and by analytic results we find for the single scalar field model there is no additional gravitational perturbation growth. 2
Reheating period
As was realized in [24] that parametric resonance instability occurs during reheating stage when the inflaton field 4> oscillates. Since gravitational perturbation is coupled to the inflaton field by the Einstein equation, it may also experience parametric resonance amplification during this stage. This issue has been studied in Ref [25] and [26], and recently examined in a systematic way by Finelli & Brandenbergei 23 . The gravitational potential $ can be calculated by solving the linearized Einstein equation in the usual way, however, in the case of the adiabatic perturbation with wavenumber far outside the Hubble radius (the wavenumber k —¥ 0), it is convenient to work with Bardeen parameter, f C
2$ + tf-14 _ ^3-LT^+$'
(1)
where, a dot denotes the derivative with respective to time, H is the Hubble expansion rate, and w = p/p is the ratio of the pressure to the density of the background. In the limit of k —• 0, the Bardeen parameter satisfies27'28 ^(1+W)H(
= 0,
(2)
and during the stage of reheating, Eq. (2) becomes28: 4>2( = 0 •
(3)
Recently Finelli and Brandenbergei 23 pointed out that when the inflaton field oscilates, 0 = 0 occurs periodically. So it is possible to have C ^ 0, i.e. parametric amplification of cosmological perturbations without violating causality.
332
They have considered a specific model with inflaton potential V{4>) = m2(j>2 /2 and solved it numerically, however, they found that ( is constant in time23. In this paper, we extend the works of Finelli and Brandenberger by considering two alternative models for inflaton potentials: i) V(
(4)
where a(t) is the scale factor. The perturbed Einstein equation gives23, k
2
•
•
$ + 3 i J $ + [— + 2(H + H2)]$ = K2{4> + H<j>)84> L z a 2 k 5
=
\K2&4>,
(5) (6) (7)
where K2 = 8wG, 8<j> is the perturbation to the inflaton field 4>, and a prime denotes the derivative with respect to <$>. Inserting equation (42) into equation (5) we obtain the equation of motion for $, $+(H-2t)$
+ (^1+2H-2Ht)$
=0
(8)
To eliminate the sigularities in the equation above when the inflaton field
Q = 6>+jj$.
(9)
then Eq.(8) can be re-written as 2 5
Q+3HQ+
V » 4 + 2 § + 3H
0 = 0.
(io)
333
In terms of Q, the Bardeen parameter ( is given by 2 3
We consider first a model with V{<j>) = A0 4 /4 for a massless self-coupled inflaton. We numerically solve Eqs.(lO) and (11) for the evolution of Q and ( during the reheating stage. Note that Eqs.(l) and (2) only hold for the adiabatic perturbation with the wavenumber k ->• 0, in our numerical calculation we take k = 0 for simplicity, from which one can see that Q does not change over a period of time and £ remains constant. The second model we have considered is a massive inflaton with selfcoupled interaction, V(>) = m2cj)2/2 + A0 4 /4 C . In this model there are two parameters. We take the Plank mass mp/ as the unit of the parameter m, and then leave X/m2 as a dimensionless parameter. In our numerical calculation we take X/m2 = 1 x 10~ 3 ,1,1 x 103 with the numerical results shown in29 . One can see that ( does not change during the zero crossing of 4> in the reheating stage. In summary, we have extended the work of Ref.[23] and examined in detail the possibility of parametric amplification of gravitation fluctuation during reheating and found no additional growth of superhorizon modes beyond the usual prediction for a massless or a massive inflaton with self-coupled inflaton. Before concluding, we present an analytical arguments to support our numerical results. We start with the equation of motion for the inflaton field 0 + 3H0 + V' = O.
(12)
Differentiating (12) with respect to a = In a (note that a = H), we get H-1^)where ( )'" = ^ . Given that H = by
+34>+ (V" + 3H)H-l<j> = 0 ,
(13)
and H = -n2
-K2^2/^8,
2H~2H4> - H'2H4> = 0 .
(14)
Substracting (14) from (13), and then simplificating, we can obtain
f
+ZH
f
+
V +2
" ( f+3H
Ji = 0 •
(15)
c T h e model considered by Finelli and Brandenberger[23] corresponds to this model in the limit of A —> 0
334
Differentiating Q — (57) C with respect to time t, we have
«= £ c+ £ K .
as)
plugging Q, Q and Q above into (10), and making use of Eq.(15), we obtain an equation of motion for £
£<" + (4-4* + *)f+S (!)<=•••
<»)
Clearly the solution of Eq.(18) is that ( = 0 when (/> = 0 (note that = 0). 3
Discussion and Conclusion
From our above analysis we conclude that in the single scalar field case there is no additional gravitational perturbation growth, which is basically different from that of the parameter resonance production mechanism for particles. However, for more scalar fields case and especially for inclusion of the backreactions the conclusion could be changed and the results vary. We are also investigating that case30 now. Recently, motivated from a solution to the hierarchy problem between the weak scale and Planck scale, a brane world scenario, Randall-Sundrum model is proposed, in which gravity works in the five-dimensional bulk of spacetime while matter fields are confined in four-dimensions. In the context of this extra-dimension paradigm, inflation models with the higher-dimensional fundamental Planck scale in the TeV region can be constructed, which is different from the original Friedman equation by the density quadratic term existence. So, it is also quite interesting to discuss the preheating in the extra-dimension cosmology pictures. We are under the way for some progresses in studying that. Acknowledgements: The author thanks the organizers of the international conference on the early universe and partcle physics, the COSMO 2000, in Cheju Island of Korea
335
during Sept, 2000, especially Prof. J.E.Kim for his kind invitation and considerate arrangements to the COSMO2000, Drs. J.S.Lee and S.Y.Choi for many helps during his stay at KIAS and Cheju Island, Korea. The work is mainly based on the collaborated paper29 with Dr. W.B.Lin and Prof. X.M.Zhang. We also thank Drs. L.Covi and W.B.Lin, Prof.Robert Brandenberger, Prof.David Lyth, Prof. L.Rozskowcki, Prof. Xin Min Zhang, and Prof. Yuan Zhong Zhang for many helpful discussions. This work is partly supported by grants of China NSF and Chinese Education Ministry. References 1. Kolb E , Turner M. The Early Universe. Redwood City,CA: AddisonWesley Publishing Co,1989 ; S.Winberg. Gravitation and Cosmology. New York. John Wiley Publishing Co. 1972 2. Covi L , Lyth D. Observational constraints to an inflation model with running parameters, hep-th/9809562 3. Lyth D, Riotto A, Particle physics models of inflation and the cosmology density perturbaion, hep-ph/9807278 and Phys. Rep. 318,1(1999); G.Borner. The Early Universe. Berlin: Springer-Verlag 1988 4. Brandenberger R. Dynamical breaking of CPT and baryogenesis, hepph/9901303 5. Lyth D, Spectrum of inflation models, hep-ph/9609431 6. Kinney W, Kolb E, Turner M. Ribbons on the CBR sky: A powerful test of a baryon symmetric Univese. hep-ph/9704388 7. Kaloper N, Linde A, Inflation and large internal dimensions, hepth/9811141 and Phys.Rev.D59,101303(1999) 8. Lyth D, Liddle A. Inflation and large scale structure formation, in: Proceedings of second Paris Cosmology Colloquium. Paris 1994, World Scientific Pub,1995 9. E.Coplend, et al. Inflation and defects models from large scale structure. in: Proceedings of second Paris Cosmology Colloquium, Paris 1994, World Scientific Pub, 1995) 10. Liddle A, Lyth D, Cold dark matter spectrum and inflation models. Phys. Rep. 231, 1 (1993); Lidsey J, Liddle A, Kolb E, Copeland E, T.Barriero , Abney M. Reconstruction of inflation models. Rev.Mod.Phys.136,1(1997) and astro-ph/9508078 11. Guth A. Inflation and the monopole problem. Phys.Rev.D23, 347(1981) 12. Dvali G, S.Tye, Brane inflation, Phys.Lett.B450, 72(1999) hepph/9812483; Randall L, Soljacic M, Guth A. Natural inflation, hepph/9601296 and Nucl.Phys.B472, 377(1996)
336
13. Turner M. Cosmology update 1998. astro-ph/9901168; Physica Scripta (in press astro-ph/9901109); Turner M , Tyson J. Cosmology at the Millennium. astro-ph/9901113 14. MAP project, http://map.gsfc.nasa.gov/ 15. Meng X. Allowed parameter regions of a general inflation model, hepph/9809416, Comm. Theor.Phys. (2000) in press; X.H.Meng, Acta Sci.Nat.Uni.Nan.32(1999)104; X.H. Meng and X.M.Zhang, in: Proc. of the KIAS-CTP Int'l Symposium on SSS'99, eds. J.E.Kim and C.Lee, World Scientific, Singapore (2000) 16. Liddle A and Lyth D. Cosmological Inflation and Large-Scale Structure, Cambridge UK. Oxford University Press (1999) 17. Dine M, Riotto A. Dynamic SUSY breaking model and inflation. Phys.Rev.Lett.79,2632(1997) 18. Nilles H. Supersymmetry and supergravity models. Phys. Rep. 110, 1 (1984); Haber H, Kane G, Supersymmetry particle physics models. Phys. Rep. 117, 75 (1985) : Bailin D, Love A. Supersymmetric Gauge Field Theory and String Theory, Bristol UK, IOP Pub Co. (1994). 19. Lyth D. Inflation with TeV scale gravity needs supersymmetry. Phys.Lett.B448, 191(1999) hep-ph/9810320 20. Linde A. Particle Physics and Inflation Cosmology, S witzerland, Harwood Academic Publishing Company(1990) 21. Arkani-Hamed N, Dimopoulos S, Dvali G. Phenomenology, astrophysics and cosmology of theories with submillimeter dimensions and TeV scale quantum gravity. Phys.Rev. D59, 086004(1999) hep-ph/9807344 22. Ellis J. Particle candidates for dark matter, astro-ph/9812211; Pal P. Particle dark matter: an overview, astro-ph/9906261; Li X, Meng, X H, Yan H and Zhao Y , S-neutrino as a dark matter candidate. Comm. Theor. Phys.25,324(1996); X.Hou, X.Li, X.H.Meng and Z.Tao, Comm.Theor.Phys. 28(1997)347 23. F. Finelli and R. Brandenberger, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 1362 (1999) 24. J. Traschen and R. Brandenberger, Phys. Rev. D42, 2491 (1990). 25. H. Kodama and T. Hamazaki, Prog.Theo.Phys. 96, 949 (1996); Y. Nambu and A. Taruya, Prog. Theor. Phys. 97, 83 (1997); A. Taruya and Y. Nambu, Phys. Lett. B428, 37 (1998). 26. B. Bassett, D. Kaiser and R. Maartens, Phys. Lett. B428, 37 (1999); M. Parry and R. Easther, Phys. Rev. D59, 061301 (1999). 27. J. Bardeen, P. Steinhardt and M. Turner, Phys. Rev. D28, 679 (1983) 28. V. Mukhanov, H. Feldman and R. Brandenberger, Phys. Rep. 215, 203 (1992) 29. W.B.Lin, X.H.Meng and X.M.Zhang, Phys.Rev.D61 (2000)302112 (Rapid
337
communication) 30. W.Lin, et al, to appear 31. S.Khlebnikov and I.Tkachev, Phys.Rev.Lett.77, 219(1996); ibid, 79, 1607(1997); T.Prokopec and T.Roos, Phys.Rev.D55, 3768(1997) 32. E.Kolb, A.Linde and A.Riotto, Phys.Rev.Lett.77,3716(1996) 33. S.Kasuya and M.Kawasaki, Phys.Rev.D.58,083516(1998) 34. I.Tkachev, Phys.Lett.B376, 35(1996) 35. B.Bassett, Phys.Rev.D56,3439(1997)
COSMOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF M U L T I - W I N D I N G DEFECTS
MICHIYASU NAGASAWA Department
of Information
Science, Faculty of Science, Kanagawa Kanagawa 259-1293, Japan E-mail: [email protected]
University,
Recently it is claimed that the creation of multiple winding topological defects may play an important role in the scenario of electroweak baryogenesis, topological inflation and primordial black hole formation. The number density of such defects in the early universe is estimated and their cosmological implications will be discussed.
1
Introduction
Topological defects 1 are considered to be produced in the early universe during the cosmological phase transitions accompanied by some kinds of symmetry breaking. They would contribute not only to the experimental investigation of particle physics models in our universe as a high energy laboratory but also to the theoretical explanation of various unresolved problems in the standard Big-Bang cosmology. A cosmic string is a line-like topological defect which can be characterized almost by one model parameter, 77, the symmetry breaking scale of the phase transition in which the string is generated. Particularly the line energy density of the string, ji, is expressed as
I* ~ rf ,
(1)
using rj. In the course of the cosmic evolution, the size and number distribution of the string is believed to obey the scaling model. In the scaling distribution, the ratio of the energy density of the cosmic string to the cosmological background energy density should be time independent. T h e numerical value of this ratio can be written approximately by
where Mv\ is the Planck mass. Note t h a t when 77 ~ the grand unification scale, t h a t is, l O 1 5 " 1 6 GeV, Gn ~ 1 0 " 6 , 338
(3)
339 which is suitable for the initial seed amplitude of the cosmological structure formation and in rough agreement marginally with the b o u n d by the cosmic microwave background radiation anisotropy. This is why the G U T scale string has been not only regarded as one of the possible consequence from some unified theories but also considered to be a promising candidate of the required density perturbation seed for galaxies and clusters of galaxies. T h e viability of such a scenario can be investigated by the direct comparison between the results of numerical simulations and the various observational facts such as the galaxy distribution and the cosmic microwave background radiation fluctuation similarly t o other cosmological structure formation scenarios. Although in the literature, the string scenario seems to be a less promising one t h a n t h a t based on the inflationary epoch, the fact t h a t there is no established version suggests cosmological defects may have played an i m p o r t a n t role in the cosmic evolution history. In this talk, we concentrate on the constraint on the model parameter in which the cosmic string is produced using the black hole formation by loop oscillation. T h e point which has not been discussed so far is we pay particular attention to the multi-winding number case.
2
Multi-Winding String
In the literature, only the simplest string configuration, t h a t is, a string whose winding number, n, equals one was investigated since it was implicitly assumed t h a t it seemed t o be natural. Recently, however, it has been proposed t h a t the multi-winding string may play an important role in the cosmological evolution of the early universe. One is the initial condition for the inflationary universe and the other is the electroweak baryogenesis. T h e inflation scenario is the most promising paradigm which can solve many problems the standard Big-Bang theory cannot explain. So far, however, there has been no convincing model of the inflation and people have invented many models. Among them, the topological inflation 2 model can naturally provide an initial condition for the inflationary expansion since at the core of the topological defect the infiaton energy takes large amplitude which enables the dominance of the effectively constant energy density. T h e difficulty of this efficient model is t h a t in order to satisfy the condition t h a t the whole universe within the horizon must be dominated by the infiaton field, the symmetry breaking scale of the defect forming phase transition should be sufficiently large as V > MPi •
(4)
340 Since no one knows a reliable physical theory at such a high energy scale, it would be useful if this constraint can be lowered. In the case of the topological string, the multi-winding number can settle the situation since the larger the winding number becomes, the larger the core size of the string grows which results t h a t the required value of r\ decreases. Particularly when n £* 3 x 10 3 ,
(5)
the topological inflation can occur at the G U T scale 3 . The baryon asymmetry problem is one of the most significant problems in modern cosmology and particle physics. Various observations show that there exists small baryon number as
which is the ratio of the baryon number density to the entropy. To explain the generation of baryon asymmetry in the course of cosmic evolution, three necessary conditions are required. These are the baryon number violation, C and C P violation and the deviation from the thermal equilibrium. The first and the second conditions may be satisfied by the appropriate model construction of particle interactions. On the contrary, the last one should be provided during the dynamical evolution of the universe so t h a t in this talk we pay particular attention to the non-equilibrium condition. Because of the sphaleron transition process, all the baryon asymmetry should be erased at the electroweak epoch unless there exists an asymmetry between baryon number and lepton number. This is the reason why the electroweak baryogenesis has been regarded as t h e most promising scenario of baryon number generation for many years. In the conventional model of the electroweak baryogenesis, the deviation from t h e thermal equilibrium is achieved by the propagation of nucleated bubbles and the interaction between bubble walls and the surrounded plasma during t h e first order electroweak phase transition. However, in the standard model and its simple extension, the degree of the electroweak phase transition seems t o be too weak to realize the first order transition. In such a situation, various alternatives have been suggested and the electroweak string has been proved to bring the non-equilibrium condition even if the electroweak phase transition is not of first order since it should be left after the transition and its collapse resembles the bubble wall propagation 4 . Although the idea t h a t the defect can realize t h e out-of-equilibrium remains valid, it has been shown t h a t the initial production rate of the electroweak string in the standard model is too low so t h a t it is difficult t o explain the
341 observational value quantitatively by this scenario 5 . Recently more effective scenario using the string has been proposed 6 . In this case, when n > 2~ 3 ,
(7)
the deviation from the thermal equilibrium can be satisfied by sphaleron bound states on strings and their following decay. Therefore it would be useful if the existence of the multi-winding string can be constrained by some astronomical and cosmological observations and here we consider primordial black holes produced by the string loop oscillation. In order to perform a quantitative analysis, we estimate the formation probability of the multi-winding string. Although similar consideration can be applied to the multi-winding monopole which may be useful for the topological inflation, hereafter we will concentrate on the string case. We employ the Abelian Higgs model with the Lagrangian as
- JA(«^ - r?)2 ,
£ = -\F^F,V - \{D^)\D^) Df, = <9M - ieAf,
F^
= d^Av
,
- dvA^
(8) (9)
,
(10)
where 0 is a complex scalar field, A^ is a gauge vector field and e is the gauge coupling constant. In this model, there is a well-known string solution called the NielsenOlesen vortex 7 which is a two-dimensional slice of the string and the string configuration with a fixed winding number, n, can be determined by one parameter, /?, which can be defined as
e
\mv
J
(11)
where ms is the mass of the scalar field and mv is the mass of the vector field. The important characteristic of the string configuration is t h a t as /? or the winding number, n, increases, the width scale of the string core also increases. T h e stability of the multi-winding string has been analyzed and in some parameter range, it is stable. For example, the calculation of the string line energy density shows t h a t the multi-winding string is stable for the case /? < 1 and unstable for /3 > l 8 . Moreover, the interaction force between two vortices is attractive when f3 < 1 and repulsive when /? > l 9 . Now we estimate the formation probability of the multi-winding string. In this talk, we review the essential results briefly and the detailed calculation process can be found in the reference 1 0 . The i m p o r t a n t conclusion is t h a t the
342 possible maximum winding number which belongs to one string should be (12)
2A
where [ ] denotes the Gauss's symbol. T h u s we can say t h a t the multi-winding string can be produced when A < < 1. Note t h a t , however, even in the case A ~ 1, we cannot completely deny the formation of the multi-winding configuration. Before closing this section, let us mention another possibility. W h e n the self-coupling constant of the scalar field is smaller t h a n the gauge coupling constant, that is, (5 < 1 for the local gauged string case, the attractive force acts on strings and they would accumulate to a multi-winding string. In this case, the formation probability of the string whose winding number equals n, P(n), can be easily calculated as (13) ^ n This is also the case which the black hole formation probability is calculated based on the result in the reference 1 0 in the following section.
p<») =
3
Constraint on Multi-Winding String M o d e l by P B H s
In this section, we estimate the primordial black hole formation probability by the oscillating string loop. Although there still remain many uncertainties, it is believed t h a t the probability of black hole formation during a loop oscillation, PBH can be written as PBH~K{Gllf
,
(14)
where K is a numerical coefficient and a is a power index. Although the numerical values of these parameters have been calculated based on various assumptions, hereafter for simplicity, we employ the most distinct case, a = 4, compared to the single winding string. Note t h a t K is cancelled out in the calculation process of the modified constraint so t h a t its value does not affect the final conclusion. Since we have the formula of the observational constraint on the string model for the ordinary single winding string case a s 1 1 Gn < (1 - 3) x 1 ( T 6 ,
(15)
the only thing we have to do is t o clarify the difference when we consider the multi-winding one.
343 First we assume the modified formula of the parameter which characterizes the multi-winding string. If the line energy density of n winding string can be written as A(n)fi then A(n) < n since otherwise a multiple winding string becomes energetically unstable to the division into single winding strings. We write the probability of n winding string production per correlation volume at the initial formation epoch as P(n). Then we can calculate explicitly two modifications by the increase of the winding number which affect the energy density of the mass relic by the black hole evaporation.When A(n) > 1 the time t h a t the black hole of specific mass ~ 10l5g which is evaporating at present was formed becomes earlier. Then more work the relative enhancement of the black hole number density by the cosmic expansion A(n)1'2 and the increase of loop number density due to the scaling distribution of the string A(n)2, although the loop creation size and other parameters are not completely determined. As a result, the overall modification factor for the string whose winding number is equal to n, f(n), should be described as f(n)
= P(n)A(n)a+5'2
.
(16)
At last we can estimate the modification factor of the black hole formation probability for the multi-winding string. T h e first case is the string formation probability is calculated including the detailed analysis of the correlated region size and the string configuration. T h e assumption for the parameter is Q = 4 ,
A(n)-n,
(17)
which makes the modification rather large. T h e final expression of the factor, f(n), can be written as f(n)
= P(n)n6-5
,
(18)
and the numerical values for n = 1 - 4 are depicted in Table 1. In this case, f(n) is too small to enhance the black hole production so t h a t the result is trivial, t h a t is, the constraint on the string model parameter is unchanged. In contrast to t h a t , the other case in which the string coalescence is taken into account may be more interesting. Using the same assumption for the parameters, a and A(n), as the former case, the formula of the modification factor can be calculated as f(n)
= P{l)n55
.
(19)
The ratio, f{n)/f(l) are shown in Table 2 for n = 2 - 4. It can be obviously seen t h a t the degree of the enhancement becomes greater as n increases.
344 T a b l e ! . Modification Factor
P(n)
1
/(»)
0.2102
0.2101
2 8.36 x 10~ 4
7.57 x 10- 2
3
4.8 x 10" 7
6.1 x 10~ 4
4
8 x 10" 11
7 x 10- 7
Table 2. Relative Modification Factor
2
n
3
4
421 2050
45.3 /(I)
4
Conclusions
In this talk, we have estimated how the observational constraint on the particle physics model parameter in which the cosmic string is produced should be modified when we consider the multi-winding string which may be useful for the topological inflation and the electroweak baryogenesis. T h e modified formula of the constraint on the line energy density which can be translated to t h a t on the symmetry breaking scale, 77, can be written as -2/(3+2a)
«*my
10 - 6
(20)
in which we assume the simple scaling distribution of the string. The numerical values of the above modification factor are calculated in two cases. One is the case t h a t the multi-winding string is produced at the initial formation epoch and the modification is not so significant since /(«) < /(I)
(21)
In the other case, the dynamical evolution of the string after its formation is analyzed and the string accumulation by the attractive interaction between strings makes the enhancement remarkable as
/(«)»/(!)
(22)
345 which means the upper b o u n d on rj must be much lower. T h u s we can say t h a t more stringent constraint by primordial black holes on the model parameter might be obtained by multi-winding strings. This is not the end of the story. There may be other effects which can enable the a b u n d a n t formation of the multi-winding defect such as the relaxation of the geodesic rule 1 2 which is applied when the phase between two different correlated regions is interpolated. Moreover, it may be possible t h a t the homogeneous gauge flux distribution greatly enhances the total winding number within the correlated domain so t h a t huge winding strings might be produced by the string coalescence 1 3 . Further work would be needed in the future. Acknowledgments The author is grateful to A r t t u Rajantie for his comment at the conference. The participation in the conference, COSMO2000, was realized by the support from Yokohama Gakujutsu Kyoiku Shinko Zaidan. References 1. T . W. B. Kibble, J. P h y s . A 9, 1387 (1976). For a review of topological defects, see, e.g., A. Vilenkin and E. P. S. Shellard, Cosmic Strings and Other Topological Defects (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, England, 1994). 2. A. Vilenkin, P h y s . Rev. Lett. 72, 3137 (1994). A. D. Linde, Phys. Lett. B 327, 208 (1994). 3. A. A. de Laix, M. Trodden and T . Vachaspati, Phys. Rev. D 57, 7186 (1998). 4. R. H. Brandenberger and A. -C. Davis, Phys. Lett. B 3 0 8 (1993) 79. 5. M. Nagasawa and J. Yokoyama, Phys. Rev. Lett. 77 (1996) 2166. 6. V. Soni, Phys. Lett. B 3 9 4 , 275 (1997). 7. H. B. Nielsen and P. Olesen, Nucl. Phys. B 6 1 , 45 (1973). 8. E. B. Bogomol'nyi and A. I. Vainshtein, Sov. J. Nucl. Phys. 2 3 , 588 (1976). 9. L. Jacobs and C. Rebbi, P h y s . Rev. B 19, 4486 (1979). L. M. A. Bettencourt and R. J. Rivers, Phys. Rev. D 5 1 , 1842 (1995). 10. T . Okabe and M. Nagasawa, Phys. Lett. B 4 6 1 , 49 (1999). 11. J. H. MacGibbon, R. H. Brandenberger and U. F. Wichoski, Phys. Rev. D 5 7 , 2158 (1998). 12. L. Pogosian and T . Vachaspati, Phys. Lett. B 4 2 3 , 45 (1998). 13. M. Hindmarsh and A. Rajantie, cond-mat/0007361.
Q-BALL FORMATION, B A R Y O G E N E S I S , AND DARK MATTER IN T H E G A U G E - M E D I A T E D SUSY B R E A K I N G SCENARIO S. K A S U Y A Research Center for the Early Universe, University of Tokyo 7-3-1, Hongo, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 133-0033, Japan E-mail: [email protected] We consider the Q-ball formation, and its implication to cosmology in the context of gauge-mediated SUSY breaking in minimal supersymmetric standard model. In addition to the usual stable Q ball investigated in the literature, we obtain a new type of a stable Q ball. It is so-called gravity-mediation type of Q ball, but also stable against the decay into nucleons, since the energy per unit charge is equal to gravitino mass m-^j-i, which can be smaller than nucleon mass in the gaugemediation mechanism. We consider the cosmological consequences in this new Q-ball scenario, and find that this new type of the Q ball can be considered as the dark matter and the source for the baryon number of the universe simultaneously.
1
Introduction
In the supersymmetric standard models, Affleck-Dine (AD) mechanism x is the most promising procedure for the baryogenesis. In the minimal supersymmetric standard model (MSSM), there are many flat directions consist of squarks and sleptons 2 , which can be identified as the AD field. Its potential is almost flat but slightly lifted up by effects of supersymmetry (SUSY) breaking. For the mechanism of SUSY breaking, there are two famous scenarios: the gravity- and gauge-mediated SUSY breakings. It was believed that the AD field stays at large field value at the inflationary stage, and, when the Hubble parameter becomes as small as the AD scalar mass after inflation, rolls down homogeneously its potential with rotation, making the baryon number of the universe. Recently, however, it was revealed that the AD field does not evolve homogeneously, but feels spatial instabilities, which grow nonlinear and form into Q balls 3 . A Q ball is a kind of the nontopological soliton, whose stability is guaranteed by the nonzero charge Q 4 ' 5 . In the context of the AD baryogenesis, the charge Q is the baryon number B. In the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking, a Q ball is stable against the decay into nucleons, provided that its charge is large enough so that its energy per unit charge is less than nucleon mass: EQ/Q ~ m ^ Q - 1 / 4 < 1 GeV 6 ' 3 , where m^ ~ 1 TeV, is the mass of AD field. Therefore, the Q ball itself can be a candidate for the 346
347
dark matter. On the other hand, in the gravity-mediated SUSY breaking, the energy of a Q ball per unit charge is essentially constant: EQ/Q ~ m^ > 1 GeV 7 . Thus, it should decay into nucleons, and the dark matter will be lightest supersymmetric particles (neutralinos) produced in Q-ball decays. In either case, the dark matter and the baryon number of the universe can be explained simultaneously by the Q-ball formation through the AD mechanism. In all the previous studies of Q balls in the context of SUSY breaking, the effects of gauge- and gravity-mediations are considered separately. However, it is natural to have both effects in the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking scenario, since the gravity-mediation effects will dominate over the gauge ones at the large field value. Cosmology including AD baryogenesis in such more realistic SUSY breaking scenario was considered in Ref. 8. There, AD field is regarded as a homogeneously rotating condensate, but we notice that it will form Q balls due to the instabilities of the field. Particular interest is the smallness of the gravitino mass comparing with that in the gravity-mediation scenario. It usually ranges between 100 keV and 1 GeV. Therefore, we can imagine a new type of a stable Q ball: the profile is the same as that in the gravitymediation, but its energy per unit charge is less that 1 GeV because of the small gravitino mass. Here, we study the cosmological consequences of Q balls (baryogenesis and the dark matter) in the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking, taking into account the gravity-mediation effects at large field value. 2
Properties of Q balls in the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking
To be concrete, let us assume the following potential for the AD field, y($) = m4,logfl + ^ j
+
m^
/ 2
|$|2[l
|2\ 1 +
^log(^)
.
(1)
where m 3 / 2 is the gravitino mass, K{< 0) term a one-loop correction, M» the renormalization scale, and we assume that the second term should be neglected for very small field value. This is nothing but the sum of the potentials for the gauge- and gravity-mediation mechanisms studied previously 3'7>9>10. However, as we mentioned earlier, the gravitino mass is considerably smaller. The second term will dominate the potential when 771
> > 4>eq = > / 2 — * - ,
(2)
m3/2 where $ = 4>exp(iu;t)/\^2. In this case, a new type of a stable Q ball is produced n . Its property is very similar to that in the gravity-mediation,
348
such as 7 ' 12 RQ ~ \K\-l/2m-j2, 3 4
4> ~ | ^ | / m 3 / 2 Q
w ~ m3/2, 1/2
,
£ Q ~ m3/2Q,
(3)
but, as can be seen from the last equation, it is stable against the decay into nucleons. In the opposite case, the Q-ball properties are the same as in the gauge-mediation only 3 : RQ-m^Q1'4,
w-rn^Q-1/4,
<j>~m4,Ql'\
EQ~m^Q3l\
(4)
The energy per unit charge can be treated from unified viewpoint u . The largest charge of the Q ball formed depends linearly on the initial charge density of the AD field as 9,1 ° m
3/2
W3/2/
where /3 < 1 12 , and we use q = LJ(/>2 ~ m3/2<^>2. Inserting it into Eq.(2), we obtain m 3 / 2 > (2/3) 1 / 4 m 0 Q- 1 / 4 .
(6)
The right hand side of this equation is identical to the expression for the energy per unit charge of the gauge-mediation besides the factor of order unity. The energy per unit charge of the Q ball is written as
EQ__[ Q
m^Q-1/4 \m3/2
4> < 4>eci
The gap on the boundary should disappear and both sides of the curves will be smoothly connected because Q balls formed in this region are not the exact type of either (3) or (4), but will show properties between them. 3
Q-ball formation through Affleck-Dine mechanism
We consider the full nonlinear equations of motion of the Affleck-Dine scalar field in order to see the formation of the Q-ball through the Affleck-Dine mechanism by numerical lattice simulations 910 > 12 . It is shown that large Qballs are really produced by the fragmentation of the condensate of a scalar field whose potential is very flat, as in the supersymmetric standard theory. The most important result is that, once Q-balls are formed, almost all the charges are absorbed into them, and only a tiny fraction of the charge is
349 carried by the relic AD field, b u t its amplitude is very small and fluctuates so t h a t it m a y not be possible to regard it as a condensate. Also, we find t h a t the charges stored within Q-balls grows as the initial charge density of the AD condensate increases. In other words, the larger the initial amplitude of the AD condensate is, the larger charge Q balls have. 4
B a r y o g e n e s i s b y t h e c h a r g e e v a p o r a t i o n f r o m Q-ball surfaces
Since Q balls are stable even for
= -^THITR2Q,
(8)
where /i is a chemical potential of the Q ball, which is estimated as /z ~ u because u> is energy of ^-field inside the Q ball. Although the mass of the (free) AD particle m ^ is affected by thermal corrections, which should be changed as m,p —» m . ^ ( r ) ~ T , at T > m§, the gravitino mass is not affected, since particles coupled to the AD field are decoupled from thermal b a t h when the AD field has a large vacuum expectation value. At T > m$, large numbers of ^-particles are in thermal b a t h outside Q balls, so a ~ 1. On the other hand, since only light quarks are in thermal b a t h at T < m^, the corresponding cross section is highly suppressed by the heavy gluino exchanges, and a ~ (T/m^)2. However, if the r a t e of the charge diffusion from the "atmosphere" of the Q ball is smaller t h a n the evaporation r a t e , chemical equilibrium will established there, which results in the suppression of t h e evaporation 1 4 . T h e diffusion r a t e is 14 T diff = ^
= -4ir(RQDfiQT2,
(9)
where D = a/T with a ~ 4 — 6, and ( ~ 1. T h e time scale of charge t r a n s p o r t a t i o n is determined by the diffusion when Tdiff < r e v a p . It holds for
T > T ~ *
K/!Wr1/12
4><
laV3|^|i/«(m8/2m|)1/8
^ > ^
'
[
'
In the opposite case, the diffusion effect is negligible, a n d t h e charge t r a n s p o r t a t i o n rate is completely determined by the evaporation rate 1 x .
350
Therefore, total amount of the charge evaporated from the Q ball is "\l2^Ma2/3|^|-2/3(m3/2m2ri/3
^ > ^
q
'
where A a 0.2 and M - 2.4 x 1018 GeV. Provided that the initial charge of the Q ball is larger than the evaporated charge, we regard that the Q ball survives from evaporation, and contributes to the dark matter of the universe: Qinit > AQ, that is,
fio»(W 12/11 I
10
("GiV J
*<** (iw)
0 ^ &q
where we set a = 4 and |JFST| = 0.01.
Now we can relate the baryon number and the amount of the dark matter in the universe. As mentioned above, the baryon number of the universe should be explained by the amount of the charge evaporated from Q balls, AQ, and the survived Q balls become the dark matter. If we assume that Q balls do not exceed the critical density of the universe, i.e., QQ < 1, and the baryon-to-photon ratio as rjB ~ 10 - 1 °,
Q< { I10
4/3
(GSV)
,
2/3
(TW)
(13)
4>>4>e
In order for the Q ball to be stable against the decay into nucleons, |Q>10
1 2
(^)
I m 3 / 2 < 1 GeV
4
0 < &
V
(M)
For the usual gauge-mediation type of the Q ball, we obtain the allowed region for explaining the baryon number of the universe, using three constraints, i.e., the first lines of Eqs. (12), (13), and (14). Figure 1 shows the allowed region on (Q, m$) plane. The shaded regions represent that this type stable Q balls are created, and the baryon number of the universe can be explained by the mechanism mentioned above. Furthermore, this type of stable Q balls contribute crucially to the dark matter of the universe at present, if the Q balls have the charge given by the thick line in the figure 12 . For the new type of the Q ball, namely gravity-mediation type, there is an additional constraint. Rewriting Eq.(6), we have
351
io 3
i(T
10"
m 0 [GeV] Figure 1. Summary of constraints on (Q,m,p) plain for the old type of the Q ball. We also show the regions currently excluded by BAKSAN (B), Gyrlyand (G), and Kamiokande (K-l, K-2, K-3), and to be searched by the Telescope Array Project (TA) and OWL-AIRWATCH (OA) in the future.
Combining this constraint with the second lines of Eqs.(12), (13), and (14), we obtain the allowed region for the new type of the stable Q ball explaining the baryon number of the universe. Figure 2 shows the allowed region on {Q,m3/2) plane for m^ = 1 TeV. The shaded regions represent that the new type of stable Q balls are created, and the baryon number of the universe can be explained by the mechanism mentioned above. Furthermore, the new type of stable Q balls contribute crucially to the dark matter of the universe at present, if the Q balls have the charge given by the thick line in the figure.
352
10
WX\
! (d)
24
10 Q
(b) i 20
101
16
10
v a)
10s 104 103 102 101 1 m 3 / 2 [GeV]
10
Figure 2. Summary of constraints on ( ( 5 , m 3 / 2 ) plain for the new type of the Q ball.
5
Q-ball detection
One may wonder if these stable Q balls can be detected. When a Q ball collides with nucleons, they enter the surface layer of the Q ball, and dissociate into quarks, which are converted into squarks. In this process, Q balls release ~ 1 GeV energy per collision by emitting soft pions. This process is the basis for the Q-ball detections 15>16) which is called (Kusenko-Kuzmin-ShaposhnikovTinyakov) KKST process in the literature. It occurs for electrically neutral Q balls (ENQB). For electrically positively charged Q balls (EPCQB), the KKST process is strongly suppressed by Coulomb repulsion, and only electromagnetic processes will take place. For electrically negatively charged Q balls (ENCQB), the both KKST and electromagnetic processes occur, but the former is dominant, which is essentially the same as for ENQBs. With the discussions similar to Ref. 16 , we can restrict the parameter spaces {Q,m<j,) or (Q,m3/2) by the several experiments. Figures 1 and 3 show the results for ENQBs. Lower left regions are excluded by the various experiments. For both cases, the allowed charges are Q ~ 10 25 , where the initial amplitude of the AD field should be larger than
353 35
10
""-
:
:
30
<"^i
10
i
I
:
(
'
i >v
' I
l
l
:
:
:
••
:
^::::::i::::i::i:i:::::i::::::::i::::i::::::::: 25
10 ^ i - s -
^r»»_^fe>J
jfclC^T^SkJ
20
10
15
10
•
(
;
(
:
1
f.
:
I
(
i
t
'
t
6
10"
5
4
!
^ L •
:
i
i
•
;
i 5
10" 10" 10" 10"2 1 0 1 1 m 3 / 2 [GeV]
10
10 2
Figure 3. Restrictions by several experiments on ( Q , m 3 / 2 ) plain for \K\ = 0.01. We show the excluded region by the same experiment as for the usual gauge-mediation type.
Array Project or the OWL-AIRWATCH detector may detect this type of Q balls with an interesting gravitino mass ~ 100 keV.
R e h e a t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e after i n f l a t i o n a n d t h e r m a l b a t h before reheating In order for this scenario to work, t h e reheating t e m p e r a t u r e after inflation should be very low such as 10 3 - 10 4 GeV 1 2 . However, this is the advantage because we can avoid the gravitino problem. In addition, thermal effects on the dynamics of the AD condensate m a y be less effective for such low temperatures. As is well known, the m a x i m u m t e m p e r a t u r e after inflation is achieved just after the inflaton oscillation begins, far before the reheating time (T = TRH)- If we take into account these thermal effects, the inflation scale should be very low: V1/4 < 10 1 2 GeV for the safe Q-ball formation 1 2 . In fact, the new inflation scenario can provide b o t h very low scale inflation and very low reheating t e m p e r a t u r e .
354
7
Conclusion
We have considered the Q-ball formation and its cosmological consequences in the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking scenario. We have also showed the existence of the new type of stable Q balls. Many properties are the same as the gravity-mediation type of Q ball, but it is stable against the decay into nucleons, since the energy per unit charge is equal to the gravitino mass m 3 / 2 , which can be smaller than nucleon mass of 1 GeV in the gauge-mediation mechanism. In either type, because of its stability, it can be a nice candidate for the dark matter of the universe. The baryons are produced only by evaporation from Q balls, since (almost) all the baryons are trapped in Q balls during their formation. We have found that the the new type of the Q ball with Q ~ 1025 for m 3 / 2 ~ 1 0 - 3 GeV and m^, = 1 TeV, can account for both the dark matter and the baryon number of the present universe, and such Q balls may be detected by the future experiments. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
I. Affleck and M. Dine, Nucl. Phys. B 249, 361 (1985). M. Dine, L. Randall, and S. Thomas, Nucl. Phys. B 458, 291 (1996). A. Kusenko and M. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. B 418, 46 (1998). S. Coleman, Nucl. Phys. B 262, 263 (1985). A. Kusenko, Phys. Lett. B 404, 285 (1997). G. Dvali, A. Kusenko, and M. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. B 417, 99 (1998). K. Enqvist and J. McDonald, Phys. Lett. B 425, 309 (1998); Nucl. Phys. B 538, 321 (1999); Phys. Lett. B 440, 59 (1998). A. de Gouvea, T. Moroi, and H. Murayama, Phys. Rev. D 56, 1281 (1997). S. Kasuya and M. Kawasaki, Phys. Rev. D 61, 041301 (2000). S. Kasuya and M. Kawasaki, Phys. Rev. D 62, 023512 (2000). S. Kasuya and M. Kawasaki, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85, 2677 (2000). S. Kasuya and M. Kawasaki, (in preparation). M. Laine and M. Shaposhnikov, Nucl. Phys. B 532, 376 (1998). R. Banerjee and K. Jedamzik, Phys. Lett. B 484, 278 (2000). A. Kusenko, V. Kuzmin, M. Shaposhnikov, and P.G. Tinyakov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80, 3185 (1998). J. Arafune, T. Yoshida, S. Nakamura, and K. Ogure, Phys. Rev. D 62, 105013 (2000), and references therein.
N U M E R I C A L SIMULATIONS OF ELECTROWEAK BARYOGENESIS AT PREHEATING* A. R A J A N T I E DAMTP,
CMS,
Wilberforce
Road, Cambridge
CBS OWA,
UK
P.M. S A F F I N CPT, Durham
University,
South Road, Durham
DH1 3LE,
UK
E.J. C O P E L A N D Centre for Theoretical
Physics,
University
of Sussex,
Brighton
BN1 9QH,
UK
It has recently been suggested that the baryon washout problem of standard electroweak baryogenesis could be avoided if inflation ends at a low enough energy density and a parametric resonance transfers its energy repidly into the standard model fields. We present preliminary results of numerical simulations in a S U ( 2 ) x U ( l ) gauge-Higgs model in which this process was studied.
1
Introduction
In order to explain the observed baryon asymmetry of the universe, a theory must satisfy three conditions:1 1. Baryon number violation, 2. C and CP violation and 3. Deviation from thermal equilibrium. In principle, they all seem to fulfilled in the electroweak theory and the standard cosmological Big Bang scenario.2 At high temperatures, baryon number is violated by non-perturbative sphaleron processes, which change the ChernSimons number and consequently, due to a quantum anomaly, also the baryon number. The electroweak phase transition makes the system fall out of equilibrium in a natural way. The strength of CP violation in the electroweak theory is too small, but even that is not a severe problem because the constraints for CP violation arising from beyond the standard model are fairly weak. However, the baryon asymmetry generated in the electroweak phase transition gets easily washed out. Although sphaleron processes become less frequent after the phase transition, they don't stop completely. Instead, their * Presented by A. Rajantie.
355
356
rate is proportional to exp(—M sp h/T), where Msph is proportional to the expectation value <j> of the Higgs field, and unless
Simulations
Let us consider a simple model of inflation, in which the expansion of the universe is driven by the potential energy of a scalar field, the inflaton, rolling slowly down its potential towards its minimum at the origin. Inflation dilutes away all inhomogeneities and thus all the standard model fields are in vacuum when inflation ends, and the inflaton has a large homogeneous expectation value. It goes on rolling down its potential and starts to oscillate about the
357
minimum of its potential. We assume that it is coupled to the Higgs field and the two fields start to resonate, 7 whereby a large amount of energy is rapidly transferred from the inflaton to the long-wavelength modes of the Higgs. The details of this process of preheating depend on the properties of the inflaton, which are unfortunately unknown. Therefore we simply assume that the energy transfer is extremely efficient and results in a state in which the energy is concentrated in the Higgs modes with very long wavelengths. From the point of view of the microscopic physics that we want to describe, this is practically equivalent to the Higgs having a very large value <po- Furthermore, we assume that the effect of the inflaton to the later dynamics of the system is negligible, and therefore we don't include it in our simulations as a dynamical field. Thus we can simply consider the time evolution of the standard model fields with the special initial conditions in which the Higgs has initial value 4>o and all the other fields are in vacuum. As previous simulations 8,9 have shown, the system will quickly reach a quasi-equilibrium state in which the long-wavelength modes of the Higgs and gauge fields are approximately in equilibrium at a high effective temperature. The decays of the bosons transfer energy slowly into the fermions and gluons, and the effective temperature of the long-wavelength bosonic modes decreases. As the fermions and gluons are initially in vacuum, this process can be described perturbatively by a damping term, whose magnitude T « 2 GeV is obtained from the observed lifetime of W and Z bosons. This approximation is valid until t ~ T - 1 . Thus, the only fields that we have to consider are the gauge bosons and the Higgs field. For baryogenesis, the relevant degrees of freedom are the long-wavelength modes, and they have large occupation numbers. Therefore they behave classically, and thus we can study the dynamics of the system simply by solving the classical equations of motion d2Q4> = DtDi(f> + 2A (\2 dlB, = -d3Bl3
-
+ g'lm^D^
-
Td0Bu
&lW% = -[Dj,Wij] + ig U{D^
- 1-{D^4> - h.c.) - T c W ,
(1)
where <j> is the Higgs field, B{ is the U(l) gauge field and Wi is the SU(2) gauge field, and the covariant derivative is Di=di-
%
-gWl
-
l
-g'Bi.
(2)
358
In addition, both gauge fields must satisfy the corresponding Gauss laws diEi = g'lmir^cp, [Di,Fi\ = ig(*
(3)
where Tr^doct),
Ei = -doBi,
Fi = -doWi.
(4)
Although the classical equations of motion describe the dynamics of the long-wavelength modes, they fail to describe the early stages of the thermalization, when the quantum fluctuations play an important role. Therefore we approximate them by adding to the initial field configuration Gaussian fluctuations with the same two-point correlation function as in the quantum theory at tree level. For each real field component Q of mass m and its canonical momentum P, this means (Q*(t,k)Q(t,k'))
=
{P*(t,k)P(t,k'))
=
J (27r)3£(3>(fc-fc'), 2 v P +m2
\/P ^+ m2 V*)3S(3)(.k-k').
(5)
(6)
In a sense, this means that the quantum effects are approximated to leading order in perturbation theory. Just like real quantum fluctuations, these fluctuations generate radiative corrections to the couplings, and they must be taken into account, i.e., the parameters must be renormalized. The situation is made more complicated by the damping term T, which damps also the fluctuations and therefore the mass divergence and consequently the mass counterterm also decrease with time. The parameter with the largest radiative corrections in the Higgs mass, and we have calculated the necessary renormalization counterterm at one-loop level in perturbation theory »latt - mH -{6X+^g2
9 o
3 , \ 0.226 + -J2; ) -^re~rt.
(7)
In a similar way, when we plot {
r t
,
(8)
where we have subtracted the dominant ultraviolet divergence. With these approximations, the dynamics of the system depends only on two unknown parameters, the Higgs mass m # , for which we used the value TTIH = 100 GeV, and the initial value (f>0, which is constrained by the
359 10"
10"
> (3 10*
symmetry restoration
10"
0.5
1
1.5
time (GeV-1)
Figure 1. The time evolution of \4>\2 with the initial value <po = 700 GeV. The dashed line shows the vacuum expectation value. Until t ~ 0.8 G e V " 1 , the curve decreases exponentially, indicating that the Higgs condensate is absent and the symmetry is restored. Eventually, \4>\2 starts to grow towards it vacuum value, which means that the condensate develops and the symmetry is broken.
requirement that when the system equilibrates, it is already deep enough in the broken phase to prevent the washout of the baryon asymmetry by sphalerons. It has been estimated 3 that this requires cj> > T r e h e a t , where Treheat is the final temperature. On the other hand, conservation of energy implies 30A -'rehe
ff*7T2
1/4
t>o « O.20o,
(9)
which leads to the constraint /> 0 <600GeV.
(10)
Since we were only interested in the qualitative behaviour and not in precise numbers, we used in the simulations the value 0O = 700 GeV, which is slightly larger than the constraint (10).
360
3
Results
Startng from the initial configuration described above, we solved numerically the equations of motion (1) on a 60 3 lattice with lattice spacing Sx = 3 TeV^ 1 and time step 5t = 0.6 TeV - 1 . The time evolution of \(f>\2 is shown in Fig. 1. Its qualitative behaviour is similar to that in the Abelian theory.8 Note that in the presence of fluctuations, |>|2 is never zero, but from its qualitative behaviour we can deduce that the electroweak symmetry is effectively restored until t ~ 0.7 GeV - 1 . In the absence of a Higgs condensate, the damping term is namely expected to cause \4>\2 to decrease as exp(—Ft), which is exactly what we observe. At t ~ 0.7 G e V - 1 , \cj>\2 starts to grow towards its vacuum expectation value, just as it is expected to do in the broken phase. During this period of non-thermal symmetry restoration, baryon number is not conserved, and the out-of-equilibrium processes can generate a non-zero baryon asymmetry.
4
Baryon asymmetry
So far, we have concentrated on understanding the qualitative dynamics of the electroweak theory during preheating. However, If we really want to test the scenario of electroweak baryogenesis at preheating, 5 ' 6 we have to be able to measure the baryon asymmetry generated during the transition, and that involves many technical problems. In principle, we can measure the change of the baryon number even though we don't have fermions in our system, because a quantum anomaly links it to the changes of the Chern-Simons number of the SU(2) gauge field
AB = 3ANCS = ~
J dt J dzxz%]kE
(11)
By measuring Ef and F%, we could then find the change of the baryon number. However, as iV"cs is a topological quantity, it does not have a natural definition on a lattice, and attempts 1 0 ' 1 1 to measure eijhEfF^k in lattice theories have shown that it is dominated by ultraviolet fluctuations. However, at least in thermal equilibrium, it is possible to remove these fluctuations by cooling the system, 11 which leads to a more reliable result. Another, more serious problem is that in order to generate the observed baryon asymmetry, the theory must violate CP. If this effect arises from heavy degrees of freedom, it can be approximated by an effective term in the La-
361 grangian
*c'mr/*&^F-p""-
<12)
'new
where M is the mass of the heavy fields and <5CP parameterizes the strength of the CP violation. Unfortunately, it is very difficult to add this term in the equations of motion, because it is extremely sensitive to ultraviolet fluctuations. Thus, it seems that the only way to measure the generated baryon asymmetry is to treat 5cp as a linear perturbation. One way to do that is to use a Boltzmann-type equation 12 driB _ r s p h Scp d (
(13)
and measure r s p h, TeS and (4>2) in the simulation. However, this approximation may not always take all the relevant effects into account. 13 5
Conclusions
We have studied numerically some aspects of the behaviour of the electroweak theory during preheating and found that it is possible to restore the symmetry non-thermally for a short time, which allows the baryon asymmetry to be generated. When the Higgs and gauge bosons decay into fermions, the temperature decreases so rapidly that this baryon asymmetry does not have time to be washed out. While the results presented in this talk support the scenario of electroweak baryogenesis at preheating, they are qualitative in nature and do not let us deduce the generated amount of baryon asymmetry. However, more precise simulations are under way.14 Acknowledgments The authors were supported by PPARC and AR also partially by the University of Helsinki. This work was conducted on the SGI Origin platform using COSMOS Consortium facilities, funded by HEFCE, PPARC and SGI. References 1. A. D. Sakharov, JETP Lett. 5 (1967) 24.
362
2. V. A. Kuzmin, V. A. Rubakov and M. E. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. B155 (1985) 36. 3. M. E. Shaposhnikov, Nucl. Phys. B287 (1987) 757. 4. K. Kajantie, M. Laine, K. Rummukainen and M. Shaposhnikov, Nucl. Phys. B493 (1997) 413 [hep-lat/9612006]. 5. L. M. Krauss and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 1502 [hep-ph/9902420]. 6. J. Garcia-Bellido, D. Y. Grigoriev, A. Kusenko and M. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Rev. D60 (1999) 123504 [hep-ph/9902449]. 7. J. H. Traschen and R. H. Brandenberger, Phys. Rev. D42 (1990) 2491; L. Kofman, A. Linde, and A. A. Starobinsky, Phys. Rev. Lett. 73 (1994) 3195 [hep-th/9405187]. 8. A. Rajantie and E. J. Copeland, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85 (2000) 916 [hep-ph/0003025]; A. Rajantie, hep-ph/0010224. 9. T. Prokopec and T. G. Roos, Phys. Rev. D55 (1997) 3768 [hep-ph/9610400]. 10. G. D. Moore and N. Turok, Phys. Rev. D56 (1997) 6533 [hep-ph/9703266]. 11. J. Ambjorn and A. Krasnitz, Nucl. Phys. B506 (1997) 387 [hep-ph/9705380]; G. D. Moore, Phys. Rev. D59 (1999) 014503 [hep-ph/9805264]. 12. S. Y. Khlebnikov and M. E. Shaposhnikov, Nucl. Phys. B308 (1988) 885. 13. D. Grigoriev, hep-ph/0006115. 14. A. Rajantie, P.M. Saffin and E.J. Copeland, in preparation.
MULTI-FIELD FERMIONIC PREHEATING SHINJI TSUJIKAWA Department of Physics, Waseda University, 3-4-1 Ohkubo, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 169-8555, Japan Email: [email protected] We present non-perturbative analysis of fermion production during preheating in the presence of multiple scalar fields in an expanding background paying particular attention to the interplay between instant preheating (x-1/0 and direct fermion preheating {<j>-ii). In the broad resonance regime we find t h a t instant fermion production is sensitive to suppression of the long wavelength x modes during inflation. Further, the standard scenario of resonant fermionic preheating through inflaton decay can be significantly modified by t h e x-1/" coupling, and may even lead to a decrease in the number of fermions produced.
1
Introduction
The evolution of spin 1/2 (and higher) quantum fields propagating on curved backgrounds has traditionally been considered an esoteric domain of little cosmological interest 1 . In the face of the power and simplicity of the inflationary paradigm the added complexities associated with their renormalization, regularization and solution in the presence of a non-trivial metric g^ made them unpopular topics of study. The last two years have, however, seen a reversal in the fortune of higherspin fields with the growing belief that they may be relevant for cosmology in a number of rather profound ways. Decay of the inflaton to massive states during inflation can lead to non-trivial features in the primordial power spectrum and cosmic microwave background (CMB) 2 . In inflationary scenarios it is during reheating and preheating - the non-equilibrium end to many inflationary models - that fermions first became important for the subsequent evolution and nature of the universe. We will consider fermion production during preheating in the realistic multi-field case where fermion is coupled to both inflaton 4> and second scalar field x interacting with 4>. 2
The model and basic equations
Let us consider the massless chaotic inflation model
V = -AMl + \g24>2x2 + ?
(1)
364
P"2 A
|
2
2
Figure 1. Schematic illustration of t h e potential (1). We consider the inflaton <j>, scalar field X and fermion iji.
where tp is the fermion field of interest with bare mass my, which is coupled to the inflaton,
365
We work around a flat Friedmann-Lemaitre-Robertson-Walker (FLRW) background with perturbations in the longitudinal gauge ds2 = - ( 1 + 2<$>)dt2 + a 2 (l - 2
(2)
where $ is a gauge-invariant potential 11,12 . Decomposing the scalar fields into homogeneous parts and fluctuations <£(t, x) —>
3A02 + V
+ 6g2
- (2g24>X + 3g2
(3)
5Xk + "ZH5Xk + I ~2 + 924>2 J &Xk = 4x$ fc + 2(x + 3tf X )$ f c " (2ffVx + 3 j f V ) ^ f c , 4 fc + f f $ f c = 4 7 r G ( ^ f c + x*Xfc),
(4) (5)
where G = mlj 2 is Newton's gravitational constant. We include the second order field fluctuations in the background equations via /c-space integrals (see Ref. 13 for details). Since the Dirac spinor ip has no homogeneous component, writing the general Dirac equation to first order in the perturbed metric (2) does not yield any terms containing 3>fc, and simply gives (i-ylidlt-mesa)^=0,
(6)
where do denotes the derivative with respect to conformal time 77 = j a~xdt. We decompose the ip field into Fourier components as ^ = (2^572/d3fcE[o«wii«(fc>t')e+ik'x-i-6»(fe)^(*^)e"
(7)
Imposing the following standard ansatz 3 : us(k,rj) = (—ij^d^ — meSa)ipk{t)R±(k), where R±{k) are the eigenvectors of the helicity operator, which satisfy the relation •y°R±(k) = 1 and k • ^ R±(k) = ± 1 , we obtain the mode equation for the V>fc: d2 dx2
2
2
.df V* = 0, dx
(8)
366
where / = m e f f / ^ ( 0 ) ) , K 2 = k2/(\
4>k = akN+e-'So
+ (3kN_e+iSo «**«,
(9)
where Q.\ = K2 + f2 and N± = 1/'y/2Qk{^k ± / ) - The comoving number density of fermions is given in terms of the Bogoliubov coefficients by
The initial conditions are chosen to be afc(0) = 1, /?fc(0) = 0, which corresponds to nfc(0) = 0. The Bogoliubov coefficients satisfy the relation lafc(*)|2 + \Pk(t)\2 = 1, which means that the exclusion principle restricts the number density of fermions to below unity, nk(i) < 1. 3 3.1
Fermion production during preheating No x decay: hi^O,
h2 = 0
Let us consider the massive fermion production which may be relevant for leptogenesis scenario. We first review the case of hi ^ 0 and h2 = 0. Fermion production takes place around the region where the effective mass meff = m^ + h\4> vanishes, which corresponds to <j>* = -m^/hi.
(11)
As long as the relation m^ < \hi
mpl
-cos(0.8472v / A^co^).
(12)
Since the minimum effective mass is achieved for 0.8472VA<^CO?7 = ir, the upper limit of the fermion mass production is "V ~ ( W 5 ) " V -
(13) 17
This indicates that super-heavy fermions whose masses are of order 10 -10 18 GeV can be produced if we choose large couplings with hi close to unity 2 .
367
In the vicinity of meff = 0 where particles are non-adiabatically created, we can approximately express the effective mass of fermion as meg = hi
dr2
(14)
The solution of this equation is described by the parabolic cylinder function, and the comoving number density of fermions is analytically derived as 2 /
7T2fc2\
71>(0)
KZ
\dcf)*/dx\ Jq[
(15)
This relation means that larger values of q\ and \d4>»/dx\ lead to the production of massive particles with higher momenta. Massive fermions can be instantly created even after one oscillation of inflaton. Their occupation number increases to of order unity for low momentum modes K ~ 0. Super-heavy fermions with masses greater than the GUT scale m^ ~ 1016 GeV can be produced if the Yukawa-coupling is larger than / i i « 5 x 1 0 - 3 . These massive fermions may have played an important role in leptogenesis scenario or be candidates of the super-heavy dark matter 5 . 3.2
Instant preheating considered: h\ = 0, ft-2 7^ 0
Let us next consider the case with hi = 0 and hi ^ 0. When 1 < g2/X < 3, since long-wavelength modes of the x n e ld are resonantly amplified14, one might assume that massive fermions are efficiently produced from the beginning of preheating. However, for instant production of super-massive fermions, the whole hix term in the effective fermion mass must be comparable to the bare mass m^ at the start of preheating. This condition is rather difficult to achieve unless both the coupling h^ and the initial value of \ a r e large, which indicates that super-massive fermions heavier than m,/, ~ 10~ 6 m p i cannot be produced at the initial stage. In this case however, once the amplitude of the x field grows through parametric resonance and the \h
368
X- Then the effective mass of fermions at the end of inflation is approximately given by meS « roy, - fe2 {g/g) <j>{0).
(16)
When hi and cf>{0) are positive, meg can take negative values at the end of inflation for large couplings hi and ratio g/g. Since the amplitude of the x field decreases at the initial stage of preheating due to cosmic expansion, instant fermion production takes place when mes vanishes before the x fluctuation is amplified through resonance. This case corresponds to hi {g/g)
> 2my,/m p i,
(17)
where we used the value
Both couplings taken into account: hi jt 07 hi ^ 0
If both hi and hi are non-zero, fermionic preheating strongly depends both upon the absolute and relative strengths of the couplings. In the presence of the g coupling, the effective mass of fermion at the initial stage of preheating is approximately given by meff « my + hi-hi{g/gf
>.
(18)
This relation indicates that the negative coupling hi will assist fermion production caused by the positive hi coupling. Conversely, when hi and hi are both positive, including the hi coupling generally works as to suppress fermion production as long as hi > hi{g/g)2. Let us consider concrete cases for the couplings: hi = 1 0 - 5 , hi = 1, 2 g /X = 5.0 x 103, and g/g = 3.0 x 10" 3 with my, = 5.0 x 10- 7 m p i. When hi = 0, fermions are stochastically produced at the initial phase of preheating when the meff vanishes. However, the hi coupling makes the second term in Eq. (18) smaller than the bare mass m^. Hence instant fermion production
369 1.0 0.010
r
0.00010 lO"* 10"8 10-10
r
I
io- 12 10-"
I
r
k-a
h 1 = io- 5 , h 2 =1
'
10" J
10
15
20
X Figure 2. ft 2 -suppression of instant fermion production. Number density of fermions " f c vs x in the cases hi = 10~ 5 , hi = 1 (solid), and h\ = 1 0 - 5 , hi — 0 (dotted), with g2/\ = 5.0 x 10 3 , g/g = 3.0 X 10~ 3 , and m^ = 5.0 x 1 0 _ 7 m p i for t h e mode K = 1.
does not take place in this case, although n^ increases for x > 30 due to the resonance from the /12 coupling (see Fig. 2). This suppression is relevant for large coupling hi relative to h\. When h\ and hi are of the same order, fermion production mainly proceeds by the foi coupling, because the ratio g/g is typically smaller than unity. When h\ = 0 and hi ^ 0, massive fermions which satisfy the relation (17) are instantly produced. This typically requires rather large coupling hi for producing massive fermions whose masses are greater than m^ ~ 10~ 6 m p i. However, introducing the hi coupling even much smaller than hi can potentially alter the dynamics of fermion production. For example, in the case of h\ = 0, hi = 1, g2/X = 5.0 x 103, and g/g = 3.0 x 10~ 3 with m^, = 10 _ 5 m p i, we can not expect stochastic amplification of fermions at the initial stage while n^ increases for x > 40 after the x n e l d is sufficiently produced. Including the h\ coupling greater than 10~ 4 , fermions are periodically created from the beginning of preheating. This means that the instant preheating scenario discussed in Ref. 15 can be further strengthened by taking into account the h\ coupling.
370
4
Conclusions
We have studied spin-1/2 fermion production during preheating over a 6dimensional coupling constant parameter space. This parameter space spans both the direct resonant decay of the inflaton to fermions (4> —> ip) and the indirect decays of instant preheating (<£—*• x —> V0- We have verified the general expectation that increasing the cfh^i (h{) and X'i' (^2) couplings typically leads to enhanced fermion production though with an interesting exception. In the case where (x) > 0 and both h\ and hi are non-negative, increasing hi leads to a decrease in the production of fermions. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I thank Bruce A. Bassett and Fermin Viniegra for useful discussions. References 1. N. D. Birrel and P. C. W. Davies, Quantum fields in curved space (1980). 2. D. Chung, E. Kolb, A. Riotto, and I. I. Tkachev, Phys. Rev. D 62, 043508 (2000). 3. P. B. Greene and L. Kofman, Phys. Lett. B448, 6 (1999). 4. J. Baacke, K. Heitman, and C. Patzold, Phys. Rev. D 58, 125013 (1998). 5. G. F. Giudice, M. Peloso, A. Riotto, and I. I. Tkachev, JHEP 9908, 014 (1999). 6. J. Garcia-Bellido, S. Mollerach, and E. Roulet, JHEP 0002, 034 (2000). 7. P. B. Greene and L. Kofman, hep-ph/0003018. 8. M. Peloso and L. Sorbo, hep-ph/0003045. 9. G. G. Ross and S. Sarkar, Nucl. Phys. B461, 597 (1996). 10. B. A. Bassett, C. Gordon, R. Maartens, and D. I. Kaiser, Phys. Rev. D 61, 061302 (2000). 11. V. F. Mukhanov, H. A. Feldman, and R. H. Brandenberger, Phys. Rep. 215, 293 (1992). 12. B. A. Bassett, F. Tamburini, D. I. Kaiser, and R. Maartens, Nucl. Phys. B561, 188 (1999). 13. S. Tsujikawa, B. A. Bassett, and F. Viniegra, JHEP 08, 019 (2000). 14. P. B. Greene, L. Kofman, A. Linde, and A. A. Starobinsky, Phys. Rev. D 56, 6175 (1997); D. I. Kaiser, Phys. Rev. D 56 706 (1997). 15. G. Felder, L. Kofman, A. Linde, Phys. Rev. D59, 123523 (1999).
CONSERVED EVOLUTIONS OF T H E P E R T U R B E D F R I E D M A N N W O R L D MODEL JAI-CHAN HWANG Department
of Astronomy
and Atmospheric Sciences, University, Korea E-mail: [email protected]
Kyungpook
National
HYERIM NOH Korea Astronomy E-mail:
Observatory, Taejeon, [email protected]
Korea
The evolutions of linear structures in a spatially homogeneous and isotropic world model are characterized by some conserved quantities. The amplitude of gravitational wave is conserved in the super-horizon scale, the perturbed three-space curvature in the comoving gauge is conserved in the super-sound-horizon scale, and the angular momentum of rotational perturbation is generally conserved.
1
Gravity theory and perturbed world model
We consider a gravity theory with the Lagrangian
1
\f{4>, R) - \w{4>Wc4>,c - V(
(l)
where R is the scalar curvature, and
(2)
where a(t) is the cosmic scale factor. The perturbed order variables a ( x , t ) , P(x,t), (p(x.,t), and 7(x,t) are the scalar-type metric perturbations. Ba(x.,t) and C Q (x,t) are transverse {Ba, = 0 = Ca,a) vector-type perturbations corresponding to the rotational perturbation. CQ/g(x, t) is a transverse-tracefree (C" = 0 = C^.p) tensor-type perturbation corresponding to the gravitational wave. Thus, we have four degrees of freedom for the scalar-type, four degrees of freedom for the vector-type, and two degrees of freedom for the tensor-type perturbations. Two degrees of freedom for the tensor-type perturbation indicate the graviational wave. Whereas, two out of four degrees of freedoms, each for the scalar-type and vector-type perturbations, are affected by spacetime 371
372
dependent coordinate transformations which connect the physical perturbed spacetime with the fictitious background spacetime. This is often called the gauge effect and a way of using it as advantages in handling problems is proposed in 1. The scalar fields are decomposed into the background and perturbed parts as ^ 7 (x, t) = 4>I(t) + 54>I(j(.,t), and similarly for R and F (= /,#). The energymomentum tensor is decomposed as T§ = -n=-(fi
+ 6ii),
T° = (/x + p K ,
T2 = (p + 6p)5Z+ir2,
(3)
where 7r2 is the anisotropic stress. 2
Scalar-type s t r u c t u r e
For the scalar-type structures we have va = —v>Q/k. In handling the scalartype structure the proper choice of the gauge condition simplifies the analyses and the resulting equations. We will use the following gauge-invariant combinations aH = ip--rt
-
c0
A ;ipv = stresses,
a3 ( ^ 2 + ^ ) a3
(^ 2
+
jg^
^
.
A
(6)
£)
+
(5)
where c2s = p/fi. A minimally coupled scalar field belongs to eq. (6) with F = 1 = u>. For a pressureless ideal fluid, instead of eq. (5) we have
dt,
(ps
a-
(7)
dt,
(8)
373
where C and D (D) are integration constants indicating coefficients of relatively growing and decaying solutions, respectively. Compared with the solutions in the other gauge conditions, the decaying solutions in this gauge condition are higher order in the large-scale expansion. Thus, ignoring the transient solutions we have these variables conserved as (pv=
(9)
From eqs. (5,6) we notice that eq. (7) is valid in the super-sound horizon scale, whereas eq. (8) is valid in the super-horizon scale. Using a combination K/a2
. (10)
t-V'-toGfr+p)**' we can derive a closed form equation for 3> (H+P)a3 3
{H + p)a
•
2
c\ — $ = stresses, A 2 a
2 2
HdA
(11)
which is valid for both a fluid and a field. In the case of a fluid we have c2A = c2 and eq. (11) is valid for c^ ^ 0. In a pressureless case $ ( x , t ) = C(x) is an exact solution valid in general scale 4 . Thus, assuming an ideal fluid, in the large-scale limit, thus ignoring the c'jA/a 2 term, we have a general solution
<*(x,t) = C(x) + d(x) f
f2j
J0
4TTG{IJ. +
3dt,
(12)
p)as
which includes c2 — 0 limit. Thus, apparently $ is generally conserved in the super-sound-horizon scale considering general K, A and time-varying p{fj). We would like to point out an important fact that eq. (11) is valid for arbitrary number of fluids as well. Since each minimally coupled scalar field can be interpreted as a fluid of special type, eq. (11) is valid for arbitrary numbers of fluids and fields as well 5 . In the case of multiple ideal fluids eq. (12) is valid for adiabatic perturbation with S(y) = 0 where 5(y) = <J/*(j)/(/X(j) +P{i)) — 8fjLQ)/{iXQ) +P(j))- Thus, solution in eq. (12) is valid for the adiabatic perturbation considering general number of fluid components with general K and A, and generally time varying p{fj). In the case of a minimally coupled scalar field, however, we have c2A(t) = l-3(l-c2s)K/k'2. Since k'2 -> 0 does not imply cAk'2 -> 0, contrary to the ideal fluid situation, in the hyperbolic background, $ does not show the conserved behavior in the large-scale limit (super-curvature scale) with vanishing k'2.
374
3
Vector-type structure
For the vector-type perturbation (rotation) we have va = i4 which has a transverse property and gauge-invariant. The governing equation becomes 1 [ a 4 ( ^ + p ) ^ " ) ] = stress.
(13)
In the multi-component fluids the rotational perturbation of individual component follows eq. (13). This equation is derived from the conservations of the energy-momentum tensors without using the gravitational field equation. Thus, neither the generalized nature of the gravity theory nor the presence of scalar fields affects the rotational perturbation in the hydrodynamic part. The combination a 3 (fj, + p) x a x i4 corresponds to the angular momentum. Thus, for vanishing anisotropic stress, the rotational perturbations of the hydrodynamic part are characterized by the conservation of the angular momentum of the individual fluid; this conclusion is valid considering general K. 4
Tensor-type structure
For the tensor-type perturbation (gravitational wave) we have *
ik (a3Fde) ~ ^r^ce
=stress
-
(14)
Cg is naturally gauge-invariant. This equation is valid for the general theory in eq. (1) considering general number of fluids and fields. In the large-scale limit with K = 0 (super-horizon scale), ignoring the anisotropic stress, we have a general solution for the gravitational wave C$(x,t)
= cg(x) - d£(x) f 4~dt(15) Jo a p Therefore, ignoring the transient solution, the amplitude of gravitational wave in the super-horizon scale is temporally conserved. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Hwang, J., Hwang, J., Hwang, J., Dunsby, P. Hwang, J.,
1991, ApJ, 375, 443. 1999, Phys. Rev. D, 60, 103512. 1996, Phys. Rev. D, 53, 762. K. S., and Bruni, M., 1993, Int. J. Mod. Phys D, 3, 443. and Noh, H., 2000, Phys. Lett. B, 495, 277.
PHOTODISSOCIATION A N D THE NON-THERMAL PROCESS IN PRIMORDIAL NUCLEOSYNTHESIS
K. K O H R I Yukawa Institute
for Theoretical E-mail:
Physics, Kyoto University, Japan [email protected]
Kyoto,
606-8502,
In this talk, we present the recent progress on the primordial nucleosynthesis due to the photo-dissociation of light elements caused by the decay of a massive particle after the standard big-bang nucleosynthesis epoch. Especially, very recently it was reported by the other group that the non-thermal production of 6 Li constrains the number density of the parent massive particles most severely. Here we show that the theoretical prediction of 6 Li abundance is uncertain due to lack of the experimental data of the cross sections, and the observational value has large errors. Therefore we find 3 He overproduction due to 4 He photodissociation still gives the strongest constraint. Then compared to the observational light element abundances, we can constrain the model of the inflation scenario and particle physics.
1
Introduction
Since big bang nucleosynthesis (BBN) is very sensitive to the thermal history of the early universe at temperatures T £ 1 MeV, it has been used to impose constraints on hypothetical particles predicted by particle physics, In particle physics model, e.g supersymmetry (SUSY), weakly interacting massive particles often appear. In this talk, we consider particles which have masses of ~ 0(100 GeV) and which interact with other particle only very weakly (e.g., through gravitation). These particles have lifetimes so long that they decay after the BBN of the light elements (D, 3 He, 4 He, etc.), so they and their decay products may affect the thermal history of the universe. In particular, if the long-lived particles decay into photons, then the emitted high energy photons induce electro-magnetic cascades and produce many soft photons. If the energy of these photons exceeds the binding energies of the light nuclides, then photodissociation may profoundly alter the light element abundances. Thus, we can impose constraints on the abundance and lifetime of long-lived particles, by considering the photodissociation processes induced by its decay. There are many works on this subject, such as the constraints on massive neutrinos and gravitinos obtained by the comparison between the theoretical predictions and observations. 1 Recently it was claimed that the non-thermal production of 6 Li caused 375
376
by the 4 He photodissociation process gives the severest constraint for the abundance of such a massive particle. 2 . Concerning the hadron-induced dissociation model, such a possibility had already been pointed out by the other authors. 3 . Here we will consider the problem more qualitatively whether it is effective or not. Especially we obtain the photon spectrum by solving the Boltzmann equation numerically. In addition we perform the Monte Carlo simulation which includes the experimental errors and properly estimated the confidence levels by performing the \2 fitting with errors of the observational abundance. 2
Current status of the observational data
Here we show the current status of the observational light element abundances. Concerning the deuterium abundance, the primordial D/H is measured in the high redshift QSO absorption systems. For the most reliable D abundance, we adopt the following value which is obtained by the clouds at z = 3.572 towards Q1937-1009 and at z = 2.504 towards Q1009+2956 4 , yfs
= (3.39 ± 0.25) x 10" 5 .
(1)
3
For He, we use the pre-solar measurements. In this talk, we do not rely upon any models of galactic and stellar chemical evolution, because of the large uncertainty involved in extrapolating back to the primordial abundance. But it is reasonable to assume that 3 He/D is an increasing function of the cosmic time, because D is the most fragile isotope, and it is certainly destroyed whenever 3 He is destroyed. Using the solar-system data reanalyzed by Geiss 5 , r°32% = {y°3bs/y°2bs)Q = 0-591 ± 0.536,
(2)
where 0 denotes the pre-solar abundance. We take this to be an upper bound on the primordial 3 He to D ratio: r
32
^ r 32,©-
(3)
Although in the standard scenario the theoretical prediction agrees with the above constraint, 4 He photodissociation produces both D and 3 He and can raise the 3 He to D ratio 6 . Hence, in the analysis of BBN with photodissociation, we include this upper bound carefully. The primordial 4 He mass fraction Yp is observed in the low metallicity extragalactic HII regions. Since 4 He is produced with Oxygen in the star, the primordial value is obtained to regress to the zero metallicity O/H —> 0 for the observational data. More recently Fields and Olive 7 also reanalyze the
377
data including the Hel absorption effect and they obtain Yobs = 0.238 ± (0.002), tot ± (0.005),„, t ,
(4)
where the first error is the statistical uncertainty and the second error is the systematic one. We adopt the above value as the observational Yv. The primordial 7 Li/H is observed in the Pop II old halo stars. We adopt the recent measurements which are observed by Bonifacio and Molaro 8 logio(y?bs) = -9.76 ± (0.012) rfot ± (0.05) syst ± (0.3) a(U .
(5)
Here we added the additional uncertainty. Because 6 Li is so much rarer than 7 Li, it is much more difficult to observe the primordial component. Currently, there is insufficient data to find the "Spite plateau" of 6 Li. However, we can set an upper bound on 6 Li/ T Li, since it is generally agreed that the evolution of 6 Li is dominated by production by spallation (reactions of cosmic rays with the interstellar medium). Today we only observe the 6 Li/ 7 Li ratio in low-metallicity ([Fe/H] < —2.0) halo stars 9 , rl^Haio = (yt/y°7bs)
= 0-05 ± 0.02.
(6)
We take this value as an upper bound for the observational value, ^67 < r67,halo-
3
(7)
Photodissociation of light elements
3.1
Overview
In order to discuss the effect of high-energy photons on BBN, we need to know the shape of the photon spectrum induced by the primary high-energy photons from X decay. In the background thermal bath (which, in our case, is a mixture of photons 7BG) electrons eg G , and nucleons NBG), high energy photons lose their energy by various cascade processes.The important processes in our case are: • Double-photon pair creation (7 + 7BG —>• e + + e~) • Photon-photon scattering (7 + 7BG —>• 7 + 7) • Pair creation in nuclei (7 +
TVBG
—> e+ + e~ + N)
• Compton scattering (7 + eg G —• 7 + e~) • Inverse Compton scattering (e ± + 7BG -^ e±
+J)
378
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Reactions D + 7 -> p + n T + 7-s-n + D T + 7 - • p + 2n 3 He + 7 ^ p + D 3 He + 7 -> n + 2p 4 He + 7 - > p + T 4 He + 7 - > n + 3 He 4 He + 7-S-P + 71 + D 6 Li + 7 -> anything 7 Li + 7 -*• 2n 4- anything 7 Li + 7 -> n + 6 Li 7 Li + 7 —> 4 He + anything 7 Be + 7 - • p + 6 Li 7 Be + 7 -> anything except 6 Li
l a Error 6% 14% 7% 10% 15% 4% 5% 14% 4% 9% 4% 9%
Threshold 2.2 MeV 6.3 MeV 8.5 MeV 5.5 MeV 7.7 MeV 19.8 MeV 20.6 MeV 26.1 MeV 5.7 MeV 10.9 MeV 7.2 MeV 2.5 MeV
Ref. Evans et al. lu Pfeiffer11, Faul 12 Faul 12 Gorbunov & Varfolomeev13 Gorbunov & Varfolomeev13 Gorbunov & Varfolomeev13 Irish et al. 14 ,Malcom et al. 15 Arkatov et al 16 Berman 17 Berman 17 Berman 17 Berman 17
Table 1. Photodissociation processes, and the l-
In our analysis, we numerically solved the Boltzmann equation including the above effects, and obtained the distribution function of photons, f1{E1). Once the photon spectrum is formed, it induces the photodissociation of the light nuclei, which modifies the result of SBBN. This process is governed by the following Boltzmann equation: dnN —
at
h 3HUN
=
dn N dt
— nN
SBBN
z_j I N,
dE1ais-l^Nl{E1)f-1{E1)
J
+ 22 UN" / dE~,ON"~t-+N{E-i)f-y{E'1), TV"
(8)
J
where nyv is the number density of the nuclei N, and [dnjv/dt]sBBN denotes the SBBN contribution to the Boltzmann equation. The photodissociation processes we included in our calculation are listed in Table 1. The abundances of light nuclides will be functions of the lifetime of X (TX), the mass of X (mx), the abundance of X before electron-positron annihilation, Yx = nx/rij, and the baryon-to-photon ratio (77).
379 3.2
Non-thermal
As Jedamzik tion of 4 He,
2
6
Li production
pointed out, T and 3 He produced through the photodissocia4
He +
7
3 H
^ (
! + : T +p
(9)
are still energetic and have the kinetic energy enough to produce 6 Li through the following process, 3
H e + 4He—•» 6 Li + p, T+
4
He-^
6
(10)
Li + n,
(11)
until they are stopped through the ionization loss in the electromagnetic plasma. The threshold energy of the 6 Li production process is El\He = 4.03MeV for 3 He, and E^ = 4.80MeV for T. Then 6 Li produced through the process in Eq. (11) is estimated by
dn6
[°° n4
~dT = JEth+4Eth
^
, r^-E?)/*
E
* ^*eh,T)pfTjEth
dE, (12) where a"4He(7 T ) p / 7 is the cross section of the 4 He photodissociation, E^1 is the threshold energy of the photodissociation process, / 7 is the photon spectrum which are obtained by solving the Boltzmann equation, 0"T(a,n)6Li is the cross section of the process in Eq. (11). dE/dx denotes the rate of the ionization loss while the charged particle T is running a distance dx in the electromagnetic plasma. It is expressed by 18 dE
n4aT{a,n)eU
(dEY\r
= Z*ap l n
^ ^
2
(Kmep\
r^rJ'
^—j
(13)
where cup1 is plasma frequency (= Aimea/me), ne is the electron number density, me is the electron mass, Z is the charge, A ~ 0(1) is a constant and (i is the velocity. If we want to know the differential equation in the process in Eq.(10), only we change the suffix T into 3 He. We include the above two processes of the 6 Li production in BBN code and compute the 6 Li abundances. In the computation we adopt the experimental cross section 0"T(Q,n)6Li = 35 ± 1.4 mb 19 commonly for the two processes. Because it is only one point data for the kinetic energy ET = 28 MeV in the laboratory system, we assume here that it is a constant cross section for all the energy region and does not have the energy dependence. Then we should integrate the second factor in Eq. (12) until the high energy.
380
If we compare it with the original photodissociation case in which the photodissociation rates decrease rapidly as the energy increases, we can find it is serious that the constant cross section contributes the integration until the higher energy region. Because we have only the experimental data for the 4 He photodissociation rates until about 100 MeV for the photon energy 14 ' 15 - 16 ) we should interpolate the photodissociation rates in the high energy region. Then the integration has the large uncertainty (~ 20 %) when we change the upper limit of the integration. Therefore in this situation we adopt about 20% errors for the non-thermal 6 Li production rates and perform the Monte Carlo simulation including them. 4
Comparison with observational light element abundances and analysis
In Fig.l we plot the predicted 6 Li to 7Li ratio in (TX, mxYx) plane. The solid line denotes the observational mean value of 6 Li / 7 Li and the dashed line denotes the 2cr upper bound. From the figure, we may think that the mean value of the theoretical prediction constrain mxYx more severely. We should bear in mind, however, that the theoretical prediction has a large uncertainty which comes from the errors of the production rates, and in addition the observational constraint also has a large error. Therefore, that is why we should perform the Maximum Likelihood analysis 1 which includes both the theoretical and the observational errors. In Fig. 2 we plot the result of the \2 fitting by using the method of the Maximum Likelihood analysis. l This figure tells us that the region below the solid line agree with the observations. The obtained upper bound does not change our earlier results very well. x . Clearly we can find that the nonthermally produced 6Li does not contribute to the bound at all. That is why it has a very large uncertainty in the theoretical calculation. In addition, the results tells us that we should not take only the observational mean value in the analysis, and we should include the errors. When we assume that the parent massive particle is a gravitino and it decays into a photon and a photino, i.e. ip^ —> 7 + 7, we can relate the mass TO3/2 with the lifetime T3/2 by the following equation, r 3 / 2 ~ 4 x 105 sec x ( m 3 / 2 / l TeV)" 3 .
(14)
On the other hand, we also assume that the gravitino is produced through the thermal scattering in the reheating process after the inflation. Then we can relate the abundance Y3/2 = "3/2/^7 of the gravitino with the reheating
381 10« 10* 10* 10' 10* 10*10l<10"10"10< 10» 10* 10' 10« 10»10">10ll10"
10* 10« 10" 10' 10* 10»10'»10"10u104 105 10» 10' 10» lO'lO'lO^lO" T, (sec) T . (see)
Figure 1. Plot of 6 Li / 7 Li ratio in (TX, m x ^ x ) plane for various baryon to photon ratio (?j = n B / n 7 ) in (a)7j = 2 x l 0 - 1 0 , (b)r; = 4 x l 0 " 1 0 , {c)rj = 5 x l C r 1 0 , a n d (d)t] = 6 X 1 0 " 1 0 . The solid line denotes the observational mean value of 6 Li / 7 Li and the dashed line denotes the la upper bound.
temperature TR, F3/2 ^ 3 x 10- 1 1 x (T fl /10 10 GeV).
(15)
In Fig.3 we plot the 95% upper bound of the reheating temperature after the inflation as a function of the gravitino mass. From the figure we can obtain the upper bound of the reheating temperature to agree with the observational light element abundances. 5
summary
In this talk we have shown that in the present observational and experimental situation, the non-thermal production of 6 Li is not strong enough to constrain the abundance Yx of the massive particle which decays radiatively after the BBN epoch. We find 3 He overproduction due to 4 He photodissociation still
382 10 - 5
n
"»1
uiiif
""1
" " 1 ' " " 1 urn -i
10 - 6
= \
10 - 7
r
-i
>
10 -a
r
~S
O
10 - 9
r
95% C.L.
n
-i
io- 10 r io- t i r io- 12 io- 13 io- 14 ^
~s ~l __3
I
iniinJ
IIIIJ
t '
J
<<«J
io3io4io5io6io7io8ionoioio' '10 TX
(sec)
Figure 2. Plot of the contour of the confidence level in (Tx,mxYx) denotes the 95% C.L. projected on TJ axis.
10 13 I'l 10 12
(GeV)
r—
E-
10"
r
10 10
r
10 9
r
10 8
r 1r
10 7 10 8 10 6
i;
1 95% C.L.
;,i
'
plane. The solid line
' /' " I /
1
10 2 m3/2
10 3 (GeV)
Figure 3. Plot of the contour of the confidence level in (7713/2, TR) plane. The solid line denotes the 95% C.L.
gives the strongest constraint. However, the process is very interesting phenomenologically and would have a potential to investigate the scenario of the early universe and particle physics model. Therefore we hope the increase of further observations and experiments concerning 6 Li in the near future.
383
Acknowledgments The author wishes to thank M. Kawasaki and Takeo Moroi for the valuables discussions. If there were not their help, this work would not be completed. References 1. E. Holtmann, M. Kawasaki, K. Kohri and T. Moroi, Phys. Rev. D60 023506 (1999), hep-ph/9805405. 2. K. Jedamzik, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 84 (2000) 3248. 3. S. Dimopoulos, R. Esmailzadeh, L.J. Hall, and G.D. Starkman, Astrophys. J. 330 (1988) 545; Nucl. Phys. B311 (1989) 699. 4. S. Buries and D. Tytler, submitted to Astrophys. J., astro-ph/9712109. 5. J. Geiss, in Origin and Evolution of the Elements, edited by N. Prantzos, E. Vangioni-Flam, and M. Casse (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1993) 89. 6. G. Sigl, K. Jedamzik, D.N. Schramm, and V.S. Berezinsky, Phys. Rev. D52 (1995) 6682, astro-ph/9503094. 7. B.D. Fields and K.A. Olive, Astrophys. J., 506 (1998) 177. 8. P. Bonifacio and P. Molaro, Mon. Not. R. Astron. Soc. 285 (1997) 847. 9. V.V. Smith, D.L. Lambert, and P.E. Nissen, Astrophys. J. 408 (1993) 262; L.M. Hobbs and J.A. Thorburn, Astrophys. J. 491 (1997) 772; V.V. Smith, D.L. Lambert, and P.E. Nissen Astrophys. J. 506 (1998) 923; R. Cayrel et al., Astron. Astrophys. 343 (1999) 923. 10. R.D. Evans, The Atomic Nucleus (McGraw-Hill, New York, 1955). 11. R. Pfeiffer, Z. Phys. 208 (1968) 129. 12. D.D. Faul, B.L. Berman, P. Mayer, and D.L. Olson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 (1980) 129. 13. A.N. Gorbunov and A.T. Varfolomeev, Phys. Lett. 11 (1964) 137. 14. J.D. Irish, R.G. Johnson, B.L. Berman, B.J. Thomas, K.G. McNeill, and J.W. Jury, Can. J. Phys. 53 (1975) 802. 15. C.K. Malcom, D.V. Webb, Y.M. Shin, and D.M. Skopik, Phys. Lett. B47 (1973) 433. 16. Yu.M. Arkatov, P.I. Vatset, V.I. Voloshchuk, V.A. Zolenko, I.M. Prokhorets, and V.I. Chimil', Sov. J. Nucl. Phys. 19 (1974) 598. 17. B.L. Berman, Atomic Data and Nuclear Data Tables 15 (1975) 319. 18. J.D. Jackson, Classical Electrodynamics (Wiley, New York). 19. J.A. Koepke and R.E. Brown, Phys. Rev. C16 (1977) 18.
AFFLECK-DINE LEPTOGENESIS WITH AN ULTRALIGHT NEUTRINO
K. HAMAGUCHI Department
of Physics, E-mail:
University of Tokyo, Tokyo 113-0033, [email protected]
Japan
Leptogenesis with Affleck-Dine mechanism is investigated. We find that an extremely small mass for the neutrino ra„ 5; 10 ~ 8 eV is required to obtain the desired baryon asymmetry in the present universe. We also propose a model to avoid such an ultralight neutrino, where the mass can be as large as 10 —4 eV.
1
Introduction
There have been proposed a number of scenarios to account for the baryon asymmetry in the present universe. A crucial ingredient of the generation of a cosmological baryon asymmetry (baryogenesis) is the connection between baryon (B) and lepton (L) number at high t e m p e r a t u r e . It is known t h a t the standard electroweak gauge theory has a nonperturbative baryon-number violating interaction. 1 Although this process is suppressed by a large exponential factor at zero t e m p e r a t u r e , it can be efficient at high t e m p e r a t u r e above the electroweak scale. 2 This process, called "sphaleron", violates baryon ( 5 ) and lepton (L) number simultaneously, conserving a linear combination of them, B — L. Therefore, if the baryon number was generated with B — L conserving processes, it would be washed out by the "sphaleron" effect. a T h u s we can say t h a t B — L violating processes may play an i m p o r t a n t role in generating the baryon asymmetry. In 1998 the Superkamiokande collaboration presented convincing evidence of the atmospheric neutrino oscillation, 3 which strongly suggests small but finite neutrino masses. These small neutrino masses can be explained by the following effective operator. 4
° = JfhljHH>
(1)
where li and H denote lepton doublet and the Higgs scalar field, respectively. Notice t h a t this operator does violate B — L. This lepton-number violating operator indicates t h a t it is possible to produce lepton asymmetry in the early universe. Once nonzero lepton number is produced, it is partially converted "This is not the case if the baryon asymmetry is produced after or during the electroweak phase transition.
384
385 into baryon asymmetry by the "sphaleron" effects. 5 This scenario, ("leptogenesis" 5 ) is one of the most attractive possibility of the baryogenesis. Among various mechanisms 6 ' 7 ' 8 for leptogenesis, we consider in this talk b the leptogenesis by flat directions
2
F l a t d i r e c t i o n s for t h e L e p t o g e n e s i s
We adopt flat directions Hu = Li —
W
=
^ i
{ L i H u )
^
(2)
where we have taken a basis where the mass matrix for neutrinos Vi is diagonal. Note t h a t Mi are related to the neutrino mass mvi by the seesaw formula, 4
6
This talk is based on a work
9
with T. Asaka, M. Fujii, and T. Yanagida.
386 Here, {Hu) — 174GeV x sin/3. c Hereafter, we suppress the family index % for simplicity. T h e potential of the flat direction > is given by
v = m2 2 +
^
W(^4 + A'^ + df*1*1*'
(4)
where m and A are SUSY-breaking parameters and t h e last term is derived directly from the superpotential in Eq. (2). We choose m ~ \A\ ~ 1 TeV. During inflation, and during the oscillation period of inflaton x after t h e end of inflation, the energy density of the universe is dominated by the inflaton X- T h e nonzero vacuum energy of x induces additional SUSY breaking effects, and we have an additional potential given by 8V = -cHH2\4>\2+~
{*B4>A + « ^ * 4 ) ,
(5)
where CJJ and Ojf are real and complex constants respectively, and H is the Hubble parameter of the expanding universe. We take CJJ ~ |aff| ~ 1, hereafter. In the x oscillation period, most of t h e energy density of the universe is carried by the coherent oscillation. However, there is a dilute plasma with a temperature T = (T]iM*H)llA (Mt = 2.4 x 10 1 8 GeV is t h e reduced Planck mass) arising from the inflaton decay even in this stage. 1 6 As stressed in Refs. 1 1 ' 1 2 the thermal effects from t h e dilute plasma may affect t h e dynamics of the
(6)
is satisfied. 12 Here, /& correspond to their Yukawa or gauge coupling constants of the flat direction <j> (we take / j . real a n d positive). Then t h e total effective potential for <j> including the Hubble-induced terms a n d t h e thermal mass t e r m is given by 12 Kotai = I m2 - H2 +
V ckf2T2 f„\
-\
(adr + + ^ 7 (, „a „^, 4. +, h-c) , +, JTTiW6' K + hh.c.) -c) + (7) ; 8M V V ' 8M K " " 4M2 where Ck are real positive constants of order unity and a = A/m is a complex constant of order unity. In actual calculation, we include all t h e couplings / ^ relevant for flat direction Hu = L. (See Ref. 9 .) c
tan/3 EE (Hu) / {Hj), where Hu and Ha are Higgs supermultiplets which couple to "up"type and "down"-type quarks, respectively. We take sin/3 ~ 1
387 3
T h e resultant lepton asymmetry.
Since the (f>fieldcarries the lepton charge, its number density is related t o the lepton number density n^, as
nL=l-i{4>*<j>-4>*£).
(8)
The evolution of the flat direction <j) is described by the equation of motion with the potential Vtotai m Eq. (7), ^ + 3 ^ + ^ 1
= 0,
(9)
where the dot denotes the derivative with time. We have performed a detailed analysis on the evolution of the flat direction
MTR
s
VIM}
'eff,
(10)
where <$eff is an effective CP violating phase and we assume Jeff — C(±)- T h e produced lepton asymmetry is partially converted into the baryon asymmetry through the sphaleron effects. 6 However, if we take into account the thermal effects, t h e production of the lepton asymmetry is suppressed, and the resultant lepton asymmetry is given by 9 nL
MTR
( m
\
where Hosc ( > m) denotes the Hubble parameter at the time when the AD field starts the oscillation. T h e explicit formula of the Hosc is given in Ref. 9 . It depends on M, T R , and the couplings in a complicated way. Notice t h a t an additional suppression factor m/Hosc appears in Eq. (11), compared with Eq. (10). This suppression represents the effect of the early oscillation due to the thermal effects of the dilute plasma pointed out in Refs. ' . It should be also noted t h a t the produced lepton asymmetry becomes larger as the scale M increases, i.e., as t h e neutrino mass mu becomes In deriving Eq. (10) and Eq. (11) we have assumed that the <j> oscillation starts before the reheating process of inflation completes. e T h e present baryon asymmetry is given by 1 8 ng/s = (8/23)ri£,/s in the case of the minimal SUSY standard model.
388
10
10
10 10 >
o
10 10"
io 5 t10
10
10
10 10 M [GeV]
23
10
Figure 1. The contour plot of the lepton asymmetry n£,/» in the M-TR plane. The solid lines and the dashed lines show the contour lines of nj,/» obtained by numerical calculation and those obtained from analytic formulas, respectively. Corresponding values of TVL/S are also represented. We take m = 1 TeV, tan/3 = 3 and arg(a/ofj) = 7r/3.
smaller. Therefore, the leptogenesis is most effective for t h e flat direction corresponding to the lightest neutrino v\. Now, we discuss how much lepton asymmetry is generated in the SUSY s t a n d a r d model. We have performed a numerical calculation t o follow the evolution of the flat direction >. Fig. 1 shows the contour plot of the produced lepton asymmetry n^/s in the M-TR plane. We show b o t h results by the numerical calculation a n d also from the analytic formulas Eqs. (10) a n d (11). We confirm t h a t the analytic estimation discussed above reproduces very well the result obtained by the numerical calculation. T h e crucial observation is t h a t the resultant lepton asymmetry is suppressed by the t h e r m a l effects when the reheating t e m p e r a t u r e is high enough. In this section, we show t h a t the thermal effects on t h e AD leptogenesis is very significant. In fact, when we require the reheating t e m p e r a t u r e should
389 be TR ;$ 10 8 GeV to avoid t h e gravitino problem, 1 3 we need a large value of M, say, M ^ 3 x 10 2 1 GeV, in order to obtain the desired lepton asymmetry UL/S ~ 1 0 _ 1 0 - 1 0 ~ 9 . This large value M corresponds t o an extremely small neutrino mass mvi z, 10 eV. 4
Large effective m a s s e s for r i g h t - h a n d e d n e u t r i n o s
Let us discuss t h e origin of t h e operators in Eq. (2) in t h e presence of t h e heavy right-handed Majorana neutrinos N. T h e relevant superpotential is ' W = hNLHu
+ ]-MRNN
.
(12)
Suppose t h a t the Majorana masses MR for N are given by a vacuum expectation value (vev) of some field X, W = ^hNXNN
.
(13)
If it is t h e case, masses of t h e heavy Majorana neutrinos N in t h e early universe m a y be different from those in t h e present universe. In particular, when there is a flat direction containing the X field, t h e X field m a y have a large value during t h e inflation. To demonstrate our point, we assume t h a t t h e field X is responsible t o the Peccei-Quinn symmetry breaking 1 4 and consider the following superpotential for t h e Peccei-Quinn symmetry breaking sector, W = \Y(XX-F2) ,
(14)
where A is a coupling constant. Y, X, a n d X are supermultiples which are singlets under t h e standard-model gauge groups and have 0, - f l , a n d —1 Peccei-Quinn charges, respectively. Here, the Peccei-Quinn breaking scale Fa is constrained by laboratory experiments, astrophysics, and cosmology as Fa ~ l O ^ - l O 1 2 GeV. 1 9 From Eq. (14) we see t h a t there exists a flat direction XX — F%. We parameterize this direction by t h e scalar field
_h2{Huf
mv =
.
'Hereafter we suppress the family index of N, L and h for simplicity.
(15)
390 The vev of X in the true vacuum, (X) ~ Fa, is supposed to give the neutrino masses observed today. As discussed in the previous sections, the lightest neutrino v\ (m„i
™"-(H^)(l^)(g).
m
Notice that there is no thermal effects for the reheating temperature of TR ^ 10 8 GeV because of the large value of X.9 9 Therefore, the produced lepton asymmetry is estimated by using Eq. (10) as n
*<
i
T =
in-4jt
! X 10
T
{
R
\ /"10~ 4 eV\ f ™W GeV\ f X0\
'« [WGev) (-^T) I " F T - J (M-J •
(17)
One might think t h a t too large a m o u n t of the lepton asymmetry is produced through the AD mechanism. However, this asymmetry is sufficiently diluted by an substantial entropy production, as we will see soon. T h e saxion begins the coherent oscillation a t H ~ m„ with the initial amplitude XQ ~ M,, and the oscillation energy dominates the energy of the universe soon after the reheating process completes.'' Then, the universe is reheated again through its decay. Its reheating t e m p e r a t u r e Ta is estimated as
Here we assume t h a t the dominant decay process of saxion is the decay into two gluons. T h e saxion decay takes place far before the beginning of the big-bang neucleosynthesis (BBN), and hence is cosmologically harmless. This decay increases the entropy of the universe by the rate
A - 2 x 10" (
T
« ) (^Y'
2
(
F
« ) (XL)*
(19)
"The flat direction saxion a stays at Xo — M, until H ~ ma ~ m 3 / 2 due to the friction of the expansion of the universe. h T h e saxion oscillation starts before the reheating process of the inflation takes place, as long as TR< 2 X 10 10 G e V ( m „ / l T e V ) 1 / 2 .
391 Because of this entropy production by the saxion decay, the primordial lepton asymmetry shown in Eq. (17) is also diluted by the rate A. Then the present baryon asymmetry is given by
Notice t h a t the present baryon asymmetry is independent on the reheating temperature T R . We see t h a t the desired baryon asymmetry is just given by the lightest neutrino mass of mvx ~ 10~ 4 eV for Fa ~ 10 1 0 GeV. We should also comment on the cosmological consequence of our model. The entropy production by the saxion in Eq. (19) ensures t h a t the number density of gravitinos produced at the reheating process is diluted by the rate A and hence we are free from the cosmological gravitino problem. 5
Conclusions and discussion
In this talk we have investigated the Affleck-Dine leptogenesis taking into account the thermal effects from the dilute plasma. We have found t h a t an ultralight neutrino with a mass such as m^i ~ 10~ 8 eV is required to produce enough lepton asymmetry to account for the baryon asymmetry in the present universe. Such an ultralight neutrino seems to be very unlikely the case, since the recent Superkamiokande experiments 3 ' 2 1 suggest the masses of heavier two neutrinos to be m ^ 3 — 1 0 _ 1 - 1 0 ~ 3 eV. However, in the second part of this talk, we have pointed out t h a t , we can avoid such an ultralight neutrino if the heavy Majorana masses of the right-handed neutrinos are dynamical valuables in the early universe. We construct a model based on the Peccei-Quinn symmetry to demonstrate our point, and find t h a t the neutrino mass mv\ in the true vacuum can be as large as mvl ~ 1 0 - 5 - l ( T 4 eV to obtain nB/s ~ 1 0 _ l o - 1 0 - 1 1 for the reheating 8 temperature of TR < 10 GeV. Acknowledgments I would like to t h a n k my collaborators, T . Asaka, M. Fujii and T. Yanagida, in the work this talk is based on. This work was partially supported by the J a p a n Society for the Promotion of Science. References 1. G. t'Hooft, Phys. Rev. Lett. 3 7 , 8 (1976); Phys. Rev. D 14, 3432 (1976).
392 2. V.A. Kuzmin et.al, Phys. Lett. B 155, 36 (1985). 3. Y. Fukuda et.al., Superkamiokande Collaboration, Phys. Lett. B 433, 9 (1998); 436, 33 (1998); Phys. Rev. Lett. 81, 1562 (1998). 4. T. Yanagida, in Proc. Workshop on the unified theory and the baryon number in the universe, (Tsukuba, 1979), eds. 0 . Sawada and S. Sugamoto, Report KEK-79-18 (1979); M. Gell-Mann et.al, in "Supergravity" (North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1979) eds. D.Z. Freedman and P. van Nieuwenhuizen. 5. M. Fukugita and T. Yanagida, Phys. Lett. B 174, 45 (1986) 6. See, for a recent review, W. Buchmuller and M. Pliimacher, Phys. Rep. 320, 329 (1999); M. Pliimacher, Nucl. Phys. B 530, 207 (1998), and references there in. 7. K. Kumekawa et.al., Prog. Theor. Phys. 92, 437 (1994); G. Lazarides, hep-ph/9904428 and reference therein; G.F. Giudice et.al., J. High Energy Phys. 08, 014 (1999); T. Asaka et.al., Phys. Lett. B 464, 12 (1999); Phys. Rev. D 61, 083512 (2000). 8. B.A. Campbell et.al., Nucl. Phys. B 399, 111 (1993); H. Murayama and T. Yanagida, Phys. Lett. B 322, 349 (1994); H. Murayama et.al., Phys. Rev. Lett. 70, 1912 (1993), Phys. Rev. D 50, 2356 (1994); T. Moroi and H. Murayama, J. High Energy Phys. 07, 009 (2000). 9. T. Asaka et.al., hep-ph/0008041. 10. I. Affleck and M. Dine, Nucl. Phys. B 249, 361 (1985). 11. M. Dine et.al., Nucl. Phys. B 458, 291 (1996). 12. R. Allahverdi et.al., Nucl. Phys. B 579, 355 (2000). 13. M.Y. Khlopov and A.D. Linde, Phys. Lett. B 138, 265 (1984); J. Ellis, J.E. Kim, and D.V. Nanopoulos, Phys. Lett. B 145, 181 (1984); M. Kawasaki and T. Moroi, Prog. Theor. Phys. 93, 879 (1995); see also, E. Holtmann, et.al., Phys. Rev. D 60, 023506 (1999). 14. R.D. Peccei and H.R. Quinn, Phys. Rev. Lett. 38, 1440 (1997), Phys. Rev. D 16, 1791 (1977). 15. H. Murayama and T. Yanagida in references 8 . 16. See, for example, E. Kolb and M. Turner, The Early Universe (AddisonWisley, 1990). 17. T. Moroi and H. Murayama in references 8 . 18. S.Y. Khlebnikov and M.E. Shaposhnikov, Nucl. Phys. B 308, 885 (1988), J.A. Harvey and M.S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 42, 3344 (1990). 19. See, for a review, J.E. Kim, Phys. Rep. 150, 1 (1987). 20. S. Kasuya et.al., Phys. Lett. B 409, 94 (1997); 415, 117 (1997). 21. Y. Suzuki, talk presented at XIX International Conference on Neutrino Physics and Astrophysics, Sudbury, Canada, June, 2000
T H E HELIUM A B U N D A N C E P R O B L E M A N D NON-MINIMALLY C O U P L E D Q U I N T E S S E N C E XUELEI CHEN Physics Department, Ohio State University, 174 W18thAve., Columbus, OH 43210, USA E-mail: [email protected] The observed Helium abundance is in marginal disagreement with the prediction of the standard Big Bang Nucleosynthesis model. We show that non-minimally quintessence model may help to reduce the possible breach between theory and observation.
Recently, it has been discovered that the expansion of the Universe is accelerating1. This requires the existence of a dark energy component in the Universe with an equation of state p = wp, w < 0. One example of such a component is a cosmological constant. However, it is difficult to understand in the present framework of particle physics why it is so small. A fine tuning of 10~ 120 is required if the cosmological constant arises from Planck scale physics. Quintessence models 2 were suggested as an alternative to cosmological constant. In quintessence models, a scalar field provides the dark energy which drives the accelerated expansion of the Universe. The evolution of the scalar field is such that its equation of state mimics the dominant component of the Universe, thus explains why it is so small at present time. In Non-minimally Coupled (NMC) quintessence models 3 the scalar field couples to the gravitational constant. The action of NMC can be written as dPx •
iFR-^
+ LRuid
,
(1)
/
where
fW = l - ^
2
- 4
V{4>)=V0cj>-a-
(2)
Such coupling could arise if for example, the scalar field is a dilaton in superstring theory. One of the motivations for introducing such non-minimal coupling is to address the "coincidence problem": why does the dark energy component happens to become dominant at the present epoch? Had this occurred at an earlier epoch, growth of structure due to gravitational instability would be inhibited, and any life form would be impossible to exist. By introducing a coupling between curvature and the quintessence field, it was hoped 393
394
that the scalar field dominance could be triggered automatically shortly after the Universe becomes matter dominant. Unfortunately, for the NMC models discussed here, it was found that the trigger mechanism does not work 3 ' 4 , nonetheless, the coupling to gravity could have other interesting consequences. Here, I show that NMC models provides a possible solution of the "helium problem" in the big bang nucleosynthesis. The standard model of Big Bang Nucleosynthesis (BBN) is an enormously successful theory. The predicted abundances of the light elements, which ranges ten orders of magnitude, were found to be consistent with observations6. In particular, the BBN prediction of 4 He abundance (Yp w 0.25) provides the first evidence of a hot big bang beginning of the Universe. The 4 He abundance were mostly influenced by two factors, the expansion rate of the Universe during BBN, and the baryon to photon ratio r\ (see Fig. 1). The helium abundance increases with the expansion rate for two reasons. First, BBN starts when the weak interaction which converts proton to neutron ceases to be effective. This occurs when F ~ H, where F, H are the reaction rate and expansion rate, respectively. For a higher H at a given scale factor a = 1/(1 + z), BBN starts earlier, when the neutron fraction is higher. Second, this also meant a shorter interval for the neutrons to decay before it is combined in subsequent nuclear fusion. Both of these two effects enhance the neutron fraction. Since most of these neutrons ended up in 4 He, a faster expanding universe would yield more helium. Thus, once r) is determined from either deuterium abundance or other methods such as cosmic microwave background (CMB) anisotropy, the 4 He abundance could be used to constrain the expansion rate during BBN. The helium abundance in extragalactic HII (ionized hydrogen) regions could be obtained by observation of the Hell —>• Hel recombination lines. Since 4 He is also produced in stars along with heavy elements such as Oxygen, it is expected that the primordial 4 He abundance could be obtained by extrapolation to zero Oxygen abundance. Using this technique, Oliver and Steigman obtained 7 Yp = 0.234 ± 0.003(stat.),
(3)
while Izotov and Thuan obtained a higher value8 Yp = 0.244 ± 0.002(stat.).
(4)
Clearly these two data sets are statistically inconsistent with each, due to large systematic errors. Below, we adopt a midway value of Yp = 0.239 ± 0.005,
(5)
395 r
|
• —>"
•
| -r
i
•
| j
i
•
i
|
j 0.26
i ..----"
-
„--'
• *
0.24
*
•"* **
rr'
•—•—r
r"
i
*••
II• I 1
_^^^.
/ /^^\Z~:
.
'/ ,<^ ""X \
0.22
/'' -// (*'
r-
1
'''
1
-] •
-
1
j
•
{
.
i
. . .
i
. . .
i!
. . .
i
6 1»
.
.
.
i 10
Figure 1. Helium abundance vs. rj. The solid curve is the prediction of standard BBN with 3 neutrinos, the two short-dashed curves are standard BBN with 2 and 4 neutrinos, and the long-dashed curve is the result for a NMC model. The horizontal lines mark the center and 2cr limits of helium in our "midway" approach. The vertical lines mark the value of r/ determined from combined COBE+Boomerang+Maxima data.
or, 0.229 < Yp < 0.249 at 95% C.L. In order to compare theory with observation, we also need to determine rj. r) could be determined from BBN. Buries and Tytler 9 obtained D/H=(3.3 ± 0.25) x 10~ 5 , corresponding to a lower bound on r\ at 2cr level T?IO = 10iUi7 < 6.3.
(6)
CMB anisotropy provides another way of measuring baryon density. Recently, an analysis of the combined data from Boomerang and Maxima yields a higher
396 baryon density. The best fit model with a flat universe yields10 nbh2 = 0.030 ± 0.004,
rjio = 8 . 2 ± 1 . 0 ,
(7)
If we assume that there are three neutrino species, and adopt r\ m 4.5 as inferred from the deuterium abundance, then the standard BBN 4 He abundance is in disagreement with the results of Oliver and Steigman. It is in marginal agreement with the "midway" result of Eq. 5, but still at high the end. If we adopt the rj inferred from CMB, then even the "midway" limit is exceed (see Fig. 1). Furthermore, in addition to the three standard model neutrinos, a sterile neutrino may be needed to explain the results from neutrino oscillation experiments 1 J . If either or both of these were confirmed, or if there is any other light particle in the Universe, the breach between theory and observation on 4 He would become even wider. How could we make a model which produce less helium? If the expansion of the Universe is slower at the time of BBN, then the helium abundance is reduced. In the standard BBN model, the expansion rate is given by
Thus, p becomes greater with the introduction of each new particle species. In quintessence models, pt0t — Pf + \4>2 +V(4>), is it possible to introduce a negative V to reduce pi Unfortunately, this would not work. To see this, note that if a negative potential is introduced, the minima of the potential must have V < 0, the Universe would fall to this potential well. Since pf is a decreasing function of a, sooner or later we would reach to the point that ptot = 0, further expansion is not possible, and the Universe would begin to contract. Such a contraction of the Universe in the future is not ruled out, however, if we hope to use a negative potential to reduce helium production, the negative potential must become sub-dominant at BBN era, and then become dominant well before the current era, which is incompatible with observation. With the NMC model introduced in Eq. 1, however, it is possible to obtain a lower helium abundance, because now we have H'2 = ^ ( P
+ \
(9)
For F > 1 the value of H could be lowered. The Helium abundance in such a model could be estimated. To a first approximation, Y=
(0.2378+ 0.0073 In 7 ?10 )(l-0.058/» ?1 o)
(10)
397
0
5
10
15
a Figure 2. £ — 1 as a function of a, the five curves from top to bottom are for models with £ = 0.004,0.008,0.012,0.016,0.02.
+0.013(iV„ - 3) + 2 x
1(T4(T„
- 887).
(11)
The speed up factor C = H(a)/Hsm(a)
(12)
is related to the neutrino number by C2 = l + | ^ - 3 ) .
(13)
A y = 0.08(C2-l).
(14)
So we have
398 The differential speed up factor £ — 1 for a number of models is plotted in Fig. 2. As an example, let us consider a = 10, £ = 0.004, and Qo = 5.5 which satisfies the solar system limit |£| < 0.022Q^"1. The helium abundance could be reduced by as much as 0.096%. In Fig. 1, the helium abundance for this NMC model is plotted. It lies much more comfortably within the allowed range. Alternatively, the helium bound on neutrino number could be relaxed. If we apply this to the current cosmological limit on neutrino number 12 , which is 1.7 < N„ < 4.3 at 95% C.L., the upper limit of Nv could be lifted to 5. In summary, I have shown that in some NMC models, the BBN helium abundance could be reduced, thus alleviate the marginal disagreement between theory and observation, and make more room for new neutrinos or other new particles. Whether such a reduction is necessary depends on the result of future observations. Acknowledgments This work is supported by the US Department of Energy grant DE-FG0291ER40690. References 1. A. G. Riess et al, Astron. J. 116, 1109 (1998); P. M. Garnavich et al, Astrophys. J. 509, 74 (1998); S. Perlmutter et al, Astrophys. J. 517, 565 (1999). 2. See e.g., P. J. E. Peebles and B. Ratra, Astrophys. J. Lett 325, L17 (1988); B. Ratra and P. J. E. Peebles, Phys. Rev. D 37, 3406 (1988); C. Wetterich, Nucl. Phys. B 302, 668 (1988); J. Frieman, C. Hill, A. Stebbins, I. Waga, Phys. Rev. Lett. 75, 2007 (1995); R. R. Caldwell, R. Dave and P. J. Steinhardt, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80, 1582 (1998); P. G. Ferreira and M. Joyce, Phys. Rev. Lett. 79, 4740 (1997); I. Zlatev, L. Wang and P. J. Steinhardt, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 896 (1999). 3. J. P. Uzan, Phys. Rev. D 59, 123510 (1999); F. Perrotta, C. Baccigalupi, S. Matarrese, Phys. Rev. D 61, 023507 (1999); C. Baccigalupi, F. Perrotta, S. Matarrese, astro-ph/0005543. 4. A. Liddle and R. Scherrer, private communication. 5. R. E. Lopez and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 59, 103502 (1999). 6. K. A. Oliver, G. Steigman, and T. P. Walker, Phys. Rep. 389, 333 (2000). 7. K. A. Olive and G. Steigman, Astrophys. J. Supp 97, 49 (1995).
8. Y. I. Izotov and T. X. Thuan, Astrophys. J 500, 188 (1998). 9. S. Buries and D. Tytler, Astrophys. J 499, 699 (1998); Astrophys. 507, 732 (1998). 10. A. H. Jaffe et al, astro-ph/'0007333. 11. For a review, K. Nakamura, this volume. 12. D. E. Groom et al (Particle Data Group), Euro. Phys. J. C15, (2000).
COLOR S U P E R C O N D U C T I V I T Y A N D C O M P A C T STAR COOLING* DEOG KI HONG Department of Physics, Pusan National University, Pusan 609-735, Korea E-mail: [email protected] I briefly review some of recent developments on color superconductivity and discuss the neutrino interaction in color superconductors which might exist in the core of compact stars. Then, I discuss the possible implications of color superconductivity on the cooling of neutron stars.
Matter exhibits several different phases, shown in Fig. 1, depending on external parameters. At temperature, higher than the deconfinement temperature (T > 100 MeV), quarks confined in the nucleons get liberated and matter becomes a quark-gluon plasma, as happened in the very early universe. Similarly, also at extremely high density, where the Fermi momentum of nucleons in matter is larger than 1 GeV or so as in the core of compact stars like neutron stars, the wavefunction of quarks in nucleons will overlap with that of quarks in other nucleons due to asymptotic freedom. At such high density, quarks are no longer confined in nucleons and thus the nuclear matter will therefore become a quark matter, where rather weakly interacting quarks move around 1. The Fermi surface of quark matter at high density is unstable at low temperature, called Cooper instability, against forming pairs of quarks or holes, if attraction exists between a pair of quarks or holes with opposite momenta. No matter how small the attraction is, it will dominate any repulsive forces at low energy, since the attraction between a pair of quarks or holes with opposite momenta is a relevant operator while all repulsive forces become irrelevant as one scales down toward the Fermi sea 2 ' 3 . It turns out that color anti-triplet diquark condensates are energetically more preferred among possible pairings, including particle-hole parings or density waves 4 . Intense study on color superconductivity 5 shows that superconducting quark matter has two different phases, depending on density. At intermediate density, the Cooper pair is color anti-triplet but flavor singlet, breaking only •PROCEEDING OF T H E TALK AT COSMO-2000, 4-TH INTERNATIONAL WORKSHOP ON PARTICLE PHYSICS AND THE EARLY UNIVERSE, AT CHEJU-ISLAND, KOREA, SEPT. 4-8, 2000.
400
401 T (MeV)
150
Figure 1. A schematic phase diagram of matter.
the color symmetry down to a subgroup, SU(3)C i->- SU(2)C ab3 ,
(1)
where i,j = 1,2 and a, b = 1,2,3 are flavor and color indices, respectively. For high density where the chemical potential is larger than the strange quark mass, n > ms, the strange quark participates in Cooper-pairing. At such a high density, the Cooper-pair condensate is predicted to take a so-called colorflavor locking (CFL) form 6 , breaking not only color symmetry but also flavor symmetry maximally: (fLi(P>ii(-^l) = (rm{p)^Rj(-p)) b = k18?6 j+k26«6l
(2)
At much higher density (/i 3> AQCD), & I ( = A 0 ) — — k-2 and the color-flavor locking phase is shown to be energetically preferred 7 ' 8 . There are two kinds of the attractive forces that lead to Cooper instability, depending on the density. At the intermediate density, where JX < ms or p ~
402
(5 — 10)po, the QCD interaction is approximated with four-quark interactions, £QffCD 3 J*H>W> + •••,
(3)
since both electric and magnetic gluons are screened due to the medium effect. This short-range attraction is precisely the BCS type interaction, which is generated in metal by the exchange of massive phonons. The Cooper pair gap is then given by 14 epexp
(4)
92PF
which is estimated to be 10 ~ 100 MeV, for A and ep are of the order of AQCD and g is of the order of one at the intermediate density. On the other hand, though electric gluons are screened in quark matter, the magnetic gluons are not screened at high density even at a nonperturbative level, as argued convincingly by Son 9 . Thus the Cooper-pairing force at high density is long-ranged and the gap equation is so-called the Eliashberg equation. The (long-range) magnetic gluon exchange interaction leads to an extra (infrared) logarithmic divergence in the gap equation, which is in hard-dense loop (HDL) approximation given as,
A
W
4 / \ * >
36TT2
^Jql + A2
]_ll
1„(
* )
(5)
\\Po-qo\J
where A = 4fi/n • (/x/M) 5 e 3 / 2 ^ with a gauge parameter £. By solving the gap equation (5), one finds the Cooper pair gap to be 9.m,11,12,13
Though the ground state of quark matter is a color superconductor, one needs to know its criticality to observe color superconductivity in the laboratory or in stellar objects. The quark matter which might exist in the core of compact stars like neutron stars will be in the superconducting phase if the interior temperature of compact stars is lower than the critical temperature and the density is higher than the critical density. For the neutron stars, the inner temperature is estimated to be < 0.7 MeV and the core density is around 1.7 fm~ , which is ten times higher than the normal nuclear matter density 19 . In BCS superconductivity, the critical temperature is given as 14 Tc = - e 7 A ~ 0.57A. TV
(7)
403
Thus, the critical temperature of color superconductivity at the intermediate density is quite large; Tc ~ 5-50 MeV. In dense QCD with unscreened magnetic gluons, the critical temperature turns out to take the BCS type value, Tc ~ 0.57A. Since the unscreened magnetic gluons give a much bigger gap than the usual BCS type gap, the critical temperature of color superconductvity is quite large compared to the interior temperature of neutron stars, regardless of the form of attractive forces. It is instructive to derive the critical temperature for the color superconductivity at high density where the pairing is mediated by the unscreened magnetic gluons. We start with the zero temperature Cooper-pair gap equation (5). Following the imaginary-time formalism developed by Matsubara 15 , at finite temperature T, the gap equation (5) becomes, 92sT^
,
A(
fdq
AK)
*K') = VJJ^J ^
+ A^ n )V
n
/
A
\
IkT^iJ '
(8)
where wn = nT(2n + 1) and q = VF • q- We now use the constant (but temperature-dependent) gap approximation, A(w n ) ~ A(T) for all n. Taking n' = 0 and converting the logarithm into integration, we get
16
Using the contour integral 1 =
g2T
fR' dx I
f
2
hi: y
36TT J
, one can in fact sum up over all n to get
J0
dw
2ni Jc 1 + e - " /
1 T
2
2
2
(w - q - A (T)) [(w - iu0)2 + x)'
Since the gap vanishes at the critical temperature, A(Tc) = 0, after performing the contour integration in Eq. (10), we get
I=_»L fdq r dx f 36^ J J \ 2
q
0
2
{7rTc)2+x q2 tanh
'
q2}2 + (2irTcq)2
[(TTT C ) 2 +X2
^Tc) +q -x
[ 2
2
[(TTTC) + q
w^c^ ^q
coth[^/(2Tc)}\ 2
- x}
2
+ (2TVTC) X
V^
J
At high density A > Tp, the second term in the integral in Eq. (10) is negligible, compared to the first term, and integrating over x, we get 2
36^ J0
dy
tanhy y
% (ir/2) +y2)
i
2
\
,2
, „ (V \\2
404
rfi 36TT
Ay
2
9s 367T
tanh 3/
lnA* +
(11)
[ln(eAAc)]J
where we have introduced y = q/(2Tc)
=
r
, tanh y \2 dy In -£• + V V1
r dy^i + r
and Ac = A/(2Tc) and .4 is given as
dy
tanh y
+ 7-
VTT vy y Jo J\ Therefore, we find, taking the Euler-Mascheroni constant 7 ~ 0.577,
Tc = y A ~ 1.13 A.
(12)
(13)
As comparison, we note in the BCS case, which has a contact four-Fermi interaction with strength g, the critical temperature is given as rCJa
1=
dz
9
tanhz
Jo
J\
z
Jo
z
dz
Ji
1 — tanh z
(14)
= 0ln(.eAojc) where w c (^ > 1) is determined by the Debye energy, u>c = u>r>/(2Tc). It shows that the ratio between the critical temperature and the Cooper-pair gap in color superconductivity is same as the BCS value, e7/7r ~ 0.57 18 ' 17 ' 8 . At high density, antiquarks are difficult to create due to the energy gap provided by the Fermi sea and thus it is energetically disfavored for antiquarks to participate in condensation. But, as the density becomes lower, one has to take into account the effect of antiquarks. In the high density effective theory, this effect is incorporated in the higher order operators 8 . First, we add the leading 1/fi corrections to the gap equation Eq. (5) to see how the formation of Cooper pair changes when the density decreases. The leading l//i corrections to the quark-gluon interactions are £1 = - — ^2iP\vF,x){-y± "t/'F
• D)2i){vF,x)
=
- ^ cf
(15) In the leading order in the HDL approximation, the loop correction to the vertex is neglected and the quark-gluon vertex is shifted by the l//x correction
405
as -igsvF
i->- -igsvF
(16)
- igs
where lt is the momentum carried away from quarks by gluons. We note that since the l//x correction to the quark-gluon vertex does not depend on the Fermi velocity of the quark, it generates a repulsion for quark pairs. For a constant gap approximation, A(p||) ~ A, the gap equation becomes in the leading order, as p —• 0, 1
9W
(2TT)'
1
In
r
+A2
36TT 2
In
In
£ )-3|Cl7)
When n < fxc ~ e 3 A, the gap due to the long-range color magnetic interaction disappears. Since the phase transition for color superconducting phase is believed to be of first order 2 0 , 2 1 , we may assume that the gap has the same dependence on the chemical potential /z as the leading order. Then, the critical density for the color superconducting phase transition is given by M<
=
e3fj,c
Zir1
L V2gs(fic)\ Therefore, if the strong interaction coupling is too strong at the scale of the chemical potential, the gap does not form. In other words, the chemical potential has to be bigger than a critical value, 0.13GeV < /uc < 0.31GeV, which is about the same as the one estimated in the literature 20 ' 21 > 22 . In the CFL phase of color superconductors, there are 8 pseudo NambuGoldstone (NG) bosons and one genuine NG boson. Since the (pseudo) NG bosons are very light, they constitute the low-lying excitations of the CFL phase, together with the modified photon. To discuss the cooling process of color superconductors, we need to know the NG boson mass. The pseudo NG bosons will get mass due to interactions that break 5C/(3) chiral symmetry such as Dirac mass terms, electromagnetic interactions, and instantons. For the Dirac mass term, it is important to note that it is suppressed by 1/n at high density since it invloves anti-quarks. As in 2 3 , 8 , if we introduce the charge conjugated field ipc = C'0 T with C = ij0/y2 and decompose the quark field into states (I/J+) near the Fermi surface and the states (ip-) deep in the Dirac sea, the Dirac mass term can be rewritten as glptp
-mq (ip+xp. + ip-i>+) + -m% (ipc+i>c- + il>c-ipc+) •
(19)
Since the states in the Dirac sea can propagate into their charge conjugated states via the radiatively generated Majorana mass term, which is shown to
406
be same as the Majorana mass of quarks near the Fermi surface 27 , the Dirac mass term becomes, if one integrates out the states in the Dirac sea, ^_ fields, m2 . ( id-V\ - " , # = -~^\ (1 ~ - ^ - ) ^
mQmTn + + -^-^+A^C+
+ •••,
(20)
1
where V = (l,vp) and the ellipsis denotes the terms higher order in l//i. Then, the vacuum energy shift due to the Dirac mass term is ~ TO2, A 2 ln(/x 2 /A 2 ) in the leading order, which has to be matched with the vacuum energy in the meson Lagrangian, m\F'2 with the pion decay constant F ~ (x 2 4 . Therefore, one finds the meson mass due to the Dirac mass TO2 ~ m 2 A 2 //x 2 • ln(/i 2 /A 2 ). 2 4 ' 2 5 , 2 6 The electromagnetic interaction also contributes to the meson mass, since it breaks the 5£/(3) flavor symmetry. Among 8 pseudo Nambu-Goldstone bosons, four of them have the unbrken f/(l) charge and receive a correction, 27 ' 28 Sm^ ~ 12.7 sin 9A [ln(/i 2 /A 2 )] , where 8 — t a n - 1 (e/g). To discuss the interaction of neutrinos in color superconductors 29 , we first note that gluons mix with weak gauge bosons, since the diquark condensates in color superconductors carry not only a color but also a weak charge. Consider the color-gluon annihilation into the lepton pair, 11, as an example of weak neutral current interactions: (21) (22)
V+ +V~ -^ Z ^ 11, V+ + V~ ->• V0 -> 11.
The coupling at the VVZ vertex in the process mediated by Z, eq.(21), is given by /cos
2
<5-l^r^4 V3 g1 + g'2 v1 which gives a suppression factor
c o s
^ ~ 4ff V3
c o s 3
^(#1)2 Mw
(23)
compared to the conventional vv production. The suppression factor in the process mediated by V0, eq.(22), due to the vertex V0 11 is given by ~sin/3 ~ g/gs.
(25)
2
The propagator in the low energy limit Q' << My is greater than in eq.(21), i.e.,
-r^—5- ~ - V Q2-My
My
(26)
407
However the amplitude for fusion is enhanced at the strong interaction vertex, VVVo, by a factor of / , and we get the factor for the amplitude
~Q"Jf,M9- = Q'M
(27)
with the modified elctric charge Qf. One can now see that the gluon fusion into the charged flavor 11 pair is greater than the weak neutral current by a factor of ~ (-f^-)~ 2 ~ 106 and hence comparable to photon mediated processes ? . However this enhancement does not apply to gluon-mediated vv processes because Qf is zero for neutrino. In general, for the neutral current with neutrinos, the contribution from color-gluon mediated processes in the broken phase vanishes since the amplitude is proportional to Qf (neutrino) which is = 0. We arrive at the same conclusion for qq —>• vv. The charged current weak interaction in the process mediated by VQ is also comparable to the ordinary weak interaction strength for the neutrinoquark interaction in the low-energy limit. Consider the following processes in matter, q + l ->• q' + v(v), q -> q' + l + v(v).
(28) (29)
As in the gluon annihilation processes, there are two amplitudes that can be decomposed into three parts: quark gauge boson vertex, propagator, gauge boson-lepton-neutrino vertex, qq'W± qq'V±
-> W± -)• lvW±, - • V-± - • lvV±.
(30) (31)
In the low energy limit, eq.(30) gives the ordinary weak amplitude
~ ~MwV
(32)
It is easy to see that the contribution of the color gauge-boson-mediated process, eq.(31), also gives an amplitude comparable to that of the W± mediated process,
9Mior-rT72 'gsyMw> Mys9.~i7r" Mw
(33)
It should be noted however that the quark decay mediated by V0 in eq.(29) cannot take place because of the energy conservation: the quarks with different colors but with same flavor have the same mass. Therefore the neutrino
408
production mediated by the color-changing weak current is limited to the process in eq.(28) qr + e~ -> qb + v +
qb + e
(34)
->• qr +v.
(35)
To keep the system in a color-singlet state in the cooling process, these processes should occur equally to compensate the color change in each process. It implies that these processes depend on the abundance of positrons in the system. At finite temperature in the cooling period, it is expected that there will be a substantial amount of positrons as well as electrons as long as the temperature is not far below ~ MeV. Of course the additional enhancement of the neutrino production due to the CFL phase depends on the abundance of positrons in the system which depends mainly on the temperature. If confined colored gluons are present in the matter in the CFL phase, the same amplitude can be obtained in eq.(31) when qq' is replaced with VV. The result obtained above can be summarized as predicting an enhancement of the effective four-point coupling constant for the neutrino production process in the low energy limit. The enhancement due to the neutrino-color interaction is suppressed by factors of e _ A / T or e~Mv/T, since it depends on the unpaired excitations above gap which can participate into neutrino-color interaction. Hence for the cooling process at low temperatures as ~ 109K it is not so effective. However during the early stage of proto-neutron star the temperature is expected to be high enough ~ 20 — 50MeV 30 to see the effect of the enhancement due to color excitations. Let us now consider the weak decay of light quasi-quarks, described by the four-Fermi interaction: C-Fermi = —f= ^
^L^F, X^lpL
(VF, x)9 L{x)l^V
L(x)
(36)
VF
= -J=^$\{VF,X)$L(VF,X)VL(X)I)VL{X)
(37)
VF
where GF — 1-166 x 10~5 G e V - 2 is the Fermi constant and V denotes the quasi-quark near the Fermi surface, projected from the quark field * as in 8 ,
^ r . » ) = 1 + f"fe-^(4
(38)
Since the four-Fermi interaction of quarks with opposite momenta are marginally relevant and gets substantially enhanced at low energy, it may havj
409 significant corrections to the couplings to quarks of those weakly interacting particles 8 : 5Cuq =
-j=^L(vF,x)^L{vF,x)vL{x)pvL{x) 2M,2
Jxi
where vF and vj? are summed over and 33 is the value of the marginal fourquark coupling at the screening mass scale M. In terms of the renormalization group (RG) equation at a scale E
where t = In E. The scale dependence of the marginal four-quark coupling in the color anti-triplet channel is calculated in 23 ' 8 . At E
(41)
Since as(t) = 27r/(llt), we get Uii
G
F
(£)^GF(M)(§)
3 6 3
•
(42)
Since the RG evolution stops at scales lower than the gap, the low energy effective Fermi coupling in dense mattor is therefore Gf
= GF •(%)**.
(43)
We emphasize that this enhancement applies equally to the ft decay of quarks and other neutrino production processes described in the previous section. At asymptotic density and low temperature (T ^ 0), the relevant excitations are quasi-quarks that are not Cooper-paired, and 17 Nambu-Goldstone bosons. All other massive particles, Higgsed gluons and other massive excitations ? are expected to be out of thermal equilibrium and decoupled. Thus the main cooling processes must be the emission of weakly interacting light particles like neutrinos or other (weakly interacting) exotic light particles {e.g. axions) from the quasi-quarks and Nambu-Goldstone bosons in the thermal bath. For the neutrino emissivity from quasi quarks, the so-called Urea process is relevant. The neutrino emissivity by the direct Urea process in quark matter,
410
which is possible for most cases in quark matter, was calculated by Iwamoto 31 . For the CFL superconcductor, we expect the calculation goes in parallel and the neutrino emissivity is
direct « aaPY^3T6,
(44)
where p is the density, T is the temperature of the quark matter, and Ye is the ratio between the electron and baryon density. On the other hand, the neutrino emissivity by the modified Urea process, which is the dominant process in the standard cooling of neutron stars 32 , is suppressed by (A/fj,)4, since the pion coupling to quarks is given by gqqTi ~ A//i 25 . Thus, the neutrino emmisivity by the modified Urea process in the CFL quark matter is greatly suppressed in the CFL quark matter, compared to normal quark matter. Futhermore, since the pion-pion interaction in the CFL quark matter are also suppressed by A/fj, 24>33, we note that all the low energy excitations in the CFL quark matter are extremely weakly coupled. But, since most excitations in the CFL quark matter are gapped and frozen out, the CFL quark matter has a quite small heat capacity and cools down very rapidly at temperatures lower than the gap 34 . Together with the general enhancement of the effective four-point coupling constant in RG analysis, the enhancement of the neutrino production implies that the cooling process speeds up as the CFL phase sets in dense hadronic matter near the critical temperature. But, at temperature much below the critical temperature, the interaction of quasi-quarks and pions and kaons is extremely weak, suppressed by A//x, and the CFL quark matter cools down extremely rapidly. For a realistic calculation of the cooling rate of compact stars, we need to also consider the neutrino propagation in the CFL matter before the neutrinos come out of the system. A recent study 35 suggests that the presence of the CFL phase can accelerate the cooling process because neutrino interactions with matter are reduced in the presence of a superconducting gap A. However this result is subject to modification by the effect of additional interactions not taken into account in this work - mediated by the colored gluons on the quark polarization. It would be interesting to see how the enhancement of the neutrino production correlates with the neutrino-medium interaction. This is one of the physically relevant questions on how the enhanced neutrino interaction could affect neutron-star(proto neutron star) cooling following supernova explosion. This issue is currently under investigation.
411
Acknowledgments I am grateful to H. K. Lee, T. Lee, D.-P. Min, V. Miransky, M. Rho, I. Shovkovy and L. C. R. Wijewardhana for enjoyable and fruitful collaborations and to M. Alford, S. Hsu and K. Rajagopal for useful conversations. This work was supported by Korea Research Foundation Grant (KRF-2000-015DP0069). References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
J. C. Collins and M. J. Perry, Phys. Rev. Lett. 34, 1353 (1975). R. Shankar, Rev. Mod. Phys. 66, 129 (1994). J. Polchinski, hep-th/9210046. E. Shuster and D. T. Son, hep-ph/9905448; B. Y. Park, M. Rho, A. Wirzba, and I. Zahed, hep-ph/9910347. See for recent reviews, F. Wilczek, " QCD in Extreme Conditions," hepph/0003183; T. Schafer, "Color Superconductivity," nucl-th/9911017; K. Rajagopal, " Mapping the QCD Phase Diagram," hep-ph/9908360; M. Alford, "Color superconductivity in dense quark matter," hepph/0003185; D. K. Hong, "Color superconductivity in high density effective theory," hep-ph/0003215. M. Alford, K. Rajagopal, and F. Wilczek, Nucl. Phys. B 538, 443 (1999), hep-ph/98044233. N. Evans, J. Hormuzdiar, S. D. H. Hsu, and M. Schwetz, hep-ph/9910313; T. Schafer, hep-ph/9909574. D. K. Hong, Nucl. Phys. B582, 451 (2000) [hep-ph/9905523]. D. T. Son, Phys. Rev. D59, 094019 (1999), hep-ph/9812287. D. K. Hong, I. Shovkovy, V. Miransky, and L. C. R. Wijewardhana, Phys. Rev. D 6 1 , 056001 (2000). T. Schafer and F. Wilczek, Phys. Rev. D 60, 114033 (1999), hepph/9906512; R. Pisarski and D. Rischke, Phys. Rev. D 6 1 , 074017 (2000), nuclth/9910056; W. E. Brown, J. T. Liu, and H.-C. Ren, hep-ph/9908248; S. D. Hsu and M. Schwetz, hep-ph/9908310. See for instance J. R. Schrieffer, Theory of Superconductivity (New York, W.A. Benjamin, 1964). T. Matsubara, Prog. Theor. Phys. 14, 351 (1955). V.P. Gusynin and LA. Shovkovy, Phys. Rev. D56 (1997) 5251. W. E. Brown, J. T. Liu, and H.-c. Ren, hep-ph/9912409.
412
18. R. Pisarski and D. Rischke, nucl-th/990741; nucl-th/9910056. 19. D. Pines and M. Ali Alpar, in The Structure and Evolution of Neutron Stars, Conference Proceedings, Ed. by D. Pines, R. Tamagaki, and S. Tsuruta, Addison-Wesley (1992). 20. J. Berges and K. Rajagopal, Nucl. Phys. B 538 (1999) 215, hep-ph 9804233; M.A. Halasz, et. al Phys. Rev. D 58 (1998) 096007, hep-ph 9804290. 21. M. Stephanov, K. Rajagopal, and E. Shuryak, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 (1998) 4816, hep-ph/9806219. 22. R. Rapp, et. al, hep-ph/9904353. 23. D. K. Hong, Phys. Lett. B473, 118 (2000) [hep-ph/9812510]. 24. D. T. Son and M. A. Stephanov, Phys. Rev. D 6 1 , 074012 (2000), hep-ph/9910491; Erratum, D62, 059902 (2000), hep-ph/0004095. 25. D. K. Hong, T. Lee and D. Min, Phys. Lett. B477, 137 (2000) [hepph/9912531]. 26. M. Rho, A. Wirzba and I. Zahed, Phys. Lett. B473, 126 (2000). C. Manuel and M. H. Tytgat, Phys. Lett. B 479, 190 (2000), hepph/0001095; S. R. Beane, P. F. Bedaque and M. J. Savage, Phys. Lett. B483, 131 (2000). hep-ph/0002209. 27. D. K. Hong, Phys. Rev. D62, 091501 (2000) [hep-ph/0006105]. 28. C. Manuel and M. H. Tytgat, hep-ph/0010274. 29. D. K. Hong, H. K. Lee, M. A. Nowak and M. Rho, hep-ph/0010156. 30. J.A. Pons, S. Reddy, M. Prakash, J.M. Lattimer and J.A. Miralles, Astrophyaical J. 513, 780(1999). 31. N. Iwamoto, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44, 1637 (1980). 32. B. L. Friman and O. V. Maxwell, Astrophys. J. 232. 541 (1979). 33. M. Rho, A. Wirzba and I. Zahed, Phys. Lett. B473, 126 (2000) [hepph/9910550]. 34. M. Alford, J. A. Bowers and K. Rajagopal, hep-ph/0009357. 35. G.W. Carter and S. Reddy, hep-ph/0005228.
LATTICE G A U G E T H E O R Y OF G A U G E D N A M B U - J O N A - L A S I N I O MODEL SEYONG KIM Department of Physics, Sejong University, Seoul 143-747, Korea E-mail: [email protected] Using lattice gauge theory simulation, we investigate non-perturbative triviality of QED. Difficult problems with chiral limit is avoided by adding a small Z(2) symmetric four fermi interaction. The added term is irrelevant and its effect should disappear in the continuum limit. Furthermore, this term separates the phase transition associated with monopoles from the phase transition associated with chiral symmetry, which allows us to concentrate on the chiral phase transition. Our result extends perturbative triviality of QED to a non-perturbative regime.
1
Introduction
Perturbative calculation of text book quantum electrodynamics (QED) shows that electric charges are completely screened by vacuum polarization effect. Upto one-loop order, renormalized electric charge behaves as *
M
=
l-eg(A)/(fcr»)logA'
(1)
where eo (A) is the bare electric charge at the cutoff scale, A, and fx is renormalization scale. As A —> oo, en vanishes however strong eo(A) is. Alternatively, if the theory is renormalized while holding the renormalized charge fixed, the effective charge measured on a particular length scale will diverge. We would like to understand whether the triviality of QED based on this perturbative argument can be extended beyond perturbation theory because this issue addresses whether a non-asymptotically free quantum field can exist. Numerical simulation of lattice discretized version of QED on four spacetime dimension is uniquely suitable framework for investigating such a question since the lattice spacing, a, is the only known quantum field theory regulator which is non-perturbatively defined1. Since the continuum limit of a lattice model is related to the existence of a quantum field theory, properties of a continuum field theory can be studied by looking into critical properties of a lattice model in principle. Indeed, there have been numerous lattice studies on the triviality of QED. However, they gave confused pictures. On the one *in colllaboration with J.B. Kogut and M.-Paolo Lombardo. 413
414
0.12 -
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.2
0.24
Figure 1. chiral condensate, (ipip) = a vs. 1/e 2
hand, QED looks trivial as expected from perturbative argument although simulations were not done in the near chiral limit and needs extrapolation 2 . On the other hand, lattice QED action admits various additional lattice excitations which may survive in continuum limit and thus may result in interacting theory 4 . Part of confusions was caused by large finite volume effect3, narrow scaling window associated with non-zero fermion mass used in simulations, and overlapping of the chiral phase transition with the phase transition associated with lattice monopoles and lattice Dirac string 5 . We add small Nambu-Jona-Lasinio type four fermi interaction term, |G 2 (V'V') 2 ! t 0 usual non-compact version of lattice QED action,
s = E iP(x)(P , +m5 xy
Xiy)i>(y)
+
^G'\^)\x)
415
+ TT Y^A"(X
+
^+
A x
^ "> -A^x
+ l/
) - A"(x)Y
(2)
HJ^v
where 0XiV = \ £ M -ylt[eiA"{x)Sy,x+ll - e-
£
ii)(x){$x,y + (m +
x A x A x +X7 4e2 £ { ^ ( + ^) + *( ) ~ ^
+ u
">~
1 '(*) 2G 2 A x 2
"( ))
(3)
H^tu
which is amenable to numerical simulation. The Z(2) symmetry is realized by ip(x) -> I/J(X)J5
1p(x) ->
-tl)(x)j5
(4)
The presence of four fermi term allows us to simulate directly in the chiral limit because the vacuum expectation value of auxiliary field, (a) serves as a dynamical mass term for the charged particle and makes the numerical inversion of the Dirac operator fast even if we set m = 0. Thus, we can avoid scaling violation coming from finite fermion mass. Also, since a field acts as a smooth interpolating field between the neighoring lattice sites and modifies fluctuation between the sites, lattice excitations coming from large fluctuating gauge field may be reduced. Of course, we are interested in the G —> 0 phase since our ultimate issue is the triviality of text book QED. Thus we investigate the phase structure of QED by varying (3e with a fixed but small G in this extended coupling space of (/3e = l / e 2 , G 2 ) (see 6 for a brief report). Since the critical behavior of lattice QED should show up in the bulk quantities, chiral condensate (ipi/)) at the chiral limit (m = 0) has been calculated with various fie and G2 = 1/4 on several lattice volumes ranging from 8 4 to 20 4 . Here, we report the result from simulations on a 164 lattice volume (full details on finite size scaling analysis and run with different parameters will be reported elsewhere). We fit the chiral condensate to the equation of
416 i
/ .o
i
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
x"
7.2
-
y'
7
i
—»—i
"
7.4
r
-
6.8
A y
"
6.6
-
,''S
6.4
-
6.2
*' 2.3
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Figure 2. | l / e 2 - l/e 2 |/cr 2 vs. l / l n ( l / ( r )
state allowing different assumptions on the scaling behavior. In addition, chiral susceptibility has been studied. If the continuum limit is trivial, mean field theoretic behavior with logarithmic corrections is expected. On 164 lattice, search in the coupling space of (/3e,G2) shows a line of chiral phase transition extending from (0.204, 0) to (oo, ~ 2.) and shows a line of monopole percolation phase transition extending from (0.204, 0) to (0.244, oo). Therefore, numerical simulation with G2 = 1/4 is not near to the strong coupling phase of G2 and QED behavior is not tainted by the additional term. 2
Lattice simulation and result
Naive continuum limit of Eq. (3) gives 0(a) term where a is the lattice spacing and shows large finite lattice spacing error. To reduce this effect, the auxiliary scalar field has been defined on the 16-dual sites surrounding a lattice site x, not directly on a lattice site. To handle fermion doubling problem, staggered
417
fermion method has been chosen. Thus, the actual lattice action chosen for simulation is
*=£
<x,x>
(5)
where px,y = \ E ^ M W ^ ^ ^ ^ J . X + K - e~iA"{y)$v,x-ij\ a n d X>X are staggered fermion field and hybrid molecular dynamics simulation algorithm 7 has been employed. Errors associated with finite molecular time step has been investigated. Figure 1 shows the result from the chiral condensate measurement for various f3e (the vertical axis is the chiral condensate and the horizontal axis is j3e). The dotted line is the result of fitting the data with the form 0C - 0e = acr2(\og(b/a))p, where we get /3C = 0.2350(1), a = 34.3(3.9), log 6 = 1.55(1) and p = 1.00(8) with confidence level of 34%. Mean field theory predicts the equation of state, (3C — j3e = aer1//?n"'g'let[z'"ior' with /^magnetization = 2. Logarithmic correction to mean field theory behavior modifies this equation of state to (3C — 0e = aa2log(b/a). Thus, our data is consistent with logarithmic corrected mean field theory, which suggests that the continuum limit of lattice QED is trivial since mean field theory is a free theory. To illustrate this logarithmic correction more clearly, |/3C — /5e|/cr2 has been plotted against l/ln(l/cr) in Figure 2. The presence of logarithmic correction is quite pronounced. In Figure 3, the data for inverse susceptibility is plotted together with the fitted result of the form, x+ = c+|£|~ 7 for the data/3 e < 0C and X- = C-|t|~ 7 ' for the data fie > /3e where t is the reduced variable, t = {j3c — @e)/pc. Fitted parameters are (3C = 0.2358(5) and 7 , 7 ' ~ 1. /3C obtained from this fit is consistent with that from the chiral condensate within fitting error. Leading order calculation based on mean field theory gives 7 , 7 ' = 1 and there is logarithmic correction to this mean field theory behavior of the susceptibility : Logarithmic correction does not modify exponents, 7 , 7 ' but the correction changes the amplitude, c+,c- such that C-/c+ = 2 — 1/ log(b'/a) < 2. Fitting result is given by c-/c+ = 1.74(10) < 2. Again, our inverse susceptibility data gives us a picture consistent with logarithmic corrected mean field theory behavior of lattice QED.
418 I
o
I
i
1
i
\
»
— i
1
-
1
i
5
"
V^ 4
3
"
s v> V.
-
"
\
I 2
o
i
,-\ .$' 1
.&
\\ n
0.14
<
<
0.16
0.18
•
i
0.2
0.22
/ I
I
1
1
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.3
V
Figure 3. inverse susceptibility vs. 1/e 2
3
Conclusion
In four dimensional spacetime, we have simulated lattice action of QED with small additional four fermi interaction term. The added term is irrelevant and does not contribute in the continuum limit. Quite accurate investigation on the chiral condensate and the chiral susceptibility was possible because we could simulate directly on the chiral limit due to dynamical chiral symmetry breaking by the auxiliary field, a. Also, the added four fermi term separates the chiral phase transition from the lattice monopole transition which allows us to concentrate on the properties of the chiral phase transition, which is confirmed by the exploration in the (/3e,G2) coupling space (to be reported in lengthy presentation). The equation of state for the chiral condensate from the simulation of lattice QED with Z(2) Nambu-Jona-Lansio term agrees with logarithmically corrected mean field theory prediction. Chiral susceptibility shows the same
419
logarithmic corrected mean field behavior. Thus, we conclude that all the results from our simulation of U(l) gauged Nambu-Jona-Lasinio model point to logarithmic corrected mean field theory behavior. This suggests, in turn, that QED is trivial even beyond perturbative theory context. References 1. M. Creutz, Quarks, gluons, and lattices, (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1983). 2. M. Gockeler, R. Horsley, P. Rakow, G. Schierholz, and R. Sommer, Nucl. Phys. B 371, 713 (1992). 3. S. Hands, Nucl. Phys. B(Proc. Suppl.) 42, 663 (1995). 4. T. Banks, R. Myerson, J. Kogut, Nucl. Phys. B 129, 493 (1977). 5. J.B. Kogut et al, Phys. Rev. D 53, 1513 (1996) ; M. Gockeler et al, ibid., 1508. 6. S. Kim, J.B. Kogut, and M.Paolo-Lombardo, hep-lat/0009029, to be published in Phys. Lett. B. 7. S. Duane and J.B. Kogut, PRL 55, 2774 (1985) ; S. Gottlieb et al, PRD 35, 2531 (1987).
B U R S T S OF G R A V I T A T I O N A L R A D I A T I O N F R O M SUPERCONDUCTING COSMIC STRINGS A N D THE NEUTRINO MASS SPECTRUM H E R M A N J. M O S Q U E R A CUESTA1'2'3 Abdus Salam International Centre for Theoretical Physics, Strada Costiera 11, Miramare 3J014, Trieste, Italy Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fisicas, Laboratorio de Cosmologia e Fsica Experimental de Altas Energias Rua Dr. Xavier Sigaud 150, Cep 22290-180, Urea, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil 3 C e n t r o Latinoamericano de Fisica (CLAF), Avenida Wenceslau Bras 173, Botafogo, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil DANAYS M O R E J O N GONZALEZ4'5 Pontificia
Universidade Catolica do Rio de Janeiro, Rua Marques de Sao Vicente 225, Cep 22453-900, Gdvea, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil 2 Centro Brasileiro de Pesquisas Fisicas, Laboratorio de Cosmologia e Fsica Experimental de Altas Energias Rua Dr. Xavier Sigaud 150, Cep 22290-180, Urea, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil Berezinsky, Hnatyk and Vilenkin showed that superconducting cosmic strings could be central engines for cosmological gamma-ray bursts and for producing the neutrino component of ultra-high energy cosmic rays. A consequence of this mechanism would be that a detectable cusp-triggered gravitational wave burst should be released simultaneously with the 7-ray surge. If contemporary measurements of both 7 and v radiation could be made for any particular source, then the cosmological time-delay between them might be useful for putting unprecedently tight bounds on the neutrino mass spectrum. Such measurements could consistently verify or rule out the model, since strictly correlated behaviour is expected for the duration of the event and for the time variability of the spectra.
1
Reviewing Cosmic Strings
Cosmic strings (CSs) are topological defects formed during phase transitions in the early Universe induced by spontaneous symmetry breaking at GUTscale energies1. The energy of the unbroken vacuum phase is released as GUT quanta of the gauge and scalar fields, forming the CSs 2 . It has been suggested that ordinary CSs could be the cosmological sources of the biggest explosions in the Universe3: the cosmological (classical) gamma-ray bursts (GRBs) 4 , with energies EQRBS ~ 1 0 5 3 - 5 4 erg, timescales 1 0 - 2 < TQRBS < 103s, as observed by BATSE 5 . CSs may also be the origin of the ultra high energy cosmic rays (UHECRs) with energies above the Greisen-Kuzmin-Zatsepin (GZK) 420
421
cut-off: Ex ~ 1019 eV 6 , as well as the very high energy neutrinos observed today 2,7,8 . Also, ordinary cosmic strings are potential sources of gravitational radiation. Emission of gravitational waves (GWs) is considered the main channel for CS loops to decay 9 ' 1 . Turning attention to superconducting cosmic string (SCCS) loops, Babul, Paczyriski and Spergel 10 , and most recently Berezinsky, Hnatyk and Vilenkin (BHV2000)4, have proposed that such objects could be the central engines of most cosmological bursts of gamma-rays. In the first study, the currents are thought of as being induced in the strings by primordial magnetic fields, and the source distance scale is assumed to be (102 < z < 10 3 ) 10 . In the second one, on the other hand, the string currents are seeded by an intergalactic magnetic field, with the GRB sources being located at distances characteristic of superclusters of galaxies, i.e., z < 5 4 . In both of the models, a surface defect referred to as a cusp is the trigger of the bursts, while the electric currents are induced by oscillation of string loops in an external intergalactic magnetic field. A further by-product of these pictures is that a beamed surge develops naturally at the place where a superconducting string loop cusp annihilates. Because of the very large Lorentz factor achieved by the contracting cusp when it is nearly at the point where it will trigger the GRB, this beamed radiation is a very interesting feature of the model. It fits quite well with the current trend among GRB workers who claim that recent observations provide strong evidence for some degree of beaming in GRBs 11 . Table 1. Inferred duration of the GRB (GW) emission phase (giving a large part of the total energy E) as a function of characteristic values for the BATSE GRB fluence S, and the assumed intergalactic magnetic field strength B, with the CS parameter a ~ 0.4 x 1 0 - 8 . rpGHBs r„i
6.7 x irr
6
3.2 x 10- 4 2.5 x 10- 3 6.7 x 10- 3
@ (Fig.l) * (Fig.l) XX (Fig.l)
2.o x irr 2 200
LISA Target
S [erg cm 2] 3 x 10- 3 1 x 10" 4 1 x 10~5 3 x 10~ 4 1 x 10- 5 1.5 x 10~ 8
B[G] 8
ioio- 8 io- 7 io- 7 io- 7 io- 7
E^"* [erg] ~ 3x 6.7 x 6.7 x > 3x
54
10 IO53 IO53 1054
GRB 971214 991216 »
55
990123
> 5 x IO51
Based on BATSE observations, we point out that the Berezinsky, Hnatyk and Vilenkin SCCS scenario 4 appears to be more well-motivated than the earlier one for explaining GRBs from CSs. Thus, we shall follow its main lines here in order to demonstrate that in such a view for the central engine
422
of GRBs, an accompanying burst of gravitational radiation should also be released. As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the characteristics of such GW bursts make them potentially observable with the forthcoming generation of Earthbased interferometric GW observatories LIGO, VIRGO, TAMA and GEO600, and the space-borne LISA, as well as by the resonant-mass TIGAs. 2
The Berezinsky, Hnatyk and Vilenkin SCCS Loops Model for G R B s
A superconducting cosmic string loop, with energy per unit length ^ ~ rj2 (where rj is the string symmetry-breaking scale), oscillating in a magnetic field B, behaves like an oc generator, and an electric current To ~ e2Bl flows in it. Here I ~ act, defines the string loop invariant wavelength (I = E//J,, where E is the energy of the loop in the center-of-mass frame), and a ~ K9G/J « 1 is a parameter determined by the gravitational back reaction 4 . During brief time intervals, a noticeable augmentation of the local current intensity can occur in domains quite close to the cusp location, the point at which the string speed gets closest to the velocity of light. Several cusps may appear during a single loop oscillation period. Inside a cusp domain 51c (at maximum contraction) the string shrinks by a large factor, 1/61, leading to a relativistic Lorentz factor T ~ 1/51 (in the string rest frame)", this condition being sustained for a timescale 5tc ~ 5lc/c, within a physical length scale 6lc ~ 51/T ~ l/T2. Most of the huge cusp rest energy is converted into kinetic energy. Since, in general, the string velocity is extremely high near to the cusp collapse (it spreads out inside a cone with opening angle 9 ~ 1/r oriented along the direction in which the cusp contracts), a quadrupole distribution of the local energy density is expected to develop (see Ref.4 for further details). This scenario implies that a short burst of GW emission should occur in the time leading up to cusp annihilation. In this brief time scale, 5tc, the large asymmetric cusp shrinkage and energy reconversion mean that a powerful GW burst would be emitted. As suggested above, we expect that the GW burst and the 7-ray burst should have exactly the same duration, and emphasize that long bursts (At ~ 200s) may also be possible 4 . This last point may be realised if a special combination of intergalactic magnetic strengths, i.e., B ~ 10 - 7 G, and GRB fluences, e.g., S ~ 10~8erg c m - 2 , is invoked. This possibility is illustrated in Table I, where several 7-ray fluences °In the BHV2000 model this Lorentz factor may reach up to T ~ 6.7 X 10 7 . However, when the back-reaction effect of the electromagnetic radiation emitted in the process is taken into consideration the factor reduces to T < 1 0 4 1 2 , which is very consistent with the correspondings values inferred from BATSB observations 5 ' 1 1 .
423
from particular events are combined with magnetic field strengths thought to exist around the GRB sources in the context of the SCCS cusp annihilation mechanism. The GW characteristics (amplitude and frequency) can be estimated using the typical dynamical timescale for GRJBs in this model. According to BHV20004, the 7-ray timescale (GRB duration) is given by
/10-4ergcm-2\ (1 + z)~' X V S ) [(l+z)-V2-l]-2'
K)
where S is the GRB fluence in units of 1 0 - 4 erg c m - 2 , B is the intergalactic magnetic field in units of 1 0 - 8 G 13 , and z ~ 4 is the source redshift. This value for the redshift z at which the SCCS is located in this model has been taken in agreement with BATSE observations of the most distant and most energetic GRBs ever detected: GRB000131 at z = 4.5, Andersen et al. (VLT Team) 14 . It is also consistent with existing models for ultrahigh-energy cosmic rays and the observed shape of their spectrum. This is a timescale that could be observed by BATSE (time resolution At ~ 100/xs) in very short GRBs from this sort of cosmological source (see Table I), were it not for its low efficiency for such bursts (see for example Trigger Number 01453, At = 0.006 ±0.0002 in Table 1 in Cline, Matthey and Otwinowski 15 ). In what follows we concentrate on this kind of GRB. 3
Gravitational Waves from Cosmic String Loops
One can use the general relativity (GR) quadrupole formula to make an estimate of the characteristic GW amplitude: the dimensionless space-time strain (h), generated by the non-spherical dynamics of the cusp kinetic energy, is related to the distance of the CS (D) by h\j = Jrfj-^2 , where Qij is the second moment of the mass distribution (quadrupole mass-tensor) in the transverse traceless (TT) gauge and is given by Qtj = J p(xiXj - l/3x2)d3x, with p being the mass-energy density of the source. This expression can be rewritten as 16 h — 2<J ENon-Sym
c4
DL
/0\
'
{l)
where DL is the luminosity distance defined by DL = rz(l + z), with z being the source redshift (inferred from the spectrum of the GRB host), and
424
rz is the comoving distance given by rz = 2-^-(l - [1 + z}~1/2). Here HQ is the present-day value of the Hubble constant. For the case which we are studying, we can approximate the non-symmetric part of the kinetic energy of the annihilating cusp as £/v on -Sym ~ Mc ( ^ ) , where Mc ~ fj,5lc ~ /j,cStc is the total mass of the cusp. At the time when the gamma-ray outburst occurs, we can express the time derivative of the cusp characteristic linear dimension as
( f ) 2 ~ ( l 7 ^ ) ~ r 2 c 2 ' w i t h 5t ~ 5tc a s discussed by BHV2000. We also identify the GW pulse duration as 5tc ~ TQ$BS, given by Eq.(l). Using these expressions, we can write ENon-Sym ~ HC3T25tc, and Eq.(2) becomes G cDi
nT2Tg*BBs
~ 1.9 x 1 0 - 2 2 r 2 {TS*BB») x 10 28 c m \ /
DL
(3)
fj, 16
) V(10 GeV) 2 ,
where we have used as the GUT symmetry breaking scale for the SCCS: rj ~ 1016GeV, and have assumed that the source is at a distance equal to the Hubble radius. Consistently with current observations, and following BHV2000, we will consider sources at low z ~ 5 14 for which T = 300 and T = 103 are plausible Lorentz factors according to BATSE observations and the fireball model 5 . Recall that high T values are needed in order for the fireball to avoid overproduction of electron-positron pairs 17 . From Eq.(3) we then have ft£=3op _ 9 4 x 10-21^-1/2^ ^=300 _ 2.1 x l O ^ H z - 1 / 2 and ^o.l2ms ~ 1-5 x 1 0 - 2 1 H z - 1 ' 2 , for the burst duration and Lorentz factor, as indicated. The maximum frequency of the GW burst in the reference frame of the loop can be approximated as few ~ *7«n> w l t n ^dyn ~ ^cwBs being the dynamical timescale for annihilation of the cusp. This then implies h ~ fGW and so we can write fGW = (TgfiP')-1
~ (^A
~ 150,420,3200 Hz,
(4)
for GRBs with the durations given in Table I. Such frequencies fall just within the range of highest sensitivity for the LIGO (I,II), VIRGO and GEO600 interferometers, and for the Brazilian Mario Schonberg and Dutch MiniGRAIL TIGAs, as shown in Figure 1. Thus, in the high frequency regime, the bursts may be detectable for higher F and much lower 77, for a given At, than is the case at lower frequencies.
425
1
2
3 Log10 [GW Frequency] (Hz)
4
Figure 1. Locus of the GW characteristics (-3/2 slope equally spaced lines) of the burst produced by the SCCS cusp annihilation (computed for r) = 10 1 6 GeV and At = 2.4ms) plotted against strain (burst) spectral densities and frequency bandwidth of the interferometers LIGO(I,II) and the future twin TIG As: the Mario Schonberg (MS, Brazil) and the Mini-GRAIL (MG, Netherlands). Symbols *, XX and @ denote GW bursts with frequencies 150 Hz ( r = 300), 420 Hz ( r = 300) and 3200 Hz ( r = 10 3 , very short bursts (SB)), respectively. These GW signals may be triggered simultaneously with GRBs having the characteristics shown in Table I and Lorentz factors (LF) T as indicated here.
For the very low GW frequency band 10~ 4 - 10° Hz, the LISA antenna could observe these signals even for extremely low GUT energy scales but large T factors, as shown in Figure 2 (of course, it could also observe the GW pulses for higher rj and lower T). sectionUltra High Energy Neutrino Production in the BHV2000 SCCS model of GRBs In the context of the BHV2000 SCCS model for GRBs it is also possible for an outburst of ultra high energy cosmic rays to be released simultaneously with the GRB surge. Assuming that a packet of such particles comes in the form of a neutrino burst, we can estimate the neutrino time-of-flight delay with
426 10"'
I
<< 10"
•: :•• Delta t=1 ms,LF= 105 s—« Delta t=1ms, LF= 106 • » Delta t=1 ms LF= 10'
^. Y**
A **• * * > .
"
»—-•« WDBs Confusion Limit
*** »1
£.10"
**. A
\
^..
C/)
~*^ *-x
§ 10"
@(LF=6.5E?^ > /
J
s
\ \
/"**
*
>*
C3
\
rv •N... . i
10"'
" ^
10
/
'•^-~...
~
10"
>i "•^v
10""
^, 10 10 10" Log 10 [GW Frequency] (Hz)
10"
10'
Figure 2. Locus of the GW characteristics (computed for 77 = 10 1 0 GeV and At = 1ms) compared with the strain (burst) spectral density and the frequency bandwidth of LISA. The confusion limit produced by the background of white dwarf binaries is also plotted. The symbol @ indicates a GW burst with frequency 1 0 - 2 Hz and h = 4 x 1 0 - 2 3 , in units of ( H z J - V z , for a G R B w i t h r = 6.5 x 10 6 .
respect to both the GRB and GW signals. This measurement can provide an indication of the neutrino mass eigenstates. Next we make a rough estimate of the overall characteristics of such a i/-spectrum, and use it to constrain the predicted time lag. (A more consistent calculation of the actual UHECR spectrum in this picture, in the light of their detectability by the AUGER experiment, is now under way 18 .) Topological defects or unstable relic particles produce ultra high energy photons at a rate hp = nPi0(t/t0)~m, where m = 0,3,4 for decaying particles, ordinary CSs and necklaces, and SCCS, respectively 1 ' 2 . In the GRB fireball picture 17 , the detected 7-rays are produced via synchroton radiation coming from ultrarelativistic electrons boosted by internal shocks in an expanding relativistic blast wave (wind) consisting of electron-positron pairs, some baryons and a huge number of photons. The typical synchroton fre-
427
quency is constrained by the characteristic energy of the accelerated electrons and also by the intensity of the magnetic field in the emitting region. Since the electron synchroton cooling time is short compared with the wind expansion time, electrons lose their energy radiatively. The standard energy of the observed synchroton photons (see Refs. 19 ' 20 for a more complete review of this mechanism) is E^ =
^e
which is then given by
E ? , 4 5 M e v^(_|_y'*(i2l) /0.25ms\
(5)
where L 7 = 1054 ergs - 1 is the power released in the most energetic GRBs observed by BATSE. This Ly may imply Lorentz expansion factors T ~ 103, and we assume this in the following. At = 0.25ms is the inferred timescale for the shorter 7-ray bursts from the BHV2000 SCCSs, £B is the fraction of the energy carried by the magnetic field: 47rr^cT2B2 = STT^BL, where L is the total wind luminosity, and £e is the luminosity fraction carried away by electrons. No theory is available to provide specific values for t;g and £e • However, for values near to equipartition, the break energy Ehv for photons in this model is in agreement with the observed one for T ~ 103 and At = 0.25 ms, as discussed below. More precisely, the hardness of the GRB spectra, which extend up to 18 GeV, constrains the wind to have Lorentz factor T ~ 103, while the observed variability of the GRB flux on a timescale At < lms implies that the internal collisions occur at a distance from the center of rj, ~ T 2 At, due to variability of the central engine on the same timescale. Since most of the BATSE observed GRBs show variability with At < 10 ms and there is rapid variability with At < 1 ms, the implied characteristic size of the emitting region is rem ~ 107 cm which means that it must be a compact domain. The SCCS loop cusp clearly satisfies this constraint. In the acceleration region, protons (the fireball baryon load) are also expected to be shocked. Their photo-meson interaction with observed 7-burst photons should produce a surge of neutrinos almost simultaneously with the GRB via the decay p+"° —> 7r+ -H- /U+ + Z/M «->• e+ +ve + T>ll + vll. The neutrino spectrum for a fireball driven explosion is expected to follow the observed 7ray spectrum, which is approximately a broken power-law -^- oc E~&, with (3 ~ 1 for low energies and (3 ~ 2 for high energies as compared with the observed break energy E@ ~ 45 MeV, where /3 changes. The interaction of protons from the surrounding medium, accelerated to a power-law distribution
428
•^r- oc E 2, with the fireball photons, leads to a broken power-law neutrino spectrum ^ oc E~P, with /3 = 1 for E„ < Ebu, and j3 = 2 for Ev>Ehv. Thus the neutrino break energy E\ is fixed by the threshold energy of photons from photo-production interacting with the dominant ~ 45 MeV fireball photons (in our case), and is
*-•"- "GSO'ra-v-
(6)
Thus, for vs produced with the above energy a further Fermi cycle in the ultrarelativistic blast wave may amplify the UHECR energy by a factor of T2 which, for the case of protons, may push them over the GZK limit 6 {vs do not have a GZK cut-off). The part of the total fireball luminosity that escapes as the v-Qux is determined by the efficiency of pion production. The energy fraction lost via pion production by protons producing vs above the break energy is essentially independent of the energy and can be expressed as
/ir
=0.23'-
± W45MeVWl03 1054 ergs" 1 J \ E* ) \ T 0.25 ms" At
(7)
Thus, an important part of the total wind energy is given to these very high energy vs. 4
The Neutrino Mass Spectrum from Timing G W s a n d v Bursts
The time-of-flight delay of the vs with respect to the GWs (and the GRB) may be computed by using the spectrum (Eq.6) and Table II, above. This gives^1 ATGWs-GRBs
„
(g)
L545 s
D
\ /
ml
\ ZlOOGeV 2
,3Gpc/ VlOOeVV V
K
This equation was originally derived as a way of estimating the time-offlight lag between massive neutrinos and massless ones, which should travel at the speed of light 21 . However, it can also be applied to the problem which we
429 Table 2. Time delay between GWs (GRBs) and //-bursts as a function of the i/-energy in the BHV2000 SCCS model. ATuHt,s-LrWs
[s]
1.545
y Energy 10
[ e y]
10
8
1.545 x 101.545 x 1(T 20
1014 1020
are studying here, since we assume that the GWs propagate at the velocity of light, as in GR. It turns out that the detection of such a neutrino pulse with a delay of approximately 1.5 seconds (for Ev ~ 1010eV) after the GRB and GW outbursts from the same source on the sky would make it possible to impose tighter bounds on the neutrino mass spectrum, since the source distance may be estimated from its redshift and the GWs detected. Of course, there are some uncertainties involved in the derivation of Eq.(8). However, it is foreseeable that if atomic clocks were installed in both the GW and u observatories, a very precise measurement of the arrival times might be obtained, making this determination a plausible one in the near future.
5
Conclusion
To summarize, since the i/-spectrum ranges over fourteen orders of magnitude (MeV i/s from SN1987A, above GZK us detected by AGASA, Fly's Eye, etc., see Table II), and the ^-energy can be measured directly at the detector, the detection of any species of neutrino in near spatial and temporal coincidence with observed GW + GRB signals might yield a very accurate estimate of the time-delay between them. Through the analysis of such a time lag, one may verify or rule out the BHV2000 SCCS model, and also clarify the value of the GW propagation velocity which is a quantity of great interest for descriminating between different relativistic theories of gravity 22 ' 23 .
Acknowledgments We are indebted to Prof. John C. Miller (SISSA and OXFORD) for his advising during the preparation of this paper. HJMC thanks Conselho Nacional de Desenvolvimento e Pesquisa (CNPq, Brazil) for financial support. DMG also thanks CNPq for a Graduate Scholarship.
430 References 1. A. Vilenkin, Phys. Rev. Letts. 46, 1169 (1981). See also A. Vilenkin and E. P. S. Shellard, Cosmic strings and other topological defects, C.U.P., Cambridge, England (1994), and references therein. 2. M. Hindmarsh and T. W. B. Kibble, report hep-ph/9411342 (1994). 3. R. Brandenberger, A. T. Sornborger and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. D 48, 940 (1993). M. Mohazzab and R. Brandenberger, Int. J. Mod. Phys. D2, 183 (1993). 4. V. Berezinsky, B. Hnatyk and A. Vilenkin, astro-ph/0001213 (2000). 5. C. Meegan, et al., Astrophys. J. Supp. 106, 65 (1995). 6. K. Greisen, Phys. Rev. Letts. 16, 748 (1966); Z. T. Zatsepin and V. A. Kuz'min, P'sma Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. 4, 144 (1966). 7. P. Bhattacharjee, report hep-ph/9811011 (1998). 8. T. Totani, Mon. Not. R. Astr. Soc. 307, L41 (1999). 9. B. Allen and A. C. Ottewill, report gr-qc/0009091 (2000). 10. A. Babul, B. Paczyriski and D. Spergel, Astrophys. J. Letts. 316, L49 (1987). 11. E. E. Fenimore and E. Ramirez-Ruiz, Astrophys. J. 518, 375 (1999). 12. J. J. Blanco-Pillado and K. Olum, report astro-ph/0008297 (2000). 13. E. Battaner, E. Florido and M. I. Sanchez-Saavedra, Astron. Astrophys. 236, 1-8 (1990). 14. Andersen, M., et al., "VLT Identification of the optical afterglow of the gamma-ray burst GRB000131 at z = 4.5", to appear in Astron. & Astrophys. Letts., Dec. 1 (2000). 15. D. B. Cline, C. Matthey and S. Otwinowski, Astrophys. J. 527, 827 (2000). 16. B. F. Schutz, in Proceedings of the Como Conference on Gravitational Waves in Astrophysics, Cosmology and String Theory, April 18-23, Como, Italy (1999), to be published. 17. M. J. Rees and P. Meszaros, MNRAS, 258, L41 (1992). T. Piran, Phys. Reports 314, 575 (1999). 18. H. J. Mosquera Cuesta and D. Morejon Gonzalez, in preparation. 19. E. Waxman, report astro-ph/0002243 (2000) and Refs. therein. 20. P. Meszaros & J. N. Bahcall, report hep-ph/0004019 (2000). 21. G. Raffelt, Stars as laboratories for fundamental physics: The astrophysics of..., Univ. of Chicago Press (1996). 22. H. J. Mosquera Cuesta, M. Novello & V. A. De Lorenci, submitted to Phys. Rev. D, May (2000). 23. C. M. Will, Phys. Today 38, October (1999).
MODELING A N E T W O R K OF B R A N E - W O R L D S SOONKEON NAM Department
of Physics,
Kyung E-mail:
Hee University, Seoul, 130-701, [email protected]
Korea
From the BPS equations of junctions of domain walls, we consider a stable hexagonal configuration of network of brane-worlds, which are only approximately locally BPS. We propose a model for a mechanism of supersymmetry breaking, where a messenger for the SUSY breaking comes from the neighboring anti-BPS junction world, propagating along the domain walls connection them. We also consider implication to Dark Matter problem. We consider modification of the Newton's force law for brane world consisting of periodic configuration of branes, which supports a massless graviton. It is well separated from the Kaluza-Klein spectrum by a mass gap. As another application of recent development of string theory to Cosmology, we consider the Casimir effect on compact noncommutative space. We suggest a stabilization mechanism for a senario in Kaluza-Klein theory, where some of the extra dimensions are noncommutative.
1
Introduction
Recently an alternative idea of our matter made of zero modes trapped on a topological defect (3-rT)dimensional, embedded in a higher dimensional universe was also proposed 1 ' 2 . Recent proposals of large extra dimensions in a similar philosophy has provided exciting new possibilities of addressing long standing problems such as cosmological constant problem, hierachy problem and supersymmetry breaking 3 ' 4 . The basic tenet of these works is that the standard model resides on a 3-d brane or intersection of branes in the higher dimensional spacetimes where as the gravity is progating throughout entire dimensions. For the simplest model of thin branes intersecting, it was shown that the gravity indeed localizes on the intersection 5 ' 6 . The model we will be considering in this letter will be that of domain wall junction. Just as a BPS domain wall breaks half of the supersymmetry, there are BPS domain wall junction configurations which break one quarter of supersymmetry 7 ' 8 . In these configurations, stability is directly linked to the supersymmetry of the system. So, one phenomenological question which arises in this context is how to break supersymmetry, without losing the stability of the configuration. Here, we propose a way of achieving both, stability as well as breaking of supersymmetry. For this purpose, we consider a network of junctions. Such a network enjoys stability against local fluctuations, as well as the domain wall thickness does not exceed the size of the domains bound by them. 431
432
2
Modeling a Network of Brane-Worlds
Now let us consider an N = 1 locally supersymmetric theory, whose bosonic part is given as follows: e-'L = ~R
- eK(K^\D^W(cf>)\2
+ g^K^d^d^
- 3\W\2).
(1)
where e = I d e t ^ l 1 / 2 , and D^W = e'1 (d^W). We have 7^ = e%-ya 0 where 7 are the flat spacetime Dirac matrices satisfying {7 a ,7 6 } = 2riab. o = 0,1,2,3. We also have put 8TTG = 1. We use the Weyl basis for the gamma matrices. The projection operators are PR,L = | ( l ± i 7 5 ) , and K^ = l/d^d^K, and Kt
- b(j>.
(2)
In the global case one has three isolated minima. The BPS equation comes from the vanishing of supersymmetry transformation of fermion of the chiral superfield. The spin 1/2 field \ transforms as ScX = -V2eK/2K^(D^WPR
+ D^WPL)e
- iV2(dvct>PR + d,4>PL)jve,
(3)
and the gravitini transform as k^Vi
2(0„ + \ufaab)
+ ieK'2{WPR
+ WPL)^
~
M * , ^ h
5
(4)
Since we are interested in constructing static brane junction solution, which in the thin limit gives us the patches of AdS spaces 5 , the ansatz for the vierbein we choose is e£ = Amg{A1/2{x, z),A1^2(x,z),A1/2(x,z), A1^2(x,z)), which has just a conformal factor, for the spacetime metric: ds2 = A2{z)T]llvdx,idxv.
(5)
In order to satisfy the BPS equation one has to have e = (ei, «Cei) Ceii —*Cei) where ( = ± 1 . We will call the solutions of £ = 1 case a BPS configuration and £ = — 1 case an anti-BPS configuration. The BPS equations we find are (dx+idz)
-VAeK'2K*+D$W = -2\fAeK/2W,
433
dz log A = -2\m{K^dx^) + 2ieK'2Wy/A, {dx + idz) log A = -2VAeK'2W, dx log A = 2\m{K^dz4>) - 2eK,2WyjrA.
(6)
Just as in the case of the domain walls, these equations satisfy Einstein's equation, and in the thin limit we have three domain wall junctions with angles of 2ir/3 fixed. Here we no longer have the constraint on the geodesic on W space, and wall junctions exist. We see that the scalar field will be solved as a function of x + iz. Unlike the rigid superymmetric case, here we have nontrivial coupling to the gravity through y/A and it is in general difficult to solve it analytically. However, it inherits the general structure of BPS equations of rigid supersymmetric case 7 . One quarter of the original supersymmetry is preserved by the domain wall junction. The contribution from the junction energy will not matter for the asymptotic geometry, because it will a source of gravity for one higher dimension than the domain walls thus falls off faster. Brane world on a junction can be viewed as a model with two types of extra dimensions. One is the directions transverse to all the domain walls and has truely the nature of the bulk. The other is along the direction of the domain walls. In the model we considered there is one such direction. This direction is different from the transverse directions to the domain walls because, massless modes can still be captured here. So we need not have only gravity mode along this direction. In fact, these massless modes can propagate along the domain wall in the speed of light. The massless modes can be further trapped because the domain walls get thinner away from the junction. However, if we have another junction within a finite distance, joined by one of the domain walls, then the massless modes can travel over to the other junction with finite probability, because the wall thickness will grow as we approach another junction. Of course this would be difficult to see in a model with thin branes, but within the smooth model we have considered above, this is certainly the case. Of course an explicit demonstration of this would require a numerical study. All in all, there can be information exchange between the junctions, if they are joined together by a domain wall. 3
SUSY Breanking
There are proposals of supersymmetry breaking mechanism which involve bulk messengers, either from a SUSY broken hidden sector, or a supersymmetric source of a massive bulk messenger. 10 ' 11 A way of stablizing the configuration
434
is to consider a network of brane junctions, forming an array. Given that a stable static triple intersection exists, one can also think about a networks of domain walls. Certain configuration of network is meta-stable, and for the case of Z 3 model we have studied, BPS junctions have to be joined with anti-BPS junctions. For the case of Z 3 invariant theory, hexagonal domains, like graphite, was shown to be stable under local fluctuations. Numerical simulation showed that it is stable, as long as the domain sizes are greater than the thickness of the walls. We can have metastable configuration of hexagonal structures. These are non-BPS (but almost BPS) configurations. Maybe some of the effect of the neighboring anti-BPS junction give rise to the breakdown of supersymmetry at our junction. If we have finite thickness of the domain wall, some of the massless modes can propagate along the walls. So the presence of of the neighboring anti-BPS junctions will be known to us on a BPS junction, by some messenger 10,11 . So this should give rise to a way of having supersymmetry broken, without losing the stability against perturbations. This model can be regarded as a toy model of the mechanism proposed 11 . On our junction world, one particular combination of original supercharges, say, Q\ is left unbroken, and the states will be invariant under the action of the charge. On the other hand, the states originating from the neighboring anti-BPS junction world will be invariant by the action of different linear combination, say Q2- Then they will certainly be not invariant under Qi and will be seen as a messenger of supersymmetry breaking. Of course, if the array forms a regular lattice, then there will be Bloch wave functions along the lattice. The parameter which controls the supersymetry breaking will be related to the ratio of the domain wall thickness with respect to the domain size. Other messengers can come along the the domain walls from originating from the neighboring junction and can be sources of approximate symmetries of our world. Since we have anisotropic extra dimensions we might be able to see some of the effects in high energy collider processes 12 . Another thing that the network of domain walls can affect is the cosmology of early universe. Numerical simulations of 3+1 dimensional cosmology which admits domain walls and their junctions show that a network of domain walls quickly dominates the universe 13,14 . This can be a problem for cosmology if the domain walls and their junctions reside in our observed universe. However, if the domain walls are embedded in higher dimensional universe, and we are living on the domain wall or on a junction, it is not going to be an immediate problem. Senarios of cosmology can have phase transitons of the domain wall configurations where the junctions dominate and where they do not.
435
4
Kalzua-Klein Spectrum
There has been a considerable interest in the model where the Standard Model is confined to a (3+1) dimensional subspace in the higher dimensions 3 ' 15 ' 4 . This is a renewal of old ideas 1 ' 2 in light of recent developments of string theory, especially due to the fundamental role that extended objects, i.e. branes, play a fundamental role. There has been a lot of works related to this recently, such as generalization of the RS model 16,17 , in relation to supergravity or superstrings 18 , in relation to cosmology19, and also some phenomenological consequences20. An alternative understanding of the hierachy problem of the electroweak and gravitational mass scales is one of the major advantage of such a senario. In this senario, our understanding of classical and quantum gravity has to be critically reanalyzed too: Newton's law is affected by the Kaluza-Klein modes of the large extra dimensions, and gravity may become strong at a scale of few TeV in the full 4 + n dimensional space. Furthermore, the effect of virtual exchange of Kaluza-Klein towers of gravitons might be detected in colliders in a forseeable future 21 . In the original formulation of Randall and Sundrum, a continuous spectrum of Kaluza-Klein modes of graviton arises without any mass gap 4 . However, to have a well defined effective field theory, it is desirable to have a solution where the graviton is well separated by a mass gap from the Kaluza-Klein modes. In this paper we consider a model with the desired spectrum of Kaluza-Klein with a mass gap without direct reference to supergravity. This is when we have a periodic array of thin branes, in light of recent proposals for a network such braneworlds 22 , or a folded brane 23 , producing many idential braneworlds 24 . Such a picture raises an interesting question. What will be the effect on our world from the presence of other worlds? Some indirect effects such as messengers of supersymmetry breaking 22 ' 23 , or cosmological/astrophysical effects were discussed 23 . Here we will discuss one another aspect of such a network of braneworld, which might be more sensitive to the shape of the network of the braneworlds. It is the spectrum of Kaluza-Klein modes, which might perhaps be explorable at LC and Muon Colliders21. As is quite familiar from condensed matter physics, which deals with periodic systems (one or higher dimensional) in many cases, the energy levels of have a distinct feature of the periodicity. This is the occurance of forbidden zones and allowed bands in energy spectrum 25 . If we recall that the fluctuation equations of modes around a stable BPS configurations satisfy (supersymmetric) quantum mechanics 26 , and the spectrum of Kaluza-Klein spectrum comes from the energy spectrum of such a Schrodinger equation with the potential determined by the shape of the stable BPS object, we expect
436
that a periodic configuration of such objects will lead to Schrodinger equation with a periodic potential and the Kaluza-Klein spectrum will have mass gaps, reflecting the band structure. One might argue that there will be no distiction between this and the torus compactification around a circle. However, since it is likely that the number of large extra dimensions will be equal or larger than 2, there are possibilities of highly nontrivial network of braneworlds, as we have witnessed from the many different ways that nanotubes can form and affect the electronic structure 27 . Here we will be mainly concerned with the Kaluza-Klein modes of the graviton. This is because the original formulation of Randall and Sundrum necessarily has a continuum of Kaluza-Klein modes without any mass gap, and the very low lying modes has been a discomforting factor of the model. Here we will explicitly calculate the mass gap arising from a periodic system of 3 branes. There has been some works 29 having mass gaps from a distribution of D-branes in the context of five dimensional supergravity, however the spectrum is different from what we consider here. Although we have confined our considerations 28 to a simple one dimensional case this method can be easily generalized to higher dimenensional cases as well as more complicated networks, as well as other potentials for the fluctuation equations from smooth models 30 ' 31 . For example, for the graphite like structure (or nanotube like structures) we can utilize the hexagonal symmetry of the system and obtain the band structure, although we might have to resort to numerical methods eventually. i) Since there will be a gap right above the zero mode, the lowest KaluzaKlein mode will start at, say, nik • For this case the physics of the effective four dimensional theory will be mostly affected by the first band and the Newton's law of gravity will be as follows:
V„M~ G „=l=(. + e—(=i + l ) ) .
(7)
We have an exponential suppression of the correction to the Newton's law. This will be a generic feature of any of the models involving a network of brane worlds or 'manyfold' universe, as long as there are many of the brane worlds to have periodicity. ii) There will be modifications in the Standard Model cross sections due to the virtual exchange of graviton towers. New processes not allowed in the Standard Model at the tree level might appear. In the case of exchange, the amplitude is proportional to the sum over the propagators of the entire Kaluza-Klein tower and can potentially diverge. Usually it is dealt with brute force regularization 21 . In the presence of a mass gap, it will behave much
437
better, since the lattice size of the network of braneworlds will give a natural cutoff scale. If there is enough symmetry, such as hexagonal symmetry, the corresponding Kaluza-Klein spectrum can in principle be obtained and even an experiment sensitive enough to explore the configuration of the brane networks might be possible. Furthermore, compactification along the large extradimension can affect the spectrum, just like the different electronic structure of a nanotube has from a graphite on a plane 27 . 5
Noncommutative Compactification
One question which is essential in Kaluza-Klein theories is how we can have small (or unobserved) extra dimensions. To explain smallness of extra dimensions, Appelquist and Chodos 32 suggested that the vacuum fluctuations of the higher dimensional gravitational field might provide a physical mechanism. However, the radius could not be stabilized. It is very natural to expect that there will be stabilization of the size of the extra dimensions if there is some intrinsic minimum length scale in the theory. One candidate certainly is the Planck (or string) scale as mentioned above. We can explore another possibility, when there is noncommutativity of space in the extra dimensions 33 . When we have spacetime noncommutativity, Lorentz invariance is broken. However, having extra dimensions with broken (or deformed) Lorentz symmetry is not incompatible with observations so far. Here we have the following commutation relations among space-time coordinates xM [i" ,xv] = W'"', (8) and d* " introduces minimum area in the fi, v plane, just as there is a minimum volume in phase space due to [x,p] = ih, due to a space-time uncertainty relations 1
Ax"Ax"
> i|6>H-
(9)
So in a noncommutative space there will be a length scale associated with \/\0flv\- Another consequence of this relation is the UV/IR mixing, due to the absence of decoupling of scales. Short distance scales in one direction is related to long distance scales in another direction which is related to the previous one by the parameters 6^v. Difference with the Planck scale is that this scale is something which should be determined by underlying dynamics. In this sense we will not be able to solve the problem of radius stabilization in Kaluza-Klein theories
438
completely. However, in most compactification senarios in string theory, B^v has expectation value 34 , and we will be able to relate the expectation value of B^v with the radius of the Kaluza Klein radius. This is interesting because, despite all the theoretical interests, the relevance of quantum field theories in noncommuatative space to measurable effects in particle physics has not been discussed very much. One of the main reason is that the presence of the external magnetic field which induces the noncommutativity breaks Lorentz invariance of the spacetime and thus a strong noncommutativity might not be a desirable thing to have. However, having a noncommutative extra dimension can be interesting, without destroying the desirable four dimensional Lorentz invariance. Very recently, there has been a work by Gomis et al 35 in this direction where the KaluzaKlein spectrum due to noncommutative compact extra dimension has been considered. They obtain corrections to the Kaluza-Klein spectrum which resembles the contributions of winding states in string theory. Acknowledgement This work is supported in part by Brain Korea 21 (BK21) program of Korea Research Fund (2000), and by the Research Fund of Kyung Hee University (2000), and by KOSEF 2000-1-11200-001-3. References 1. V. Rubakov and M.E. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. 125B (1983) 136. 2. I. Antoniadis, Phys. Lett. 246B (1990) 377. 3. N. Arkani-Hamed, S, Dimopoulos, and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B429 (1998) 35. 4. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett.83 (1999) 3370; ibid 83 (1999) 4690. 5. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, G. Dvali, and N. Kaloper, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 (1999) 586. 6. C. Csaki and Y. Shirman, Phys. Rev. D61 (2000) 024008; A.E. Nelson, hep-th/9909001. 7. G.W. Gibbons and P.K. Townsend, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 1727. 8. S.M. Carroll, S. Hellerman, and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. D61 (2000) 065001; ibid D62 (2000) 044049. 9. M. Cvetic, S. Griffies, and S. Rey, Nucl. Phys. B381 (1992) 301. 10. E.W. Mirabelli and M.E. Peskin, Phys. Rev. D58 (1998) 065002. 11. N. Arkani-Hamed and S. Dimopoulos, hep-ph/9811353. 12. E.W. Mirabelli, M. Perelstein, and M.E. Peskin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 (1999) 2236. 13. M. Aryal, A.E. Everett, A. Vilenkin, and T. Vachaspati, Phys. Rev. D34
439 (1986) 434. 14. B.S. Ryden, W.H. Press, and D.N. Spergel, Ap. J. 357 (1990) 293. 15. I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. 436B (1998) 257. 16. J. Lykken and L. Randall, hep-th/9908076. 17. W.D. Goldberger and M.B. Wise, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 4922. 18. A. Kehagias, hep-th/9906204; H. Verlinde, hep-th/9960182. 19. A. Vilenkin and E.P.S. Shellard , Cosmic Strings and Other Topological Defects, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1994. 20. K.R. Dienes, E. Dudas, and T. Gherghetta, hep-ph/9908530; H. Davoudiasl, J.L. Hewett, and T.G. Rizzo, hep-ph/9909255. 21. See for example T.G. Rizzo, hep-ph/9910255, and references therein. 22. Soonkeon Nam, JHEP 03 (2000) 005. 23. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, G. Dvali, and N. Kaloper, hepth/9911386. 24. H. Hatanaka, M. Sakamoto, M. Tachibana, and K. Takenaga, Prog. Theor. Phys. 102 (1999) 1213. 25. N.W. Ashcroft and N.D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, New York, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976. 26. J. Casahorran and Soonkeon Nam, Int. J. Mod. Phys. A6 (1991) 5467. 27. R. Saito, G. Dresselhau, and M.S. Dresselhaus, Physical Properties of Carbon Nanotubes, London, Imperial College Press, 1998. 28. Soonkeon Nam, JHEP 04 (2000) 002. 29. A. Brandhuber and K. Sfetsos, JHEP 9910 (1999) 013. 30. K. Skenderis and P.K. Townsend, Phys. Lett. B468 (1999) 46. 31. O. DeWolfe, D.Z. Freedman, S.S. Gubser, and A. Karch, hep-th/9909134. 32. T. Appelquist and A. Chodos, Phys. Rev. Lett. 50 (1983) 141; Phys. Rev. D28 (1983) 772. 33. Soonkeon Nam, JHEP 10 (2000) 044. 34. B.R. Greene, K. Schalm, and G. Shiu, hep-th/0004103. 35. J. Gomis, T. Mehen, and M.B. Wise, hep-th/0006160.
G A U S S - B O N N E T I N T E R A C T I O N IN R A N D A L L - S U N D R U M COMPACTIFICATION * HYUN MIN LEE Department of Physics and Center for Theoretical Physics, Seoul National University, Seoul 151-742, Korea E-mail: [email protected] We show that the Gauss-Bonnet term is the only consistent curvature squared interaction in the Randall-Sundrum model and various static and inflationary solutions can be found. And from metric perturbations around the RS background with a single brane embedded, we also show that for a vanishing Gauss-Bonnet coefficient, the brane bending allows us to reproduce the 4D Einstein gravity at the linearized level.
1
Introduction
The main motivation of recent brane scenarios is to solve the gauge hierarchy problem in the higher-dimensional spacetime 1,3 . In the supersymmetric Standard Model, the gauge couplings unify at the energy scale ~ WX6GeV by the renormalization group running from the weak scale. However, we cannot make such a prediction for the gravitational coupling, i.e., the Newton constant since gravity is not renormalizable. According to the Horava-Witten's proposal 2 , one finds that the 4D Planck scale becomes the low-energy arfifact of a four-dimensional world. In this proposal, the strong coupling limit of the Es x ^8 heterotic string compactified on a Calabi-Yau(CY) manifold X, is described by a 11-dimensional theory compactified on X x S 1 / ^ (the so called 'Heterotic M-theory'). And the gauge and ordinary matter fields sit only on the ten-dimensional boundaries denned by S1 /Z2, and gravity propagates in the bulk of the spacetime. Upon the CY compactification of the Heterotic M-theory, the eleventh dimension is larger than the CY compactification length scale (or the string scale) when the string scale is identified as the GUT scale. Therefore, in fact, the universe is five-dimensional above the compactification scale of the eleventh dimension and thus smallness of the Newton constant stems from the fact that we cannot reach for the extra dimension of the universe. However, in the Horava-Witten's proposal, the five-dimensional(or 11-dimensional) fundamental scale cannot be below the GUT scale for the validity of running of the gauge couplings. On the other hand, the higher-dimensional fundamental scale can be pulled down to the •TALK AT COMO-2000, CHEJU ISLAND, KOREA, SEP. 2000.
440
441 weak scale in the large extra dimension scenario suggested by Arkani-Hamed, Dimopoulos and Dvali(ADD) 1 , where the higher dimensional spacetime is a factorizable geometry. In their proposal, at least two extra dimensions are required for solving the hierarchy problem. And, there is a problem related to the stabilization of the large extra dimensions, which corresponds to introduction of another hierarchy problem. By the way, the Randall-Sundrum(RS)'s proposal 3 used the 5D non-factorizable geometry with one extra dimension to explain the gauge hierarchy problem. Their model setup is similar to that of the Horava-Witten's in the sense that the SM model matter and gauge fields are assumed to live only on the 4D boundaries (or 3-branes) defined by the S2 /Z2 orbifold, but they introduced brane tensions on the boundaries and a non-zero bulk cosmological constant, which is shown to be realized from a Calabi-Yau compactification of the Heterotic M-theory 5 . As the physical scale varies along the bulk according to the exponential warp factor of the metric, they identify the positive (negative) tension brane as the hidden (visible) brane with the Planck (weak) scale. In this proposal, there is no large hierarchy between input parameters. In addition, the effective 4D Planck scale becomes still finite even for the infinite extra dimension, which implies an alternative compactification without small extra dimension 4 . If all mass scales in the RS model are given by one input scale, i.e., the 5D Planck scale, then the curvature scale is also of order of the 5D Planck scale. Therefore, the next step is to consider the higher order gravity effects in the RS model. In this paper, we show that in the existence of the Gauss-Bonnet term, various static and inflationary solutions can be found and properties and pecularities of the RS model can be maintained 11 . Then, through the perturbative analysis and the brane bending effect, we consider the second RS model with the Gauss-Bonnet term as a 4D effective gravity theory 12 . 2
A review of R S m o d e l
The large extra dimension scenario 1 is the simpliest case to use the higherdimensional mechanism to solve the gauge hierarchy problem. The effective 4D Planck scale MP is determined by the (4+n)-dimensional Planck scale M and the geometry of the extra dimensions. Since the higher-dimensional spacetime is a product of a 4-dimensional spacetime with a n-dimensional compact space in the large extra dimension scenario, the effective 4D Planck scale MP is given by the formula Mp — Mn+2Vn, where Vn is the volume of the compact space. For the (4+n)-dimensional Planck scale M to be the weak scale, the compactification scale /J,C ~ 1/Vn would have to be much smaller than the weak scale, which requires that the SM particles and forces are
442
confined to a 4-dimensional subspace while gravity is allowed to propagate in the bulk of the spacetime. However, it gives rise to a new hierarchy problem related to the compactification scale. On the other hand, the small extra dimension scenario3 considers the higher-dimensional spacetime as the case of the non-factorizable geometry with Sl/Z2; ds2 = e~2kb^r]llvdx^dxv = gMNdxMdxN
+ b20dy2 (1)
where k is the AdS curvature scale given by k = J- ^ j - and y is the fifth coordinate with y £ [ - | , | ] - Then, the effective 4D Planck scale is determined by M% = M3£{2/2dye-2kb°M = Mi(l - e~kb°), which implies the weak dependence of the 4D Planck scale on the extra dimension. Even the non-compact extra dimension also allows the finite 4D Planck scale. Since there exists two 3-branes with brane tensions Ai, A2 at y — 0 and y =• | , respectively, by the consistency of the boundary conditions on the branes, the following finetuning condition is required between brane and bulk cosmological constants, Ax = - A 2 = y/-6M3Ab.
(2)
And, as the warp factor exponentially decreases along the bulk, we can obtain the weak scale as the physical scale of the brane at y = | by appropriately choosing the distance between two branes (i.e., &o ~ 74/k ~ 74/Mp) without introducing another large hierarchy. In a next step, cosmological considerations in the extra dimension scenarios follow essentially. The cosmological bound on the ADD scenario comes from the effects of the light Kaluza-Klein(KK) graviton excitations. However, the masses of the KK graviton modes should be larger than about a few GeV for nuclesynthesis10, which corresponds to b0 < 80/fc, so it seems that the light KK graviton problem may be avoided in the RS model. On the other hand, we have to consider the cosmological expansion of 3-brane universes in the bulk and check whether the normal Hubble expansion rate can be reproduced on the brane. For the sake of this, we assume that the 3-branes are homogeneous and isotropic such that the 5D metric reads, ds2 = -n2(T,y)dT2
+ a2(T,y)5ijdxidx^
+ b2(r,y)dy2.
(3)
Then, from the Einstein equations of motion with the above metric, we have the following non-trivial equation for the Hubble expansion rate on each
443
brane 6 , H2 =
A
b 3M 3
(Pi + AQ2 36M 6
K a 4 '*
=^A->G%)+3jA7b+£'"i=u
<4)
where we used the Eq. (2) and if is a constant of motion determined from the initial condition and the last term is so called the dark radiation 9 . Consequently, the p\ term and the dark radiation term in the above Hubble expansion would drastically affect a later cosmology in our brane, e.g., the big bang nucleosynthesis and there is the wrong sign problem in the Hubble parameter from the linear term in p 2 - To avoid the effects to the nucleosynthesis, the brane tension must be |A 2 | S> (MeV)4 and the dark radiation density should be diluted by inflation and/or reheating processes. And the wrong sign problem can be solved by having the positive tension brane A 2 > 0 11 or by introducing a mechanism for stabilizing the size of the extra dimension while the branes expand 8 . 3
Static and inflationary solutions
When the higher curvature terms are added as correction terms in the action, the higher derivatives are generically induced in the equations of motion, which gives rise to runaway solutions and tends to make the system unstable. In particular, since the first derivative of the RS metric has to be discontiuous along the bulk to compensate the delta function sources due to the branes, we have to choose the higher curvature terms such that there don't appear higher derivatives of the metric with respect to the y coordinate than the second. The Gauss-Bonnet term, E = R2 - ARMNRMN + RMNPQRMNPQ, one of particular choices of the curvature squared terms, is a topological term in D = 4 and it does not affect the graviton propagator even for the D > 4 flat spacetime background 13 . Since there are no higher order derivatives induced from the Gauss-Bonnet term, it seems that the Gauss-Bonnet term is consistent with the RS model as the effective interaction. When the Gauss-Bonnet term is included as the effective interaction in the RS model, we obtain two RS type static solutions with the AdS curvature scale k as follows11,
444
where M, a and A& are the 5D fundamental scale, the dimensionless parameter of the Gauss-Bonnet term and the bulk cosmological constant, respectively. By the boundary conditions on the branes, the finetuning conditions are to be satisfied between input parameters, a, A 1; A2 and A;,11, A? = -At
= TQk±M^l+4^.
(6)
From the above result, we find that for the k+ solution, the bulk cosmological constant is allowed to be positive and it is possible to have a positive tension brane as the visible brane at y = | . On the other hand, the k- solution is connected with the RS solution in the limit of vanishing a, for which the visible brane has a negative tension and the bulk cosmological constant has to be negative as in the RS case. Unless the input parameters are finetuned like the Eq. (6), the branes and the bulk space are not static any more 7 . Then, for inflationary solutions in the RS model with the Gauss-Bonnet term, we assume a separable metric ansatz like n = f(y), a = f(y)g(r) in the Eq. (3). Here we have the extra dimension static necessarily for the separable metric; b = b0 = const and g/g = HQ = const. Consequently, the inflationary solutions are two-fold as follows11, ds2 = (^\
sinh2(-k±b0\y\
+ c0)[-dT2 + e2HoT5iidxidxi]
+ b20dy2
(7)
where the constants bo and Co are determined from the boundary conditions on the branes. In the limit of H0 —> 0 and CQ —> +oo with keeping the ratio (Hoec°)I(2k±) —>• 1 fixed, the two RS type static solutions are recovered along with the consistency from the boundary conditions, Eq. (6). Therefore, one can see the possibility of the visible brane with the positive tension again. By making the 4-dimensional part of the metric be in the form ds\ — —dt2 + e2H^t5ijdx'dx:', we get the Hubble parameter at the visible brane expressed as i?vis,± = -vA&vis.dt)2 — k\. Here h%- ± = k"± for the static solutions and the two parameters corresponding to the k+ and fc_ solutions at the visible brane, kv-lSt±, are given by k
( A ? + ^is)
= VIS,±
(8)
6 M V 1 + (4aA 6 /3M 5 )
where A^ S> pvis • Thus the Hubble parameter at the visible brane is given by JJ2 vis,±
PvisiPvis + 2 A 2 )
36M 6 (l + 4aA 6 /3M 5 )
±p
v 1 + $M%y/\ + 4aA 5 /3M 5 [ 2A;2 v
(9) -I
445
Therefore, with the k+ solution we can obtain a plausible FRW universe at low temperatures. As a result, our additional solution could be proposed to solve the negative tension problem in the RS model. However, as we will see in subsequent sections, we will show that the k+ solution may be unstable under perturbations. 4
RS model with the Gauss-Bonnet term as a 4D gravity theory
In the second RS model with a single brane of positive tension 4 , it has been shown that gravity can be localized on the brane even if the extra dimension is non-compact. As a result, the 4D Newtonian gravity can be reproduced on the brane without the need of compactifying the extra dimension. The 4D graviton is identified as a normalizable bound state of massless graviton due to the delta function source of the brane and continuous Kaluza-Klein modes give rise to small corrections to the 4D Newtonian gravity since they are weakly coupled to the brane matters 4 . However, it seems that it is not plausible to detect the extra dimension in the second RS model because the effects from the extra dimension appear around the AdS curvature scale k, which may be about the Planck scale for giving no hierarchy. (There also exists a stringy picture of lowering the AdS curvature scale. 17 ) On the other hand, the localization of gravity has been also shown by decomposing the full graviton propagator 14 ' 15 . As a result, it turns out that a localized source induces a localized field, which diminishes as one goes toward the AdS horizon 14,15 . And, the brane bending effect in the existence of matter on the brane is shown to be crucial for consistency of the linearized approximation 15 and is necessary to reproduce the 4D Einstein gravity on the brane 14 ' 15 . For the second RS model, the extra dimension is non-compact with y € (—00, 00), of which just the half [0, 00) is sufficient for discussion. Having the perturbed metric as gMN = SMN + /IMJV, Randall and Sundrum 4 took the gauge of /155 = h5)l — 0 (Gaussian normal condition) and dM/iM„ = h^ — 0 (transverse traceless condition) in the absence of matter on the brane, of which the advantage is that all components of the metric are decoupled. In general, however, the metric does not satisfy the RS gauge condition on the brane with matter and thus we have to maintain some degrees of freedom of the metric to satisfy the brane junction condition. As a result, there exists an additional unphysical scalar degree of freedom, which is harmful because it might couple to the trace of the energy-momentum tensor. However, it has been shown that the scalar degree can be cancelled out by a fifth coordinate transformation (or brane bending) 14 .
446
For the case in the second RS model with the Gauss-Bonnet term 1 1 , 1 2 , we choose just the Gaussian normal condition for the metric perturbation for the case with matter on the brane. Here we put 60 = 1 in the Eq. (1) and assume that the matter is localized on the brane, i.e., T 55 = T5fl = 0 and Tuv = Sl_l„(x)6{y). (Note that TM„ are not including the contribution from the brane tension.) Then, the equation of motion for the trace h follows12, dv
-2*«a„(e2*»ft)
\M-
1 -
J>n
M2
(10)
Therefore, if T^,M 7^ 0, the trace h has the exponentially growing component. So, to cancel the growing component for validity of the linearized approximation, we have to take the y position of the brane shifted by — £ 5 , d^d^5(x)
= |M"3
1
S»
"M7
(11)
In fact, £5 is the gauge choice of the 5D coordinate transformation maintaining the metric as a Gaussian normal form. Then, we can always choose the transverse traceless condition (i.e., the RS gauge) for the metric by rewriting the Eq. (10) and the relation dy(e2kydxhflX) = d{e2kyd^h) in the coordiate 5 where the brane is shifted by — £ along the bulk. As a result, the brane bending £5 will play the role of the source for the metric perturbation in the RS gauge. Consequently, in the initial coordinate where the brane is perpendicular to the AdS horizon, the metric perturbation on the brane is made of two components as follows12, KAx)=h$Xx)+h${x)
(12)
where h$[x)
= -M-3
Jd4x'G5(x,0;x',0)(s^(x')
- ^S^(x'))
(13)
h$(x)=2kr1^e{x) (14) where G$ is the 5D graviton propagator in the presence of the Gauss-Bonnet term 12 . For instance, in case of a static point source with mass m on the brane, i.e., for the energy-momentum tensor S^„ = 7116^06 „o6^\x), we obtain the approximate metric perturbation for a static point source on the brane as the following12, 2GN™. r
9\-
-§H'
hoo(x) ~ hij{x)
9/
2Gjvm
1±M
+
1
x
1
1 1 + 2/?
(AT) 2
2 3^
1 1 + 2/3 J
^
1
(15) 1 Sij, (16) (kr)
447 where by the Newton potential $JV = — |/ioo, the Newton constant is given by
CJN =
P =
8^AP{1
M2 )
4ak2/M2 1 - 12ak2/M2'
U + 2/3J
(17) (18)
For thefc+solution, the Newton constant GM would be negative and 1 —1/3 > 0 always, which might give rise to massless and massive ghosts. That is, it means that the k+ solution is unstable under perturbations and therefore we have to exclude it at the perturbative level. On the other hand, for the fc_ solution, we can get the normal gravity without ghosts for —0.47 < "M% < 0 for a > 0 and any value for a < 0. Therefore, even the fc_ solution could excite ghost particles in some bulk parameter space with a > 0. As leading terms of /too and hij components are not equal in the above result, elimination of the unphysical scalar degree due to the brane bending effect is incomplete in the presence of the Gauss-Bonnet term, unlike in the original RS case. Therefore, we can also show that the bending of light passing by the Sun could be modified with the Gauss-Bonnet term. For a source in xz plane on the brane, for instance, the bending of light travelling in z direction is described by a Newton-like force law, x = |(/ioo + hzz)iX. If the metric perturbations due to the Sun are approximated by those from a point source, the bending of light is (1 — | / ? ) - 1 of that predicted from the 4D Einstein gravity. Therefore, from the experimental measurements of the bending of light 16 , we can get another bound on the Gauss-Bonnet coefficient as —0.20 < Inrv^ < 1.2 for the k^ solution connected to the RS solution.
5
Conclusions
We studied static and inflationary solutions in the Randall-Sundrum framework with the Gauss-Bonnet term added to the standard Einstein term. It has been argued that the Gauss-Bonnet term is the only consistent curvature squared interaction in the Randall-Sundrum model. In particular, our additional RS type solution might solve the negative tension problem but it may be unstable under perturbations. And we showed that for a vanishing Gauss-Bonnet coefficient, the brane bending allows us to reproduce the 4D Einstein gravity at the linearized level.
448
Acknowledgments The author thanks S.-H. Moon and J. D. Park for useful discussions. This work is based on works in collaboration with J. E. Kim and B. Kyae and supported by the BK21 program of Ministry of Education, Korea. References 1. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 429, 263 (1998); I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 436, 257 (1998). 2. P. Horava and E. Witten, Nucl. Phys. B 460, 506 (1996); E. Witten, Nucl. Phys. B 471, 135 (1996); P. Horava and E. Witten, Nucl. Phys. B 475, 94 (1996). 3. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3370 (1999). 4. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4690 (1999). 5. A. Lukas, B. A. Ovrut, K. S. Stelle and D. Waldram, Phys. Rev. D 59, 086001 (1999). 6. P. Binetruy, C. Deffayet and D. Langlois, Nucl. Phys. B 565, 269 (2000); C. Csaki. M. Graesser, C. Kolda and J. Terning, Phys. Lett. B 462, 34 (1999); J. M. Cline, C. Grojean and G. Servant, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4245 (1999). 7. N. Kaloper, Phys. Rev. D 60, 123506 (1999); T. Nihei, Phys. Lett. B 465, 81 (1999); H. B. Kim and H. D. Kim, Phys. Rev. D 61, 064003 (2000). 8. W. D. Goldberger and M. B. Wise, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4922 (1999); C. Csaki, M. Graesser, L. Randall and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D 62, 045015 (2000). 9. P. Kraus, JHEP 9912, 011 (1999); E. E. Flanagan, S. -H. H. Tye and I. Wasserman, Phys. Rev. D 62, 044039 (2000). 10. S. Chang and M. Yamaguchi, hep-ph/9909523. 11. J. E. Kim, B. Kyae and H. M. Lee, Phys. Rev. D 62, 045013 (2000); J. E. Kim, B. Kyae and H. M. Lee, Nucl. Phys. B 582, 296 (2000). 12. J. E. Kim and H. M. Lee, hep-th/0010093. 13. B. Zwiebach, Phys. Lett. B 156, 315 (1985) 14. J. Garriga and T. Tanaka, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84, 2778 (2000). 15. S. B. Giddings, E. Katz and L. Randall, JHEP 0003 (2000) 2778. 16. C. M. Will, Theory and experiment in gravitational physics, p.171, Cambridge University, Cambridge, (1993). 17. D. J. H. Chung, L. Everett and H. Davoudiasl, hep-ph/0010103.
COSMOLOGY A N D M O D U L U S STABILIZATION IN T H E R A N D A L L - S U N D R U M SETUP W I T H BULK M A T T E R * BUMSEOK KYAE Department
of Physics and Center for Theoretical Physics, University, Seoul 151-742, Korea E-mail: [email protected]
Seoul
National
We provide the exact time-dependent cosmological solutions in the RandallSundrum (RS) setup with bulk matter, which may be smoothly connected to the static RS metric. In the static limit of the extra dimension, the solutions are reduced to the standard Friedmann equations. In view of our solutions, we also propose an explanation for how the extra dimension is stabilized in spite of a flat modulus potential at the classical level.
As a possible solution of the gauge hierarchy problem, Randall and Sundrum (RS) proposed an S1 /Z2 orbifold model with non-factorizable geometry of space-time 1, which has immediately attracted a great deal of attention. The model employs two branes, Brane 1 (Bl) with a positive cosmological constant(or brane tension) Ai = 6fciM3 and Brane 2 (B2) with a negative cosmological constant A2 = 6/C2M3, and introduces a negative bulk cosmological constant Aj, = —6fc2M3. Bl is interpreted as the hidden brane and B2 is identified with the visible brane a Then the metric has an exponential warp factor which could be used to understand the huge gap between the Planck and eletroweak scales. Although the RS setup introduces cosmological constants k in the bulk and ki and k-z on the branes, it still describes a static universe because of the fine-tuning between the bulk and brane cosmological constants k = k\ = —k-2, which is a consistency condition in the model. Hence, if the fine-tuning is not exact, the solution has the time dependence and the universe expands exponentially 3 but its form is not suitable for the standard Big Bang universe after the inflation. Although there have been many cosmological solutions in the RS setup 4 5 , the graceful exit problem from the inflation phase to the standard Big Bang cosmology has not been seriously considered yet. In addition, the role of the extra dimension in the presence of the bulk matter is not well understood. •PROCEEDING OF THE TALK AT COSMO-2000, 4-TH INTERNATIONAL WORKSHOP ON PARTICLE PHYSICS AND T H E EARLY UNIVERSE, AT CHEJU-ISLAND, KOREA, S E P T . 4-8, 2000. "Although B l is regarded as the visible brane, the hierarchy problem between two scales could be solved by introducing bulk messenger fields and SUSY 2 .
449
450
In this talk 6 , we will present exact cosmological solutions in the RS setup with bulk matter. Our exact solutions converge to the RS metric if the space time is made to be static, and leads to the standard Friedmann equations if the fifth dimension is stabilized. In view of our exact solutions, we can find a clue for a stabilization mechanism of the fifth dimension and obtain a small compactified fifth dimension naturally. Throughout this talk we consider a (4+1) dimensional universe with coordinate indexed by (0, 1, 2, 3, 5). The action describing the bulk matter as well as bulk gravity and brane matter is
s = J d 5 *^ ( | - A6 + 6MA + E
/ **v^j" (4M) - A,) ,
jf=l,2 branes
(i) where we set the fundamental scale M = 1. £( M ) and Cj ' represent matter contributions in the bulk and on the branes. For compatibility with the cosmological principle that our three dimensional space is homogeneous and isotropic, we assume that the metric of the universe has the following form, ds2 = -e2N^T'^dT2
+ e2A^T'^5ijdxidxj
+ e2B(-T^dy2
,
(2)
where r denotes time and y denotes the fifth component. From the metric ansatz, the Einstein tesor GMN is derived through the standard calculation, G ^ oo = -3e 2 ( N - B > [A" + 2A'2 - A'B']
(3)
2
(4)
G (1) a = e2{A~B)
[2A" + 3A'2 + N" + N'2 + 2A'N' - 2A'B' - B'N'] (5)
G
(2)
oo = 3 [A + i f i ]
G (2) a = -e2{A-N)
\2A + 3 i 2 +B + B2 + 2AB - 2AN - BN\
G ^ 55 = 3 [.l'2 + .4'iV'] 2
2
B
G( ) 55 = _ 3 e ( - ^ [ i + 2 i
(6) (7)
2
- AN]
G05 = 3 U'B + AN' - A' - AA'] ,
(8)
(9)
where dot and prime denote the derivatives with respect to r and y, respectively, and the i runs through 1, 2, and 3. Here diagonal Einstein tensors are split into two parts, G^ AA and G^ AA, depending on the nontrivial y and r derivatives, respectively. Thus the original Einstein tensor is, of course, expressed as the sum, GAA = G^ AA + G^ AA, where the A is (0, i, 5). The source part of the Einstein equation is composed of the cosmological constant and the energy-momentum tensor of matter. In this talk, we will regard the
451
matter as perfect fluid. For the future convenience, we divide also the source tensor into two parts, T
( i ) % = -(l-^).diag[A6,A6,A6,A6,A6] -
S(y-yj)e-Bdmg[Aj,Aj,Aj,Aj,0}
E j—1,2
+
(10)
branes
6 y
5Z
-yj)e~Bdia&[-PhPj>Pj>Pj>°]
(
j —1,2 branes
T^
A
B=
diag [-{p + r]Ab),P - VAb,P - VAb, P - VAb, P5 - r,Ab] , (11)
where the pj and f>j are nontrivial components of the energy-momentum tensor of the matter living only on the j - t h brane, and T] is a number representing how Ab is split into T^ A B and T^ A B- The total source tensor is described as TA B = T^l A B + T^ A B- Here we set T 05 = 0 because it is believed that there is no flow of matter along the fifth direction. The continuity equation of the energy-momentum tensor TA B \A = 0 must be satisfied, whose B = 0 and B = 5 components are p + 3A{p+P) + B{p + P5) = 0 P; + 3A'{P5-P) + N'{p + P5)=0
.
(12) (13)
The B — i component is identically zero. Now let us take some ansatze, G ^
(or G^
= T ^ A A
A A
A'(T,y)=N'(T,y)
.
AA
= T<2> AA)
(14) (15)
The above ansatze have been chosen to fulfill our purpose of restoring the Randall-Sundrum metric in the static limit. The ansatz Eq. (14) and G05 read 3 e " 2 B [A" + 2A'2 - A'B']
(16) B
e-2B
= - ( 1 - V)Ab - e~ [<%) (Ax + Pl) + 6(y - 1/2) (A2 + p2)} [2A"+3A'2+N"+ N'2+2A'N'-2A'B'-B'N'] (17)
= - ( 1 - ^)A„ - e~B [5(y) (Ax - P l ) + 6(y - 1/2) (A2 - p2)} (18) 3 e -2B r^/2 + A,N,] = _ ( i _ ^)A 6 A'B+
AN' - A' - AA' = 0 .
(19)
Under the ansatz Eq. (15), Eq. (18) becomes 2
A'-
= -(l-r,)^xe2B=k2e2B.
(20)
452
The solution consistent with the S 1 jZ^ orbifold symmetry is A(T, \y\) = kF(r, \y\) + J(r)
and
F(r, \y\)' = -eB^sgn(y)
,
(21)
where the sgn(y) is defined as sgn(y) = \y\' = 2[9(y) - 9(y - 1/2)] - 1. Then, because of the ansatz Eq. (15), the exponential factor N of the goo component in our metric tensor is written as N(T,
\y\) = kF(r, \y\) + K(T)
—• kF(r, \y\),
(22)
where K{T) is removed by the redefinition of time r in the second part of the above equation. Therefore, we ignore K{T) below. The above result Eq. (21) leads to some useful relations, A" = -keBB'sgn(y) - 2 [S(y) - S(y - 1/2)] keB = A'B' - 2 [<%) - 6(y - 1/2)] keB A' = -keBsgn{y)B = A'B .
(23) (24)
Eq. (24) implies that the N(T, \y\) should be stabilized if the B(T, \y\) can be stabilized somehow, since A' = N'. With Eqs. (15) and (24), we can show directly that our ansatz is consistent with Eq. (19). Because of Eqs. (15) and (23), Eqs. (16) and (17) just require matching the boundary conditions, k = - ( A i +pl) = - g ( A 2 + h)
and
Pj =-pj
.
(25)
Hence, considering the fluid continuity equation on the branes, pj + 2>A{pj + Pj) = 0, we can arrive at a result pj = constant and so the pj is a constant also, which are expected results from our assumption T05 = 0. Now that we have fulfilled the ansatz Eq. (14) already, the remaining equations, G^2' AA = T^ AA are
p + nAb = 3e~2iV [ i 2 + ABJ P - vAb = -e~2N
(26)
h.A + 3 i 2 + B + B2 + 2AB - 2AN - BN]
P5 - nki = - 3 e ~ 2 W [A + 2A2 - AN]
,
(27) (28)
which describe the relation between matter and geometry dynamics. They are nothing but the extended Friedmann equations. With Eqs. (15) and (24), we can check that the above equations Eqs. (26), (27) and (28) satisfy both fluid continuity equations, Eqs. (12) and (13) identically, that is, the constraints, Eqs. (12) and (13) are just redundant equations, which are interesting results. Therefore, the remaining required conditions for the solution are only
453
Eqs. (21) and (22). The relations among the p, P and P5 may be, of course, governed by particle physics. Toward a simple solution, let us consider the case that the size of the extra dimension is stabilized, i.e. B = 0, which leads also to B' = 0 generically by redefinition of y. Because of Eqs. (15), (22) and (24), then, N is also generically set to zero. After all we have B = B' = N = 0 .
(29)
Then, from Eqs. (21) and (22), the function F(r,\y\) F(T, \y\) = — keB\y\ and so N(r,\y\)
= -keB\y\
is determined to
= -kb0\y\
(30)
A(T, |J/|) = -kbo\y\ + J(T) = -kb0\y\
T
+j
H(t)dt ,
(31)
where the interval scale 60 is a small constant and H(T) is a time dependent arbitrary function but may be determined by the equation of state. Thus the metric is read off as ds2 = e-2kh0\„\
£_ d T 2
+ e2f
H(t)dtd^
+
^dy2
(32)
Note that the metric is the same as that of the Randall-Sundrum except for the factor e2 f H(t)dt. Then Eqs. (26), (27) and (28) become p(T,\y\)+r)Ab
= 3e2kb°MH2(T) 2kb
P(T, \y\) - 7?A6 = -e °M
[2H(r) + 3H (r)]
P5(T, \y\) - r,Ab = -3e2kb°M
[H(T) +
1 p(T,\y\)-3P(r,\y\) ~ 2
(33) 2
(34)
2H2(T)]
2r)Ab
(35)
"'
where p. runs through 0, 1,2, 3. [B(T, \y\) is associated with the vacuum expectation value of a massless four-dimensional scalar field.] The above equations, Eqs. (33), (34) and (35), show that due to the exponential factor matter in the bulk is accumulated mainly near the B2 brant (negative tension brane). Of course, any H{T) with H(T) —> 0 and H(T) —>• 0 as r —» 00 can lead to an exit from an inflationary phase to a static Randall-Sundrum (k •£ 0) or Minkowski (k = 0) universe. In this talk, however, we will not specify a model because we are more interested in the real expanding universe.
454
In Eqs.(33), (34) and (35), we should remember that p + 77 A&, P — rjAb and P5 — rjAb are non-trivial components of the five-dimensional energymomentum tensor. To derive effective four-dimensional energy-momentum tensor TA 73, it is necessary to consider the definition of the five-dimensional energy-momentum tensor, 5S =
/*„
SH
B =
l**\
dy boV=gl 6(6B A)T^A
B
(36) where g\ = det[<jM„] (/j, v = 0,1,2,3). As four-dimensional metric at a fourdimensional slice in the bulk is (jfM„ = e2kb°^gtl„, which was introduced by Randall and Sundrum to solve the gauge hierarchy problem 1 , effective fourdimensional energy-momentum tensor is given as
fflu = b0 J dy e-Akh°\y\T{'2^ „ fdye-2kboM
= -bo
• diag[3// 2 (r), 2H(T) + 3H2(T),
2H(T) + 3tf 2 (r), 27/(r) + 3H 2 (r)](37)
= &a4-U>(T)+r,\),P(T)-T,A,P(T)-riA,P(T)-r,\]
.
(38)
According to RS, 60 / dye~2kb°^ is nothing but the induced four-dimensional Planck scale M2Pl l. Thus, from Eqs.(33), (34), (37) and (38), we can get the Friedmann equations, a(r)
L«(r)J £(l) a(r)
2
-2*60 M
p(-r,\y\) + v^b
3M2Pl
P{T)+T)\
and
(39)
= -2fc6 0 |y|
6 6M2Pl
p(T,\y\)+3P(T,\y\)-2VAb p{r) + 3P(r) - 2rjA
(40)
where a{r) is a scale factor of our three-dimensional space, a(r) = e-l ' . Therefore, we could have saved the whole standard cosmological scenario by only requiring stabilization of B in our framework (i.e. B = 0). As an example, let us consider the vacuum dominated era. The equation of state is P = -p and then P5 is given by P 5 = -2p - r]Ab. Then Eqs. (33) and (34) lead to H = constant = Ho
(41)
455
which gives the inflationary universe. Ho can be considered as a parameter representing the degree of fine-tuning given in Eq. (33). If #0 vanishes, the fine-tuning is successful and the universe is static. On the other hand, a non-zero H0 does not satisfy the fine-tuning condition and gives rise to an inflationary universe. Note that our solution is for B = 0 and any modulus potential is not generated at the classical level since b0 is arbitrary. We proceed to discuss the possibility of stabilizing the size of the fifth dimension in our framework. Since we obtained already the solutions for the B = 0 case, we conclude that if B goes to zero asymptotically, there exist solutions converging asymptotically to our B = 0 solutions. We suppose that the stabilization era occurs before or during the conventional inflation era. Thus, we suppose that the system is governed by the same equations of state as those of the inflation era discussed above. Then, from Eqs. (26), (27) and (28), we obtain 2A + B + B2 - ABA-AN
2AN - BN = 0 -IAB =0,
(42) (43)
which are the equations of state in the inflationary era. The above equations and Eqs. (21) and (22) convince us that any potential for the modulus field is not generated also since the B is not fixed yet. Eq. (43) is easily solved, A = e»(M)+Ar62
= es(\y\)+kFb2
(
= kp
+j \
(44)
where s(\y\) is an integration constant and b is defined as 6(r, \y\) = eB(-T^\ Note that A is an increasing function of time since A > 0. Removing A from Eqs. (42) and (43), we obtain B + B2 + 3AB -BN
= 0,
(45)
which can be solved to give •
1 ~ e^\v\)-N+3A
_
1
~ et(\y\)+2kF+3J
'
(46)
where t(\y\) is an integration constant. Note that b is an increasing function of time but b could be zero asymptotically. The extra dimension scale b can be stabilized if the combination —N + 3A (= 2kF + 3 J ) is an increasing function of time without limit. Especially, if TV
456
From Eqs. (44) and (46), we obtain ^
=
es(\v\)+t(.M)+3A
b2
^
^
b which is integrable. The solution is 6(r, \y\f = u3(\y\) - e—-CIs/1)-^CIs/1)-3^. ^
(4g)
where u(\y\) is a \y\ dependent arbitrary function. The remaining constraints to satisfy are only Eqs. (21) and (22), i.e. A' = N' — -kb(r, \y\)sgn(y), from which Eq. (48) can be written as 3X
u*(\y\)-t + S'i]y]) + *'(M) = ~3A> = Skb ' Sgn{v) •
(49)
We intend to make our solution become the inflationary solution asymptotically that was obtained before. Since N -> — kbo\y\, A ->• H0, and b —>• b0 as r —^ oo, let us take the integration constants in Eqs. (44) and (48) as *(l»l) = kbo\y\+hx u(\y\) = b0 ,
Ho - 2In b0
(50) (51)
where bo and Ho were defined above. So far the solutions were exact. Note that any value for Ho is possible, which does not influence Eq. (49). Although Eq. (49) is difficult to solve exactly, we can argue that |JV| = k\F\
= ^e-ki°M-3kFe-3J
.
(52)
457
With Eqs. (49) and (52) we are led to the following results, b' < 1 or
b « 6(r),
(53)
and we obtain F(T,\y\) * ~KT)\V\
•
(54)
Here we must set t(\y\) « 0 in view of Eq. (46). Then, Eqs. (44) and (46) become 7,2
J « //OTI7
and
b w e"3J
«C 1,
(55)
% which shows that during the period of the three space inflation it is quite difficult for b to be dynamical. It is interpreted as the stabilization of the extra dimension in spite of the flat potential for 6. From Eq. (52) we can derive an expression for 6(r),
66g
In
(bo ~ bY bl + b0b + b2
+ 5 2 / 3 tan
6o + 26 b
/g
= fr,
(56)
or b(r) « b0 - e~3H°T .
(57)
Here we can see that as r —> 00, 6(T) grows to 60 and J tends to HQ asymptotically. In other words, to obtain an inflationary universe b should be stabilized to bo exponentially. Note that Eq. (56) becomes an exact result provided the warp factor vanishes, which corresponds the cases of A& = 0 or r] = 1. If b is 0(1) but small right after the Big Bang, 60 should be O(l) but small. As the extra dimension gets stabilized (B = 0) soon after the beginning of the inflationary era, while the three dimensional space inflates (to eH°T), b remains small ( « 1/M) and the universe is reduced effectively to 4-dimension. In a similar method, we can show that b is made asymptotically to zero also in the radiation (P = p / 3 , 77 = 0) and matter dominated era (P = 0, r\ = 0). However, as the initial condition for b is zero (through the above solution in the inflationary epoch), b should have been stabilized already and so Eq. (29) should have been valid since the beginning of the radiation dominated era. Therefore, the Friedmann equations Eqs. (39) hold good in the radiation and matter dominated eras. In conclusion, we have provided exact cosmological solutions in the RS setup with bulk matter. In the static limit of all components of the metric, the solutions become the RS metric and in static limit of the extra dimension, they are reduced to the standard Friedmann equations, which implies that bulk matter is accumulated mainly near the negative tension brane (visible
458
brane B2). In this case the modulus potential is not generated effectively at the classical level. With our solution, however, we have shown that the extra dimension could be stabilized (the B = 0 solution) even if the modulus potensial is flat (bo is arbitrary) and it should be small since the three dimensional space inflates during the inflationary era. Acknowledgments This work is based on the collaboration with J. E. Kim 6 , and is supported in part by the BK21 program of Ministry of Education. References 1. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3370 (1999). 2. J. E. Kim and B. Kyae, hep-ph/0009043. 3. T. Nihei, Phys. Lett. B465, 81 (1999); N. Kaloper, Phys. Rev. D60, 123506 (1999); H. B. Kim and H. D. Kim, Phys. Rev. D61, 064003 (2000); A. Lukas, B. A. Ovrut and D. Waldram, Phys. Rev. D 6 1 , 023506 (2000); H. A. Chamblin and H. S. Reall, Nucl. Phys. B562, 133 (1999); S. Nojiri and S. Odintsov, Phys. Lett. B484, 119 (2000). 4. P. Binetruy, C. Deffayet and D. Langlois, Nucl. Phys. B565, 269 (2000); C. Csaki, M Graesser, C. Kolda, and J. Terning, Phys. Lett. B462, 34 (1999); J. M. Cline, C. Grojean and G. Servant, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4245 (1999); J. E. Kim, B. Kyae and H. M. Lee, Phys. Rev. D62, 045013 (2000); ibid. Nucl. Phys. B582, 296 (2000); C. Csaki, M. Graesser, L. Randall, and J. Terning, Phys. Lett. B462, 34 (1999); H. B. Kim, Phys. Lett. B478, 285 (2000). 5. P. Binetruy, C. Deffayet, U. Ellwanger and D. Langlois, Phys. Lett. B477, 285 (2000); P. Kanti, K. A. Olive and M. Pospelov, Phys. Lett. B481, 386 (2000); P. Kanti, I. Kogan, K. A. Olive, and M. Pospelov, Phys. Lett. B468, 31 (1999); ibid. Phys. Rev. D61, 106004 (2000); J. Lesgourgues, S. Pastor, M. Peloso and L. Sorbo, Phys. Lett. B489, 411 (2000); A. Lukas, B. A. Ovrut and D. Waldram, Phys. Rev. D60, 086001 (1999); E. E. Flanagan, S.-H. H. Tye and I. Wasserman, Phys. Rev. D62, 024011 (2000); ibid. Phys. Rev. D62, 044039 (2000); H. Stoica, S.-H. H. Tye and I. Wasserman, Phys. Lett. B482, 205 (2000); S. W. Hawking, T. Hetog and R. S. Reall, Phys. Rev. D62, 043501 (2000); R. S. Reall, Phys. Rev. D59, 103506 (1999). 6. J. E. Kim and B. Kyae, Phys. Lett. B486, 165 (2000).
GRAVITATIONAL ORIGIN OF Q U A R K M A S S E S IN A N EXTRA-DIMENSIONAL BRANE WORLD
DAVID D O O L I N G A N D K Y U N G S I K K A N G Department of Physics, Brown University, Providence RI 02912 USA, and School of Physics, Korea Institute for Advanced Study, Seoul 130-012, Korea E-mail: [email protected], [email protected] Using the warped extra dimension geometry of the many-brane extension of the Randall-Sundrum solution, we find a natural explanation for the observed quark masses of the three Standard Model (SM) generations. Localizing massless SM matter generations on neighboring 3-branes in an extra dimensional world leads to phenomenologically acceptable effective four dimensional masses arising from the coupling of the fermion field with the background metric. Thus this geometry can simultaneously address the gauge and quark mass hierarchy problems.
1
Introduction
The Standard Model (SM) provides an elegant mechanism by which the massive intermediate vector bosons W± and Z acquire mass while the photon and gluons remain massless. Postulating the Higgs field to transform as a singlet under SU(3)C and a doublet under 5(7(2), the W± and Z masses at tree level are given in terms of gi, gi and only one dimensionful parameter v ~ 246 GeV. The SM does not provide such an economical explanation for the observed fermion masses. After spontaneous symmetry breaking, the quark mass term in the lagrangian reads £rnass = -j= {uL^h\fuRj
+ dLih\f
dRj)
+ h.C.
(1)
where the hij are arbitrary 3 x 3 complex Yukawa coupling matrices. Some predictive mechanism for fermion mass generation is needed so as to place the understanding of fermion mass on a par with that of gauge boson mass; i.e., to find an overriding principle that predicts the values of the quark and lepton mass matrix elements to be what they are. Another failing of the SM is that of explaining in a natural way the existence of a light fundamental Higgs mass scale in comparison to the Planck scale, the gauge hierarchy problem. Traditional proposed solutions have been technicolor and supersymmetry, while recently it has been suggested that large extra dimensions (LED) may result in a change in how gravity behaves at high energies and thus allow room for only one fundamental scale in physics, the TeV scale l'2. However, this suggestion in its simplest forms does not 459
460
really address the gauge hierarchy problem, but rather transforms it into a problem of disparate length scales. One needs to explain why the extra dimensions are so large. Randall and Sundrum observed that if there are in fact extra dimensions, our world is necessarily confined to a four dimensional submanifold, a 3-brane 3 . It is then apparent that any 3-branes living in extra dimensions must be taken into account when determining the metric. The imposition of four-dimensional Poincare invariance generically results in a non-facorizable geometry with an associated warp factor. Unlike in the LED scenarios, the gauge hierarchy problem is resolved not with the single fundamental scale being the TeV scale, but with the fundamental scale being the Planck scale. Particle physics scales of 1 TeV are reproduced after taking into account the effect of the warp factor on the visible brane and canonically normalizing the Higgs field, so that a Higgs VEV ~ 246 GeV may result even if the fundamental Vb is of the order of the Planck scale. In this paper, we ask the question "can the gauge hierarchy problem and the quark mass hierarachy be simultaneously explained in a minimal extension of the Randall-Sundrum solution?". In a recent paper 8 , we used the LykkenRandall scenario 4 of one hidden, positive tension brane located at the origin in a non-compact extra dimension. Treating as probes the branes where the SM fields are localized, we found that a phenomenologically acceptable quark mass spectrum results, but that the mixing parameters were inconsistent with experiment. Taking this discrepency as a signal for a more rigorous treatment, we refine the previous calculation. Using the full metric as determined by all the branes, including the previously dubbed probe branes, we solve exactly for the fermion field profile in the extra compact dimension with the original ^ L orbifold symmetry. This new implementation of the same essential mechanism as in 8 is much more restrictive, and yet we still find the quark mass spectrum can be successfully produced and the gauge hierarchy problem resolved. The outline of this paper is as follows. In Section II, we review the manybrane extension of the Randall-Sundrum solution 10 and solve for the profile of a massless fundamental five-dimensional fermion field in this geometry, as outlined in Bajc and Gabadadze 9 . In Section III, we present our mechanism of a gravitational origin of quark masses, made possible by the identification of different SM flavors with the peaked profile of one fundmental field around different branes. This idea of localizing different flavors at different locations in higher-dimensional geography has been exploited recently in 5 ' 6 . Finally, we present an example justifying our claim that variants of the RS scenario are capable of successfully addressing both hierarchies mentioned above. We then draw our conclusions and briefly mention further directions currently under investigation.
461
2
Many-brane Extension of RS
In 10 , Hatanaka et al. have generalized the orginal RS solution with the ^L orbifold symmetry to the case of many branes. The general configuration considered is that of N parallel 3-branes in five spacetime dimensions such that the ith 3-brane located at 0,: has tension V, (i = 1,2,..., N) and 0 < 0i < 02 < ••• < 4>N < 27r. This more general configuration allows for the possibility of different inter-brane bulk cosomological constants, and so the entire action may be written as N i=l
where r
Sgrav =
p2n
(
d4x
N
y/G < 2M3R - J2 Xi I9 {ct>-
Si = f dAx^T^)
{d-Vi}
(3)
(4)
and 6 is the Heaviside step function. The resulting five dimensional Einstein equations are • JV
y/G [RMN
- ^GMNRJ
=
- ^ 3
J2 A< [0 (0 - 0*) - 0 (0 - 0 i + i)]
VGGMN
(5) N
+ i=l
Taking the same form for the metric ansatze as in the original RS scenario so as to preserve four dimensional Poincare invariance, ds2 = e-2a^rilll/dxf'dxv
- r2cd(j)2
(6)
one finds the solution a (0) = (Ai - 0) (0 - 0 0 + (A2 - Ai) (0 - 0 2 ) 9 (0 - 0 2 ) +... + (Aw -
XN-X)
(0 - 0/v) 8 (0 - 0iv)
(7)
462
where S1 periodicity (c(0) = er(rc)) requires N
X>OAi + l
r=±\[\24AP"'
VjTc
i)=0
(8)
__
12m ~ ^i~ A ' - i f o r (* = 1, 2,..., JV) and A0 = \N. Given this general metric, we now wish to couple a fundamental, massless five-dimensional fermion field to it and solve for its profile in the bulk. In 9 , Bajc and Gabadadze showed that massless fermions can be localized around a single negative tension brane, but that no normalizable solution exists in the case of a single positive tension brane when the extra dimension is noncompact. However, in the case of a §- symmetric extra dimension, both negative and positive tension branes may exist and the fermion profile in the bulk will have local maxima around the negative tension branes and local minima around the positive tension branes. Switching notation so that the extra dimension is parametrized by y (0 < y < yc), we work with the configuration of twentyfour branes all with the same magnitude of tension, such that and A
o{y) =
24
1 -6A 12 V M 3
(9) i=2
where Vi = q=V as i is even or odd and 24
V Vc
(10)
3
(l2^ (l2^-W-S))^ where /3, = ^ 1 as i is even or odd. Given this metric, the properly normalized massless fermion field profile in the bulk is given by 1 y/n where n = j ^ c dyea(y\
(11)
The effective Newton constant is given by
Ml = M3yc [^ dye-2°M
(12)
Jo
M2pl
M3yc
TV
1
2A7
2AJV
+£
1 2X~i
-My) 2Ai + l
(13)
463
and so is of the order Mp[2 for every brane. Hence the y, can be chosen so as to generate an acceptable quark mass spectrum without conflicting with the observed strength of gravity. We note that our multi-brane set-up is a specific example of the so-called brane-crystals as recently investigated by Kaloper 7 . 3
Gravitational Origin of Quark Masses
As in 8 , we may naturally define an effective four-dimensional pair of quark mass matrices as Mtj = l- p
dye-4^
(i>lL (dyiPjR) - (dy^iL)
t/;jR)
(14)
Up and down quark sector mass matrices may then be evaluated once we adopt a particular brane number - SM field dictionary. Separating left and right-handed components, we may identify brane number and flavor as (2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,24) - • (dR,uR,dL,uL,sR,cR,sL,cL,bR,tR,bL:tL). Different flavors are identified with different local maxima of the fermion field in the extra dimension. We now show an example supporting our claim that this geometry allows for a simultaneous taming of the two mass hierarchy problems. Working in units of the Planck mass, we choose the fundamental parameters as follows: M = 1, A = —1 and V = 5.51. The position of the first brane is at the origin of the ^ - obifold, i/i — 0. We then place the remaining branes at equal coordinate intervals further out in the y direction. In this example, we choose j/2 = 49,j/3 = 56, ...,j/24 = 203. No new hierarchy is introduced, as yc is caculated to be ~ 227 Planck lengths. We show in Fig. (1) a plot of the function a(y) of Eq. (9). The original RS scenario would provide the same picture up to y2 = 49, the position of the first negative tension brane. In this case, the presence of the additional branes of alternating positive and negative tensions of equal magnitude allows for the appearance of the several local maxima and minima of the function cr(y). In Fig. (2) and Fig. (3), we plot the properly normalized fermion field profile in the bulk for this particular choice of parameters. We see that the peaks associated with the lighter flavors have a markedly higher profile than those associated with the heavier flavors. Within the context of our proposed mechanism for quark mass generation, this observation makes perfect sense. Because the fermion field profile goes like the inverse of the warp factor, wherever the fermion profile is large, the interaction with the background metric is dampened, and wherever the fermion profile is small, the interaction with the background metric is enhanced.
464
Fig. (1) The function a(y) plotted over the entire J— extra dimension.
360000 340000 320000 300000 280000 260000 240000 220000 200000 180000 160000 140000 120000 100000 80000 60000 40000 20000 0
Fig. (2) The properly normalized fermion field profile plotted over the entire extra dimension.
465
I
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
>\JV
140
'60
200
180
220
y
Fig. (3) T h e properly normalized fermion field profile plotted over t h e interval of t h e e x t r a dimension around which t h e heavier flavors are peaked.
Using Eq. (14) and the above brane number - flavor dictionary, we can compute Mu=MuMl and Md~MdM\.
Mu=
( .177432 x 10- 4 0 .249962 x 10~ 38 -.460803 x 10~- 37 \ .249962 x 10" 3 8 .797256 x 10" 3 6 -.137539 x 10" 3 4 \ -.460803 x 10" 3 7 -.137539 x lO" 34 .238164 x 10" 3 3 /
(15)
Md=
/ .102262 x 10- 4 1 .144233 x HT 3 9 -.265891 x 1 0 " 3 8 \ .144233 x 10- 3 9 .460510 x 10" 3 7 -.794454 x lO" 3 6 V-.265891 x 10" 3 8 -.794454 x 10" 3 6 .137567 x 10~ 34 /
(16)
where we remind the reader that we have been working in units of the Planck mass Mpi ~ 1.221047 x 10 19 GeV. Computing the eigenvalues, one finds mt ~ 188 GeV, mc ~ .66 GeV, mu ~ .002 GeV, mb ~ 45 GeV, ms ~ .159 GeV and md ~ .0005 GeV. With the exception of the bottom quark, these values are in good agreement with observation and prompt us to take this model seriously. The mixing matrix calculated in the usual way from VCKM = UlJJd where UlMuUu = diag {m\,m2c,m\) and u\MdUd = diag (md,m2s,ml) is computed to be essentially the 3 x 3 identity matrix. This result is in contrast to our previous implementation of this mechanism in 8 , in which there was too
466
much mixing between the second and third generations. In our model, flavor mixing does not arise from the diagonalization of four dimensional quark mass matrices, but rather from wave function overlap, as in 5 . As one may readily verify, varying the y,- and the other fundamental parameters by factors of the order of 2, or even relaxing the aestheticly pleasing requirements of equal magnitudes for the brane tensions and equal coordinate spacings for the brane positions in the extra dimension, one can indeed successfully produce a quark mass spectrum in all but perfect agreement with experimental observation. This variation may require some degree of moderate fine-tuning, but nothing like the fine-tuning associated with the gauge hierarchy problem within the context of the pure SM. 4
Conclusions and Further Directions
We have found a consistent, straightforward mechanism within the extra dimensional scenario to derive effective four dimensional quark mass matrices that are phenomenologically acceptable. Several issues warrant further investigation to either lend more credence to this model or to ban it to the bonfires of happy mathematical coincidences. The first issue is that of the stability of the brane coordinates, which enter strongly into the determination of the mass eigenvalues. Presumably, a simple generalization of the Goldberger-Wise mechanism could account for their stability. A more sophisticated explanation would not only account for their stability, but for the actual values needed to produce an acceptable mass spectrum. An additional point that needs to be addressed is our model's lack of CP violation. As is known, the SM mechanism for CP violation via a physically meaningful phase in the CKM matrix does not provide enough CP violation for the purposes of baryogenesis. Perhaps the source of CP violation and the origin of quark masses are different problems. To conclude, the RS scenario provides an intriguing resolution of the hierarchy problem. We find suggestive evidence that it may address the fermion mass hierarchy as well. Mass being the charge of spacetime-matter interactions, it seems only natural that the fermion mass hierarchy will be understood in terms of spacetime considerations as opposed to an internal flavor symmetry governing Yukawa-type interactions. Acknowledgements We wish to thank the Cosmo-2000 organizing committee for their examplary organization of this conference and their warm hospitality. DD also gratefully acknowledges the U.S. Dept. of Ed. for financial support via the Graduate
467
Assistance in Areas of National Need (GAANN) program and the NSF for support via a Dissertation Enhancement Award (INT-0083352). Support for this work was also provided in part by the U.S. Dept. of Energy grant DEFG02-91ER40688. Institutional report numbers for this work are BROWNHET-1239, BROWN-TA-586 and KIAS-P00069. References 1. I. Antoniadis, Phys. Lett. B 264 (1990) 377; I. Antoniadis, C. Munoz, M. Quiros, Nucl. Phys. B 397 (1993) 515; I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 436 (1998) 257; K. R. Dienes, E. Dudas, T. Ghergetta, Phys. Lett. B 436 (1998) 55; Nucl. Phys. B 537 (1999) 47; N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 429 (1998) 263; H. Hatanaka, T. Inami, C. S. Lim, Mod. Phys. Lett. A 13 (1998) 2601; K. Yoshioka, Mod. Phys. Lett A 15 (2000) 29. 2. A. Perez-Lorenzana, hep-ph/0008333. 3. L. Randall, R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 3370. 4. J. Lykken, L. Randall, JHEP 0006:014 (2000). 5. G. Dvali, M. Shifman, Phys. Lett. B 475 (2000) 295. 6. N. Arkani-Hamed, M. Schmaltz, Phys. Rev. D 61 (2000) 033005; T. Gherghetta, A. Pomarol, hep-ph/0003129; D. Kaplan, T. Tait, JHEP 0006:020 (2000). 7. N. Kaloper, Phys. Lett. B 474 (2000) 269. 8. D. Dooling, K. Kang, hep-ph/0006256. 9. B. Bajc, G. Gabadadze, Phys. Lett. B 474 (2000) 282. 10. H. Hatanaka, M. Sakawoto, M. Tachibana, K. Takenaga, Prog. Theor. Phys. 102 (1999) 1213.
B R A N E W O R L D I N GENERALIZED GRAVITY * HYUNG DO KIM Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology, Taejon, Korea and Korea Institute for Advanced Study, Seoul, Korea hdkimQkias.re.kr
We consider Randall-Sundrum(RS) model in generalized gravities and see that the localization of gravity happens in generic situations though its effectiveness depends on the details of the configuration. It is shown that RS picture is robust against quantum gravity corrections ((pTZ) as long as the correction is reasonably small. We extend our consideration to the model of scalar coupled gravity (BransDicke theory) which leads us to the specific comparison between RS model and inflation models. The exponential and power law hierarchy in RS model are shown to correspond to the exponential and power law inflation respectively.
1
Introduction
Why the gravitational interaction is so weak compared to other gauge interactions is the main question that made people to consider the extension of the Standard Model(SM). For several decades weak scale supersymmetry was believed to be the most popular explanation for the gauge hierarchy. Recently the presence of D-brane opened new way of thinking that gravitational excitations propagate through the full spacetime while gauge interactions and matter fields are confined on the hypersurface, so called branes. The 'brane world' scenario changes many conventional viewpoints toward the problems. First, the weakness of gravity at low energy is understood by the largeness of the volume of the extra dimensions *. This model needs a mechanism of radion stabilization at large values for its completion which is not easy without introducing large parameters. Recently, Randall and Sundrum (RS) 2 proposed a new idea which can explain the gauge hierarchy by localizing gravity on a 'Planck brane' and assuming we are living in a tail ('TeV brane') of those localized gravity. From now on this will be called RS I (two brane) model to distinguish it with the single brane setup RS II 3 which has been proposed as an alternative to the compactification. The localization of gravity yields the physical mass scale on the TeV brane suppressed by an exponentially small warp factor. This •TALK GIVEN AT "INTERNATIONAL WORKSHOP ON PARTICLE PHYSICS AND THE EARLY UNIVERSE", COSMO2000, CHEJU ISLAND, KOREA, SEPTEMBER 2000
468
469 scenario can be realized with one extra dimension where AdS5 ends at two boundary 3 branes (Planck and TeV branes). The 4-D Minkowski solution on the TeV brane can be achieved only through two exact fine tunings among bulk cosmological constant and the brane tensions. If the.exact relations among the parameters are not satisfied, we obtain unstable configurations generically in which the extra dimension collapses or inflates in addition to the inflation along the 3 spaces parallel to the branes 5 The solution including black holes has been obtained in 6 , and the completion of 5 has been done in 7 . The brane inflationary solution with fixed extra dimension 8 ' 9 has been obtained first. See also 10 . In this paper we investigate the properties of RS model that remain unchanged when we modify the original simple setup. Generally quantum corrections alter the simple picture and it is essential to check whether all nice properties are valid even after full consideration of quantum corrections which arise naturally. 2
Framework
In this section, we review the general solution generating technique in the context of scalar coupled gravity mainly following n though the numerical coefficients appearing in the equations are not the same as in n due to the difference in the metric sign convention or normalization of the Ricci scalar (or 5-D Planck scale). Our starting point is the action on M 4 x S 1 fZ-i 4with the metric convention gMN = (—1,1,1,1,1) and S = S&ujfc + S i +S^, whose bulk action is given by
Stuik = J dhx^g{\n
- \gABdA
(l)
where 0 is a scalar field ° and V(<j>) represents generalized bulk potential including the bulk cosmological constant and other bulk scalar potentials. The brane action is
Si = j d^x^Tg^Iii-Vitt)
+ d}.
(2)
Here Vi(
470
The Einstein equation and the equation of motion of
d(p
Taa = -\
(3)
i
T55 = ^ ' 2 - V ( < A ) ,
(4)
where A,B,- • • denote 4+1 dimensional indices, and a = 1, • • •,3 denotes the spatial index. The main interest of this paper is to look at the scaling behaviors of different theories, and we assume that the radion has been stabilized. From now on, we focus on the solutions which keep the 4-D Poincare invariance (Aeff = 0). This can be achieved by tuning the parameter which corresponds to the cosmological constant problem in 4 dimensional theory. To keep 4-D Poincare invariance, we set cj> = 4>{y). From the above conditions, the metric is expressed in a simple form ds2 = e2A^v'T]illldx>ldxv + dy2, and we can write the equation of motion in terms of
= -0'2 - ^
Vi(0)<5(y - j/0,
(5)
i
6A*
= \ f
- V{4>),
(6)
Though there are three equations, only two of them are independent. The third equation is derived from the first two equations. The second equation reminds us of the relation between the superpotential W and the potential V. If we introduce W and set cf>' = ^ T and A' — jW, then from the first equation 7 = —| is determined. Once we obtain W(
the Einstein equations become two first order equations
12,u
471
provided the boundary jump conditions A |j._e = -gKWi/i)),
^ |;,- £ =
0^
(10)
are satisfied. Since we are interested in the scaling behavior of the metric in the bulk along the extra dimension y, we choose V, such that the previous jump conditions are always satisfied. This technique can be applied only if we can find W(
Conformal transformation
Now we have a tool which is very useful for the system with Einstein-Hilbert action and general kinds of scalar potential. However, we need more than this to consider 4>1Z correction. It is well known 17 that generalized action of the following form can be transformed to the Einstein frame by conformal transformation
Sbuik = I d5x^df(4>)n
- \gABdA
(11)
472
The conformal transformation 9MN
= e
U
9MN
(12)
with ui = ilog(/(^>)) brings us to the Einstein-Hilbert action Stuik = J d5xy^{^TZ(y)
~ \gABdA
- W($)}
(13)
where the potential in Einstein frame is W($) = (/(0))-*V(^).
(14)
and the canonically normalized field $ which has a relation with <j> is
1T
All the cases appearing in the following are analyzed in two steps based on these tools. First, take a conformal transformation to Einstein frame. Second, find W and solve the first order differential equations. 3.1
Small (plZ correction
Let's consider
(16)
It is reasonable to assume that the coefficient of the induced term is small e < 1 (e. g. e ~ 1/100) since it usually contains a loop suppression factor. We can take the conformal transformations such that Stuik = Jd5x^g-{±K-
^gABdA$dB*
- U{<S>)},
(17)
where $ and W($) are determined by (15), (14) as $ = 4> - £<j? + 0(e2),
W(*) = (1 - \e^)V{ct>) + 0(e2).
(18)
The action on the brane has not been specified, and we assume that the correction on the brane is such that the relation (10) is satisfied to keep the brane configuration static. Before considering quantum correction, let's review the back reaction of GW scalar field. When there was no potential for the scalar (j> and V = A =
473
-24k2, we recover the RS model with W = 6k and A = -2ky. To check whether (j>TL correction destabilize the GW mechanism, we should consider massive bulk scalar at first. Massive bulk scalar changes the potential and now V = k + rnlcf)2 = -24i; 2 (l + rj(fi2) in which we introduce new parameters, k representing the bulk cosmological constant and r], the ratio of the scalar mass to the bulk cosmological constant. Now W = 6k(l + ^r](f)2) + 0(r]2) where j)
+ ^20)y
+ O(r]2),
(19)
where
2
) + 0(e*,V2,ev),
W($) = 6*(1 + i f o - |e)
(20) (21)
These equations give us very simple interpretations of the
474
3.2
Brans-Dicke Theory
In this section, we consider different types of theories which have entirely different properties than RS model. String theory has a dilaton which couples directly with scalar curvature and give Brans-Dicke (BD) type theory as its low energy effective theory This kind of theory shows very different behavior than the RS model. Already it has been shown that exponential and power law hierarchy are obtained in the usual supergravity and the gauged supergravity respectively in the framework of strongly coupled heterotic string 18 . Now all the features of RS scenario change if we consider BD type interactions between scalar fields and gravity. To see the qualitative features, we consider the following action Sbulk = J d5x^{^£
- ^gABdA
(22)
Actually typical form of BD theory is Sbuik = Jd5x^{^4>K-^gABjdAj>dBt-V(4>)},
(23)
but this is equivalent to the previous one with the relation e = -£j- The equivalence relation can be easily checked by changing the BD kinetic term to the canonical form. Conformal transformation brings the action into Sbulk
= j Sx^-g{\n-\gABdA^dB^-U^)},
(24)
where $ and W($) are determined from <j> and V(<j>) using eq. (15) and (14). Now the situation is entirely different from the previous case. $ and
l + ^e 2 - log(<^o) = alogWfo),
(25)
and the potential has exponential dependence < ! ,
(26)
When the bulk cosmological constant is dominant, W(4>) = 6Jk,
V{4>) = -24k2,
(27)
we get W($) = 6 t e - ^ o » e ~ * * = c e " * *
(28)
475
and can solve the differential equation ,
3a2,
4=
IT l 0 g ( 1 - 9^ CJ/) = 1 S T l 0 S ( 1 " o T ^
^
25
,
3 + 32e
25e (29)
where c = W(y = 0) is the integration constant. Now the metric is
sv = e ^ = (l -
9 + 9 6 g cy)
25e
»w>
( 3 °)
and it shows the power law dependence along y which becomes singular at finite y (yc = 9 + s ^ e ). Consideration of exponential potential rather than power law potential gives the same result, and this corresponds to the self-tuning brane models having singularity when we cut off the bulk at the singularity 19 20 > . Cutting the bulk before the singularity occurs gives the usual string settings like Horava-Witten 4 . The potential generating power law hierarchy has been studied in 21 independently. By taking the limit e —> 0 with e<j>2 fixed, we can recover the RS model as g^v = £2Ar]lll, = e~4cyriliv. In this limit <j> is frozen since the kinetic term becomes huge, and the system recovers Einstein-Hilbert action. Even for a tiny but nonzero E (E « 1), the metric (30) shows the presence of singularity at yc ~ 2§^- At any rate, we can generate the hierarchy 10~ 32 with e ~ 1/120 and putting TeV brane at y = 0.9yc — 40c ~ 40 for order one c. If we put TeV brane at y — 0.99yc, we need e ~ 1/50 and y ~ 20c ~ 20. 4
Randall-Sundrum vs. Inflation
Understanding of RS geometry can be easily done by thinking y as time of the inflation models. RS model itself corresponds to the usual inflation models in which the expansion is exponential, and scalar(dilaton) coupled theory gives rise to the power law hierarchy as in the case of extended inflation model in which BD theory gives power law inflation. More concrete relations can be found in the recent paper 22 with a table summarizing it. This analogy shows that singularities away from the brane is inevitable since this corresponds to the initial singularity in inflation models. RS II (single brane) model has AdS geometry even far away from the brane with decreasing warp factor. However, an analogy with inflation models shows that asymptotically AdS geometry with decreasing warp factor is not an attractor of the system. This is the opposite case to the inflation in which asymptotically dS is an attractor. The difference is due to the fact that the direction we are considering is opposite with each other. If we consider time reversal direction, asymptotically dS is not an attractor and generally singularity is developed since the connection
476
term in the scalar field equation of motion acts like an anti-friction. This singularity has already been observed in the study of 5-D supergravity inspired by AdS/CFT correspondence. The paper 22 addresses the question of which types of singularities are harmless. In other words the criterion on which types of the singularities are expected to be resolved is suggested.
5
Conclusion
We have studied general features of RS model by considering several quantum corrections and checked that RS model is robust against small quantum corrections. Though exponentially suppressed potential looks suspicious to be stable against possible dangerous corrections, it turned out that nothing is harmful as far as we are concerned on a theory whose systematic expansion is possible. We considered 4>TZ term and showed that it acts like changing the bulk scalar mass. Therefore, once the mass is small, the correction is further suppressed and the radion potential remains stable. Also we obtained the power law y dependence of the metric for the BD type generalization of RS model. Exponential law y dependence of the warp factor which is important to localize the gravity can be realized by freezing the dilaton such that there is no scalar that couples directly to 1Z. Otherwise, the singularity appears and we can not have RS II (single brane model) as an alternative of compactification. Finally we stated several correspondences between RS model and inflation model and checked that asymptotically AdS do not come as an attractor of the system which is necessary for the localization of gravity. This is opposite to the slow roll condition of the inflation models where the condition is guaranteed by appearing as an attractor. The singularity entering in general setup with scalar fields is inevitable in RS II (single brane setup). Nonetheless, RS I model (two brane) remains as very robust one at least within our consideration since the consideration of quantum effects does not alter its characteristic features.
Acknowledgements HK thanks to theory group of Univ. of California at Santa Cruz including T. Banks, M. Dine, M. Graesser, H. Haber and L. Motl for the hospitality during the visit. HK also indebted to K. Choi for many valuable comments and discussions.
477
References 1. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B429, 263 (1998). I. Antoniadis, N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B436, 257 (1998). 2. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, hep-ph/9905221, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 3370 (1999). 3. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, hep-th/9906064, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4690 (1999). 4. P. Horava and E. Witten, Nucl. Phys. B460, 506 (1996). 5. H. B. Kim and H. D. Kim, hep-th/9909053, Phys. Rev. D61, 064003 (2000). 6. P. Kraus, hep-th/9910149. 7. J. Khoury, P. J. Steinhardt and D. Waldram, hep-th/0006069. 8. T. Nihei, hep-ph/9905487. 9. N. Kaloper, hep-th/9905210. 10. A. Lukas, B. A. Ovrut and D. Waldram, hep-th/9902071. 11. O. DeWolfe, D. Freedman, S. Gubser and A. Karch, hep-th/9909134. 12. A. Chamblin and G. W. Gibbons, hep-th/9909130, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84, 1090 (2000). 13. W. D. Goldberger and M. B. Wise, hep-ph/9907447, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 4922 (1999). 14. C. Csaki, M. Graesser, L. Randall and J. Terning, hep-ph/9911406. 15. W. D. Goldberger and M. B. Wise, hep-ph/9911457, Phys. Lett. B475, 275 (2000). 16. C. Charmousis, R. Gregory and V. A. Rubakov, hep-th/9912160. 17. K. Maeda, Phys. Rev. D39, 3159 (1989). 18. A. Kehagias, hep-th/9906204. 19. S. Kachru, M. Schulz and E. Silverstein, hep-th/0001206. 20. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos, N. Kaloper and R. Sundrum, hepth/0001197. 21. V. Barger, T. Han, T. Li, J. D. Lykken and D. Marfatia, hep-ph/0006275. 22. H. D. Kim, hep-th/0012091.
D Y N A M I C A L C O N S T R U C T I O N OF BLACK B R A N E - W O R L D VIA DEFECTS*
DONG HYUN KIM, YOONBAI KIM, CHONG OH LEE, DONG HYUN PARK E-mail:
BK21 Physics Research Division and Institute of Basic Science, Sungkyunkwan University, Suwon ^0-7^6, Korea [email protected], [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
We construct dynamically a black p-brane world of an exponentially decaying warped factor in arbitrary but larger than one extra-dimensions. Our fine tuned brane world is identified by the interior of an extremal charged black hole.
1
Introduction
Brane world scenario has been a very attractive subject during a few years since it opened a new possibility for the resolution of a number of longstanding problems, e.g., hierarchy, cosmological constant, etc. Among many intriguing issues a direction to be tackled is construction of the brane world by assuming a smooth bulk matter governed by dynamical field equations. If we take into account a remote bridge to the string theory and its compactification, topological defects of field theory models may be appropriate candidates. In this note, we briefly summarize the recent works of Randall-Sundrum brane world formed by topological defects when the extra-dimensions are more than one. Then, we discuss how a fine tuned global defect generates a brane world of an exponentially decaying warped factor, which coincides with the interior of an extremal charged black hole and how the strange boundary value of scalar field at the horizon is interpreted by the existence of a short scalar hair. We live on the p-brane located at the core of the defects. 2
Static Anti-de Sitter Solutions and Warped Geometry
The models of our interest involve Einstein gravity and some matters which live mainly as matter fields in the D-dimensional bulk. Dynamics of the models is described by the action :
S= j
dDx^J{-l)^gD
M.D-2 16TT
*TALK WAS GIVEN BY Y. KIM.
478
-(ft+ 2 A)
i '-'matterj
{*)
479 where bulk cosmological constant A has mass dimension two, which is assumed to be negative for almost all the cases, and M, is mass scale of the D-dimensional gravity. Einstein equations are A
^ STT
_
A A
MD-2
'B
2A M\ D
_
A r
where Tj = TA - 5ABT/(D - 2), T = T ^ , and TAB = D+l (2/yj{—l) gD)(5Smntter/8gAB)• Here the Z)-dimensional spacetime of the bulk (xA : A,B,- • • = 0,1, • • •, D - 1) is composed of one time (a;0 = t), p-spatial coordinates of the p-brane (xl : i,j--- — 1, 2, • • • ,p), and N extradimensions (a, b, • • • — 1,2, • • •, N) so that we have D = p + N + 1. In what follows we shall use the above notations and the matters are given by the field theoretic action in the bulk except for the next subsection 2.1. 2.1
N = 1 ; Randall-Sundrum
Type-II Brane World
In this subsection we briefly review the brane world in (p + 2)-dimensions formed by gluing symmetrically two patches of static anti-de Sitter vacuum solutions *. When we assume Poincare symmetry on the spacetime of the p-brane with time-reversal (t —> —t) and parity (xl —> —xl), (j> + 2)D static geometry is naturally described by the metric : ds2 = e2A^
(dt2 - dxi2 )-dz2.
(3)
Then the Einstein equations (2) for the vacuum are summarized by /,
2A ; —, (4) W p(p + 1) where prime ' denotes differentiation by ^-coordinate. When the cosmological constant is negative, general solution of Eq. (4) is given by A = 0 and A
2
=
A )=±
^ \l£frf
(5)
up to a removable integration constant. If we force a reflection symmetry to the extra-dimension (z —> —z) and ask an exponentially decaying warped factor for large z, a combination of the general solution (5) leads to a resultant metric of the Randall-Sundrum type-II brane world : _ 2 „/I 2 l A l Ids =e V nv+1" ' {dt2 - dxlZ) - dz2. 2
(6)
480
Note that a coordinate transformation, dz ~ dlny, with the help of an appropriate rescaling transforms the warped metric (6) to the standard form of anti-de Sitter spacetime : / 2 _ P(P+1) 2|A|
r
y2{di2-dxi2)-%
A :i
'
(7)
y
The metric (6) is continuous but not smooth at z = 0 so that the Einstein equations (2) have matter contribution on the p-brane
A iz)
' = i£fr)[e{z)-0{-z)]
andA {z)
" = -^£fT)5^
<8>
which is expressed in terms of components of the energy-momentum tensor as follows
> = r< = f H ^ w '
r
(9>
ri
"°-
The above ^-function is interpreted as the matter on the p-brane, of which magnitude is fine-tuned by the value of the cosmological constant. The most intriguing feature of this model is the finding that an observer on the p-brane (z — 0) feels Newtonian gravity in the limit of weak gravitation. If we consider small gravitational fluctuations on the p-brane in the limit of a slowly varying weak gravitation field
_2../imirui 2
ds
=e
V "<"+1)l \Vltv
+ h^)dx"dxu
- dz2,
(10)
then the gravitational fluctuations h^ satisfy Schrodinger-type equation : [V2 +V(z)]y = E*, (11) where V is five-dimensional Laplacian, ^ denotes each component of /iMi/ after a gauge fixing such as so-called Randall-Sundrum gauge /V^ = 0, and the potential V(z) is Volcano type. The ground state of zero energy, E = 0, is given by constant wave function, however, it is normalizable due to the exponentially-decreasing warped factor. The very zero mode depicts Newtonian gravity. 2
2.2
N = 2 : Brant World from a Vacuum Solution
Now let us consider two extra-dimensions (N = 2) with rotational symmetry 2 ' 3 . We shall adopt the following metric to describe warped geometry with
481
convenience : ds2 = e2A^T\di2
- dx*2) - dr2 - C2(r)de'2.
(12)
For the vacuum configuration, the Einstein equations (2) reduce to two firstorder equations A - £ • ) Ce<»»A
= K,
(13)
where prime ' denotes r-differentiation from here on and K is an integration constant. General solutions up to a removable integration constant are classified by the values of K : Table 1 K 0 nonzero l n cosh ^2 [ (w r - 7)] Mr) 0+2 C(r) e p+2 —^ [cosh (u r — 7 ) ] _ p + 2 sinh (u r — 7) where w = yj(j> + 2)|A|/2(p + 1) and 7 is an integration constant. Except for the negative solution of A(r) among the K = 0 solutions, all the other solutions are increasing for large r. A noteworthy property of the solutions is disconnectedness of the K ^ 0 solutions from K = 0 solutions, i.e., the limit of vanishing K of the K ^ O solutions does not coincide with the K = 0 solutions. In conclusion, one of the K = 0 solutions (the lower negative sign) in the Table 1 is the unique static vacuum solution to describe Randall-Sundrum type-II brane world with an exponentially decaying warped factor. Since the circumference C(r) is also exponentially decaying for large r, geometry of the extra-dimensions looks like a bottle-neck. 3
Bulk Defects and Brane World
In this section we summarize the known brane world geometry with extradimensions larger than one (N > 2) in a Table, and then compare them to what we have obtained for the case of global U(l) vortex in an N = 2 bulk. 3.1
Brane Worlds of Known Defect Solutions
If we assume a bulk scalar matter field with ordinary kinetic term in the case of an extra-dimension, it is well-known that the scalar potential should have upper bound in order to constitute a non singular brane world, which does
482
not admit ordinary polynomial type scalar potentials, e.g., Mexican hat type potential. On the other hand, it is not suffered by such symptom in case of higher extra-dimensions when a negative cosmological constant is turned on. Before introducing what we obtained, we summarize the other's results in the following Table 2. The asymptotes of metrics involving exponentially decaying warped factor are classified by two : one is a cigar-like asymptote with a finite circumference ds2 « e-ur{di2
- dxi2) - dr2 - r 0 2 c/n^_ 1 ,
(15)
and the other a bottle-neck with an exponentially-decaying circumference ds2 « e-"r(dt2
- dxi2) - dr2 - r02e-urdfl2N_u
where u is positive and is determined by dynamics of Table 2 A AT Species of defects ds2 Ref. 2 0 global U(l) vortex (16) [41 2 global U(l) vortex (15) [2]
(16)
model.
comments physical singularity forbidden boundary condition superheavy scale > 2 global monopole (15) [5] thin-wall limit + 0 bulk N-2 form field (15) > 2 [61 2 thin-wall limit local U(l) vortex (16) [7,8] (16) thin-wall limit global 0(N) defects > 2 [6] physical singularity On the local defects, e.g., 't Hooft-Polyakov monopole in AT = 3 extradimensions, Ref. [6] reports nonexistence of brane world with an exponentially decaying warped factor. In author's opinion, their results do not exclude a possibility in the limit of vanishing scalar potential like a BPS monopole for N = 3. Even if there is no exact BPS bound, but there may exist a local monopole with long range electromagnetic and scalar tails such as T*t ~ 1/r4, which can lead to a brane world of our interest. We also notice that I. Cho reports intriguing results with global 0(N) defects in this COSMO2000 9 . 3.2
Brane World of Unique Incomplete Vortex
Let us consider global defects which live on bulk and are formed by nontrivial dynamics of the N extra-dimensions 3 . The action of 0(N) vector model is S„
JdDXy/(-l)™
1
9D
-5ABV^JVB/
\{4>J^
(17)
where capital Roman indices (/, J, ••• = 1,2, •••,A r ) denote both internal indices and spacetime indices of the extra-dimensions. In this subsection
483
we consider two extra-dimensions (N = 2) and a global 0(2) symmetry for simplicity without losing generality. Under the metric (10), an ansatz for the global vortex is 4>\ + i
A/At;2 -> A, GD = v2jM^~'\
V\vC^C,
(18)
the scalar field equation is
f +
'C C
n
, r2
+ {p + 1)A
1)
/ = o,
(19)
and the Einstein equations (2) are simplified as 2A + {p + 2)Al'2 =
2A,eff P+l
•2
8TTG D
+
2Aeff
p+l
c2
8TTGD
"'W'-p+i
p+l
(20)
f - f
f
(21)
where effective cosmological constant Aeff is defined by Aeg = A + 2TTGD(J2 — l) 2 . Since the metric function A(r) does not appear in the Einstein equations (20)-(21) and the constant piece of A(r), e.g., a boundary value of A(0), can always be absorbed by reparametrization of the spacetime variables of the p-brane, (t,xl), Eq. (20) is a first-order equation of A (r) and then Eq. (21) another first-order equation of C(r). Series solutions near the origin are given from Eqs. (19)-(21) f(r) C{r)
for n/c0 CQT
-i
A (r) «
-
2TTGD + A
P- 1 (2TTGD p+1
(22)
p+ l + A)
/o*-i
(23)
where two boundary values are fixed, i.e., /(0) = 0 and A (0) = 0, and the remaining two, / 0 and CQ should be determined by proper behavior at the opposite boundary though Co is constrained to be n/co = a natural number for regularity of f(r). A noteworthy point of the series solutions is inconsistency between these series solutions and the K = 0 solutions so that it is unlikely to find a configuration of global vortex of which asymptotic geometry is smoothly connected to the brane world of an exponentially decaying warped factor given as an anti-de Sitter vacuum solution in the Table 1. The next task is to look into a possible set of boundary conditions at spatial infinity. A careful examining of Eqs. (19)-(21) admits unique boundary
484
condition for a brane world of an exponentially decaying warped factor : /(oo) =
v
^ ^ < l
!
A(00) = — ^ - J ^ - , p+lyip+1
C(oo) = 5 , £
(24)
where f = [|A|/2TT(2P + lJGc] 1 / 4 and |A| > 2TTGD£2. Since A'(oo) is also chosen by a specific value and all the other solutions do not describe the brane world of an exponentially decaying warped factor, the brane world formed by a global vortex is also a fine tuned geometry. The most striking observation is /(oo) ^ 1 as far as |A| ^ 0 as shown in Eq. (24) : This is the reason why we call the vortex as incomplete vortex 3 . Therefore, the effective cosmological constant Aeff has positive contribution from the scalar potential such as Aeff = [—1 + (Xv4/8(2p+ 1)^(7£>)]|A|, and the radius of the cigar geometry at its asymptote is C(oo) = n/[\A\/2ir(2p + 1)GD] , which is identified by TQ in Eq. (15). A plausible physical understanding will be given in the subsection 4.2. 4
Black Brane World
In this section, we show how the extremal black hole (or p-brane) should appear in this brane world and that the strange boundary condition for the global vortex in the extra-dimensions can naturally be understood as the existence of a short scalar hair outside the horizon. A familiar coordinate to study black hole structure is Schwarzschild type coordinate : ds2 = e2*(fi>B{R){dt2 - dxi2) - dR2/B{R)
- R2d£l2N_1.
(25)
Then the scalar equation is Bf
+
B_ (I + ! ) B ' + ( I ) B * ' +P / R +
- R2 + (/ 2 - 1) / = 0,
(26)
where the prime denotes differentiation by R from now on. The Einstein equations (2) are summarized as two coupled nonlinear equations including first-order derivatives of B and $: p + 2B' , ,B<*>' / A T 2A, n , B - l GD + ( p + l ) + (iV-2) 5 W-N-l-^ R-2n21) R R p+
(p+l)B'& 2Aeff
p+N-l
+ ^-l?+
B
+ (p+l)B'2 + N 2
^GDBf' .
1
R
f*'+(1 + ;)**' (28)
485
Since $ itself does not appear in any equation and the constant piece of it can always be absorbed by a reparametrization of the p-brane variables, determination of $ (R) is a kind of algebraic process. Therefore, we need three boundary conditions except the constant piece of 3> such as two for / and one for B. 4.1
p = 0 and N = 2 : Charged BTZ Black Holes
The minimal dimensions are obtained by the choice of a 0-brane in two extra dimensions, so to speak, 2+1 dimensions 1 0 ' n . When there is no matter field, Tjj = 0, but the cosmological constant A is negative, general static solutions of Eqs. (27)-(28) are classified by an integration constant M : ds2 = (\K\R2 - M)dt2 -
| A |
^
M
- R2dd2.
(29)
When M < 0, the solution depicts a regular hyperboloid. When M > 0, it is the well-known Schwarzschild type BTZ black hole with mass M. The case of zero M is called by the vacuum solution (or the black hole solution of zero mass). If we compare Eq. (29) with Eq. (7), then one may easily be tempted to identify the p-brane (p > 0) as a Schwarzschild type black p-brane with a horizon at y = 0 (or equivalently at z = ±00). For an observer at the exterior region of a global vortex, the metric looks approximately as follows : $CR) ~ 0 and B(R) ~ \A\R2 - 8irGv2 ln(V\vR/n)
-
A-KGV2TI.
(30)
Similarly, possible geometries include a regular hyperboloid, an extremal charged BTZ black hole, and a charged BTZ black hole with two horizons as the minimum value of the metric B is positive, zero, and negative, respectively 10 . In the next subsection, we shall show that the structure of extremal charged black hole is sustained for arbitrary p and N, and its interior region is nothing but the brane world. 4-2 p > 1 and N = 2 : Extremal Black p-Brane When we solve the coupled equations (26)-(28) for the p-brane with arbitrary N, regularity at the origin asks two boundary conditions, /(0) = 0 and B(0) = 1. Since we have to add two more conditions at opposite boundary i?H such as f(Rn) and $>(.RH), the value of B(RH) should be controlled by the parameters of the theory, e.g., GD, |A|, n, etc. When the minimum value of B(R) is positive, a coordinate transformation exhibits impossibility of an exponentially decaying warped factor. Suppose that exists a position Ra to
486
let B ( / ? H ) vanish, then the Einstein equations require B (RH) = 0. Expansion near the horizon R^ gives the resulting spacetime metric : ds2 = BH[a(R - flH)]2(1-Q)(d*2 - dxi2) -
_ R^)2
-
fl^N-i,
(31)
where a — — 1 (or 1) for the interior (or exterior) region, and both Bu and a are determined by RH and the parameters of the theory. Both the radius of the horizon /?H itself and the value of the scalar field at i?n are also determined by such parameters as shown in Table 3. A coordinate transformation \/B~H[<J(R — / ? H ) ] 1 _ Q = exp[—(1 — a)\fB~Y{r] leads to the cigar-like warped geometry (15) with an exponentially decaying warped factor. A detailed analysis shows that the interior surrounded by the horizon coincides exactly with the whole warped geometry obtained in the subsection 3.2 (See Table 3). Note that the scalar field does not vanish at the horizon except for some extreme cases, e.g., RH —> oo, so that there is a short scalar hair in addition to the charge of the black hole given by the topological charge n. In synthesis, our p-brane is located at the origin (R — 0) and our brane world is surrounded by the horizon at Ru, of which near horizon geometry involves an exponentially decaying warped factor. metric boundary scalar equation scalar field circumference
Table 3 A(r), C(r) r —> oo
£ + (/2 - 1)_
= 0 OO
B(R), $(i?) R —> 7?H ^ + (f
~ 1)_
= 0 AH
/ ( r = 0) = 0 = f(R = 0) lim f(r) = y/l- C2 = f(Rn) r—)-oo
lim 27rC(r) = 2irn/£, =
2TYRH
r—>oo
radial distance volume/27r 5
fn°°dr +1 r
~ oo ~ tf»dR/jB{R) /n°° dre(P W *>C{r) ~ finite ~ / n " H dRRe^+^B^2
Discussion
The following issues have not been dealt in this note due to the limitation of length but are worth to being mentioned briefly here : (i) Though our discussion was mainly on the N = 2 case but arbitrary N cases are mostly similar to the two extra dimensions 12 . (ii) If we consider 0(N + 1) nonlinear a model instead of 0(N) vector model, new nontopological lumps with half winding form a black brane structure without the scalar hair n > 1 3 . (Hi) The following intriguing topics are discussed in the subsequent talk 14 , e.g,
487 generation of Newtonian gravity on the p-brane given as zero mode of the gravitational fluctuations, a possible interpolation between the model of large extra dimensions and the Randall-Sundrum type brane world, and a few dynamical questions, (iv) A possible invasion of (test) particles including the Goldstone bosons from the exterior region of the horizon can spoil the above scenario so t h a t it should be settled down elsewhere, (v) T h e most intriguing calculation is dynamical evolution from some appropriate initial configurations to our black brane world (a massless Schwarzschild type or extremal charged black brane) as the final destination. Acknowledgments The authors would like to t h a n k our collaborators, Seung J o o Lee, Sei-Hoon Moon, and Soo-Jong Rey, for very helpful discussions. This work is supported by No. 2000-1-11200-001-3 from the Basic Research P r o g r a m of the Korea Science & Engineering Foundation and Korea Research Center for Theoretical Physics and Chemistry. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 3 , 4690 (1999). R. Gregory, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 4 , 2564 (2000). Y. Kim, S.-H. Moon, and D. H. Park, in progress. A. G. Cohen a n d D. B . Kaplan, P h y s . Lett. B 4 7 0 , 52 (1999). I. Olasagati and A. Vilenkin, Phys. Rev. D 6 2 , 044014 (2000). T. Gherghetta, E. Roessl, and M. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Lett. B 4 9 1 , 353 (2000). T. Gherghetta and M. Shaposhnikov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 8 5 240 (2000). I. Oda, Phys. Lett. B 4 9 6 , 113, (2000). I. Cho, in this proceedings; See also K. Benson and I. Cho, [hep-th/0104067]. N. Kim, Y. Kim, and K. Kimm, Phys. Rev. D 56, 8029 (1997); Class. Quant. Grav. 1 5 , 1513 (1998). Y. Kim and S.-H. Moon, Phys. Rev. D 5 8 , 105013 (1998); G. Clement and A. Fabbri, Class. Quant. Grav. 1 7 , 2537 (2000). S.-H. Moon, S.-J. Rey, and Y. Kim, t o appear in Nucl. Phys. B [hep-th/0012165]. D. H. Kim, Y. Kim, a n d S. J. Lee, in progress. S.-H. Moon, in this proceedings.
BLACK B R A N E WORLD SCENARIOS *
SEI-HOON MOON School of Physics
and Center for Theoretical Physics, Seoul National Seoul 151-742, Korea E-mail: [email protected]
University,
We consider a brane world residing in the interior region inside the horizon of extreme black branes. In this picture, the size of the horizon can be interpreted as the compactification size. The large mass hierarchy is simply translated into the large horizon size, which is provided by the magnitude of charges carried by the black branes. Hence, the macroscopic compactification size is a quantity calculable from the microscopic theory which has only one physical scale, and its stabilization is guaranteed from the charge conservation.
In this talk, we will pay attention to the interior region bounded by a degenerated horizon of extreme black branes. The interior region possesses all of the features needed for large extra dimension (ADD) 1 as well as RandallSundrum (RS) scenarios2 provided that the interior region is regular. Since the interior region has finite volume while it asymptotes to the infinitely long AdS throat, the central region inside the near horizon region acts like a domain wall embedded in anti-de Sitter space (AdS$) like the RS brane. The massless 4D graviton is clearly localized to the central region, reproducing the correct 4D Newtonian gravity. The size of the horizon can be interpreted as the compactification size in that the four-dimensional Planck scale Mpi is determined by the fundamental scale M» of the higher-dimensional theory and the size of the horizon TH via the familiar relation M^t ~ M 2 + d rj7 and the effective gravity on a 3-brane residing in the central region has a transition from the four-dimensional to the higher-dimensional gravity around distances of the size of the horizon. This scenario gives a natural explanation of the large mass hierarchy between the four-dimensional Planck scale Mpi and the weak scale TXIEW- The large mass hierarchy is translated into the large size of the horizon. The large size of the horizon, i.e., the small compactification scale is provided with the large magnitude of charge carried by the black branes, that is, winding number or R-R charge. Hence, the macroscopic compactification size now is a quantity calculated from the microscopic theory and its stabilization is guaranteed from the charge conservation. "THIS TALK IS BASED ON WORKS IN COLLABORATION WITH W.S. BAE, Y.M. CHO, Y. KIM AND S.-J. REY.
488
489
We will consider two types of black brane solutions. Firstly, we will show a global black brane solution 8,9 which is a black hole like defect solution to a scalar theory with global 0(d) symmetry coupled to higher dimensional gravity and is a p-dimensional extended object surrounded by a degenerated horizon. This solution is perfectly regular everywhere. Secondly, we will consider the supergravity solution of the D3-brane. Its interior region interpolates between the singularity and the near horizon region. When the singularity is smoothed out by stringy effects, the graviton is localized in the central region. Further, even in the existence the gravity could be trapped, under the assumption of the unitary boundary condition for the graviton states 10 . The scalar theory with global 0(d) symmetry coupled to Z?-dimensional gravity, of which potential has minimum on the (d — l)-sphere with radius v2 allows a black hole like extended defect solution, which we will call as 'global black p-brane'. The global black p-brane is a p-dimensional extended object surrounded by a degenerated horizon. This object is very similar to the black p-brane solutions of supergravity and string theories. However, this solution is perfectly regular everywhere, that is, either inside or outside of the horizon. Here, we will not write down the Einstein's equations of motion and the scalar field equation of motion, and we will skip the procedure to find the global black brane solution. These are treated in detail in Refs.[8,9]. We will begin just with a brief description for the spacetime of the global black brane. We introduce the following Schwartzschild-type metric ansatz: ds2 = e2N^B(r)g^
(x)dx»dx» + ^rr
+ r2dn2q_,,
(1)
where g^(x) is a general Ricci-flat metric on the brane, which satisfies (p+l)D Einstein equations R^ig) = 0. We have looked into the behavior of solutions at a few regions because it seems almost impossible to find exact analytic solutions. Outside the core, the behavior of metric functions is controlled by the ratio between the scalar field energy density ("H-KG D I T2) and the cosmological constant (|A|). In the far region where the cosmological constant dominates over the field energy density, The metric (1) has the form of ds2 ss B^r2
g^(x)dx»dx"
+
dr2
+ r2dn2d_1:
(2)
£5007'
where B^ = 2|A|/(p + d)(p + d - l ) . This corresponds to .D-dimensional antide Sitter space (AdSo) and can be changed to the form found in Refs.[3,4] using the proper radial distance \(= Jr dr'/y/B(r')) as ds2 m e2"/EZx
gllv(x)dx>1dx1' + dX2 + e2VWZx
dSl2 x.
(3)
490 The horizon occurs in a region where the field energy density and the cosmological constant are comparable, and the spacetime is approximated by dr2 +— -+r2Hdn2q_1, tsH{r - rii)
ds2 * BH[a(r -rH)}2^^g^(x)dx^dxv
(4)
where cr is —1 for the interior region (r < r # ) and +1 for the exterior region (r > rff) and the curvature scale of this spacetime and the horizon size are given by
k2 2
r
"
EE
=
+JA], 1V (p+l)(p + d- 1) (p + d-l)(8nGD-d + 2) BH(l - a? =
2JAJ
•
(5) (6)
It is easy to see relation between the near horizon solution and the cigar-like warped spacetime obtained in Refs.[3,4]. Introducing a new radial coordinate x(> 0) denned by exp(—k\) = V^H [
+ dx2 + r^dU2,^.
(7)
Hence, among solutions obtained in Refs.[3,4], the meaningful solution with respect to the Randall-Sundrum scenario can naturally be interpreted as the near horizon geometry of a black p-brane. The two solutions (2) and (7), which seemed to be disjointed in Refs.[3,4], can be matched to each other. On the other hand, in the region between the brane core and the near horizon where the cosmological constant is negligible compared to the field energy density (if A
491
always allows solutions with a general Ricci flat metric g^{x) and the massless 4D graviton is simply the usual gravitational wave solution of linearized 4D vacuum Einstein equation. And the boundness of the massless graviton is equivalent to the condition that the 4D Planck scale Mpi is finite. Examination of the 4D effective action yields the brane world Planck scale: d 00 2 d d Mli = Md+2 fdz ^g ~M + r H.
(8)
Thus, it is now clear that a massless state of the 4D graviton is bounded. The relation (8) tells that the 4D Planck scale is determined from the fundamental scale M* and the horizon size TH via the familiar relation from usual Kaluza-Klein theories. This implies that the horizon size TH can be interpreted as the effective size of d compact extra dimensions, even though the interior region infinitely extends. From the point of view of one who lives in infinitely extended higher dimensional spacetime, this seems indeed a correct interpretation, clearly the interior region takes only a finite part with volume ~ rdH of the infinite transverse space and the apparent infinite extent of the interior region is simply a result of the warping of the finite region of extra space by the gravity of the brane itself. This interpretation could be cleared up through a complete analysis of the effective 4D gravity. In order to see the effective gravity on the brane, we introduce the perturbations by replacing g^v(x) with rj^ + h)iV(x,z) in Eq.(l). Imposing the RS gauge on h^v, we can easily find the linearized field equation for h^. Making a change of variables £ = Jr ^/—g00{r')grr(r') dr', h^ = K h^ and separating /i(£, fl) = e^elpx Rme(£,)Ye(Q), the linearized field equation can always be written into the form of an analog non-relativistic Schrodinger equation: &,2
with
Rmt(0=rn2Rme(0,
veff{0 = ¥^+l(e
+d-2)^,
(9) (10)
where K = r^d~1^2g0() and Yi(Q,) is a d-dimensional spherical harmonics. Here eM„ is a constant polarization tensor and m (= ^Jp • p) is the mass of continuum modes. The zero-mode wave function, with m = t = 0, is easily identified as i?oo(0 — K(Q- All of the important physics follows from a qualitative analysis of the effective potential. The Newtonian potential generated by a point source of mass m* localized
492 on the brane then is yn* , r m* U(\x\) = - G 4 — - —zs £ / \x\
M.
t
JmjtO
dm m«\Rme(0)\2
P-m\x\ -r^r-.
(11)
\x\
m5 is contribution from more than one extra dimensions for measures of relevant density of states. If the extra dimensions are noncompactified, then S = d — 1, simply. The factor of md~1 is just the d-dimensional plane wave continuum density of states (up to a constant angular factor). In our case, d—\ extra dimensions are compactified to 5 d _ 1 with radius TH- The modes with small £ behave as plane waves only in the radial direction, while the modes with large £ do in the full extra dimensions. Thus, S will depend on £, that is, S = 0 for modes with small £ but 6 = d — 1 for sufficiently large £. In the original warped bulk model of Randall-Sundrum type scenario, the bulk cosmological constant A had always been identified with the fundamental scale for naive naturalness reasons. However, given our ignorance regarding the cosmological constant problem, we do not feel any strong prejudice forcing A to be of the order of the fundamental scale M%. We will simply treat A as a parameter; we know only that rn must be smaller than ~ 1mm from the present-day gravity measurements if it should be interpreted as a compactification size. We will consider two limiting values of A; |A| ~ Ml ~ M2t and |A| ~ 10 6 - 6 °/ rf GeV 2 < Ml ~ m\w. We will call the first limit as RandallSundrum (RS) limit and the second limit as large extra dimension (ADD) limit. In the RS limit, the interior region is well approximated by the near horizon geometry Eq.(7) because both the core radius rc ~ ( v A u ) - 1 / 2 and the horizon size r # are of the order of the fundamental scale and so S-KGD/T2 and |A| are comparable in whole interior region. In this regime, since both curvature scales of AdSs and Sd~1 are of the order of the fundamental scale, the extra space effectively reduces to one-dimensional space because one who lives in the bulk could not observe the extra 5 d _ 1 through low-energy processes under the fundamental scale. Then the 3-brane looks like a one-sided RSbrane embedded in a AdS$ bulk spacetime. Hence the physics on the brane will be nearly the same with that of RS scenario. A difference arises due to massive KK modes with £ ^ 0 living in the AdS$. However, this correction is strongly suppressed due to the repulsive centrifugal potential. Thus, the low-energy physics on the brane are imperceptibly different from those in the RS scenario. In the ADD limit, the phenomenologically acceptable size of the hori-
493 zon (cosmological constant) is rH ~ 10 3 0 / d - 1 7 cm (|A| ~ 10 6 - 6 0 / d GeV 2 ) with M» ~ MEW ~ 103GeV and Mpl ~ 1018GeV. Then the AdS region takes extremely tiny portion of the transverse space and the intermediate region, in which ^TTGD/T2 » |A|, between the core and the AdS region occupy most volume of transverse space. The geometry of the intermediate region can be approximated by that of Cohen-Kaplan solution 5 when d = 2 and those of global monopole spacetime 4 when d > 3. It is easy to explicitly calculate the potential Eq.(lO) using the Cohen-Kaplan and the global monopole metric. The explicit calculations show that, when d = 2,3, the potential is attractive or zero in the intermediate region. However, it is not needed to specify details of the the shape of the central region of the potential, because the potential is not repulsive in the intermediate region and the central region is localized within the the AdS length scale A;-1. Then the leading corrections to the long-range gravitational potential are in fact identical to those in the RS limit, as shown in Ref.[7]. The short distance gravity is dominated by continuum modes with m > k and £ S> 1 and (4 + d)D gravity appears at distances \x\
494 horizon size ru in the sense of the conventional large extra dimension scenarios. However, there still remains a hierarchy between MEW and |A|, because such large size of the horizon is provided by only the tiny bulk cosmological constant. This hierarchy could be stable in the sense that small changes of |A| have small effects to the physics on the brane as expected in ADD scenarios. An unpleasant point is the fact that |A| is a Lagrangian parameter that is not free from the radiative correction due to various bulk fields and needs to be stabilized by a symmetry, such as supersymmetry. In absence of a clear stabilization mechanism, it however seems natural |A| to be of the order of the fundamental scale. From this aspect, the Randall-Sundrum limit only seems to be natural. At this point, an immediate question is whether the such large size of the horizon (or equivalently the small compactificatioh scale) can be calculated in the theory that has only one physical scale of the order of the weak scale. The answer seems to be positive. Usually the size of the horizon of an extreme black brane is determined by the magnitude of charge (equivalently mass) carried by the black brane. It does not seem uncommon to have solutions with huge magnitude of charge; the world around us abounds with solutions that has much larger charge than the electron's. Up to now, we have considered only brane solutions with unit winding number. This was because the conditions of spherical symmetry and regularity at the origin allows only solutions with unit winding number when d > 3. While cylindrically symmetric solutions with arbitrarily large winding number n are allowed when d = 2. The solutions with winding number n can easily be obtained simply replacing 8ITGD with 87rG£>n2 in the solution with unit winding number for d = 2. Then the radius of the horizon is given from Eq.(6) in terms of unrescaled parameters by r2H = 167rt)2n2/Af^|A|. We assume all scales to be in the same order with the fundamental scale, that is, intrinsically there exist only one physical scale. Then the horizon size is given by TH ~ n M~x simply. Putting M* ~ IBEW ~ 103GeV and demanding that TH and n are chosen to reproduce the observed four-dimensional Planck scale Mpi ~ 1018GeV yields n ~ 10 15 . Hence, the global black brane solution with large winding number of n ~ 1015 seems to provide a dynamical determination of the hierarchy between the four-dimensional Planck scale and the weak scale without requiring any additional small scale from the theory that has intrinsically only one physical scale. Furthermore, the such large compactiflcation size is now stabilized via the charge conservation law. The interior region of the D3-brane interpolates between the singularity and the AdS throat. The similar analysis of the graviton states to that for
495
the global black brane shows that even in the existence of the singularity the massless graviton can be localized in the central region of the interior region under the unitary boundary condition 5 ' 6 . However, since we do not have a detailed understanding of the singularity, we will not be able to make any rigorous claim whether such boundary conditions are what we want. Thus, we will only assume that the singularity is smoothed out by the true shortdistance theory of gravity, namely, string theory. Essentially the source for the R-R field strength is sitting at the singularity. Since the only known source for R-R 5-form field strength is D3-brane, we are naturally expected to see a stack of D3-branes when we probe the singularity with energy over the string scale. The analog Schrodinger potential resembles with that for the global black brane with d = 2. And so the gravity on a 3-brane residing in the central region behaves like what we would expect by interpreting the horizon size TH as a compactification radius. Since the effective Planck scale is determined via the relation M 2 ; = r^ / (24TV3 g2l^) and the size of the horizon is given by rjj = 4irljgsN, the hierarchy between the string scale I'1 and the fourdimensional Planck scale Mpi can be provided with the R-R charge of the 2n3/2l2.gs Mpl2) . If we naively assume that the string scale is of the order of the weak scale, i.e., ls ~ rriEW, then the amount of the R-R charge needed to generate the hierarchy is N ~ 1022 and the size of the horizon is ~ 10 _12 cm. Perhaps the deepest consequence of the above picture is that it gives a natural explanation of the large mass hierarchy and gives a good reason of why string theory would necessarily choose such type of compactification geometry. The large mass hierarchy is translated into the large size of the horizon. The large size of the horizon, i.e., the large compactification size can be calculated in string theory that has only one physical scale ls and is determined by the amount of the R-R charge N carried by the D3-brane. Furthermore, the stabilization of such large compactification size is strictly supported by the conserved D3-brane charges. We don't need to compactify whole spacetime introducing the compactification manifold. The geometry needed for the Randall-Sundrum type brane world can be obtained simply from the noncompact ten-dimensional spacetime by means of formation of a large cluster of D3-branes. Let us conclude with some discussions. The above picture may provide new perspectives on problems associated to the brane world scenarios. Both non-Ricci fiat metric g^v{x) and metric dependent on the extra dimensional
496
coordinates z%, i.e., g^(x,z) ~ 7]^ + h^(x,z), correspond to excitations upon the extremal black brane background, which is the ground state of the black p-brane. That is, in the existence of such excitations the black brane becomes now non-extremal and its Hawking temperature is not zero. Thus, such excitations will be diluted through Hawking radiation. First, the continuum modes are one of such excitations. The analysis on the singular behavior of the continuum modes at the horizon 11 should be reexamined because it has done on the rigid AdS background, while in the existence of such excitation we lose the AdS background. Second, the Poincare invariance in the longitudinal direction will persist even in the presence of the quantum corrections to the brane tension because the quantum corrections also will be diluted, so that no 4D cosmological constant generated. Third, this picture provides a new physical mechanism that can solve the cosmological flatness problem. Even though our world brane was highly bent initially, the bending should have been diluted as the black brane Hawking radiates and evolves toward the extremal one. Since the entropy density of our universe is minutely small, our world brane seems to be embedded in the interior region of very nearextremal black brane. Finally, the another flatness problem 12 associated with the approximate Lorentz invariance in the longitudinal direction also can be resolved because the bulk curvature will be diluted via Hawking process. We wish to acknowledge discussions with H. Lee, J.D. Park and S. Yi. References 1. N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B 429 (1998) 263; Phys. Rev. D 59 (1999) 086004; 2. L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 3370; Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 4690. 3. R. Gregory, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 (2000) 2564. 4. I. Olasagati and A. Vilenkin, Phys.Rev. D 62 (2000) 044014. 5. A. G. Cohen and D. B. Kaplan, Phys. Lett. B 470 (1999) 52. 6. M. Grem, Phys. Lett. B 478 (2000) 434. 7. C. Csaki, J. Erlich, T. Hollowood and Y. Shirman, Nucl. Phys. B 581 (2000) 309. 8. Y. Kim, S.-H. Moon and S.-J. Rey, in preparation. 9. S.-H. Moon, in preparation. 10. W.S. Bae, Y.M. Cho and S.-H. Moon, in preparation. 11. A. Chamblin and G. W. Gibbons, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 (2000) 1090. 12. D.J.H. Chung, E.W. Kolb and A. Riotto, hep-th/0008126.
List of Participants for COSMO2000 Arnowit, Richard Lewis Astorga, Francisco Bak, Dongsu Bartalucci, Sergio Belli, P Bottino, Alessandro Chen, Xuelei Cho, Inyoung Cho, Sungil Choi, Kiwoon Choi, Kang Sin Choi, Ki Young Chung, Byungchul Covi, Laura Cuesta, Herman Julio M. Dooling, David Drees, Manuel Freedman, Wendy Gong, Jin-Wook Hamaguchi, Koichi Han, Kyootaek Hawking, Stephen W. Hong, Deog Ki Hwang, Jai-Chan Hwang, Kyuwan Ignatius, Janne Jackson, Dave Joo, Chul Jung, Dong-Won Kane, Gordon Kang, Sin Kyu Kasuya, Shinta Kim, Chung Wook Kim, Do-Won Kim, Do Yeong Kim, Hang Bae Kim, Hyung Do Kim, Jinn E. Kim, Seyong Kim, TaeYeon Kim, Yeongduk Kim, Yeonjung Kim, Yoonbai Kim, Yeon Woo Ko, Pyungwon Koh, Seoktae Kohri, Kazunori Kolb, Edward W. Kwack, Jaeyong Kyae, Bumseok Lee, Chul Hoon
(Texas A&M Univ.) (Universidad Michoacana) (Univ. of Seoul) (INFN, Laboratori Nazionali di Frascati) (INFN, Rome2 ) (INFN, University di Torino) (Phio State Univ.) (Emory Univ.) (Seoul National Univ.) (KAIST) (Seoul National Univ.) (Seoul National Univ.) (KAIST) (DESY, Theory Group) (Abdus Salam ICTP) (Brown Univ.) (TU Munich) (Obs. of Carnegie Inst, of Washington) (KAIST) (Tokyo Univ.) (Hanyang Univ.) (DAMTP, Univ. of Cambridge) (Pusan Nat'l Univ.) (Kyungpook Natl's Univ.) (KAIST) (Helsinki Univ.) (Osaka Univ.) (Seoul National U.) (Seoul National U.) (Univ. of Michigan) (KIAS) (RESCEU, Univ. of Tokyo) (KIAS) (Kangnung National Univ.) (KAIST) (Lancaster Univ.) (KAIST) (SNU) (Sejong Univ.) (SNU) (Sejong Univ.) (KAIST) (Sungkyunkwan Univ.) (KAIST) (KAIST) (Hanyang Univ.) (YITP, Kyoto Univ.) (Fermilab & Chicago) (Seoul National U.) (Seoul National Univ.) (Hanyang Univ.)
497
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Sergio.B artalucci@lnf. infn. it [email protected] [email protected] xuelei@pac ific. mps.ohio-state. edu [email protected] sicho@phya. snu.ac .kr [email protected] [email protected] chysky@phva. snu. ac.kr [email protected] .loco vil@mail . desy.de [email protected] dooling@het. brown. edu [email protected] [email protected] devourer@kaist. ac.kr hama@hep-th .phys .s.u-tokyo .ac.jp [email protected]. ac.kr swh 1 @damtp.cam. ac.uk [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]. ac.kr janne. [email protected] [email protected] moosoy@phya. snu .ac.kr dwjung@zoo. snu.ac.kr gkane@umich .edu [email protected] kasuya@resceu. s.u-tokyo.ac.jp [email protected] dwkim@kangnung. ac .kr [email protected]. ac.kr [email protected] [email protected]. ac.kr j ekim@phyp. snu. ac.kr skim@kuni a. se i ong. ac. kr tykim@hep 1 .snu.ac.kr [email protected] [email protected]. ac.kr yoonbai@skku. ac.kr wavewave@muon. kaist. ac.kr [email protected] [email protected]. ac.kr [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] kyae@fire. snu.ac.kr [email protected]. ac.kr
498 Lee, Hyunchul Lee, Hyun Min Lee, Hong Seok Lee, Jong Phil Lee, Jae Sik Lee, Kimyeong Lee, Tae Hoon Lyth, David Meng, Xinhe Moon, Sei-Hoon Nagasawa, Michiyasu Nakamura, Kenzo Nam, Soonkeon Nihei, Takeshi Nilles, Hans-Peter Noh,H Oh, Jang Won Park, Donghyun Park, Jong Dae Park, Jae Hyun Park, Jeong-Hyuck Park, Seong Chan Primack, Joel Rajantie, Arttu Roszkowski, Leszek Schnee, Richard Sinn, Heegeun Stewart, Ewan Davidson Trodden, Mark Tsujikawa, Shinji Wang, Minkyoung Watari, Taizan Yamaguchi, Masahide Yi, Piljin Yoshimura, Motohiko Zakharov, Alexander Zhang, Xinmin
(KAIST) (Seoul Nat'l Univ.) (KAIST) (Seoul National U.) (KIAS) (KIAS) (Soongsil Univ.) (Lancaster Univ.) (Nankai Univ.) (Seoul Nat'l Univ.) (Kanagawa Univ.) (KEK) (Kyung Hee Univ.) (Lancaster Univ.) (Univ. Bonn) (Korea Astronomy Observatory) (Seoul Nat'l Univ.) (Sungkyunkwan Univ.) (Seoul Nat'l Univ.) (KAIST) (KIAS) (Seoul Nat'l Univ.) (Univ. of California) (Univ. of Sussex) (Lancaster Univ.) (Case Western Reserve University) (Seoul National Univ.) (KAIST) (Syracuse Univ.) (Waseda Univ.) (KAIST) (Univ. of Tokyo) (RESCEU, Univ. of Tokyo) (KIAS) (Tohoku Univ.) (ITEP) (IHEP, Academia Sinica)
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] d. lyth@lancaster. ac. uk [email protected] .en [email protected],ac.kr [email protected] kenzo. [email protected] p [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] oj angwon@phya. snu. ac. kr [email protected] [email protected] j [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] I ,ro$zkowski@lancaster. ac ,uk [email protected]. edu eunsu9 @snu. ac .kr [email protected] [email protected]. cwru. edu [email protected] king@muon. kai st. ac.kr [email protected]. ac.jp [email protected]. ac.jp [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] xmzhang@hptc 5. ihep. ac. en
09:45 10:30
PROGRAM OF THE COSM02K CONFERENCE Cheju Island, 4 September TO 8 September 2000 All plenary sessions are held in the Grand Ballroom A and the parallel sessions are held in three separate rooms.
CD CO
A. Bottino
R
P. Belli
P
10:30 10:50
Coffee Break
10.5011:35
_ c R. Schnee
R S
11:3512:20
K. Arnowitt
N _ D
12:20 13:05
p ic '
^ d
Chairperson: G. Kane
14:30 15:10
S. Hawking
L
15:1015:55
_ _ '
O t
September 3 (Sunday) - Registration
15:55 16:15
Coffee Break
Grand Ballroom A
17-00
^ " Yamaguchi N
17:00 17:45
M
14:00 - 19:00 Registration 19:00 - 21:00
17:45
End of session
Reception
September 4 (Monday) - Plenary sessions Inflation»
« Dark Matter I and
Y h" Q " ^ Imura (
September 5 (Tuesday) - Plenar Structure and Neutrinos » Grand Ballroom A
Grand Ballroom A Chairperson: L. Roszkowski Chairperson: C. W. Kim 09-00 10-00 I Pri
k
End of s
10:00 - 10:30 Coffee Break • M i« 11 ,c r. i^ II. It): JO - 11:1 J fc.. Kolb
The Alarming Phenomenon of Particle Creation in , r•• .1 • the Expanding Universe
. . - ,-, „„ - c* 11:15-12:00 E. Stewart
Accelerating universe, vacuum energy e and anthropic . . selection
Chairperson: D. Lyth
September 7 (Thursday) -
Grand Ballroom A -Inflation & Large Scale Struc
14:00- 15 00 K. Nakamura Current Experimental Status of Neutrino Oscillation 15:00- 15 :45 M. Drees
New Constraints on Cool Dark Matter
Chairperson: E. Stewart
15:45-16: 15 Coffee Break 16:15-17: 00 W. Freedman Recent Measurements of CosmologicaJ Parameters ,-, nn ,-, ^ ^ « _. . • The PAMELA experiment: a clue to the enigma of 17:00-17:45 S. Bartaluca . . „ . „ r Antimatter in Space 17:45
End of session
18:30-
Banquet
14:00-14:25 L. Covi Inflation a supersymmetry breaking 14:25-14:50 J.C. Hwang Conse quantities in the perturbed worl
Grand Ballroom B 14:50-15:15 J. Ignatius QCD p transition and primordial densit perturbations
September 6 (Wednesday) -
Excursion 15:15-15:40 X. Meng Adiabati gravitational perturbation grow during preheating
September 7 (Thursday) - Plenary sessions
« Extra Dimension
»
15:40-16:00 Break
Grand Ballroom A
16:00-16:25 H. Noh Testing in models with a nonminimal scal
Chairperson: E Kolb
09:00-09:45 HJ>. Nilte
Dark matKr, dark energy and supersymmeuy breakdown
09:45 -10:30 L. Roszkowski On Supersymmetric Candidates for Dark Matter 10:30 -11:00 Coffee Break 11:00 -11:45 M. Trodden
Diluting Gravity with Compact Hyperboloids
11:45-12:30 H. B.Kim
Cosmology of stabilized RS models
16:25-16:50 A. Rajantie Nume simulations of electroweak baryogenesis at preheating 16:50-17:15 S. Tsujikawa Mul fermionic preheating 17:15-17:40 M. Nagasawa
Possible Interpretations of Observational Data
Cosmological Implications of Multi-Winding Defects
September 8 (Friday) - Parallel sessions
September 8 (Friday) - Plena
Grand Ballroom A.
Mugunghwa Hall
Dongbaek Hall
•Dark Matter-
•tYIattergenesis-
•Extra Dimension II-
Chairperson: L. Covi
Chairperson: H.B. Kim
Chairperson: Y.B. Kim
09:00-09:30 S. Kasuya Q-ball formation, baryogenesis, and dark matter in the gauge-mediated SUSY breaking scenario
09:00-09:30 K. Hamaguchi Affleck-Dine Leptogenesis with an Ultralight Neutrino
09:00-09:30 S. Nam Modeling a Network of Brane Worlds
09:30-10:00 Y.D. Kim An experiment on search for dark matter using Csl crystal
09:30-10:00 K. Kohri Photodissociation and the non-thermal process in primordial nucleosynthesis
09:30-10:00 H.M. Lee Gauss-Bonnet interaction in Randall-Sundrum compactification
10:00-10:30T. Nihei Precise calculation of neutralino relic density in the minimal SUGRA model
10:00-10:30 X. Chen The Helium abundance problem and Non-Minimal Coupled Quintessence
10:00-10:30 B.Kyae Exact cosmological solution and Modulus stabilization in the Randall-Sundrum model with Bulk matter
10:30-11M Break
\0:30-U:00 Break
10:3O-ll:00B«at
Chairperson: H. P. Nilles
14:00 - 14:45 K. Choi 14:45- 15:15 P. Ko 15:15
11:00-11:30 T. Watari 11:00-11:30 D.K. Hong Color 11:00-11:30 H. Cuesta Quintessence Axion superconductivity and Gravitational wave bursts from Potential from Electroweak Compact star cooling superconducting cosmic strings Instantons and the neutrino mass spectrum 11:30-12:00 A. Zakharov Non-Compact (Non-Baryonic) Microlensing: Theory and
Grand Ballroom A
11:30-12:00 S. Kim Lattice gauge theory of gauged Nambu-Jona-Lasinio model
End of sess